JP7477150B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can execute a display effect using a display device when a gaming ball enters a starting hole (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In these types of gaming machines, it is possible to create display effects using character images, patterns, etc.

JP 2016-202930 A JP 2016-198339 A JP 2016-182376 A

However, even with the gaming machines described above, there was still room for improvement in terms of technology to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the entertainment value of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least some of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference symbols and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described below in order to aid in understanding the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way.

[Application Example 1]
A gaming machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
It is possible to execute a performance in which a specific image is displayed in a specific area formed in a polygonal shape ,
In the presentation, increasing the number of corners of the polygonal shape increases the size of the specific area, suggesting that a larger specific area has a higher expectation of winning than a smaller specific area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The present invention can increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. FIG. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. 1 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in gaming machines. 10 is a diagram for explaining judgment tables T1 to T4 and T10. FIG. An explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table T5. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 during non-time-saving mode. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 during time-saving mode. This is an explanatory diagram of the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. 13 is a flowchart of a main control process. 13 is a flowchart of a main-side timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 2 pre-judgment processing. This is a flowchart of the special diagram 1 pre-judgment processing. 13 is a flowchart of a normal operation process. 13 is a flowchart of a special action process. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process. 13 is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. This is a first flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of processing during special pattern change. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status management process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status reset process. 13 is a flowchart of special electric device processing. 13 is a flowchart of a V-type opening/closing member operation process. 13 is a flowchart of a game status setting process. 13 is a flowchart of a V-area sensor detection process. This is a flowchart for processing the number of reserved balls. 13 is a flowchart showing a sub-control main process. 13 is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart of a pre-reading performance determination process. 10 is a diagram for explaining a configuration of a pre-determination information storage area; FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a pre-reading performance pattern determination table T51. 13 is a flowchart of the variable performance start processing. An explanatory diagram of the core performance pattern determination table T52. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. This is a flowchart of processing during variable performance. 13 is a flowchart of a display control process. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the third movable part 13. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the second movable part 15. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the display presentation of a sub-display screen 64. FIG. This is the first figure to explain the pending icon switching performance A. This is the second figure to explain the pending icon switching performance A. A diagram to explain the pending icon switching presentation B. A diagram to explain change icon acquisition performance A. 13 is a diagram for explaining a change icon acquisition effect B. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a change icon acquisition effect C. FIG. A diagram to explain the pending icon movement change presentation A. A diagram to explain the pending icon movement change presentation B. A diagram to explain the pending icon movement and change presentation C. 13 is a diagram for explaining specific icon stock effect A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining specific icon stock effect B. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a specific icon stock effect C. FIG. A diagram to explain operation stock performance A (first half). A diagram to explain operation stock presentation A (second half). A figure to explain operation stock presentation B (second half). A diagram to explain icon number pattern presentation A. A diagram to explain icon number pattern presentation B. A diagram to explain icon number pattern presentation C. A diagram to explain the pending icon presentation A when in reach. A diagram to explain the pending icon presentation B when in reach. A diagram to explain the pending icon presentation C when in reach. A diagram to explain special hold performance A. A diagram to explain special hold effect B. A diagram to explain special hold effect C. A diagram to explain icon success/failure presentation A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining icon success/failure presentation B. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the icon success/failure presentation C. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining icon selection effect A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining icon selection presentation B. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining icon selection effect C. This is a table showing the probability of winning by icon. A diagram to explain the special icon change effect A. A diagram to explain the icon special change presentation B. A diagram to explain the floating icon jump performance A. A figure to explain the floating icon jump performance B. A diagram to explain the floating icon jump performance C. 13 is a diagram for explaining operation means appearance presentation A. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an operation means appearance presentation B. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an operation means appearance presentation C. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining part assembly presentation A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining part assembly presentation B. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining part assembly presentation C. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern presentation A when a win occurs. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern presentation B when a win occurs. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern presentation C when a win occurs. A diagram to explain group promotion effect A. A diagram to explain group promotion effect B. A diagram to explain group promotion effect C. A diagram to explain the stop decorative pattern appearance performance A. A diagram to explain the stop decorative pattern appearance performance B. A diagram to explain the stop decorative pattern appearance performance C. A diagram to explain pattern color change performance A. A diagram to explain pattern color change performance B. A diagram to explain the pattern color change effect C. A diagram to explain color change reach performance A. A diagram to explain color change reach presentation B. A diagram to explain color change reach presentation C. A diagram to explain character attack presentation A. A diagram to explain character attack presentation B. A diagram to explain character attack presentation C. A diagram to explain decorative pattern color change performance A. A diagram to explain decorative pattern color change performance B. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern color change performance C. A diagram to explain special pattern effect A. A diagram to explain special pattern effect A. A diagram to explain special pattern effect A. A diagram to explain decorative pattern visibility change performance A. A figure to explain decorative pattern visibility change performance B. A diagram to explain decorative pattern visibility change performance C. A diagram to explain decorative pattern rotation and stop display performance A. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance B. A diagram to explain the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance C. A diagram to explain the expectation level number display effect A. A figure to explain the expectation level number display effect B. A diagram to explain the expectation level number display effect C. A diagram to explain a specific performance execution suggestion performance A. A diagram to explain the specific effect execution suggestion effect B. A diagram to explain a specific effect execution suggestion effect C. A diagram to explain special direction suggestion effect A. A diagram to explain special direction suggestion effect B. A diagram to explain special direction suggestion effect C. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a sound effect presentation A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a sound effect presentation B. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a sound effect presentation C. 13 is a diagram for explaining a lyric image effect A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining lyrics image presentation B. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a lyric image presentation C. FIG. A diagram to explain specific area variable performance A. A diagram to explain specific area variable performance B. A diagram to explain specific area variable performance C. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the reliability of a character appearance. A figure to explain reliability change performance A. A figure to explain reliability change presentation B. 13 is a diagram illustrating item superimposition effect A. FIG. A figure to explain item superimposition effect B. 13 is a diagram for explaining item superimposition effect C. FIG. A diagram to explain a game board made of transparent acrylic. A continuation of the diagram to explain the game board of Figure 146. A diagram to explain the movable prop decoration light-up performance. A figure to explain W mode display effect A. A figure to explain W mode display presentation B. A figure to explain W mode display presentation C. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining a method of locking the sword member to the upper plate. 13 is a diagram for explaining movable part operation warning display A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining movable part operation warning display B. FIG.

First Embodiment
1. Structure of the gaming machine Fig. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as coinciding with the left-right direction as seen by a player facing the gaming machine 1. The front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that shoots gaming balls based on the player's shooting operation, and when a gaming ball wins a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of gaming balls to the player based on the winning. The gaming machine 1 comprises a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to a front frame (front frame portion) 53, the gaming machine frame 50 comprises an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer hull of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit located on the front side of the outer frame and inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62, a performance button 63, a sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U), a sword member 65, a frame lamp 66, and a speaker 67. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the playing area 3 of the playing board 2 can be seen through the opening.

The handle 60 is located at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53 and launches game balls with a launch strength according to the rotation angle. The ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is located below the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball supply tray 61. The performance button 63 is an operation unit located near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and is operated (pressed) by the player during performances that are performed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword and can be pushed downward by the player during performances that are performed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub-display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub-display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged in a pair via the game board 2. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub-display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, and is arranged above the front frame 53 to perform light-emitting effects during play. The right frame lamp is a diagonal light-emitting element located between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is a diagonal light-emitting element located between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are located at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and provide sound effects during play.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, rail members 4, board lamps 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (center) 19, a normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first large winning device (first attacker) 31, a second large winning device (second attacker) 36, a large winning opening start port 17, a normal winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), an outlet 16, and displays 40.

The game area 3 is an area where game balls launched by operating the handle 60 flow down, and has multiple game nails protruding therein to guide the game balls. The rail member 4 is disposed at the left end of the game area 3, and guides the game balls launched by operating the handle 60 toward the top of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is disposed on the rear side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the rear side of the game area 3. Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and are configured to have a continuous shape and light emission.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the play area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a performance pattern display area in which performance patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also called variable display), a reserved image display area in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a reserved digestion image display area (respective reserved display area) in which a reserved digestion image 9C is displayed. The reserved images 9A and 9B are images that represent a reserved play, and are also called reserved icons 9A and 9B. The reserved digestion image 9C is an image that represents the reserved play, and is also called the reserved image 9C, the reserved icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, or the variable icon 9C. The reserved icon 9C may also be simply called a reserved icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas, "left", "center", and "right". The left symbol display area displays a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L. The center symbol display area displays a center effect symbol (center decorative symbol) 8C. The right symbol display area displays a right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers, for example, from "1" to "9". The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 can display the results of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, (the result of the big win lottery) in an easy-to-understand manner to the player, by the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, center, and right symbol display areas.

For example, if a jackpot is won, the display will stop with a repeat number such as "777". If a loss occurs, the display will stop with a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result from the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, as well as the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. In addition, the variable display of the variable symbols may be a vertical scroll or may be other than that. The combination of the variable symbols to be displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. Hereinafter, the display of the variable symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be referred to as "variable symbol display", "variable decorative symbol display", or simply "variable display" or "variable display". In addition, this decorative pattern change performance counts the performance during the period from when the special pattern starts changing to when it stops (also called the special pattern change period) as one change performance (one cycle of change performance). Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts changing to when it stops, the temporary stop performance is included in the decorative pattern change performance.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a not only the performance symbol changing performance, but also a jackpot performance performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo performance for waiting for customers, and the like. In the performance symbol changing performance, in addition to the performance symbol, performance images such as background images and character images may also be displayed. Furthermore, the image display device 7 may display on the display screen 7a, in addition to the performance symbol, an identification display (fourth symbol, not shown) that can suggest that a special symbol is changing or the result of a lottery for a special symbol. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light-emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area includes a first reserved display area that displays reserved images 9A according to the number of reserved first special symbols, which will be described later, and a second reserved display area that displays reserved images 9B according to the number of reserved second special symbols, which will be described later. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the reserved first special symbol display 43a, which will be described later, and the number of reserved second special symbols displayed on the reserved second special symbol display 43b, which will be described later, can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The reserved consumption image display area includes a reserved consumption display area that displays reserved consumption image 9C. The reserved consumption image 9C corresponds to the currently changing performance pattern (performance pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and by displaying the reserved consumption image 9C, it can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player that the reserved first special symbol or reserved second special symbol is consumed ("reserved special symbol consumption" described later).

On the right and left sides of the image display device 7, there are provided first movable boards 14 (also called first movable gadgets 14), which are movable so-called gimmicks. The first movable gadgets 14 are configured so that two semi-ring-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides can move in the left and right directions. The first movable gadgets 14 are normally stationary in retracted positions (Figure 1) on the left and right sides of the image display device 7, and can move (advance) from the retracted positions toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to approach each other, and come to rest at an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. When the left and right members of the first movable gadget 14 are combined at the advanced position, a ring-shaped decorative part is formed, which covers part of the image display device 7.

A second movable board 15 (also called the second movable gadget 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided above the image display device 7. The second movable gadget 15 is configured so that a rectangular member (decorative part) marked "OARO" can move up and down. The second movable gadget 15 is normally stationary in a retracted position (Fig. 1) above the image display device 7, and can move (advance) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest at an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The second movable gadget 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

On the right and left sides of the image display device 7, there is a third movable board 13 (also called the third movable gadget 13), which is a movable so-called gimmick. The third movable gadget 13 is configured so that two members arranged on the left and right sides can move in the left and right directions. Each of the two members has a ring-shaped decorative part, and a circular transparent part with transparency is provided inside the ring shape. The third movable gadget 13 is normally stationary at the retracted positions (Figure 1) on the left and right sides of the image display device 7, and can move (advance) from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to approach each other and come to rest at the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. When the left and right members of the third movable gadget 13 are combined at the advanced position, the two ring-shaped decorative parts come close to each other to form a glasses shape, covering part of the image display device 7.

A stage section 11 is formed at the bottom of the center decorative body 10. The stage section 11 has a shape that can guide game balls rolling on the top surface of the stage section 11 to the first starting hole 20 described below. A warp section 12 is provided at the bottom left of the center decorative body 10. The warp section 12 has an entrance section through which game balls flow and an exit section through which game balls flow out, and causes game balls that flow in from the entrance section to flow out from the exit section to the stage section 11.

The fixed winning device (center) 19 is disposed below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball hole, fixed starting hole) 20, which always allows the game ball to enter with a constant ease. The entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the drawing of a lottery for a first special symbol (jackpot lottery). In other words, the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the acquisition of a jackpot random number and the like, as well as the determination of a jackpot.

The normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22 is disposed below the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, and is provided with a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entry hole, variable starting hole) 21. The entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 triggers the drawing of a second special pattern (drawing of small and big wins). The electric chute 22 is provided with a movable member 23 in front of the second starting hole 21, and the second starting hole 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chute solenoid 24 (Fig. 3). The second starting hole 21 is capable of receiving a game ball when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It is sufficient that the electric chute 22 allows a ball to enter the second starting hole 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in an open state than when it is in a closed state, and it may be possible for a ball to enter the second starting hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in a closed state.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is located above the first big prize device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow the game ball to pass through. The passage of the game ball through the gate 28 triggers a normal pattern lottery that determines whether or not the electric chute 22 will open. In other words, the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 triggers the acquisition of a normal pattern random number (winning random number) and a win determination, etc.

Here, the "special symbol jackpot lottery" refers to a process in which, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, a jackpot random number for determining the special symbol is obtained, and the obtained jackpot random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "jackpot" to determine whether or not a jackpot has been obtained. The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but rather, the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b described below displays a variable special symbol, and after a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed stationary (determined), and the lottery result is notified to the player. The image display device 7 plays a pattern matching game in which the performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and this pattern matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot.

The "special symbol small prize lottery" refers to a process in which, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21, a small prize random number for determining the special symbol is obtained, and the obtained small prize random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "small prize" to determine whether or not a small prize has been obtained. The result of the "small prize" lottery is not immediately notified to the player, but rather, the second special symbol display 41b described below displays a variable special symbol, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed stationary (determined), and the lottery result is notified to the player. The image display device 7 plays a pattern matching game in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner in sync with the display of the variable special symbols, and this pattern matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result for the small prize.

"Drawing a normal pattern" refers to a process in which, when a gaming ball passes through gate 28, a random number for determining the normal pattern is acquired, and this acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "win" to determine whether or not there is a win. The result of the drawing for the normal pattern is also not immediately announced when the gaming ball passes through gate 28; rather, a fluctuating display of the normal pattern is performed on normal pattern display 42 (described below), and after a predetermined fluctuating time has elapsed, the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as a confirmed one (lit or unlit), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first large prize winning device (first attacker, first special variable prize winning device) 31 is located above and to the right of the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, and includes a first large prize winning hole (first special prize winning hole) 30, a V area 39, a non-V area 70, and a V opening and closing member 71. The first large prize winning hole 30 includes an opening and closing member (first special prize winning hole opening and closing member) 32 that allows or prevents the reception of game balls by a swing-type opening and closing action. The opening and closing member 32 is driven by a first large prize winning hole solenoid 33 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the first large prize winning hole 30 when the opening and closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large prize winning device 31 is equipped with a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (Figure 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, a non-V area sensor 70a (Figure 3), a first large prize winning port sensor 30a (Figure 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (Figure 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured inside the first large prize winning device 31 as areas through which a game ball that has passed through the first large prize winning port 30 can pass. The first large prize winning port sensor 30a is disposed upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize winning port 30. The V area sensor 39a is disposed in the V area 39, and detects the passage of a game ball into the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to distribute the game ball to the V area 39 in a first state (rotating state), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is located at the origin and distributes the game ball to the non-V area 70 in a second state (stopped state). In addition, the V-opening member 71 may be configured to move in a left-right direction with respect to the game board 2, as long as it has a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, without being limited to rotational movement. That is, when the V-opening member solenoid 73 is energized, it is in a retreat state (first state) in which the game ball is distributed to the V area 39, and when the V-opening member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in an advance state (second state) in which the game ball is distributed to the non-V area 70. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V area 39 is a trigger for transition to a high probability state described later. In other words, the V area 39 is a probability variable operation port. On the other hand, the non-V area 70 is not a probability variable operation port. The first large winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first large winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first large winning device 31. The first big prize device discharge sensor is installed at the point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 join downstream, and counts the number of game balls that pass through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second large prize winning device (second attacker, small prize attacker, second special variable prize winning device) 36 is located to the upper right of the first large prize winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a second large prize winning opening (second special prize winning opening) 35. The second large prize winning opening 35 is equipped with an opening/closing member (second special prize winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows the reception of game balls by swinging open and closed. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second large prize winning opening solenoid 38 (Figure 3). When the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state, game balls can enter the second large prize winning opening 35. This second large prize winning device is a small prize attacker that is activated when a game ball enters the second starting opening 21 and wins the small prize lottery.

The large prize opening start opening 17 is located above the first large prize opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large prize opening 30 opens when the game ball passes through.

The general winning opening 27 is provided at the bottom of the play area 3. The outlet 16 is provided at the bottom of the play area 3, and ejects game balls that do not win at any of the winning openings out of the play area 3. The indicators 40 are located near the center of the right side of the play board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is located at the bottom right of the play area 3, adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30.

The game area 3 has a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called a "left hit". On the other hand, a hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called a "right hit". The game machine 1 is configured so that a left hit can aim for winning at the first starting hole 20. On the other hand, a right hit can aim for passing through the gate 28 and winning at the second starting hole 21, the first large winning hole 30, and the second large winning hole 35.

Figure 2 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The display devices 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reserved display 43a, a second special symbol reserved display 43b, and a normal symbol reserved display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special symbol reserved display 43a displays the number of reserved activations (first special symbol reserved) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reserved display 43b displays the number of reserved activations (second special symbol reserved) of the second special symbol display 41b. The regular symbol reserve display 44 displays the number of reserved activations (regular symbol reserves) stored in the regular symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbols." The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41." The first special symbol reserve display 43a and the second special symbol reserve display 43b are collectively referred to as "special symbol reserve display 43."

The special symbol display 41 variably displays (varies) the special symbol (identification information) and then displays it in a stopped state to notify the result of a lottery (jackpot lottery) based on winning at the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. The special symbol (stopped symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) that is stopped is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) of a predetermined jackpot stop mode, a special game (jackpot game) is played in which the first jackpot opening 30 or the second jackpot opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot that has been won). The opening patterns of the jackpot openings (first jackpot opening 30 and second jackpot opening 35) in the jackpot game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 variably displays (varies) the special symbol (identification information) and then displays it in a stopped state to notify the result of the lottery (small prize lottery) based on the winning of the second starting hole 21. The special symbol (stopped symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display) that is stopped is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (small prize symbol) with a predetermined small prize stopping mode, a special game (small prize game) is played in which the second large prize hole 35 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. The opening pattern of the second large prize hole 35 in the small prize game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol lottery depending on the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, when a big win (one of the multiple types of big wins described below) is won, the big win symbol is displayed with the first, second, fifth, and sixth LEDs from the left lit, as in "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). When a small win is won, the small win symbol is displayed with the first and second LEDs from the left lit, as in "○○●●●●●●" (○: lit, ●: off). When a loss occurs, a loss symbol is displayed with only the rightmost LED lit, as in "●●●●●●●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off as a loss symbol may be adopted. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined variable time. The variable display mode may be, for example, each LED is lit so that light flows repeatedly from left to right. The manner of the variable display is not limited to the above manner and can be any lighting manner as long as the LEDs are not displayed as stopped (illuminated in a specific manner). For example, the manner of the variable display may be such that all LEDs flash simultaneously.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number obtained for that entry are temporarily stored in the special pattern reservation memory area 85 (Fig. 5). Specifically, if the game ball enters the first start hole 20, it is stored in the first special pattern reservation memory area 85a (Fig. 5) as the first special pattern reservation, and if the game ball enters the second start hole 21, it is stored in the second special pattern reservation memory area 85b (Fig. 5) as the second special pattern reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special pattern reservations that can be stored in each special pattern reservation memory area 85, and in this embodiment, the upper limit is four for both the first special pattern reservation memory area 85a and the second special pattern reservation memory area 85b. The special pattern reservation stored in the special pattern reservation memory area 85 is consumed when the special pattern based on the special pattern reservation becomes variable displayable. "Consuming the reserved special symbols" means determining the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the reserved special symbols, and executing the variable display of the special symbols to show the result of the determination. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, even if a winning occurs during the variable display of the special symbols or during the execution of the special game, the right to the jackpot lottery for the winning can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved special symbols is displayed on the reserved special symbol display 43. The first reserved special symbol display 43a and the second reserved special symbol display 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each reserved special symbol display 43 displays the number of reserved special symbols by lighting the LEDs for the number of reserved special symbols.

The variable display of the normal symbol is triggered by the passage of the game ball through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays (varies) the normal symbol, and then displays it still to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28. The normal symbol that is displayed still (normal symbol stop symbol, normal symbol derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display) is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of normal symbols by the normal symbol lottery. If the normal symbol stop symbol is a specific normal symbol that has been determined in advance (a normal symbol in a predetermined stop mode, i.e., a normal winning symbol), an auxiliary game is played in which the second start hole 21 is opened in an opening pattern that corresponds to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second start hole 21 will be described later.

The normal pattern display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal pattern according to the result of the normal pattern lottery depending on the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning pattern with both LEDs lit is displayed as "○○" (○: lit, ●: off). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss pattern with only the right LED lit is displayed as "●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off as a normal loss pattern may be adopted. Before the normal pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the normal pattern is displayed in a predetermined change time. The mode of the change display may be, for example, both LEDs are turned on alternately. The mode of the change display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighting display in a specific mode). For example, the mode of the change display may be all LEDs flashing at once.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal pattern random number (winning random number) acquired for that passage is temporarily stored as a normal pattern reserve in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86 (Figure 5). There is an upper limit to the number of normal pattern reserves that can be stored in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is four. The normal pattern reserve stored in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86 is consumed when it becomes possible to variable display the normal pattern based on that normal pattern reserve. The consumption of the normal pattern reserve means determining the normal pattern random number (winning random number) corresponding to that normal pattern reserve and executing variable display of the normal pattern to show the result of the determination. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of the normal pattern based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, even if a prize is won during the variable display of the normal pattern or during the execution of the auxiliary game, the right to draw the normal pattern for that passage can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of normal pattern reserves is displayed on the normal pattern reserve display 44. The regular map reservation indicator 44 is, for example, composed of four LEDs, and displays the number of regular map reservations by lighting up the LEDs according to the number of regular map reservations.

2. Electrical Configuration of the Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 3 and FIG. 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), a sound control board 106 (FIG. 4), and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as big win lottery and transition of game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is a performance control board that controls performances executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. The sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game on the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Examples of sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the large prize opening start port sensor 17a, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large prize port sensor 30a, the second large prize port sensor 35a, the V area sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal prize port sensors 27a and 29a. Examples of solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chute solenoid 24, the first large prize port solenoid 33, the second large prize port solenoid 38, and the V opening and closing member solenoid 73. The large prize opening start opening sensor 17a is provided inside the large prize opening start opening 17 and detects a game ball that has entered the large prize opening start opening 17. The first start opening sensor 20a is provided inside the first start opening 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start opening 20. The second start opening sensor 21a is provided inside the second start opening 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start opening 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large prize opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening 30. The second large prize opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 35. The V-area sensor 39a is provided in the V-area 39 inside the first large prize opening 30, and detects game balls that have passed through the V-area 39. The non-V-area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V-area 70 inside the first large prize opening 30, and detects game balls that have passed through the non-V-area 70. The regular prize opening sensor 27a is provided inside the regular prize opening 27, and detects game balls that have won in the regular prize opening 27. The regular prize opening sensor 29a detects game balls that have passed through the regular prize opening 29. The electric chute solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chute 22. The first large prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first large prize device 31. The second large prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second large prize device 36. The V-shaped opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 of the first big prize device 31.

The main control board 80 is connected to the displays 40 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 controls the display of the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, the normal symbol display 42, the first special symbol reserved display 43a, the second special symbol reserved display 43b, and the normal symbol reserved display 44.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 110 is connected to the prize ball payout device 120, the loan ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135, and is connected to the launch device 112 via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The loan ball payout device 130 pays out loan balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball-lending motor 131 of the ball-lending device 130 to dispense balls based on a signal from a card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1. The dispensed balls are detected by a ball-lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information about ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launching device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launching motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launching volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 by the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 by the launching volume 115. Then, the launching motor 113 is driven so that the game balls are launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launching volume 115.

The sub-control board 90 (Figure 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that only allows signals to be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. In other words, a unidirectional circuit (not shown, for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a means for restricting the direction of communication.

The sub-control board 90 includes a performance control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The performance control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the performance of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub-CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub-ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the performance control microcomputer 91. The sub-control board 90 is connected to an image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 via an input/output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to a program for controlling the display, the ROM 103 stores still image data and video data to be displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64, specifically image data such as characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, and symbols (including performance patterns) and background images. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding the image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. Based on commands received from the main control board 80, the performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64. Based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91, the image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 and controls the display based on the read image data.

The speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Sound data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. The audio control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may execute audio control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, and audio data may be stored in the ROM. The speaker 67 may also be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute audio control. Furthermore, audio data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The lamp control board 107 is connected to the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the third movable role 13, and controls them. The performance control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 through the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light pattern data (data that determines the on/off and light color, etc., also called lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and controls the light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 according to the light emission pattern data. The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the third movable role 13 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, and the third movable part 13, and controls the operation of the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, and the third movable part 13 according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to control the lighting of the lamps and the operation of the movable parts 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data regarding the light emission pattern and operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

The relay board 108 is connected to a performance button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (Figure 1) has been pressed. When the performance button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the performance button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. In addition, a sword component detection switch that detects that the sword component 65 has been searched is also connected to the relay board 108.

3. Data Structure of the Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 5 and 6. Figure 5 (A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. Figure 5 (B) is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. Figure 6 (A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. Figure 6 (B) is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) stores a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol change pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, a change pattern determination table T6, an electric chute opening pattern determination table T7, a large prize opening pattern determination table T8, a V-shaped opening member opening pattern determination table T9, and a small win determination table T10. These determination tables are referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special chart reserved memory area 85, and a normal chart reserved memory area 86. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a pre-determination command, a reserved ball number command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V pass command, a customer waiting standby command, and the like are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the game state are set in the main control main process (described later), and a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, a small winning flag, a V flag, a sure win flag, a time-saving flag, and the like are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control main process (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability change counter, a time reduction counter, etc. are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area where a status in the special operation process described later is set. The special pattern reserved memory area 85 includes a first special pattern reserved memory area 85a in which the first special pattern reserved is stored, and a second special pattern reserved memory area 85b in which the second special pattern reserved is stored. The first special pattern reserved memory area 85a is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) such as random numbers for special patterns corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special pattern reserved, respectively. The second special symbol reserved memory area 85b is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special symbol reserved. The normal symbol reserved memory area 86 is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) such as normal symbol random numbers (winning random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal symbol reserved. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 is provided with a winning type set buffer in which special symbol stop symbol data is set, and a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the movable gimmicks 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600 is set.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6(A)) stores a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51, a core performance pattern determination table T52, a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. These determination tables are referenced by the performance control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the performance control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) includes a command memory area 94a, a performance command set area 94b, a pre-judgment information memory area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command memory area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit in the sub-control main process (described later) are stored, and includes pre-judgment commands, reserved ball number commands, fluctuation start commands, fluctuation stop commands, opening commands, round designation commands, ending commands, game state designation commands, V pass commands, and customer waiting standby commands. The performance command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, and includes a fluctuation performance start command, a pre-fluctuation end command, a fluctuation performance end command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, an ending performance start command, and the like. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a first special reserved effect counter, a second special reserved effect counter, a normal reserved effect counter, a special chance effect counter, and a time-saving effect counter.

Figure 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. Figure 7 (A) shows the random numbers acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and Figure 7 (B) shows the random numbers acquired by the performance control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control unit side. The gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured to acquire a "jackpot random number", a "jackpot type random number", a "reach random number", a "variable pattern random number", a "normal pattern random number (win random number)", and a "small win random number" at the timing described below. The "jackpot random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "jackpot type random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine the type of jackpot that has been won (jackpot type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not a reach occurs in the performance pattern change performance that indicates the result when the jackpot judgment is a miss, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The reach is a state in which there is only one performance pattern remaining among multiple performance patterns (decorative patterns) that is displayed in a changing manner, and depending on which of the performance patterns that are displayed in a changing manner are displayed as stopped, a combination of performance patterns that indicates a jackpot win (for example, a "7↓7" state). Note that the performance pattern that is displayed in a stopped state in the reach state may be displayed as if it is flickering on the display screen 7a. The "change pattern random number" is a random number used to determine a change pattern including a change time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "normal pattern random number (win random number)" is used in a lottery (normal pattern lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chute 22. The normal pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The "small win random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not there is a small win (small win determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "big win random number", "big win type random number", "reach random number", and "variable pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21. The "small win random number" is obtained based on the ball entering the second start hole 21. The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first start hole 20 is stored in the first special pattern reserve memory area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second start hole 21 is stored in the second special pattern reserve memory area 85b. The "normal pattern random number (win random number)" is obtained based on the passage of the gate 28. The obtained normal pattern random number value is stored in the normal pattern reserve memory area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "look-ahead performance random number" and a "chance up random number" at the timing described below. The "look-ahead performance random number" is a random number used to determine the look-ahead performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance up performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead performance random number" is acquired based on a pre-determination command being output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94. The "chance up random number" is acquired based on a variation start command being output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

Figure 8 is a diagram for explaining the judgment tables T1 to T4 and T10. Figure 8(A) shows a diagram for explaining the big win judgment table T1, Figure 8(B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach judgment table T2, Figure 8(C) shows a diagram for explaining the normal pattern win judgment table T3, Figure 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal pattern change pattern judgment table T4, and Figure 8(E) shows a diagram for explaining the small win judgment table T10.

The jackpot determination table T1 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine whether the acquired jackpot random number (any of 0 to 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "miss". In FIG. 8(A), it is shown that in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random number is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot" (approximate probability 1/397), and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 164 (165 to 65535)", it is determined to be a "miss". In the "high probability state", if the jackpot random number is "0 to 649", it is determined to be a "jackpot" (approximate probability 1/101), and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)", it is determined to be a "miss". The contents of the "normal probability state" and "high probability state" will be described later.

The reach judgment table T2 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine whether the acquired reach random number (any of 0 to 127) corresponds to "reach" or "no reach". Note that this reach judgment table T2 is not referred to when the acquired jackpot random number corresponds to "jackpot". In FIG. 8 (B), in the "non-time-saving state", when the reach random number is "0 to 13", it is judged as "reach", and when the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127)", it is judged as "no reach". Also, in the "time-saving state", when the reach random number is "0 to 5", it is judged as "reach", and when the reach random number is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is judged as "no reach". The contents of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach judgment table T2, the time-saving state is less likely to trigger a reach when missing than the non-time-saving state. This is because the time-saving state is more likely to select a miss without a reach that has a short fluctuation time, which speeds up the consumption of reserved special charts.

The normal symbol hit determination table T3 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine whether the acquired normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) corresponds to a "hit" or a "miss." FIG. 8(C) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2," it is determined to be a "hit," and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 2 (3 to 255)," it is determined to be a "miss." It also shows that in the "time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254," it is determined to be a "hit," and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)," it is determined to be a "miss."

The normal symbol change pattern determination table T4 is a table that is referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine how many seconds the normal symbol change time is depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). Figure 8 (D) shows that in the "non-time-saving state", the normal symbol change time is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the "time-saving state", the normal symbol change time is determined to be "1 second".

The small win determination table T10 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine whether the acquired small win random number (any of 0 to 127) corresponds to a "small win" or a "miss". Note that this small win determination table T10 is not referred to when the acquired big win random number corresponds to a "big win". In FIG. 8 (E), in all states (regardless of the game state), if the small win random number is "0 to 63", it is determined to be a "small win" (probability 1/2), and if the small win random number is "a number other than 0 to 63 (64 to 127)", it is determined to be a "miss". Note that the small win determination table T10 is a table that is referred to when the game ball enters the second start hole 21 (it is not referred to when the game ball enters the first start hole 20). Also, the small win determination table T10 is not referred to when it is determined to be a "big win".

Figure 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine the "jackpot type" and the "type of special symbol" according to the acquired jackpot type random number value (any of 0 to 127). In Figure 9, when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is selected in the lottery, if the jackpot type random number value is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot" and the special symbol 1 stopping symbol (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". If the jackpot type random number value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot" and the special symbol stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number is "50-55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actual 15R) V-passing jackpot" and the special symbol stop pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number is "56-67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actual 13R) V-passing jackpot" and the special symbol stop pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number is "68-127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing jackpot" and the special symbol stop pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 5". On the other hand, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is selected in the lottery, when the jackpot type random number is "0-40", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV-passing jackpot" and the special symbol 2 stop pattern (special symbol stop pattern) is determined to be "jackpot pattern 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "41 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV scheduled to pass" and the stop pattern of the special chart 2 (special chart stop pattern) is determined to be "jackpot pattern 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actual 13R) V scheduled not to pass" and the special chart stop pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special chart stop pattern data" corresponding to the special chart stop pattern, the "opening (OP) command", the "round designation command", and the "ending (ED) command" of the special game can also be specified. The specific contents of "16RV scheduled to pass", "16R (actual 15R) V scheduled to pass", "16R (actual 13R) V scheduled to pass" and "16R (actual 13R) V scheduled not to pass" will be described later.

Fig. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time-saving state. Fig. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time-saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random number value (0 to 127).
10, for example, when a ball enters the first starting hole 20 in a non-time-saving state, the ball is judged as a "miss" in the big win judgment table T1, the ball is judged as a "reach" in the reach judgment table T2, the number of reserved balls is "1-2", and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0-60", the fluctuation pattern is judged as "P7". Also, when a ball enters the second starting hole 21 in a non-time-saving state, the reserved ball is consumed when the time-saving state (high probability high base state) ends and the normal state (non-time-saving state, low probability low base state) is entered, the ball is judged as a "big win" in the big win judgment table T1, and the ball is judged as a "16RV passing big win" or "big win pattern 2 (21H)" in the big win type judgment table T5, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0-127", the fluctuation pattern is judged as "P22". In addition, when the reserve at the second starting port 21 is consumed in a non-time-saving state, a "small win" is determined in the small win determination table T10, and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P34".

11 shows, for example, that if a ball enters the first starting hole 20 in the time-saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines it as a "miss", the reach determination table T2 determines it as a "no reach", the number of reserved balls is "3-4", and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0-127", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P56". Also, if a ball enters the second starting hole 21 in the time-saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines it as a "jackpot", the jackpot type determination table T5 determines it as a "16RV passing jackpot" and "jackpot pattern 2 (21H)", and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0-127", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P62". It also shows that if a prize is won at the second starting hole 21 during the time-saving state, a "small win" is determined in the small win determination table T10, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 127," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P74."

As shown in Figures 10 and 11, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. For example, when the reserve of the second starting hole 21 is consumed in a non-time-saving state and it is determined to be a small win, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P34" and the fluctuation time is determined to be 15,000 msec. Also, when the second starting hole 21 is won in a time-saving state and it is determined to be a small win, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P74" and the fluctuation time is determined to be 3,000 msec. Note that during the time-saving state (high probability high base state), it is also during the small win rush (RUSH) period described later until the next big win occurs. In other words, during the small win rush period, when the second starting hole 21 is won, the fluctuation time is 3,000 msec and the probability of a small win is 1/2, so small wins occur frequently in a short period of time. And during the small win rush period, you can aim for a big win while increasing the number of game balls you have. In addition, when a reach occurs, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). A super reach is a reach performance in which the change time after the reach is longer than that of a normal reach. Here, five types of super reaches (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different change times are set. In SP1 to SP3, the normal reach is followed by a development. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo consecutive win. In particular, SP5 is a special reach change pattern ("P62") in which a pseudo big win suggestion performance is performed by winning the second starting hole 21 during a small win rush (RUSH) period that occurs in a time-saving state (high probability high base state) described later. SP5 may also occur during the consumption of reserved balls in the second starting hole 21 when the time-saving state (high probability, high base state) ends and the normal state (non-time-saving state, low probability, low base state) is entered, and in this case too, a pseudo jackpot suggestion effect may be performed (variation pattern "P22").

Figure 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 refers to in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). In Figure 12 (A), it is shown that in the "non-time-saving state", the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11", and in the "time-saving state", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12". In Figure 12 (B), the contents of opening pattern 11 and opening pattern 12 are shown. In opening pattern 11, the electric chute 22 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In opening pattern 12, the electric chute 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per time, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 seconds. However, if a predetermined number of game balls are won (a maximum of 10 balls), the electric chute 22 will close even if there is still time left to open it.

13 is a diagram for explaining the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. The large prize opening pattern determination table T8 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 according to the special symbol stop pattern data (FIG. 9). In Figure 13 (A), it is shown that, as the large prize opening pattern in a large prize game, when the special chart stopping pattern data is "11H", "12H", "20H" or "21H", the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", when the special chart stopping pattern data is "14H", "15H" or "22H", the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 22", and when the special chart stopping pattern data is "13H", the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 23". In addition, Figure 13 (A) shows that, as for the large prize opening pattern in a small prize game, when the special chart stopping pattern data is "20H", the opening pattern of the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 25", and when the special chart stopping pattern data is "21H", the opening pattern of the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 26".
13B shows the contents of opening patterns 21, 22, and 23 as the large prize opening opening patterns in the large prize game. In opening pattern 21, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 14th and 16th rounds. In opening pattern 22, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 1st to 13th rounds, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and the opening time is 0.1 seconds (short opening) in the 14th and 16th rounds, and the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 0.1 seconds (short opening) in the 15th round. In the opening pattern 23, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in the 14th round, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in the 16th round. However, if a predetermined number of game balls have won (a prescribed number of winning balls, up to 9 balls), the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 are closed even if there is still opening time remaining.
In FIG. 13(C), the contents of the opening pattern 25 and the opening pattern 26 are shown as the large prize opening opening pattern in the small prize game. In the opening pattern 25, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 1.0 seconds. In the opening pattern 26, the second large prize opening 35 is opened five times and for an opening time of 0.3 seconds. In other words, in the small prize game, the first large prize opening 30 is not opened, and only the second large prize opening 35 is opened. In addition, the opening pattern 25 is performed during the small prize rush period after the end of the large prize game, and during the reserve of the second start opening 21 after the end of the small prize rush, when the "16RV passing planned large prize" is caused by the large prize pattern 1 (20H) of the special chart 2. The opening pattern 26 is performed during the small win rush period after the end of the big win game when the "16RV passing big win" is caused by the big win pattern 2 (21H) of the special chart 2, and during the reserve of the second start port 21 after the end of the small win rush. In other words, the opening pattern 26 is the opening pattern of the small win game performed after the big win game when the big win is achieved via the variation pattern ("P62") of the dedicated reach (SP5) in which the pseudo big win suggestion performance described later is performed. In other words, the big prize opening pattern in the small win game is different when the big win is achieved via the pseudo big win suggestion performance and when the big win is achieved without the pseudo big win suggestion performance.

Figure 14 is a diagram for explaining the V-opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V-opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 according to the special symbol stop pattern data (Figure 9). In Figure 14 (A), when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "12H", "20H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 is determined to be "opening pattern 31", when the special symbol stop pattern data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 32", when the special symbol stop pattern data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 33", and when the special symbol stop pattern data is "15H" or "22H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the 8th and 10th races, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd and 6th races, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th races, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30. In opening pattern 34, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is short-opened with an opening time of 0.1 seconds.

4. Description of jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots", "small jackpots" and "losses" as the results of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of a "jackpot", a "jackpot symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "small jackpot", a "small jackpot symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "loss", a "loss symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. When a jackpot is won, a "jackpot game" is executed in which the jackpot winning holes (the first jackpot winning hole 30 and the second jackpot winning hole 35) are opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol (the type of jackpot) that is displayed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit opening games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game. The time (interval time) during which the large prize opening is closed between round games is included in the open round game before the closure. When a small prize is won, a "small prize game" is executed in which the large prize opening (second large prize opening 35) is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the large prize that triggered the small prize rush described below.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. 9. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types: a "V-passing jackpot" and a "V-non-passing jackpot".
A "V-passing jackpot (probable jackpot)" is a jackpot that operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37, and the V-opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game. In addition, a "V-passing jackpot (probable jackpot)" is a jackpot in which the game state is a high probability high base state from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, and during that period, the second starting hole 21 is frequently won and small jackpots occur, resulting in a small jackpot rush period. Here, jackpots with special stop pattern data of 11H to 14H, 20H, and 21H correspond to a "V-passing jackpot (probable jackpot)". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in Figure 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in Figure 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33), or (opening pattern 23: opening pattern 32), it becomes possible for the game ball to pass into the V area 39 during the jackpot game.
The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is a jackpot that operates the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37, and the V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) that makes it impossible for the game ball to pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. In addition, the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is a jackpot in which the game state becomes a low probability low base state after the end of the jackpot game, during which it becomes difficult to win the second starting hole 21, and therefore the small winning rush period after the end of the jackpot game does not occur. Here, a jackpot with special chart stop pattern data of 15H and 22H corresponds to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the game ball cannot pass through to the V area 39 during the jackpot game.
As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 serves as both a V-passage scheduled opening pattern and a V-non-passage scheduled opening pattern.

The "V passing jackpot" includes the "16RV passing jackpot", the "16R (actually 13R) V passing jackpot", and the "16R (actually 15R) V passing jackpot". The "16RV passing jackpot" has a total of 16Rs. The first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R in Rs 1 to 13 and R 15. The second large prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R in Rs 14 and 16 (Figure 13: opening pattern 21). In Rs 10 and 12, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time (Figure 14: opening pattern 31), and it is easy to pass through to the V area 39 in the first large prize opening 30.

In the "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, but in 15R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per R, and in 14R and 16R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per R (Figure 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V-pass scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of 13R in effect. In rounds 2 and 6, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened long (Figure 14: opening pattern 33), making it easy to pass through to the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

In the "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first large prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, and in 16R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, but in 14R, the second large prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per R (Figure 13: Opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize opening is extremely short in 14R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be won. In other words, the "16R (actually 15R) V-pass scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of essentially 15R. In rounds 8 and 10, the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 is opened long (Figure 14: opening pattern 32), making it easy to pass through to the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of opening pattern 22, in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first large prize winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in 15R, the first large prize winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per round, and in 14R and 16R, the second large prize winning hole 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the large prize winning hole is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot of essentially 13R. At 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (Figure 14: opening pattern 34), making it almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

As shown in FIG. 9, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the drawing for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for the V-passing jackpot (jackpot with small jackpot rush) and 60/128 (approximately 47%) for the V-non-passing jackpot. In contrast, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the drawing for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is 83/128 (approximately 64.8%) for the V-passing jackpot (jackpot with small jackpot rush) and 45/128 (approximately 35.2%) for the V-non-passing jackpot. In this way, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) held when the game ball enters the second start hole 21 is set to be more advantageous for the player than the jackpot lottery (lottery for the first special symbol) held when the game ball enters the first start hole 20.

5. Description of the gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The gaming control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. Here, the state in which the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs probability variation control on the special symbols of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state (high probability state, probability variation state, probability change state)," and the state in which the probability variation control is not performed is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)." The gaming control microcomputer 81 realizes the high probability state by performing a jackpot determination using a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is greater in the high probability state than in the normal probability state, as the probability variation control of the special symbols. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of jackpot than the normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the special pattern of the special pattern display device 41, the probability that the display result (stop pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern by the special pattern display device 41 will be a jackpot pattern is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not being executed.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the time-shortening of the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called the "time-shortening state", and the state in which the time-shortening of the special symbol is not controlled is simply called the "non-time-shortening state". In the time-shortening state, the time-shortening of the special symbol (the time from the start of the display to the derivation of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time-shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 judges the variation pattern using the variation pattern judgment table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time-shortening state in the time-shortening state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variation time-shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, a short variation time is more likely to be selected as the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol compared to when the variation time-shortening control is not executed. As a result, in the time-shortening state, the pace of consumption of the special symbol reservation is faster, and effective winning (winning that can be stored as the special symbol reservation) at the starting port is more likely to occur. This allows players to aim for a big win while playing smoothly. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them. However, in this example, an embodiment in which probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control are executed simultaneously is shown, as described below.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal pattern of the normal pattern display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special pattern of the special pattern display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal pattern in the time-shortening state, but does not execute them in the non-time-shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the hit judgment (judgment of the normal pattern) using the normal pattern hit judgment table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) in which the number of normal pattern random number values (hit random number values) judged as a hit is higher in the time-shortening state than in the non-time-shortening state, as the probability fluctuation control for the normal pattern. Therefore, in the time-shortening state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal pattern normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the normal pattern of the normal pattern display 42, the probability that the display result (stop pattern) of the variable display of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display 42 will be a winning pattern is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not executed. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter than that in the non-time-saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is 30 seconds in the non-time-saving state, but is 1 second in the time-saving state (FIG. 8 (D)). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chute 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening time extension control on the electric chute 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chute 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than that in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening number increase control on the electric chute 22. In a situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and the opening number increase control for the electric chute 22, the electric chute 22 is opened more frequently and the game balls enter the second start hole 21 more frequently than when these controls are not executed. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of shot balls, becomes higher. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which they are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls in hand. The high base state is a state in which the so-called electric support control (control that supports the entry into the second start hole 21 by the electric chute 22) is executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all of the above controls. That is, by executing one or more of the following controls, it is sufficient that the electric chute 22 is more likely to open than when the control is not executed: probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 42, fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 42, opening time extension control for the electric chute 22, and opening count increase control for the electric chute 22. Also, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the time-saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the game state after a jackpot game due to winning a V-passing jackpot is a high probability state, a time-saving state, and a high base state if the jackpot game passes through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. This game state is particularly called a "high probability high base state" or a "high probability time-saving state". The high probability high base state ends when the variable display of the special pattern is executed 10,000 times. In other words, the high probability high base state ends when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the game state after a jackpot game due to winning a V-non-passing jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, i.e., a low probability state), a non-time-saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state) if the jackpot game does not pass through the V region 39 (it almost never does). This game state is particularly called a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state is sometimes called the "normal game state" or the "low probability non-time-saving state (also simply called the non-time-saving state)." When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the game state after powering on is this low probability low base state. In addition, although not implemented in this example, there is also a game state that is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, i.e., a state of low probability), time-saving state, and high base state (electric support control state), and this game state is particularly called the "low probability high base state" or the "low probability time-saving state" (a state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is called a "specific game state"). In addition, the state during which a special game (jackpot game) is being played is sometimes called the "special game state (jackpot game state)."

In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, it is more advantageous to advance the game by hitting the ball to the right game area 3B (Fig. 1). This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chute 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second start hole 21 than the first start hole 20. For this reason, in a high base state, the ball is hit to the right to enter the second start hole 21 while passing through the gate 28, which is the trigger for the normal pattern lottery. This allows more start wins (entry into the second start hole 21) than hitting to the left, and small wins can be generated frequently. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting to the right even during a big win game. On the other hand, in a low base state, it is more advantageous to advance the game by hitting the ball to the left game area 3A (Fig. 1) by hitting to the left. This is because in the low electric base state, electric support control is not being executed, so the electric chute 22 is less likely to open than in the high base state, making it more difficult to win in the second start hole 21; in other words, it is easier to win in the first start hole 20 than in the second start hole 21. For this reason, in the low base state, the ball is hit from the left in order to win in the first start hole 20. This allows more start wins (wins in the first start hole 20) to be obtained than by hitting from the right.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (Fig. 3) will be described with reference to Figs. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the win/lose determination means (Fig. 23) and the win/lose advance determination means (Figs. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
15 is a flow chart of the main control process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads out a program for executing the main control process from the main ROM 83. In the main control process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). In the initial settings, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial settings are performed only once after the power supply is turned on, and are not performed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interrupts from the interrupt process (step S002) and performs the normal and special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, variable pattern random number, normal symbol random number, and small win random number) shown in FIG. 7(A) by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Each random number may also be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit consisting of a counter IC or the like.

After the normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S004). While the interrupt is allowed, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 4 msec). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 4 msec). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, the update process of various counter values by the normal and special symbol main random number update process is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 when the interrupt is prohibited, the main timer interrupt process does not start immediately, but starts after the interrupt is allowed.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flow chart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7 (A). This random number update process is the same as the normal and special pattern main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update process of various random number counter values is performed both during the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and during other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process).

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs input processing (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by the various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and sets payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning hole in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. The various sensors are, for example, the first start hole sensor 20a, the second start hole sensor 21a, the first large winning hole sensor 30a, the second large winning hole sensor 35a, the normal winning hole sensor 27a, and the normal winning hole sensor 29a (Figure 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the start hole sensor detection process (step S103), the normal operation process (step S104), the special operation process (step S105), the V-area sensor detection process (step S106), and the reserved ball number process (step S107) in that order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the output process (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands and the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub-control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes other processes (step S109). In the other processes, for example, the second special chart reserved display 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the reserved ball number of the special chart 2 described later, and the first special chart reserved display 43a is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the reserved ball number of the special chart 1.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flow chart of the start hole sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S202). The number of reserved balls for normal symbols is the number of reserved normal symbols, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved normal symbols provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of reserved normal symbol balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved normal symbol balls (step S203), and then a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-H), and stores the acquired random number value in the first to fourth memory areas of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86 of the main RAM 84 according to the current number of reserved normal symbol balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not a game ball has entered the second start hole 21. This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 21a. If a game ball has not entered the second start hole 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If a game ball has entered (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S206). The number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is the number of reserved second special charts, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved second special charts provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. If the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 (step S207), and then a special chart 2 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the big win random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-A), the value of the big win type random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-RC), the value of the variation pattern random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-T1), and the value of the small win random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-K) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in the memory area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 among the first to fourth memory areas of the second special chart reservation memory area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the second special chart reserved memory area 85b for the special chart 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described later. After the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special chart 2 pre-determination process (step S209). The details of the special chart 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20. This judgment is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting hole sensor 20a. If a game ball has not entered the first starting hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process is terminated. If a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S211). The number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is the number of reserved first special charts, and more specifically, is the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved first special charts provided in the main RAM 84. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. If the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (step S212), and then a random number acquisition process related to special chart 1 is performed (step S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are acquired in accordance with the above-mentioned special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for special chart 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reservation storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the first special chart reservation storage area 85a for the special chart 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described later. After the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special chart 1 pre-determination process (step S214). The details of the special chart 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special Drawing 2 Pre-Decision Processing]
FIG. 18 is a flow chart of the special chart 2 pre-judgment process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability of winning is ON or not (step S301). If the probability of winning is OFF (step S301: NO), this process is terminated. That is, if the probability of winning is OFF, no pre-judgment is performed. On the other hand, if the probability of winning is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-judgment of a jackpot by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-judgment buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-judgment of whether or not a jackpot has been won by using the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) and the jackpot random number value to be referred to. Here, since the probability state is high (the probability flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high probability state table (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1 to determine in advance whether or not there is a jackpot. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", it is determined in advance as a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance as a "miss". In this embodiment, the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later is used to perform the pre-determination, but in other embodiments, a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used to perform the pre-determination.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "miss" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random number value is "0" to "127", the pre-determination is "16RV passing scheduled jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but in other embodiments, the pre-determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for pre-determination that is different from the jackpot type determination table T5.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value and the reach random number value as the judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, since the time-saving state (time-saving flag is ON) is in effect here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state (FIG. 11) and specifies the fluctuation pattern from the jackpot pre-determination result of step S304, the reach pre-determination result obtained from the reach random number value, and the fluctuation pattern random number value. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected depending on the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, if a reach or miss is determined in advance based on the jackpot advance determination result and the reach/no reach advance determination result, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 selects two patterns: fluctuation pattern "P64" which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2", and fluctuation pattern "P68" which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "3 to 4". In this embodiment, the advance determination is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but in other embodiments, the advance determination may be performed using a fluctuation pattern determination table for advance determination that is different from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment Processing]
FIG. 19 is a flow chart of the special chart 1 pre-judgment process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special chart 2 pre-judgment process, if the probability variable flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is terminated. That is, if the probability variable flag is ON, pre-judgment is not performed. On the other hand, if the probability variable flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot pre-judgment by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the pre-judgment buffer by the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). Next, since the state is normal probability (the probability flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 pre-determines whether or not there is a jackpot based on the table for normal probability (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as a "miss". Note that the jackpot pre-determination may use a jackpot determination table for pre-determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1. The process of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the special chart 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described above, so the description will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flow chart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. If the electric chute 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the normal pattern is changing (step S502). If the normal pattern is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal pattern is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), the process ends. If the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of reserved balls of normal symbols is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 with the number of reserved balls of normal symbols being "0", the number of reserved balls of normal symbols becomes "1" once in step S203 of the start hole sensor detection process (FIG. 17), and then the reserved balls are consumed in this step S504, and the reserved balls of normal symbols immediately become "0". This is the same for the number of reserved balls of special symbols. That is, in steps S207 and S212 of the start hole sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the reserved balls of special symbols become "1" once, and then the reserved balls are consumed in steps S1404 and S1410 of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) described later, and the reserved balls of special symbols become "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a win judgment by referring to the normal symbol win judgment table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the normal symbol random number value (win random number value) stored as a judgment value in the first memory area (corresponding to the first normal symbol reserved) of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86. Then, it judges whether or not there is a win by using the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not there is a time-saving state), and the normal symbol win judgment table T3. For example, in the non-time-saving state, if the normal symbol random number value is "0" to "2", it is judged as a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is other than that, it is judged as a "lose" (see FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8 (D)) to select a fluctuation pattern (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not the time-saving state) and selects the normal symbol fluctuation time as the normal symbol fluctuation pattern using the game state determination result and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4. Here, in the non-time-saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is determined to be "30 seconds," and in the time-saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8 (D)). The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern to start displaying the normal symbol fluctuation (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8 (D)). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the normal symbol fluctuation display continues. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) is a "miss" (step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned hit determination is a "win" (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chute opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is selected by referring to the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 (Figure 12 (A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state), and selects the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 using the game state determination result and the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. Here, when it is in a non-time-saving state, "opening pattern 11" is selected, and when it is in a time-saving state, "opening pattern 12" is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the operation of the electric chute in accordance with the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In the above-mentioned step S501, if the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that either the number of winning balls in the electric chute 22 has reached a specified maximum number of winning balls (for example, 6 balls) or the operation time of the electric chute 22 has elapsed and it has become time to close the electric chute 22. The operation time of the electric chute 22 is the operation time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the electric chute 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chute 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and ends this process.

[Special Action Processing]
FIG. 21 is a flow chart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the process related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is called "1", "2", "3", and "4" of the "special operation status". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a big win determination, a small win determination, a change pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), a special symbol change process is executed (step S1304). In the special symbol change process, a change stop command is output after the change time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), a special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, an opening command is output when a jackpot occurs. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), a special electric device process is performed (step S1308). In the special electric device process, a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is initially set to "1".

The special operation process may be configured to allow simultaneous variation in which the process related to the first special symbol display 41a and the process related to the second special symbol display 41b are independent of each other, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in parallel. In this case, the process related to the first special symbol display 41a and the large prize device (the first large prize device 31 and the second large prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is called "1", "2", "3", and "4" of the "special symbol 1 operation status", respectively. In addition, the process related to the second special symbol display 41b and the large prize device is divided into four stages, and each stage is called "1", "2", "3", and "4" of the "special symbol 2 operation status", respectively. The initial setting of the "special symbol 1 operation status" and the "special symbol 2 operation status" is "1". The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether either the "special symbol 1 operation status" or the "special symbol 2 operation status" is "4". When either the "special chart 1 operation status" or the "special chart 2 operation status" is "4", a special electric device process is performed. In the special electric device process, a big win game or a small win game is executed. Specifically, when the special chart 1 operation status is "4", a big win game due to a big win of the special chart 1 is executed. When the special chart 2 operation status is "4", a big win game or a small win game due to a big win of the special chart 2 is executed. When neither the "special chart 1 operation status" nor the "special chart 2 operation status" is "4", the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the "special chart 1 operation status" is "1", "2", or "3". When the "special chart 1 operation status" is "1", a special chart 1 standby process is performed. In the special chart 1 standby process, a hit judgment of the special chart 1 and a change pattern selection are executed. When the "special chart 1 operation status" is "2", a special chart 1 change process is performed. In the special chart 1 during change processing, output of a change stop command is executed after the change time of the special chart 1 has elapsed. When the "special chart 1 operation status" is "3", the special chart 1 determination processing is executed. In the special chart 1 determination processing, output of an opening command is executed when a big win or a small win occurs in the special chart 1 lottery. After determining whether the "special chart 1 operation status" is "1", "2", or "3", the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the "special chart 2 operation status" is "1", "2", or "3". When the "special chart 2 operation status" is "1", the special chart 2 standby processing is executed. In the special chart 2 standby processing, hit determination of the special chart 2 and change pattern selection are executed. When the "special chart 2 operation status" is "2", the special chart 2 during change processing is executed. In the special chart 2 during change processing, output of a change stop command is executed after the change time of the special chart 2 has elapsed. When the "Special chart 2 operation status" is "3", the special chart 2 determination process is performed. In the special chart 2 determination process, an opening command is output when a big win or small win occurs in the special chart 2 lottery. As described above, according to the special operation process of this embodiment, the waiting process, during-change process, and determination process of special chart 1 and the waiting process, change process, and determination process of special chart 2 are executed in parallel. On the other hand, the big win game and small win game are executed in priority to the waiting process, change process, and determination process of special chart 1 and special chart 2.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol waiting process, the game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "0" or not (step S1400). If the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1400: YES), that is, if the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b does not store a random number group acquired due to winning the second starting hole 21, the process proceeds to step S1407. If the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is "1" or more (step S1400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a small win determination process (step S1401). In the small win determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a small win determination by referring to the small win determination table T10 (FIG. 8). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the small win random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first reserved second special symbol) of the second special symbol storage area 85b, and judges whether or not a small win has occurred using the read small win random number and the small win judgment table T10. Next, if the result of the small win judgment is a "small win", the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small win flag, sets the special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the small win symbol in the buffer of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big win judgment process (step S1402) and a variable pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later.

After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls for the special chart 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of the reserved information (various random number values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b from the current position to the side to be read, and clears the reserved information stored in the location farthest from the side to be read in the second special chart reserved storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, if reserved information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the reserved information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and if reserved information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas, the reserved information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the reserved second special charts are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the reserved image 9B at the left end of the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is shifted to the reserved consumption image display area side and displayed as the reserved consumption image 9C. Also, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left out of the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special symbol reserved storage area 85b are shifted one to the left (FIG. 1). This allows the player to recognize that one second special symbol reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 2 variation start processing (step S1406). In the special symbol 2 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the variation display of the second special symbol is started, and the variation time timer is set. The variation time timer is set to a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing. Also, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". The fluctuation start command (special chart 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special chart 2 fluctuation start process includes information about the special chart stop pattern data set in the small win determination process (step S1401), information about the special chart stop pattern data set in the big win determination process (step S1402), and information about the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403) (including information about the fluctuation time).

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "0" or not (step S1407). If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, if the first special chart reserved memory area 85a does not store a random number group obtained due to winning the first starting hole 20, the process proceeds to step S1413. If the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a from the current position to the side to be read, and clears the reserved information stored in the farthest location from the side to be read in the first special chart reserved storage area 85a (step S1411). Through the above steps, the first special chart reserved is consumed in the order in which it was reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the reserved image 9A at the right end of the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is shifted to the reserved consumption image display area side and is displayed as a reserved consumption image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left of the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a are each shifted one position to the right (FIG. 1). This allows the player to recognize that one first special chart reserved has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 1 variation start processing (step S1412). In the special symbol 1 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the variation display of the first special symbol is started, and the variation time timer is set. The variation time timer is set to a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). Note that the variation start command (special symbol 1 variation start command) set in the special symbol 1 variation start processing includes information on the special symbol stop pattern data set in the big win determination processing (step S1408) and information on the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection processing (step S1409) (including information on the variation time).

In step S1407, if the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a waiting screen or not (step S1413). The waiting screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may judge, for example, by the ON/OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is a waiting screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a waiting screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined waiting time to elapse, sets a customer waiting waiting command for displaying a waiting scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1414), and ends this process. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, the consumption of the second reserved special chart is executed with priority over the consumption of the first reserved special chart. Also, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of this embodiment, the lottery based on the second reserved special chart makes it easier for the player to win a jackpot (a jackpot scheduled to pass V) that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first reserved special chart.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flow chart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402, S1408). The jackpot determination process for special chart 2 (step S1402) and the jackpot determination process for special chart 1 (step S1408) are similar in process flow, so they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S1501). If the probability variable flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special chart 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special symbol 1, the jackpot random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first reserved first special symbol) of the first special symbol reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred by using the jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to which it refers. Here, since the probability of a jackpot is high (the probability flag is ON), the jackpot determination is determined based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1.

In step S1501, if the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value in the same manner as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) is being used here, it determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the type of jackpot (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special chart 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special chart 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the type of jackpot based on the read out jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After the jackpot type is determined, the special stop pattern data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the identified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the jackpot determination is "miss" (the result of the minor jackpot determination is also "miss"), the special stop pattern data (01H) corresponding to the miss pattern is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flow charts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403, S1409). The variation pattern selection process for special chart 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process for special chart 1 (step S1409) have similar processing flows, so they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the game state is in a time-saving state or not (step S1600). The judgment of whether the game state is in a time-saving state or not is made by whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the game state is in a time-saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If the game state is not in a time-saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602). When the big win flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the small win flag is ON or not (step S1610). When the small win flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the small win flag is ON (step S1610: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state small win in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) and selects the variation pattern (step S1611). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the small win in the non-time-saving state, the part corresponding to the small win (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P34") in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Fig. 10 is referred to (the address is set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, "P34" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot or not (step S1604). The jackpot type is determined based on the special stop pattern data set in the main RAM 84.

When the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referring to the table for non-time-saving state V-passing jackpots in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a fluctuation pattern random number value as a judgment value. For example, in the fluctuation pattern selection process for special chart 2, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the fluctuation pattern selection process for special chart 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special chart reserved) of the first special chart reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V-passing jackpot, an address is set that references the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 10 that corresponds to the V-passing jackpot (the portion with the fluctuation patterns "P1" to "P3" in special chart 1, and the portion with the fluctuation patterns "P21" and "P22" in special chart 2). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in special chart 1, and "P21" or "P22" is selected in special chart 2.

If the jackpot type is a V non-pass scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time-saving state V non-pass scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Fig. 10) to select the fluctuation pattern (step S1606). Here, as the table for the non-time-saving state V non-pass scheduled jackpot, an address is set that refers to the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Fig. 10 that corresponds to the V non-pass scheduled jackpot (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P4" to "P6" in special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P23" in special chart 2). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in special chart 1, and "P23" is selected in special chart 2.

In step S1610, if the small win flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the reach random number value is a reach establishment random number value or not (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reach random number value as a judgment value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 2, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first of the second special chart reserved) of the second special chart reserved memory area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special chart 1, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first of the first special chart reserved) of the first special chart reserved memory area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not there is a reach using the reach judgment table T2 (FIG. 8 (B)) and the reach random number value. In this case, since the time-saving state is not in effect, the presence or absence of a reach is determined based on the table for the non-time-saving state (the portion of the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) between "0" and "13") in the reach determination table T2.

If the reach random number is a reach establishment random number (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of a reach with miss, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for reach with miss in the non-time-saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Fig. 10) and selects the fluctuation pattern (step S1608). Here, as the table for reach with miss in the non-time-saving state, the part corresponding to reach with miss (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P7" to "P14" in the special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special chart 2) in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Fig. 10 is referred to. In the special chart 1, one of the fluctuation patterns "P7" to "P14" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 (1 to 4). In Special Chart 2, one of the patterns "P24" to "P31" is selected as the pattern from the read-out random number value for the pattern and the current number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 (1 to 4). Since the pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, a shortened pattern function is activated according to the number of reserved balls. In other words, in both Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", more patterns with shorter change times are selected than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". This makes it possible to speed up the consumption of reserved special charts when there are a large number of reserved balls.

If the reach random number is not a reach establishment random number (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of a miss without a reach, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for a miss without a reach in the non-time-saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Fig. 10) and selects a fluctuation pattern (step S1609). Here, as the table for a miss without a reach in the non-time-saving state, the part corresponding to a miss without a reach (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P15" to "P16" in the special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special chart 2) in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Fig. 10 is referred to. In the special chart 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 (1 to 4). In the special chart 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern based on the read variation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 (1 to 4). Here too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so the shortened variation function according to the number of reserved balls is activated.

If it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is in the time-saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (FIG. 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing of steps S1614 to S1621 is the same as the processing of steps S1604 to S1611 described above, except for the following points, so the explanation will be omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1614 to S1621 and the processing of steps S1604 to S1611 is that the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 referenced in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621 is different from the already described steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, and S1611. Specifically, in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, and S1611, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referenced, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time-saving state is referenced. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11 that corresponds to the V-passing jackpot (the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P41" to "P43" in the special chart 1, and the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P61" or "P62" in the special chart 2) is referenced. From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the special chart 1, and "P61" or "P62" is selected in the special chart 2. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the part of the time-saving state fluctuation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. 11 that corresponds to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (the part with the fluctuation pattern "P44" to "P46" in special chart 1, and the part with the fluctuation pattern "P63" in special chart 2) is referenced. From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in special chart 1, and "P63" is selected in special chart 2. Also, for example, in the case of step S1621, that is, when the jackpot type is a small jackpot, the part of the time-saving state fluctuation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. 11 that corresponds to the small jackpot (the "P74" part) is referenced. From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, "P74" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above (steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, S1611, S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, S1621), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in a variation start command and is sent to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (Figure 16: step S108). This starts the variation display of the special symbol.

[Special pattern change processing]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, FIG. 25) described above. If the variation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process is terminated. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a variation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes associated with the variation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data, etc. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flow chart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The contents of the game state management process will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether the big win flag is ON or not (step S1802). If the big win flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small win flag is ON or not (step S1810). If the small win flag is OFF (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808) and ends this process. As a result, the big win game and the small win game are not started, and the process moves to the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) again, and the big win judgment and the small win judgment for the next reserved are executed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the large prize opening and the V-shaped opening member according to the type of the jackpot that has been won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large prize opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large prize opening from the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large prize opening. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V-shaped opening and closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening and closing member 71 from the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening and closing member 71. Along with setting the opening pattern of the big prize opening and the V-shaped opening/closing member, the round counter value is set to the number of rounds according to the type of big win that was won. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) that were executed during the big win game. In this case, the round counter is set to "16" (Figure 13 (B)).

After the opening pattern is set, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the special bonus flag and time-saving flag, and the details of which will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start a jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the small win flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the large prize opening according to the type of the small win rush large prize that was won (step S1811). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large prize opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the large prize opening from the special symbol stopping pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, if the special symbol stopping pattern data is "20H", "opening pattern 25" is set as the opening pattern of the large prize opening. After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "4" (step S1807) and ends this process.

[Game Status Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flow chart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S2001). If the probability variable flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the probability variable flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variable counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variable counter counts the number of times the special pattern is changed during the high probability state. Here, the probability variable counter is set to "10000" when the state transitions to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the counter value becomes "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variable counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the probability variable counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2004). Note that if the probability change counter is set to "10000", the actual probability change counter value will never become "0".

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state. Here, the time-saving counter is set to "10000" upon transition to the time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the counter value has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time-saving counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time-saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008). Note that if the time-saving counter is set to "10000", the actual value of the time-saving counter will never become "0".

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the currently set game state (whether or not it is in a special state, the special state counter value, whether or not it is in a time-saving state, the time-saving counter value, etc.).

[Game Status Reset Processing]
FIG. 29 is a flow chart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S2101). If the probability variable flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. If the probability variable flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variable flag is switched OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process is terminated. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time-saving flag is switched OFF (step S2104). In other words, during the execution of the jackpot game, the state is a non-high probability state and a non-time-saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since the game machine 1 is always in a low base state when not in a time-saving state, the game machine 1 is in a low base state when a jackpot game is being played.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flow chart of the special electric device processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the big win end flag is ON or not (step S2200). The "big win end flag" is a flag indicating that the opening of all the big win devices (first big win device 31 and second big win device 36) based on the opening pattern in the ongoing big win game has ended. If the big win end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. If the big win end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening and closing member operation process is performed to operate the V opening and closing member 71 (step S2201). The V-shaped opening/closing member 71 of this embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first large winning opening 30, and in the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period of time when a predetermined number of game balls enter according to the V-shaped opening/closing member opening pattern T9. Details of the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process will be described later. After the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the large winning openings (the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35) are open or not (step S2202). If they are open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the large prize opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the conditions for opening the large prize opening are met (step S2203). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether a ball has entered the large prize opening opening start opening 17 as a condition for opening the large prize opening. If there is no ball entering the large prize opening opening start opening 17, it judges that the condition is not met. If a ball has entered the large prize opening opening start opening 17, the game control microcomputer 81 further judges whether it is time (timing) to open the large prize opening. The time to open the large prize opening includes, for example, when the opening time of the large prize opening has passed and it has reached the time to start opening in the first round of play, and when the interval time (closing time) until the large prize opening that was temporarily closed after opening has passed and it has reached the time to start opening again. If the above conditions are not met (step S2203: NO), processing proceeds to step S2220.

If the above conditions are met (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a large prize opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large prize opening (first large prize opening 30 or second large prize opening 35) according to an opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the type of large prize. After the large prize opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the large prize game being played, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the large prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round of play. However, in another embodiment, when the large prize opening is opened multiple times during one round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 may determine whether the large prize opening is the first opening during one round, and set the round designation command only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this process ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2202, if the large prize opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the closing condition of the large prize opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that either the number of winnings in the large prize opening in that round of play has reached a specified maximum number of winnings (e.g., 9 winnings per round), or the time to close the large prize opening has arrived (i.e., a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened) is satisfied. If the closing condition of the large prize opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the large prize opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the large prize opening (step S2211).

If it is not the time (timing) to open the large prize opening in step S2203 described above, the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the round of play has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the large prize opening was closed. As described above, this is because the time (interval time) for the large prize opening to be closed between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before the closure. The game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the round of play has ended based on whether a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the large prize opening was closed. If the round of play has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round play has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the round counter by 1 (step S2221) and determines whether the round counter value is "0" or not (step S2226). If the round counter value is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of rounds has not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round play. On the other hand, if the round counter value is "0", a jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) as a jackpot ending process that ends the jackpot play, and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (e.g., 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is the same length as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot". This allows the player to recognize that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot" even if the game ball passed through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot". Note that the ending time when the game ball did not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (actual 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is also the same length. After the jackpot ending starts, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2200, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed (step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol waiting process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, in the special electric device processing, in addition to the opening process of the large prize opening (first large prize opening 30 or second large prize opening 35) in the big prize game as described above, the opening process of the large prize opening (second large prize opening 35) in the small prize game is also performed. Although not shown, specifically, when the small prize flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large prize opening (second large prize opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of the big prize with small prize rush that was won, and then judges whether the closing condition of the large prize opening (FIG. 13) is satisfied, and if the closing condition of the large prize opening is satisfied, closes (blocks) the large prize opening (end of the small prize game). Then, the small prize flag is turned OFF, and the special operation status is set to "1".

[V opening/closing member operation process]
FIG. 31 is a flow chart of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the current round game (the relevant round) is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can judge that it is an opening round when the round counter value is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", or "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process is terminated. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the relevant round.

If it is the round in which the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the first winning flag is ON or not (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won in the first large winning port 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), the process judges whether the first ball has won (step S2503). If the first ball has not won (step S2503: NO), the process ends. This is because there has been no winning in the first large winning port 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V-shaped opening/closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2504). The reason for short-opening the V opening/closing member 71 is to execute a short opening (here, 0.1 seconds) when the first ball wins, regardless of whether the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)) is "short opening" or "long opening". In addition, in the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that wins the first large winning hole 30 passes through the non-V area 70 without passing through the V area 39. In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is open and for several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set to be the V effective period during which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and sets the V effective period during the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and 1 second after closing. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the period other than the V effective period (including when a jackpot game is not being executed) as the V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is judged to be invalid. Here, "judging the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a to be valid" means that the V flag is turned ON based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (see the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 33) described later). Also, "judging the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a to be invalid" means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is that, since there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a, the period until the game ball that entered the V area 39 side just before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is taken into consideration until it is detected by the V area sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball into the V area 39) is detected during the V effective period, and the V flag is not turned ON when the V passage is detected outside the V effective period (V invalid period). When the V flag is ON, the probability variable flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the big win game is set to a high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is not turned ON based on the V passage due to fraudulent acts and is not set to a high probability state. After the V opening/closing member 71 is short-circuited and the V valid period is set, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the second winning flag is ON or not (step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first large winning port 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 in the round is a long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. If the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 in the round is a long opening or not (step S2521). If it is not a long opening (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short opening, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if the opening is long (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball has not been detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 long and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2523). The reason for opening the V opening/closing member 71 long is to execute the long opening (here, maximum 31.5 seconds) when the second ball wins in the case of "long opening" in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)). Note that here, the maximum play time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning port 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), so generally, the time from the winning of the second ball to the end of the round is shorter than 31.5 seconds. As described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the opening time of the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is configured such that at least a portion of the second and subsequent game balls that enter the first large winning port 30 pass through the V area 39 because the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is relatively long. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening/closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open or not. If the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended or not (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended or not based on whether a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the big prize opening was closed.

If the round of play has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), and performs V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and sets the V invalid period several seconds (here, 1 second) after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, and ends this processing.

If the round of play has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is met (step S2560). For example, the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 may be that a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) has elapsed since the V opening/closing member 71 was opened in the case of a short opening. If the closing condition is met (step S2560: YES), the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and the process ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), the V opening/closing member 71 is left open and the V valid period is continued, and the process ends.

If the game control microcomputer 81 determines in step S2540 that the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether or not the round of play has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572) and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), it ends this process.

[Game Status Setting Process]
FIG. 32 is a flow chart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether the V flag is ON or not (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S2309. On the other hand, if the V flag is ON in step S2301 (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the probability variable flag ON (step S2304), sets the probability variable counter to "10000" (step S2305), and turns the V flag OFF (step S2306). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 turns the time reduction flag ON (step S2307), and sets the time reduction counter to "10000" (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the current big win becomes a "high probability state", a "time-saving state" and a "high base state" (i.e., high probability high base). This high probability high base state ends when either the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times or the next big win is won.
In the high probability state, the probability of a jackpot is about 1/101, and in reality, a jackpot will almost always occur before 10,000 jackpot lotteries are performed in the high probability high base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, if a jackpot with special pattern 2 (via the second start port) in the time-saving state and a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (special pattern stop pattern data 20H, 21H) passes through V during the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot will be in the high probability high base state until the next jackpot, and it is almost guaranteed that there will be a small jackpot rush.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the currently set game state.

[V-area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart of the V-area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first judges whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601). If the game ball has not been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if a game ball has been detected (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 judges whether or not the V-effective period is in progress (step S2602). The V-effective period is a period set by the V-effective period setting process (steps S2504, S2523) of the V-opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V-effective period is set during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds, during which the V-opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed for several seconds (ball brushing period). If the V valid period is not in progress (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the V valid period is in progress (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V pass command (step S2604), and ends this process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reserved ball number of special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of normal pattern stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the reserved ball number, and includes information on the reserved ball number of special pattern 1, the reserved ball number of special pattern 2, and the reserved ball number of normal pattern. After setting the reserved ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 The operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to Figures 35 to 45. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
35 is a flow chart showing the sub-control main process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads out a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub-CPU 92 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power supply is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the performance control microcomputer 91 prohibits interrupts from the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs a random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches a set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. In addition to incrementing the random number value by 1, it may also be configured to increment by 2 or more. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S4025). While the interrupt is allowed, the sub-side timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub-CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at each predetermined cycle. Then, the random number update process is executed repeatedly between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flow chart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). The received command analysis process will be described later in detail. After the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a variable performance process (step S4305). The variable performance process is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variable performance to execute a specific display performance on the display screen 7a, and the details will be described later. After the variable performance process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the performance button detection switch 63a. After the switch process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process, etc., to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108. The image control board 100, which has received various commands, executes a display performance according to the received command using the image display device 7. In addition, the voice control board 106, which has received various commands, executes a sound performance that outputs sound from the speaker 67 according to the received command. The lamp control board 107, which has received various commands, executes a lamp performance that controls the light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received command. After the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320) and ends this process. In the other processes, for example, a random number update process is performed.

[Received command analysis process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first judges whether or not a pre-judgment command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), a pre-reading performance determination process is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading performance determination process" is a process for determining whether or not to execute a pre-reading performance, and a pre-reading performance pattern if executed. Details of the pre-reading performance determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-reading performance determination process is skipped. The pre-reading performance is a performance that suggests that the reserved information newly stored in the special chart reserved memory area 85 is highly likely to contain a jackpot, and is performed during a variable performance.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a reserved display process is performed (step S4450). In the reserved display process, the values of the first special reserved performance counter, the second special reserved performance counter, and the normal reserved performance counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated based on the information on the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 1, the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 2, and the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern included in the reserved ball number command. This allows the information on the number of reserved balls to be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the reserved images 9A and 9B displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special reserved performance counter, the second special reserved performance counter, and the normal reserved performance counter. On the other hand, if the reserved ball count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the reserved ball display process described above is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If a fluctuation start command has been received (step S4455: YES), a fluctuation performance start process is performed (step S4460). The "fluctuation performance start process" is a process for selecting the fluctuation performance pattern (contents) to be executed during the special pattern fluctuation. The details of the fluctuation performance start process will be described later. On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation performance start process is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a change stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If a change stop command has been received (step S4465: YES), a change performance end process is performed (step S4470). The "change performance end process" is a process for stopping the change performance executed during the change of the special pattern. In the change performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a counter based on the analysis result of the change stop command, and sets a change performance end command for ending the change performance. As a result, the decorative pattern corresponding to the special pattern 1 or special pattern 2 that is changing is stopped and displayed. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39) described later. Note that if the change stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the change performance end process described above is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If an opening command has been received (step S4475: YES), an opening performance pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening performance pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets information about the special symbol stop pattern data set at the time of the jackpot winning determination, which is included in the opening command, in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the performance pattern of the opening performance that is preset in accordance with the winning type indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data is selected, and an opening performance start command for starting the selected opening performance is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out a predetermined opening effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that if an opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If a round designation command has been received (step S4485: YES), a round designation pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round designation pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an open game designation pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big prize opening or during the interval between openings in a special game (big prize game). In the round designation pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special stop pattern data and information on the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, a designation pattern of the round designation that is preset in accordance with the winning type and the number of rounds indicated by the special stop pattern data is selected, and a round designation start command for starting the selected round designation is set in the designation command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads out a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if a round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If an ending command has been received (step S4495: YES), an ending performance pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big win game or small win game). In the ending performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information regarding the special chart stop pattern data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the microcomputer 91 selects an ending performance pattern according to the type of win indicated by the special chart stop pattern data, and sets an ending performance start command to start the selected ending performance in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94. When the ending performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a specific ending performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If no ending command has been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending performance pattern determination process is skipped.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a game state designation command, it stores information about the game state included in the game state designation command (whether or not it is in a high probability state, whether or not it is in a time-saving state, the values of the probability change counter and the time-saving counter, etc.) in the sub-RAM 94. Also, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a V-pass command, it stores information about the V-pass in the sub-RAM 94. Also, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than those mentioned above (a customer waiting standby command, a RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Pre-reading performance decision processing]
38 is a flowchart of the pre-reading performance determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs a pre-judgment information rewrite process (step S4601). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 stores the jackpot pre-judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type pre-judgment result (jackpot type information), and the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result (fluctuation pattern information) contained in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c.

Figure 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c. In addition to the jackpot judgment information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information described above, the pre-judgment information storage area 94c stores pre-reading performance pattern information. The pre-reading performance pattern information is information indicating the contents of the pre-reading performance executed during the fluctuation performance, and is selected in step S4604 described later. Figure 39 (A) shows a state in which the jackpot judgment information "miss" and the fluctuation pattern information "P72" and "P73" are stored in the first to third storage areas as pre-judgment results corresponding to the first to third reserved special charts 2, respectively, and the pre-judgment results corresponding to the fluctuations are stored in the corresponding areas. Figure 39 (B) shows a state in which the special chart 2 wins from the state of Figure 39 (A), and the pre-judgment information included in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 is stored in the fourth storage area corresponding to the fourth reserved special chart 2. Here, the jackpot determination information "jackpot", the jackpot type information "21H", and the variation pattern information "P61" are stored as the pre-determination information. In addition, "Pattern A" is set as the pre-reading performance pattern information in the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth reserved special chart 2 pieces and the area corresponding to the variation. FIG. 39(C) shows the state in which the variation has ended from the state in FIG. 39(B) and the pre-determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the pre-determination information in the fourth storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation performance end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the performance control microcomputer 91 then determines whether or not the pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c. If the pre-reading performance pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process is terminated. That is, if the pre-reading performance pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, the pre-reading performance pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, if the pre-judgment information is not stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" (step S4603). Whether or not the result is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" can be determined, for example, by the result of the preliminary determination of the variation pattern (variation pattern information). When the result of the preliminary determination included in the received preliminary determination command is "miss without reach" (step S4603: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead performance. On the other hand, when the result of the preliminary determination included in the received preliminary determination command is "jackpot" or "miss with reach" (step S4603: YES), a look-ahead performance execution determination is performed to determine whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, and a look-ahead performance pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 obtains the value of the counter of the look-ahead performance random number, and determines whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance and the look-ahead performance pattern selection table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93 by referring to the obtained random number value and the look-ahead performance pattern selection table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51. In Figure 40, if the pre-determination result is "big win" and the look-ahead performance random number value is "0-55", the look-ahead performance is "none", if the look-ahead performance random number value is "56-67", "pattern A" is selected as the look-ahead performance, and if the look-ahead performance random number value is "68-127", "pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead performance. Also, if the pre-determination result is "reach with miss" and the look-ahead performance random number value is "0-107", the look-ahead performance is "none", if the look-ahead performance random number value is "108-114", "pattern A" is selected as the look-ahead performance, and if the look-ahead performance random number value is "115-127", "pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead performance. Note that the type, content, and range of the random number value to be selected of the look-ahead performance pattern can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that a look-ahead performance is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead performance pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the look-ahead performance pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, the look-ahead performance pattern is stored not only in the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also in the storage area before the corresponding storage area and in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only is "Pattern A" set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, but "Pattern A" is also set in the first to third storage areas and the area. As a result, the look-ahead performance pattern A is also executed in the variable performance executed before the variable performance corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (the variable performance corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). Note that whether or not the look-ahead performance is executed in the variable performance corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable performance. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing for executing the look-ahead performance has already passed, the look-ahead performance will not be executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead performance, it will be executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead performance will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the processing ends.

[Variable performance start processing]
41 is a flow chart of the variable performance start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variable start command (step S5000). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets information on the special symbol stop pattern data included in the variable start command and information on the variable pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current game status, and pattern information indicating the pattern as the judgment result of the hit judgment process of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. The game status information and pattern information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a core performance pattern determination process (step S5010). The core performance pattern determination process is a process for determining the basic configuration of the variable performance (for example, the display and switching of background images on the image display device 7, the display and movement of predetermined characters, the output of melodies and sound effects using the speaker 67, the lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable performance is completed by superimposing additional performances such as chance-up performances and pre-reading performances on this core performance. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines the core performance pattern by referring to the core performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic performance pattern determination table T52. In Figure 42, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform normal reach performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP1 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP2 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP3 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP4 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP5 performance (dedicated reach performance patterns in which pseudo big win suggestion performances are performed, which will be described later), multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform reach-free miss performances, and multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform small win performances are set. The type of basic performance pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, if the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1", a basic performance pattern that performs SP1 performance is selected. Also, if the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72", a basic performance pattern that performs reach-free miss performances is selected. Also, if the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P74", the core performance pattern that produces a small win performance is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the core performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs chance-up performance pattern determination processing (step S5015). The chance-up performance pattern determination processing is processing for determining additional performance to be superimposed on the variable performance. The performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation performance pattern of special chart 1 in the non-time-saving state is shown. In other words, Figure 43 shows the chance-up performance pattern that is executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16". Note that the chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 may or may not include a portion that determines the chance-up performance pattern that is executed when the variation pattern is "P21" to "P34", "P41" to "P56", or "P61" to "P74".

In FIG. 43, the chance-up effect patterns are set as "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", "4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO". These chance-up effect patterns correspond to the various chance-up effects described below.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 may further refer to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54 to determine a combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed. This determines what kind of effect will be performed as the variable effect.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 above is realized (step S5020). When the variable performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (Figure 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads the variable performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the variable performance timer (step S5030) and ends this process. The variable performance timer is set to a variable time (Figure 42) that corresponds to the variable pattern included in the variable start command. For example, when the variable pattern is "P1", the variable performance timer is set to "40 seconds".

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 44 is a flow chart of the process during the variable performance (FIG. 36: step S4305). The performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not the variable performance is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variable performance is in progress can be judged, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer is set to zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variable performance is in progress (step SS4701: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 judges whether or not it is time to set the pre-variation end command in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command that the performance control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the variable performance, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command, it switches the performance content or displays a specific image according to the information contained in the pre-variation end command.

If it is not the time to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is the time to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: YES), a determination is made as to whether or not there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area of the advance judgment information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading performance pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-change end command not including the pre-reading performance pattern information is set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-reading performance pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command including the pre-reading performance pattern information is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change performance. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a look-ahead performance in which a look-ahead performance image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead performance pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade performance in which the preview image fades.

8. Operation of the image control microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided in the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIG. 45. The buffers and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flow chart of the display control process. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 judges whether or not a variable performance start command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If it has been received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable performance display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable performance start command, reads out a predetermined variable performance image designated in the variable performance start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, if the command has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Next, the image control microcomputer 101 judges whether or not a pre-change end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead performance display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-change end command, and if the pre-change end command contains look-ahead performance pattern information, it reads out a predetermined look-ahead performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even if the pre-change end command does not contain look-ahead performance pattern information, if a preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a preview fade performance is performed in which the preview image is faded. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5003: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

The image control microcomputer 101 then determines whether or not a variable performance end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If so (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads from the ROM 103 an image that displays the variable performance as stopped, and displays the variable performance stopped on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (step S5006). On the other hand, if the command has not been received (step S5005: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Then, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S5007). In other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives an opening performance start command, it reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined opening performance image specified in the opening performance start command, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Also, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives a round performance start command, it reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined round performance image specified in the round performance start command, and displays it on the display screen 7a. Also, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives an ending performance start command, it reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined ending performance image specified in the ending performance start command, and displays it on the display screen 7a, and then ends this processing.

9. Operation of the board movable body and display performance of the sub-display screen 64 Using Figures 46 to 49, the operation of the board movable body (first movable role 14, second movable role 15, and third movable role 13) and the display performance of the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) will be described. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the third movable role 13 during the game performance (display performance) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a display performance to display a specific image on the sub-display screen 64 during the game performance (display performance) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on.

Figure 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second aspect of the third movable part 13. The third movable part 13 includes a left movable part 13L and a right movable part 13R. The left movable part 13L and the right movable part 13R are each configured to be movable in the left-right direction, and a ring-shaped decorative part (left decorative part and right decorative part) is attached to the tip side. That is, the left decorative part and the right decorative part each have a ring shape. The left decorative part and the right decorative part each have a circular transparent part having transparency on the inside of the ring shape. As shown in Figure 1, the third movable part 13 can be stopped at a retreat position (home position) where the left movable part 13L is stored to the left of the display screen 7a and the right movable part 13R is stored to the right of the display screen 7a (first aspect). At this time, the left movable part 13L and the right movable part 13R are each partially visible. The third movable part 13 advances from the state shown in FIG. 1 to the center of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other) as shown in FIG. 46, so that the left decorative part and the right decorative part approach each other in the advanced position (deployed position), forming one decorative member (combined part) (second mode). Here, the combined part forms glasses. That is, the left decorative part and the transparent part correspond to the left frame and lens, and the right decorative part and the transparent part correspond to the right frame and lens. In this second mode, the combined part formed by combining the left decorative part and the right decorative part covers a part of the center of the display screen 7a in front of the image display device 7, and stops in a state in which the display screen 7a can be seen from the transparent part. The third movable part 13 can move from the advanced position shown in FIG. 46 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can stop there.

Figure 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second aspect of the first movable part 14. As shown in Figure 47, the first movable part 14 includes a left movable part 14L and a right movable part 14R. The left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R are each configured to be movable in the left-right direction, and half of the ring-shaped decorative part (left decorative part and right decorative part) is attached to the tip side. In other words, the left decorative part and the right decorative part each have an arc shape that is half of the ring shape. As shown in Figure 1, the first movable part 14 can be stopped at a retreat position (home position) where the left movable part 14L is stored to the left of the display screen 7a and the right movable part 14R is stored to the right of the display screen 7a (first aspect). At this time, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R are each partially visible. In the first movable role 14, as shown in FIG. 1, the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R each advance toward the center of the display screen 7a (in the direction approaching each other) as shown in FIG. 47, and at the advance position (deployed position), the left decorative part and the right decorative part combine to form one decorative member (combined role) (second mode). Here, the combined role forms the outline of a face. In this second mode, the combined role, in which the left decorative part and the right decorative part are combined, covers a part of the center of the display screen 7a in front of the image display device 7, and stops in a state in which the display screen 7a can be seen from the opening formed in the center. In other words, the combined role forms only the outline of a face, does not have a central part of the face, and is configured so that the display screen 7a can be seen instead. Then, an image of a face is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the combined role, completing a human face as a whole. That is, by displaying the missing part of the combined reel (for example, the center part of the face) as an image on the display screen 7a, it is possible to perform a combination performance of the reel and the image that completes one object (for example, a person's face). The first movable reel 14 can move from the advanced position shown in FIG. 47 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can stop there.

Figure 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the second movable role 15. The second movable role 15 has a rectangular decorative part marked "OARO" and is configured to be able to move up and down. As shown in Figure 1, the second movable role 15 can stop at a retreat position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable role 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable role 15 can move downward from the state shown in Figure 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and can stop at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in Figure 48 (second mode). In this second mode, the decorative part stops so as to cover the center of the display screen 7a on the front of the image display device 7. The second movable role 15 can move upward (retract) from the advanced position of Figure 48 to the retreat position shown in Figure 1 and can stop there.

Figure 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effects of the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U can each display images independently. They can also display effects linked to the images on the display screen 7a.

10. Examples of the performance, effect, modification, and mode of this embodiment Below, each of the performance examples (display performance example, role-moving performance example) of this embodiment will be described. In addition, the effect example, modification, and mode example for the performance example will also be described. The performance described below is a performance realized by the performance control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above. Note that the following display performance examples are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display performance examples.

The pending icon switching performances A and B are explained below using Figures 50 to 52. Thus, the pending icon switching performance can be executed during the decorative pattern changing performance, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the pending icon switching performance, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Pending icon switching performance A]
50 and 51 are diagrams for explaining the reserved icon switching performance A. The reserved icon switching performance is a performance in which the modes of multiple reserved icons are switched. The modes of the reserved icons include the shape, color, action, size, etc. of the reserved icon. In the reserved icon switching performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 50(A), in the normal state, three reserved icons 9A and a variable icon (reserved icon) 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. All of the three reserved icons 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). In this state, when the game ball wins the fixed winning device (center) 19, a new fourth reserved icon 9A is displayed on the far left side as shown in FIG. 50(B). At this time, the newly added and displayed reserved icon has a star shape (star shape).

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(C), of the three round reserved icons 9A displayed before the fourth reserved icon 9A was added, the shape of the leftmost reserved icon (third reserved icon from the right) 9A changes from a round shape to a star shape. After that, as shown in FIG. 50(D), the shape of the second reserved icon 9A from the right changes from a round shape to a star shape, and as shown in FIG. 50(E), the shape of the first reserved icon 9A from the right (rightmost) changes from a round shape to a star shape. That is, as shown in FIG. 50(A) to (E), when the fourth reserved icon 9A is newly added and displayed in a star shape, all the reserved icons 9A displayed before it change from a round shape to a star shape, starting from the side closest to the fourth reserved icon. Here, the shapes of the three reserved icons displayed before change sequentially due to the pre-reading of the winning time corresponding to the fourth reserved icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the round-shaped variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C disappears. After that, as shown in FIG. 50(G), the four star-shaped pending icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 9A moves to the variable icon display area (relevant pending display area, pending consumption image display area) and becomes variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next variation begins. Here, along with the display of the decorative pattern variations, a mini-game video is performed in which a humanoid character catches a star-shaped icon falling from above. The shape (star) of the icon falling from above corresponds to the shape (star) of the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon (relevant pending icon) 9C. In other words, when a variation corresponding to the star-shaped variable icon occurs (when the reserved star-shaped variable icon is consumed), a mini-game performance in which this star-shaped icon falls is performed.

As shown in FIG. 50(H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the star-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. When the humanoid character catches four star-shaped icons in the mini-game, the same number of points as the icons caught are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The number of points is represented by the number of black stars. Here, during this fluctuation, a game ball enters the fixed winning device (center) 19, and a new fourth reserved icon 9A is displayed on the far left. At this time, the newly added reserved icon has a round (spherical) shape. In other words, the reserved icon that is newly displayed after the star-shaped reserved icon that was the subject of the pre-read (the star-shaped reserved icon 9A in FIG. 50(B), the third reserved icon 9A from the right in FIG. 50(H)) is represented in a round shape.

As shown in Figure 50 (I), one circle and three star-shaped pending icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 9A (star-shaped) moves to the variable icon display area (the pending display area) and becomes variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next variable starts. When the variable starts, a mini-game video similar to that shown in Figure 50 (G) is executed. That is, because this time the variable corresponds to the star-shaped variable icon 9C, a mini-game is executed in which star-shaped icons that correspond in shape to the variable icons fall.

As shown in FIG. 50(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the star-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. If the doll character fails to catch the star-shaped icon (catch 0) in the mini-game, the points displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a do not change. That is, the number of black stars does not change. Here, during this fluctuation, a game ball enters the fixed winning device (center) 19, and a new fourth reserved icon 9A is displayed on the far left. At this time, the newly added reserved icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, the reserved icon displayed after the star-shaped reserved icon that was the subject of the pre-reading (the second reserved icon 9A from the right in FIG. 50(J)) is represented in a round shape, so it becomes the second round reserved icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the two circular and two star-shaped pending icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 9A (star-shaped) moves to the variable icon display area (the pending display area) and becomes variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next variable starts. When the variable starts, a mini-game video similar to that shown in FIG. 50 (G) is executed. That is, because this time the variable corresponds to the star-shaped variable icon 9C, a mini-game is executed in which star-shaped icons that correspond in shape to the variable icons fall.

As shown in FIG. 51(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the star-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. When the doll character catches two icons in the mini-game, the points displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a increase by two to 6. In other words, the number of black stars saved becomes 6. Here, during this fluctuation, a game ball enters the fixed winning device (center) 19, and a new fourth reserved icon 9A is displayed on the far left. At this time, the newly added reserved icon has a round shape (spherical shape). In other words, the reserved icon that is newly displayed after the star-shaped reserved icon that was the subject of the pre-reading (the first reserved icon 9A in FIG. 51(B)) is represented in a round shape, so it becomes the third round reserved icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the three round and one star-shaped reserved icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A (star-shaped) moves to the variable icon display area (the reserved display area) and becomes a variable icon 9C. That is, the reserved icon that was the subject of the pre-reading becomes a variable icon, and the corresponding change starts. When the change starts, an icon image ICG that imitates the round reserved icon 9C and is larger than the reserved icon 9C is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, six black star-shaped images representing points move toward this icon image ICG and are absorbed into the icon image ICG. The icon image ICG changes color in order according to the number of black star-shaped images absorbed. The color changes in order from a color with a low expectation of a jackpot to a color with a high expectation of a jackpot. For example, the order is blue → green → red. As a result, the icon image ICG becomes a color with a high expectation of a jackpot as the number of black star-shaped images absorbed increases.

As shown in FIG. 51(D), when the absorption of points (black star-shaped image) is completed, the icon image ICG moves toward the position where the variable icon 9C is displayed. Here, a winning game ball occurs during this fluctuation, and a new fourth reserved icon 9A is displayed on the far left. At this time, the newly added reserved icon displayed has a round (spherical) shape. In other words, a new reserved icon displayed after the star-shaped reserved icon that was the subject of the pre-read (variable icon 9C in FIG. 51(D)) is represented in a round shape, and therefore becomes the fourth round-shaped reserved icon.

The icon image ICG moves while shrinking, comes into contact with the variable icon 9C, and becomes the variable icon 9C as shown in FIG. 51(E). After that, as shown in FIG. 51(F), the decorative pattern is displayed stationary, and the variation corresponding to this variable icon 9C ends.

In Figure 51 (G), the four round pending icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost pending icon 9A (round) moves to the variable icon display area (the relevant pending display area) and becomes variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next variation starts, but the mini-game video presentation is not executed. In other words, since this is the variation time corresponding to the round variable icon 9C, the mini-game presentation in which star-shaped icons, which do not correspond in shape to the variable icons, fall is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 51 (H), at a specific timing during the change, the shape of the three reserved icons 9A changes from a circle to a star all at once (simultaneously). After that, if a game ball enters during this change, a new fourth reserved icon 9A is displayed on the far left as shown in FIG. 51 (I). At this time, the newly added reserved icon displayed has a circle shape. In other words, the newly displayed reserved icon after the reserved icons 9A all change from a circle to a star shape at the same time is represented in a circle shape. After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the round-shaped variable icon 9C disappears.

[Pending icon switching effect B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the reserved icon switching performance B. The reserved icon switching performance is a performance in which the state of a plurality of reserved icons is switched. The state of the reserved icon includes the shape, color, action, size, etc. of the reserved icon. In the reserved icon switching performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), in the normal state, three reserved icons 9A and a variable icon (respective reserved icon) 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. All of the three reserved icons 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

In this state, when the game ball enters the fixed winning device (center) 19, a new fourth reserve icon 9A is displayed on the far left, as shown in FIG. 52 (B). At this time, the newly added reserve icon displayed has a shape representing the Roman letter "G." At the same time as this fourth reserve icon 9A is newly displayed, the shape of all other reserve icons 9A changes from a circle to a G shape. Here, the shapes of the three reserve icons that were previously displayed change at the same time due to the pre-reading of the winning event corresponding to the fourth reserve icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(C), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the round-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. After that, as shown in FIG. 52(D), the four G-shaped reserved icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A moves to the variable icon display area (the reserved display area, the reserved consumption image display area) and becomes the variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next change starts. Here, along with the display of the decorative pattern changes, a battle image between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is performed. The name of the ally character CRA (here, "GORO") corresponds to the shape (G-shaped) of the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon (the reserved icon) 9C. That is, when a change occurs corresponding to a G-shaped variable icon, a performance (battle performance including the ally character CRA) is performed in which an image related to this "G" (here, the name of the ally character CRA contains G) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 52(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the G-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. In the battle image, when the ally character CRA beats (wins) the enemy character CRB, the number of wins (points) is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The number of wins (points) is represented by the number of black stars. Here, during this fluctuation, a game ball enters the fixed winning device (center) 19, and a new fourth reserved icon 9A is displayed on the far left. At this time, the newly added reserved icon has a round (spherical) shape. In other words, the reserved icon that is newly displayed after the G-shaped reserved icon that was the subject of the pre-read (the third reserved icon 9A from the right in FIG. 52(E)) is represented by a round shape.

As shown in FIG. 52 (F), one round and three G-shaped hold icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (G-shaped) moves to the variable icon display area (the relevant hold display area) and becomes variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next change begins. When the change begins, a battle image similar to that shown in FIG. 52 (D) is executed. That is, since this is also the time of change corresponding to the G-shaped variable icon 9C, an effect is executed in which an image corresponding to the variable icon appears. That is, a battle effect is executed in which an ally character CRA with the name "GORO", which includes the Roman letter "G" represented by the variable icon, appears.

As shown in FIG. 52(G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the G-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. In the battle image, when the ally character CRA loses (is defeated) to the enemy character CRB, the number of wins displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a does not change. In other words, the number of black stars does not change. Here, during this fluctuation, a game ball enters the fixed winning device (center) 19, and a new fourth reserved icon 9A is displayed on the far left. At this time, the newly added reserved icon has a round shape (spherical shape). In other words, the reserved icon displayed after the G-shaped reserved icon that was the subject of the pre-read (the second reserved icon 9A from the right in FIG. 52(G)) is represented in a round shape, so it becomes the second round reserved icon.

Next, the two circular and two G-shaped hold icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (G-shaped) moves to the variable icon display area (the relevant hold display area) and becomes variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next change begins. When the change begins, a battle image similar to that shown in FIG. 52 (D) is performed. That is, because this time the change corresponds to the G-shaped variable icon 9C, a performance is performed in which an image corresponding to the variable icon appears. That is, a battle performance is performed in which an ally character CRA with the name "GORO", which includes the Roman letter "G" represented by the variable icon, appears.

As shown in FIG. 52(H), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the G-shaped variable icon 9C disappears. In the battle image, when the ally character CRA beats (wins) the enemy character CRB, the number of wins displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a increases by one to two. In other words, the number of black stars accumulated becomes six.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(I), the two round and one G-shaped reserved icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost reserved icon 9A (G-shaped) moves to the variable icon display area (the reserved display area) and becomes a variable icon 9C. That is, the reserved icon that was the subject of the pre-reading becomes a variable icon, and the corresponding variation starts. When the variation starts, an icon image ICG that imitates the round reserved icon 9C and is larger than the reserved icon 9C is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, two black star-shaped images representing the number of wins move toward this icon image ICG and are absorbed into the icon image ICG. The icon image ICG changes color in order according to the number of black star-shaped images absorbed. The color changes in order from a color with a low expectation of a jackpot to a color with a high expectation of a jackpot. For example, the order is blue → green → red. As a result, the icon image ICG becomes a color with a high expectation of a jackpot as the number of black star-shaped images absorbed increases.

As shown in FIG. 52(J), when the icon image ICG finishes absorbing the point (black star-shaped image), it moves toward the position where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The icon image ICG moves while shrinking, and comes into contact with the variable icon 9C, becoming the variable icon 9C.

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the hold icon switching presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 50(C) to Fig. 50(E), a first effect in which the three round-shaped reserved icons 9A change from a round shape to a star shape, a second effect in which a new round-shaped reserved icon is additionally displayed after the first effect, as shown in Fig. 50(H), and a third effect in which the additionally displayed round-shaped reserved icon and the three star-shaped reserved icons shift and move after the second effect, as shown in Fig. 50(I). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effect, and the interest can be improved. The same is true for Fig. 52.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 52 (B), in the first presentation, the three circular reserved icons are switched from a circular shape to a G shape when a new reserved icon is added and displayed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel presentation, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 50 to 51, in the first performance, the three circular reserved icons are switched from a circular shape to a star shape by a pre-read corresponding to a new reserved icon, and the new reserved icon is also displayed in a star shape. With this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same is true for Figure 52.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 50(G)-(J) and 51(A)-(B), after the third performance, during the fluctuation corresponding to the consumption of the reserved star-shaped reserved icon, a fourth performance using an image corresponding to the image represented by the reserved star-shaped icon is executed. With this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same is true for Figure 52.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 51(C) to 51(E), in the fourth performance, points are accumulated during multiple changes, and during the change corresponding to the last reserved icon among the star-shaped reserved icons, the last reserved icon is changed to a state corresponding to the accumulated points. With this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest. The same is true for Figure 52.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 50(H), (J), 51(B), and (D), if a new winning occurs during the fourth performance, a new reserved icon of the first mode is additionally displayed. This configuration allows the player to visually enjoy the unprecedented novel performance, and increases the interest. The same is true for Figure 52.

[Modification]
Below are some variations on the pending icon switching presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the reserved icon switching performance A, as shown in Fig. 50 (A) to (E), when the fourth reserved icon 9A is newly added and displayed in a star shape, all the reserved icons 9A displayed before it change from a round shape to a star shape, while the variable icon 9C does not change. However, in Fig. 50 (A) to (E), when the fourth reserved icon 9A is newly added and displayed in a star shape and all the reserved icons 9A displayed before it change from a round shape to a star shape, the variable icon 9C may also change to a star shape. The same is true for the reserved icon switching performance B (Fig. 52).

[Modification 2]
In the reserved icon switching performance A, as shown in Fig. 50 (A) to (E), when the fourth reserved icon 9A is newly added and displayed in a star shape, all the reserved icons 9A displayed before that change from a round shape to a star shape. However, in Fig. 50 (A) to (E), the fourth reserved icon 9A may first be newly added and displayed in a round shape, then change to a star shape, and then all the reserved icons 9A displayed before that may change from a round shape to a star shape. The same is true for the reserved icon switching performance B (Fig. 52). In Fig. 52, the fourth reserved icon 9A may be newly added and displayed in a round shape, and then all the reserved icons 9A including the newly added reserved icon may change from a round shape to a star shape at the same time (simultaneously).

[Modification 3]
The reserved icon switching performances A and B are executed in the normal state. However, the reserved icon switching performances A and B may be executed in the time-saving state. In this case, the performances executed in the reserved icon 9A of the reserved icon switching performances A and B may be executed by the reserved icon 9B.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
A first effect in which the plurality of reserved icons are switched from a first state to a second state;
A second effect in which a new hold icon of the first aspect is additionally displayed after the first effect;
After the second performance, a third performance in which the hold icon of the first aspect and the multiple hold icons of the second aspect are shifted and moved is executable.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the first performance, the plurality of hold icons are switched from the first state to the second state at the timing when a new hold icon is additionally displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2,
In the first performance, the plurality of reserved icons are switched from the first aspect to the second aspect by a pre-read corresponding to the new reserved icon, and the new reserved icon is also displayed in the second aspect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
After the third performance, during a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to the pending consumption of the plurality of pending icons of the second aspect, a fourth performance using an image corresponding to the image represented by the pending icon of the second aspect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-4,
In the fourth performance, points are accumulated during the plurality of fluctuations, and during a fluctuation corresponding to the last reserved icon among the plurality of reserved icons of the second aspect, the last reserved icon is changed to an aspect corresponding to the accumulated points.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect A1-4 or A1-5,
During the fourth performance, if a new winning occurs, a new reserved icon of the first aspect is further displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, change icon acquisition effects A to C are explained using Figures 53 to 55. In Figures 53 to 55, for example, the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, and other movable parts arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing.

This changing icon acquisition performance can be executed across multiple changing performances (changing displays) using decorative patterns. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a changing performance start command, a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a changing icon acquisition performance is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image used in the change icon acquisition performance (referred to as the "specific background image") is a specific image not included in the normal background image, such as a lunar surface image, a space image, or an image of the inside of a spaceship. The normal background image is a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, an ocean image, an ocean floor image, or an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be a still image or a video.

Here, we will first explain change icon acquisition effect A, then change icon acquisition effect B, and then change icon acquisition effect C.

[Change Icon Acquisition Presentation A]
The change icon acquisition performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 53. Fig. 53 is a diagram for explaining the change icon acquisition performance A. The change icon acquisition performance A is performed over a plurality of change performances (change display) by decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 53(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (change display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the change performance (change display) of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

The variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, but may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Ad (the vertical distance dimensions are both the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed in the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stored.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In Figure 53 (A), the decorative pattern change performance (change display) begins, and when the game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and the change icon acquisition performance A begins due to the pre-reading performance, as shown in Figure 53 (B), the change display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the area where the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed and the surrounding area become difficult to see (disappear) due to the flash FH. Note that as a result of the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, two hold icons 9A come into existence.

For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

As the flash FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A can be seen, and at this time, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A change before and after the flash FH is displayed.

Specifically, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd before the flash FH is displayed is a rectangular image located below the variable display position 9Cd as shown in FIG. 53(B), whereas the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed is an image in which only the four corners of the square shape surrounding the variable icon 9C are expressed with white lines as shown in FIG. 53(C). Also, the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad before the flash FH is displayed are rectangular images located below the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad as shown in FIG. 53(B), whereas the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are a shape in which only the lower two corners of the square shape surrounding the hold icon 9A are expressed with white lines as shown in FIG. 53(C).

The shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are the shapes of specific display positions used as effects in the variable icon acquisition effect A, and the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed and the shape of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are displayed differently, making it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A. Note that the start of the variable icon acquisition effect A can also be communicated to the player by the change in shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

In addition, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A before the flash FH is displayed are white spherical icons as shown in FIG. 53(B), whereas after the flash FH is displayed, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A are an effect button image (in an unlit state) that resembles the effect button 63 as shown in FIG. 53(C). This effect button image is an image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, and does not indicate the expected probability of a win, but is a specific icon used as an effect in the change icon acquisition effect A. In other words, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A are switched to the same specific icon in the change icon acquisition effect A.

In FIG. 53(C), when the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a and the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, as well as the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A change, a message MG1 saying "Press the button to get the variable icon!" is displayed in small letters in a single line on the display screen 7a above the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A. At this point, the effect button images of the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are all turned off, and even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, no effect is reflected.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", resulting in a miss, and the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and as the changing performance (changing display) ends, the changing icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In FIG. 53(A) to FIG. 53(D), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal background image.

Next, the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched from the city image THG1 to the lunar surface image THG2 as the specific background image, and as shown in FIG. 53(E), when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the display mode of the effect button image, which is the variable icon 9C, is changed to a flashing display mode, informing the player that the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is valid, and prompting the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63. At this time, a message MG1 saying "Press the button to get the variable icon!" is displayed in two lines in large letters (about four times the size of small letters) in the center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a, and the variable areas of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly changed (displayed). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are difficult to see while they are changing.

Then, the message MG1, which was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in large letters (about four times the size of the small letters) saying "Press the button to get the change icon!", moves to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a while shrinking, and is displayed in two lines, smaller than the large letters and larger than the small letters (about twice the size of the small letters). In this way, the display forms of the message MG1 include a single line in small letters as shown in FIG. 53(C), a two-line display in large letters (about four times the size of the small letters) as shown in FIG. 53(E), and a two-line display in larger letters than the small letters (about twice the size of the small letters) after FIG. 53(E), for a total of three display forms, and the content of the message MG1 can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand and emphasized manner by a new expression method of displaying the same content in three display forms during the change icon acquisition performance A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(F), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to change (change display)) has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63, a message MG2 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a to inform the player whether or not the change icon was acquired. Here, the message MG2 is displayed on the display screen 7a to indicate that the change icon was not acquired and reads "Too bad!". At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3", resulting in a miss, and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the change display (change display) ends.

Next, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the display mode of the effect button image which is the variable icon 9C flashes, informing the player that the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 has been validated, and prompting the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly changed (displayed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(G), when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to change (change display)) has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the effect button 63, a message MG2 notifying whether or not the change icon was acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. In this case, the change icon was acquired and the message MG2 saying "Got it!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are still changed (change displayed) at high speed, and the change icon 9C does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Next, when message MG2 disappears from display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 53(H), a change icon HI is stocked and displayed in the lower right corner of display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 53(I), the white spherical icon that was displayed as an icon increases in size by about 1.5 times and appears in the center of display screen 7a accompanied by a flash of light. Then, as the stocked change icon HI is activated, a lightning bolt runs from the change icon HI toward the white spherical icon that has appeared, and the size of the white spherical icon that has appeared increases, until it reaches a maximum size of about 4 times the size of the white spherical icon that was displayed as an icon.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(J), the change icon HI disappears from the display screen 7a and changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, which then shrinks and moves toward the change display position 9Cd where the flashing change icon 9C, which is the performance button image, is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(K), the variable icon 9C, which is an effect button image, is switched to a star-shaped icon. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, in which the four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, in which the two lower corners of the four square corners are represented by white lines, disappear from the display screen 7a. After this, the message MG1 also disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that although the star-shaped icon shrinks during the movement, it is larger than the white spherical icon displayed in FIG. 53(a), and is about 1.5 times larger.

After that, as shown in Fig. 53(L), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again from the lunar surface image THG2 to the normal background image, the city image THG1 (at this time, the normal background image may be switched from the city image THG1 to another normal image (e.g., an underground image)), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that had been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a return to their original variable areas and are rapidly variable (variable display), and the variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad of the rectangular image are displayed again on the display screen 7a. This ends the variable icon acquisition performance A. After the change icon acquisition effect A, various effects may continue. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins. However, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a miss occurs.

[Change Icon Acquisition Performance B]
Next, the change icon acquisition performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 54. Fig. 54 is a diagram for explaining the change icon acquisition performance B. The change icon acquisition performance B is performed over a plurality of change performances (change display) by decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 54(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (change display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the change performance (change display) of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

The variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, but may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Ad (the vertical distance dimensions are both the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed in the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stored.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In FIG. 54(A), when the decorative pattern change performance (change display) starts, and the game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and the change icon acquisition performance B starts due to the pre-reading performance, the change display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the area where the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed and the surrounding area become difficult to see (disappear) due to the flash FH, as shown in FIG. 54(B). Note that as a result of the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, two hold icons 9A come into existence.

For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

As the flash FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A can be seen, and at this time, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A change before and after the flash FH is displayed.

Specifically, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd before the flash FH is displayed is a rectangular image located below the variable display position 9Cd as shown in FIG. 54(B), whereas the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed is an image in which only the four corners of the square shape surrounding the variable icon 9C are expressed with white lines as shown in FIG. 54(C). Also, the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad before the flash FH is displayed are rectangular images located below the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad as shown in FIG. 54(B), whereas the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are a shape in which only the lower two corners of the square shape surrounding the hold icon 9A are expressed with white lines as shown in FIG. 54(C).

The shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are the shapes of specific display positions used as effects in the variable icon acquisition effect B, and the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed and the shape of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are displayed differently, making it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A. Note that the start of the variable icon acquisition effect B can also be communicated to the player by the change in shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

In addition, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A before the flash FH is displayed are white spherical icons as shown in FIG. 54(B), whereas after the flash FH is displayed, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A are sword images imitating the sword member 65 as shown in FIG. 54(C), which are specific icons used as effects in the change icon acquisition effect B. In other words, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A are switched to the same specific icon in the change icon acquisition effect B. Note that although the sword image imitates the sword member 65, even if the player presses the sword member 65, this is not reflected in any effects in the change icon acquisition effect B.

In FIG. 54 (C), when the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a and the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad, as well as the variable icon 9C and pending icon 9A, a message MG1 stating "Repel them and get the variable icon!" is displayed in small letters in a single line on the display screen 7a above the variable icon 9C and pending icon 9A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", resulting in a miss, and the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and as the changing performance (changing display) ends, the changing icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In FIG. 54(A) to FIG. 54(D), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal background image.

Then, the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the lunar image THG2 as the specific background image, and as shown in FIG. 54(E), the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C. In the center of the display screen 7a, a message MG1 is displayed in two lines in large letters (about four times the size of small letters) saying "Repel them and get the variable icon!", and the variable areas of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly variable (variable display). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are difficult to see during the variable process.

Then, on the display screen 7a, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB start fighting, and the message MG1 that was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in large letters (about four times the size of the small letters) saying "Repel them and get the change icon!" is now reduced and moved to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in two lines smaller than the large letters and larger than the small letters (about twice the size of the small letters). In this way, the display form of the message MG1 includes a single line in small letters as shown in FIG. 54(C), a two-line display in large letters (about four times the size of the small letters) as shown in FIG. 54(E), and a two-line display in larger letters than the small letters (about twice the size of the small letters) after FIG. 54(E), for a total of three display forms, and the content of the message MG1 can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand and emphasized manner by a new expression method of displaying the same content in three display forms during the change icon acquisition performance B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(F), after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds from the start of the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R) has elapsed, a message MG2 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a to inform the player whether or not the variable icon has been acquired. Here, the ally character CRA has been defeated and the enemy character CRB has won, so the variable icon cannot be acquired and a message MG2 saying "Too bad!" is displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "2," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3," resulting in a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends.

Then, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly variable (variable display). This causes the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB to start fighting again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(G), after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to change (change display)), a message MG2 is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a to inform the player whether or not the change icon has been acquired. Here, the ally character CRA has won and the enemy character CRB has been defeated, so the change icon has been acquired and the message MG2 "Acquired!" is displayed to the left of the ally character CRA on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are still changed (change displayed) at high speed, and the change icon 9C does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Next, when message MG2 disappears from display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 54(H), a change icon HI is stocked and displayed in the lower right corner of display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 54(I), the white spherical icon that was displayed as an icon increases in size by about 1.5 times and appears in the center of display screen 7a accompanied by a flash of light. Then, as the stocked change icon HI is activated, a lightning bolt runs from the change icon HI toward the white spherical icon that has appeared, and the size of the white spherical icon that has appeared increases, until it reaches a maximum size of about 4 times the size of the white spherical icon that was displayed as an icon.

After that, as shown in Figure 54 (J), the change icon HI disappears from the display screen 7a, and does not switch from the white spherical icon to another icon; in other words, it becomes the same as the white spherical icon displayed in Figure 54 (a), resulting in a failed icon change, and this white spherical icon moves while shrinking toward the change display position 9Cd where the sword image, which is the change icon 9C, is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (K), the variable icon 9C, which is a sword image, is switched to a white spherical icon shrunk to its original size. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, whose four corners of a square shape are represented by white lines, and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, whose two lower corners of the four square corners are represented by white lines, disappear from the display screen 7a. After this, the message MG1 also disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in Fig. 54(L), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again from the lunar surface image THG2 to the normal background image, the city image THG1 (at this time, the normal background image may be switched from the city image THG1 to another normal image (e.g., an underground image)), and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that had been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a return to their original variable areas and are rapidly variable (variable display), and the variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad of the rectangular image are displayed again on the display screen 7a. This ends the variable icon acquisition performance B. After the change icon acquisition effect B, various effects may continue. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins. However, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a miss occurs.

[Change Icon Acquisition Presentation C]
Next, the change icon acquisition performance C will be described with reference to Fig. 55. Fig. 55 is a diagram for explaining the change icon acquisition performance B. The change icon acquisition performance C is performed over a plurality of change performances (change display) by decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 55(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (change display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the change performance (change display) of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are changed from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, and are changed at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed as slowly moving up and down in small movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

The variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, but may be the same size or different sizes. In this embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the variable display position 9Cd is larger than the size (horizontal distance dimension) of the hold display position 9Ad (the vertical distance dimensions are both the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed in the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed in the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are three hold icons that have been stocked and have not been consumed.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state spaced apart from each other. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In FIG. 55(A), the decorative pattern change effect (change display) starts, and when the game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and the change icon acquisition effect C starts due to the pre-reading effect, as shown in FIG. 55(B), the change display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the area where the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed and the surrounding area become difficult to see (disappear) due to the flash FH. Note that as a result of the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, four hold icons 9A are now present.

For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

As the flash FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A can be seen, and at this time, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A change before and after the flash FH is displayed.

Specifically, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd before the flash FH is displayed is a rectangular image located below the variable display position 9Cd as shown in FIG. 55(B), whereas the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed is an image in which only the four corners of the square shape surrounding the variable icon 9C are expressed with white lines as shown in FIG. 55(C). Also, the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad before the flash FH is displayed are rectangular images located below the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad as shown in FIG. 55(B), whereas the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are a shape in which only the lower two corners of the square shape surrounding the hold icon 9A are expressed with white lines as shown in FIG. 55(C).

The shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are the shapes of specific display positions used as effects in the variable icon acquisition effect C, and the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed and the shape of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are displayed differently, making it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A. Note that the start of the variable icon acquisition effect C can also be communicated to the player by the change in shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

In addition, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A before the flash FH is displayed are white spherical icons as shown in FIG. 55(B), whereas after the flash FH is displayed, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A are sword images imitating the sword member 65 as shown in FIG. 55(C), which are specific icons used as effects in the change icon acquisition effect C. In other words, the variable icon 9C and reserved icon 9A are switched to the same specific icon in the change icon acquisition effect C. Note that although the sword image is an axe imitating the sword member 65, even if the player presses the sword member 65, this is not reflected in any effect in the change icon acquisition effect C.

In FIG. 55(C), when the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a and the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad, as well as the variable icon 9C and pending icon 9A, a message MG1 stating "Repel them and get the variable icon!" is displayed in small letters in a single line on the display screen 7a above the variable icon 9C and pending icon 9A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3", resulting in a miss, and the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and as the changing performance (changing display) ends, the changing icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In FIG. 55(A) to FIG. 55(D), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal background image.

Then, the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the lunar surface image THG2 as the specific background image, and as shown in FIG. 55(E), the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C. In the center of the display screen 7a, a message MG1 is displayed in two lines in large letters (about four times the size of small letters) saying "Repel them and get the variable icon!", and the variable areas of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly variable (variable display). The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are difficult to see during the variable process.

Then, on the display screen 7a, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB start fighting, and the message MG1 that was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in large letters (about four times the size of the small letters) saying "Repel them and get the change icon!" is now reduced and moved to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, and is displayed in two lines in a size smaller than the large letters and larger than the small letters (about twice the size of the small letters). In this way, the display form of the message MG1 includes a display in one line in small letters as shown in FIG. 55(C), a display in two lines in large letters (about four times the size of the small letters) as shown in FIG. 55(E), and a display in two lines in a size larger than the small letters (about twice the size of the small letters) after FIG. 55(E), for a total of three display forms, and the content of the message MG1 can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand and emphasized manner by a new expression method of displaying the same content in three display forms during the change icon acquisition performance C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(F), after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds from the start of the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R) has elapsed, a message MG2 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a to inform the player whether or not the variable icon has been acquired. Here, the ally character CRA has been defeated and the enemy character CRB has won, so the variable icon cannot be acquired and a message MG2 saying "Too bad!" is displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "2," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3," resulting in a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends.

Next, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly variable (variable display). This causes the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB to start fighting again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(G), after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds from the start of the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R) has elapsed, a message MG2 is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a to inform the player whether or not the variable icon has been acquired. Here, the ally character CRA has won and the enemy character CRB has been defeated, so the variable icon has been acquired and the message MG2 "Acquired!" is displayed to the left of the ally character CRA on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the number "3," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "2," resulting in a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends.

Next, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 55(H), a change icon HI is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a as a stock icon, and then the reserved icon 9A displayed in the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the changeable display position 9Cd and becomes the changeable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly changed (changeably displayed). This causes the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB to start fighting again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(I), after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds from the start of the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R) has elapsed, a message MG2 notifying whether or not the variable icon was acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, so the variable icon could not be acquired and a message MG2 saying "Too bad!" is displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "1," the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "3," resulting in a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends.

Next, when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are rapidly variable (variable display). This causes the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB to start fighting again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(J), after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds after the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to change (change display)), a message MG2 is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a to inform the player whether or not the change icon has been acquired. Here, the ally character CRA has won and the enemy character CRB has been defeated, so the change icon has been acquired and the message MG2 "Acquired!" is displayed to the left of the ally character CRA on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are still changed (change displayed) at high speed, and the change icon 9C does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 55(K), another change icon HI is displayed in stock above the change icon HI already displayed in stock in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and the change icons HI, HI are arranged vertically side by side, and then the white spherical icon displayed as an icon increases in size by about 1.5 times and appears in the center of the display screen 7a accompanied by a flash of light. Then, as the two change icons HI, HI stored vertically are activated, lightning runs from the two change icons HI, HI arranged vertically toward the white spherical icon that has appeared, and the size of the white spherical icon that has appeared increases, reaching a maximum size of about four times the size of the white spherical icon that was displayed as an icon.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(L), the two change icons HI, HI arranged vertically disappear from the display screen 7a, and a white spherical icon is replaced by a red smiling spherical icon, which then shrinks and moves toward the change display position 9Cd where the flashing change icon 9C, a sword image, is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 55(M), the variable icon 9C, which is a sword image, is switched to a smiling sphere icon. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, in which the four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines, and the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad, in which the two lower corners of the four square corners are represented by white lines, disappear from the display screen 7a. After this, the message MG1 also disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that although the smiling sphere icon shrinks during the movement, it is larger than the white sphere icon displayed in FIG. 55(a), and is about 1.5 times larger.

After that, as shown in Fig. 55(N), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again from the lunar surface image THG2 to the normal background image, the city image THG1 (at this time, the normal background image may be switched from the city image THG1 to another normal image (e.g., an underground image)), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that had been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a return to their original variable areas and are rapidly variable (variable display), and the variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad of the rectangular image are displayed again on the display screen 7a. This ends the variable icon acquisition performance C. After the change icon acquisition effect C, various effects may continue. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins. However, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a miss occurs.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effect of obtaining a change icon.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the change icon acquisition performance A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition performance B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition performance C of FIG. 55, a first starting hole 20 (ball entry hole) through which a game ball can enter and an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images are provided, and in relation to the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 (ball entry hole), the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are displayed as the same specific icon, and in the change icon acquisition performance A, the display is switched to a performance button image simulating the performance button 63. In the change icon acquisition performance B and C, a pre-reading performance can be executed in which a sword image imitating the sword member 65 is switched to and displayed, and when the specific icon is switched to, a first performance can be executed in which a change icon HI that can change (increase) the expectation of a win is displayed and the change icon HI can be acquired (FIGS. 53(F) and (G) in the change icon acquisition performance A, FIG. 54(F) and (G) in the change icon acquisition performance B, and FIG. 55(F), (G), and (J) in the change icon acquisition performance C). According to this configuration, by switching the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A to the same specific icon, it is possible to contribute to eliminating monotony in the consumption mode of the reserved icon 9A, and it is possible to give the player an opportunity to acquire a change icon HI that can change (increase) the expectation of a win. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the change icon acquisition performance A of Fig. 53, the change icon acquisition performance B of Fig. 54, and the change icon acquisition performance C of Fig. 55, the reserved icon 9A is configured to be present in one or more. According to this configuration, even if there is a single or multiple reserved icons 9A, the first performance can be executed. Since the first performance can be executed if there is one or more reserved icons 9A, even if there is only one reserved icon 9A, it is possible to continue to give the player a sense of expectation of an opportunity to acquire a change icon HI that can increase the expectation of a win, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play due to the number of reserved icons 9A.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effects in the change icon acquisition effect A in FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B in FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C in FIG. 55, the player can obtain the opportunity to acquire the change icon HI as many times as the number of specific icons. According to this configuration, since the player can obtain the opportunity to acquire the change icon HI as many times as the number of specific icons, the player can be given a sense of expectation of an increase in the expectation of a win due to the occurrence of the change icon acquisition effect A, the change icon acquisition effect B, and the change icon acquisition effect C. Note that the number of reserved icons 9A (i.e., the number of specific icons) and the number of change icons that can be acquired do not have to match, and even if there is only one reserved icon 9A, when the change icon acquisition effect A, the change icon acquisition effect B, and the change icon acquisition effect C are performed, there are times when the player cannot acquire a change icon, times when the player can acquire one change icon, times when the player can acquire two change icons, and times when the player can acquire three change icons.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance of the change icon acquisition performance A in Fig. 53, the change icon acquisition performance B in Fig. 54, and the change icon acquisition performance C in Fig. 55, when the change icon 9C that has been switched to the specific icon is consumed and disappears due to the end of the change performance (change display), the reserved icon 9A that has been switched to the specific icon can shift and move in a certain direction (the change display position 9Cd that displays the change icon 9C). With this configuration, the decrease in the number of specific icons can be visually conveyed to the player, and the remaining number of opportunities to acquire a change icon can be conveyed.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the change icon acquisition performance A in FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition performance B in FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition performance C in FIG. 55, the change icon HI cannot be acquired during the change performance (during the change display) at the time when the pre-reading performance switches the change icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A to a specific icon. Although the change icon 9C may be used as a notice (a "change performance" that changes the display mode) for the change performance (during the change display), the change icon 9C in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is not a notice for the change performance (during the change display), but is also used as a notice to inform the start of the first performance that is about to begin (i.e., in the next change performance (next change display)), and in this respect, it is different from the one that uses the change icon 9C as a notice for the change performance (during the change display).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the change icon acquisition performance A of Fig. 53, the change icon acquisition performance B of Fig. 54, and the change icon acquisition performance C of Fig. 55, when the reserved icon 9A that has been switched to a specific icon becomes the change icon 9C and the change performance (change display) starts, it becomes possible to acquire a change icon HI during the change performance (during the change display), and the acquired change icon HI can be stocked. According to this configuration, the acquired change icon HI is not consumed immediately when acquired, but is stocked, so the player can grasp the number of acquired change icons HI, and the expectation of the effect due to the activation of the stocked change icon HI, that is, the expectation of the increase in the expectation of the hit is increased.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the first effects in the change icon acquisition effect A in Fig. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B in Fig. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C in Fig. 55, a second effect (Fig. 53 (I) in the change icon acquisition effect A, Fig. 54 (I) in the change icon acquisition effect B, Fig. 55 (K) in the change icon acquisition effect C) can be executed in which lightning is emitted from the change icon HI stored in the first effect, and the variable icon 9C that has been switched to a specific icon is switched to an icon that suggests the probability of a win. According to this configuration, when the second effect is executed, the effect of activating the already stored change icon HI is exerted, so the player can find for himself the relationship (law) between the number of stored change icons HI and the increase in the probability of a win.

[Modification]
The following describes modified examples of the changed icon acquisition effect.
[Modification 1]
The changed icon acquisition performance A in Fig. 53, the changed icon acquisition performance B in Fig. 54, and the changed icon acquisition performance C in Fig. 55 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state of so-called left-handed hitting. However, they may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may be performed in a game state of so-called right-handed hitting.

[Modification 2]
In the change icon acquisition performance A in Fig. 53, the change icon acquisition performance B in Fig. 54, and the change icon acquisition performance C in Fig. 55, the game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and starts with a look-ahead performance. However, it may be determined by a unique lottery by the sub-control board 90 whether or not to perform the look-ahead performance without using the look-ahead performance. In this case, in order to execute the change icon acquisition performance A, the change icon acquisition performance B, or the change icon acquisition performance C over a plurality of change performances (change displays) by decorative patterns, the sub-control board 90 needs to adjust the progress of the change icon acquisition performance in real time, taking into account the performance time indicated by the change performance start command from the main control board 80.

[Modification 3]
In the change icon acquisition presentation A in Fig. 53, the change icon acquisition presentation B in Fig. 54, and the change icon acquisition presentation C in Fig. 55, the change icon HI is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, it may be displayed on the display screen of another image display device provided separately from the image display device 7. The other image display device may be provided on the game board 2 together with the image display device 7, or may be provided on the front frame 53. In this way, since there are multiple image display devices, it is possible to increase the variety of display modes provided by the multiple image display devices.

[Modification 4]
In the change icon acquisition performance A of Fig. 53, the change icon acquisition performance B of Fig. 54, and the change icon acquisition performance C of Fig. 55, the change icon HI is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, a plurality of structures having three-dimensional shapes imitating the change icons may be provided on the game board 2 or the front frame 53, and the number of acquired change icons may be communicated to the player by the number of times these structures emit light.

[Modification 5]
In the change icon acquisition performance A of Fig. 53, the change icon acquisition performance B of Fig. 54, and the change icon acquisition performance C of Fig. 55, lightning is emitted from the stored change icon HI and it disappears from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the stored change icon HI may disappear from the display screen 7a in a display mode in which it explodes due to the lightning it has emitted, or the stored change icon HI may disappear from the display screen 7a in a display mode in which it uses up all its energy due to the lightning it has emitted and its structure peels off into pieces.

[Modification 6]
In the change icon acquisition performance A in FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition performance B in FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition performance C in FIG. 55, the icon acquisition performance A is performed when the reserved icon 9A and the change icon 9C are all white spherical icons with the lowest expectation of winning. However, for example, the icon acquisition performance A may be performed when the reserved icon 9A and the change icon 9C are different icons. For example, when the change icon 9C is a smiling spherical icon and the reserved icon 9A is a white spherical icon, any of the change icon acquisition performance A, the change icon acquisition performance B, and the change icon acquisition performance C may be performed. This is because the change icon 9C may be used as a notice (a "change performance" that changes the display mode) for the change performance (during the change display), but instead of being used as a notice during the change performance (during the change display), it is used as a notice to inform the start of the change icon acquisition performance A, the change icon acquisition performance B, and the change icon acquisition performance C that will be started in the next change display (next change display).

[Modification 7]
The change icon acquisition display A in Figure 53, the change icon acquisition display B in Figure 54, and the change icon acquisition display C in Figure 55 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine having an entrance through which a gaming ball can enter and a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A pre-reading effect can be executed in which the variable icon and the reserved icon are switched to the same specific icon in relation to the entry of the game ball into the ball entry opening,
When the specific icon is displayed, a first performance can be executed in which a change icon capable of changing a winning expectation degree is displayed and the change icon can be acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1,
The hold icon may be single or multiple.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A2-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1 or A2-2,
In the first performance, the player can have the opportunity to acquire the change icon in the same number as the specific icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
In the first performance, when the variable icon that has been switched to the specific icon is consumed and disappears due to the end of the variable performance, the reserved icon that has been switched to the specific icon shifts and moves in a certain direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-4,
In the first performance, the change icon cannot be acquired during the change performance at the time when the pre-reading performance switches the change icon and the reserved icon to the specific icon,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-5,
In the first performance, when the reserved icon that has been switched to the specific icon becomes the variable icon and the variable performance starts, the variable icon can be acquired during the variable performance, and the acquired variable icon is stocked.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A2-7]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A2-6,
After the first performance, a second performance can be executed in which a lightning bolt is emitted from the changing icon stored by the first performance, and the changing icon that has been switched to the specific icon is switched to an icon indicating an expectation of a win.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending icon movement and change performances A to C are explained below using Figures 56 to 58. This pending icon movement and change performance can be executed during the decorative pattern change performance, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the pending icon movement and change performance, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Pending icon movement change performance A]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon movement change performance A. The pending icon movement change performance is a performance in which the image representing the pending icon changes its appearance while moving. The appearance here includes the shape, color, action, size, etc. of the image representing the pending icon. In the pending icon movement change performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), in the normal state, three pending icons 9A and the pending icon (variable icon) 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C both have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, the pending icon 9C and the pending icon 9A have the same shape (pending icon shape), so these are also simply referred to as "pending icons 9A, 9C" collectively. The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digestion image display area) at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below this pending display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the pending display area.

As shown in FIG. 56(B), at a certain timing during the change, a text image of "Pending change pseudo consecutive starts!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At the same time, the reserved icon (changing icon) 9C moves to the upper left. At this time, the three reserved icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a (are not displayed). After that, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the reserved icon 9C stops at a specified position (first position) at the bottom left of the display screen 7a. The first position is located to the left of the reserved display area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a "6↓6" reach pattern.

As shown in FIG. 56(D), the reserved icon 9C moves from the first position to the right toward the reserved display area. In the reach state, the decorative pattern is replaced by the medium decorative pattern 8C, and a text image of "reserved change" temporarily stops. In accordance with the temporary stopping of the text image of "reserved change", the color of the reserved icon 9C changes. In other words, during the pseudo consecutive performance, when the text image of "reserved change" temporarily stops in place of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the state of the reserved icon 9C changes. Here, the color of the reserved icon 9C changes. The order in which the color of the reserved icon 9C changes is from the color with the lowest expectation of a jackpot to the color with the highest expectation of a jackpot. For example, the order is blue → green → red.

As shown in FIG. 56(E), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that had been temporarily stopped begin to change again as a pseudo consecutive performance. The reserved icon 9C continues to move to the right. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop again. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at "567." This time, because the middle decorative pattern 8C is not temporarily stopped at the text image of "reserved change," the color of the reserved icon 9C does not change. The reserved icon 9C continues to move to the right.

As shown in FIG. 56(G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were temporarily stopped start to change again as a pseudo consecutive performance. The reserved icon 9C continues to move to the right. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop again. Here, after the "3↓3" reach state, the text image "reserved change" temporarily stops in place of the middle decorative symbol 8C. In accordance with the temporary stopping of the text image "reserved change", the color and shape of the reserved icon 9C change. In other words, when the text image "reserved change" temporarily stops again in place of the middle decorative symbol 8C during the pseudo consecutive performance, the color and shape of the reserved icon 9C change to a state with even higher expectations.

As shown in FIG. 56(I), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were temporarily stopped start to move again as a pseudo consecutive performance. The reserved icon 9C continues to move to the right and stops when it reaches the reserved display area. In other words, the reserved icon 9C returns to its original position. After that, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop as shown in FIG. 56(J). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in the form of a jackpot of "333".

[Pending icon movement change performance B]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon movement change performance B. The pending icon movement change performance is a performance in which the image representing the pending icon changes its appearance while moving. The appearance here includes the shape, color, action, size, etc. of the image representing the pending icon. In the pending icon movement change performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), in the normal state, three pending icons 9A and the pending icon (variable icon) 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C both have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, the pending icon 9C and the pending icon 9A have the same shape (pending icon shape), so these are also simply referred to as "pending icons 9A, 9C" collectively. The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digestion image display area) at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below this pending display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the pending display area.

As shown in FIG. 57(B), at a certain timing during the change, a text image of "Reserved change pseudo consecutive start!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At the same time, the reserved icon (changing icon) 9C moves to the upper left. At this time, the three reserved icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a (are not displayed). After that, as shown in FIG. 57(C), the reserved icon 9C stops at a predetermined position (first position) at the bottom left of the display screen 7a. In addition, a new specific image BG is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The specific image BG is a horizontally long rectangular image, with the left end corresponding to the first position and the right end corresponding to the reserved display area. A new number image SG is displayed at the top left of the reserved icon 9C. The number image SG represents the remaining number of pseudo consecutive times. Here, "4" is displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach pattern of "6↓6".

As shown in FIG. 57(D), the reserved icon 9C moves from the left end to the right end on the specific image BG. That is, it moves from the first position to the reserved display area in the right direction. The position (display position) of the reserved icon 9C relative to the specific image BG represents (indicates) the remaining period during which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed. The number image SG moves with the movement of the reserved icon 9C. That is, the number image SG moves while maintaining the same distance from the reserved icon 9C during the movement. In the reach state, the decorative pattern is replaced by the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the text image of "reserved change" temporarily stops. In accordance with the temporary stop of the text image of "reserved change", the color of the reserved icon 9C changes. That is, during the pseudo consecutive performance, when the text image of "reserved change" temporarily stops instead of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the state of the reserved icon 9C changes. Here, the color of the reserved icon 9C changes. The order in which the color of the reserved icon 9C changes is the order in which the expectation of a jackpot goes from low to high. For example, the order is blue → green → red. When the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops, one of the pseudo consecutive turns is completed, and the number image SG changes from "4" to "3."

As shown in FIG. 57(E), the temporarily stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again as a pseudo consecutive performance. The reserved icon 9C continues to move to the right on the specific image BG. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop again. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stop at "5" and "7", and then the middle decorative pattern 8C is replaced by the character image "G!" and the character image "Get points!" is temporarily stopped. In accordance with the temporary stop of the character image "Get points!", black star-shaped points are displayed on the specific image BG. The black star-shaped points are increased (accumulated) by one each time the character image "Get points!" is temporarily stopped instead of the middle decorative pattern 8C during the pseudo consecutive period. Then, the performance using these points is executed at the last change of the pseudo consecutive. The temporary stopping of the middle decorative pattern 8C completes one of the pseudo consecutive wins, and the number image SG changes from "3" to "2."

As shown in FIG. 57(G), the temporarily stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again as a pseudo consecutive performance. The reserved icon 9C continues to move to the right on the specific image BG. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(H), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop again. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stop in the "3↓3" reach state, and then the text image "reserved change" temporarily stops in place of the middle decorative pattern 8C. In accordance with the temporary stop of the text image "reserved change", the color and shape of the reserved icon 9C change. In other words, when the text image "reserved change" temporarily stops again in place of the middle decorative pattern 8C during the pseudo consecutive performance, the color and shape of the reserved icon 9C change to a state with even higher expectations. The temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C completes one of the pseudo consecutive, and the number image SG changes from "2" to "1".

As shown in FIG. 57(I), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to move again as a pseudo consecutive performance. The reserved icon 9C continues to move to the right, and stops when it reaches the right end of the specific image BG. At almost the same time, the specific image BG disappears. This causes the reserved icon 9C to stop in the reserved display area. In other words, the reserved icon 9C returns to its original position. For the final change in the pseudo consecutive performance, a performance is executed using the accumulated black star-shaped points. Here, the black star-shaped points move while expanding, and a predetermined performance is executed in the center of the display screen 7a. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop as shown in FIG. 57(J). Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in the form of a jackpot of "333".

[Pending icon movement change performance C]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon movement change performance C. The pending icon movement change performance is a performance in which the image representing the pending icon changes its appearance while moving. The appearance here includes the shape, color, action, size, etc. of the image representing the pending icon. In the pending icon movement change performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), in the normal state, three pending icons 9A and the pending icon (variable icon) 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C both have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, the pending icon 9C and the pending icon 9A have the same shape (pending icon shape), so these are also simply referred to as "pending icons 9A, 9C" collectively. The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digestion image display area) at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below this pending display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the pending display area.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), at a certain timing during the change, a text image of "Pending change pseudo consecutive start!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At the same time, the pending icon (changing icon) 9C and the three pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a (are not displayed). After that, as shown in FIG. 58(C), a pending icon image 9D representing the pending icons 9A and 9C is newly displayed at a predetermined position (first position) at the bottom left of the display screen 7a. The pending icon image 9D may be the pending icons 9A and 9C, or may be an image imitating the pending icons 9A and 9C. A specific image BG is newly displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The specific image BG is a horizontally long rectangular image, with the left end corresponding to the first position and the right end corresponding to the pending display area. A number image SG is newly displayed at the top left of the pending icon image 9D. A part of the number image SG is displayed overlapping the pending icon image 9D. The number image SG represents the remaining number of pseudo consecutive times. Here, "4" is displayed. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the "6↓6" reach pattern.

As shown in FIG. 58(D), the reserved icon image 9D moves from the left end to the right end on the specific image BG. That is, it moves from the first position to the reserved display area in the right direction. The position (display position) of the reserved icon image 9D relative to the specific image BG represents (indicates) the remaining period during which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed. The number image SG moves with the movement of the reserved icon image 9D. That is, the number image SG moves while overlapping the upper left of the moving reserved icon image 9D. In the reach state, the decorative pattern is replaced by the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the character image of "reserved change" temporarily stops. In accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of "reserved change", the color of the reserved icon image 9D changes. That is, during the pseudo consecutive performance, when the character image of "reserved change" temporarily stops instead of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the state of the reserved icon image 9D changes. Here, the color of the reserved icon image 9D changes. The order in which the color of the reserved icon image 9D changes is the order in which the expectation of the jackpot increases from a low color to a high color. For example, the order is blue → green → red. When the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops, one of the pseudo consecutive turns is completed, and the number image SG changes from "4" to "3."

As shown in FIG. 58(E), the temporarily stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again as a pseudo consecutive performance. The reserved icon image 9D continues to move to the right on the specific image BG. After that, as shown in FIG. 58(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop again. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stop at "5" and "7", and then the central decorative pattern 8C is replaced by a character image of "Point Get!". In accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of "Point Get!", black star-shaped points are displayed on the specific image BG. The black star-shaped points are increased (accumulated) by one each time the character image of "Point Get!" is temporarily stopped instead of the central decorative pattern 8C during the pseudo consecutive period. Then, a performance using these points is executed at the last change of the pseudo consecutive. The temporary stopping of the middle decorative pattern 8C completes one of the pseudo consecutive wins, and the number image SG changes from "3" to "2."

As shown in FIG. 58(G), the temporarily stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again as a pseudo consecutive performance. The reserved icon image 9D continues to move to the right on the specific image BG. After that, as shown in FIG. 58(H), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop again. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stop in the "3↓3" reach state, and the text image "reserved change" temporarily stops in place of the middle decorative pattern 8C. In accordance with the temporary stop of the text image "reserved change", the color and shape of the reserved icon image 9D change. In other words, when the text image "reserved change" temporarily stops again in place of the middle decorative pattern 8C during the pseudo consecutive performance, the color and shape of the reserved icon image 9D change to a state with even higher expectations. The temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C completes one of the pseudo consecutive, and the number image SG changes from "2" to "1".

As shown in FIG. 58(I), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to move again as a pseudo consecutive performance. The reserved icon image 9D continues to move to the right, and stops when it reaches the right end of the specific image BG. At almost the same time, the specific image BG disappears. Then, the reserved icon 9C in the same form as the reserved icon image 9D is displayed in the reserved display area. That is, a performance is performed in which the reserved icon 9C has returned to its original position. If the reserved icon image 9D is the reserved icon 9C itself, it has returned to its original position. For the final change in the pseudo consecutive performance, a performance is performed using the accumulated black star-shaped points. Here, the black star-shaped points move while expanding, and a predetermined performance is performed in the center of the display screen 7a. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop as shown in FIG. 58(J). Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in the form of a jackpot of "333".

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the pending icon movement and change presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 56 and Fig. 57, a first effect in which the reserved icon 9C (image representing the reserved icon) changes color while moving, and a second effect in which the reserved icon 9C with the changed color is displayed in the reserved display area after the first effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effect, and the interest can be improved. In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 58, a first effect in which the reserved icon image 9D (image representing the reserved icon) changes color while moving, and a second effect in which the reserved icon image 9D with the changed color is displayed in the reserved display area (variable icon display area, reserved consumption image display area) after the first effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effect, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 56(A), 57(A), and 58(A), a third effect can be executed in which the reserved icon 9C (image representing the reserved icon) is displayed in the reserved display area (variable icon display area, reserved consumption image display area) before the first effect, and the first effect is executed after the third effect. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figs. 56 and 57, in the first performance, the reserved icon 9C (image representing the reserved icon) moves from the first position toward the reserved display area (variable icon display area, reserved consumption image display area). With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and interest can be increased. Also, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 58, in the first performance, the reserved icon image 9D (image representing the reserved icon) moves from the first position toward the reserved display area (variable icon display area, reserved consumption image display area). With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and interest can be increased.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, in the first performance, a pseudo consecutive performance of the decorative pattern is executed, and when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and a text image of "reserved change" is displayed instead of the decorative pattern 8C, the color of the reserved icon 9C (image representing the reserved icon) changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be improved. Also, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first performance, a pseudo consecutive performance of the decorative pattern is executed, and when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and a text image of "reserved change" is displayed instead of the decorative pattern 8C, the color of the reserved icon 9D (image representing the reserved icon) changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, in the first performance, the number image SG representing the remaining number of pseudo consecutive wins moves together with the reserved icon 9C (image representing the reserved icon). With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be increased. Also, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first performance, the number image SG representing the remaining number of pseudo consecutive wins moves together with the reserved icon 9D (image representing the reserved icon). With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, in the first performance, the reserved icon 9C (image representing the reserved icon) moves on the specific image BG, and the display position of the reserved icon 9C (image representing the reserved icon) relative to the specific image BG notifies the remaining period during which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be increased. Also, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first performance, the reserved icon 9D (image representing the reserved icon) moves on the specific image BG, and the display position of the reserved icon 9D (image representing the reserved icon) relative to the specific image BG notifies the remaining period during which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be increased.

[Modification]
Below are some modified examples of the pending icon movement and change presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the reserved icon moving and changing performances A and B, the reserved icon 9C is assumed to change color while moving as an image representing the reserved icon. However, in the reserved icon moving and changing performances A and B, the reserved icon that changes color while moving may not be the reserved icon 9C, but may be an image (icon image) that imitates the reserved icon 9C.

[Modification 2]
In the pending icon movement change performances A and B, the pending icon 9C is changed in color while moving as an image representing the pending icon. However, in the pending icon movement change performances A and B, the pending icon that changes color while moving may be the pending icon 9A or 9B, rather than the pending icon 9C. In this case, the pending icon 9A or 9B may be configured to move from the first position toward the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digestion image display area) instead of toward the pending image display area.

[Modification 3]
In the pending icon movement change performances A and B, the pending icon 9C that changes color while moving and the pending icon 9C displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digestion image display area) may not be the same. In other words, the pending icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a once when it moves from the pending display area or when it arrives at the pending display area, or the size, shape, or color may change between when it is moving and when it is displayed in the pending display area, or its position may shift slightly before and after it arrives.

[Modification 4]
The reserved icon movement change performances A to C are executed in the normal state. However, the reserved icon movement change performances A to C may be executed in the time-saving state. In this case, the reserved icon C in the reserved icon movement change performances A to C may move to the right and then to the left.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is an image representing a hold icon,
A first effect in which an image representing the hold icon moves and changes color;
A gaming machine capable of executing a second effect in which, after the first effect, an image representing the pending icon in a changed color is displayed in a pending icon display area.
◇[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1,
Before the first performance, a third performance can be executed in which an image representing the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area,
The gaming machine, wherein the first effect is executed after the third effect.
◇[Aspect A3-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1 or A3-2,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first presentation, an image representing the pending icon moves toward the pending icon display area from a first position different from the pending icon display area.
◇[Aspect A3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
In the first performance, a pseudo consecutive performance of decorative symbols is executed, and when a predetermined image is displayed in place of the decorative symbol when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the color of the image representing the reserved icon changes.
◇[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first presentation, an image representing the remaining number of pseudo-consecutive wins moves together with the image representing the hold icon.
◇[Aspect A3-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect A3-4 or A3-5,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first presentation, an image representing the hold icon moves over a specific image, and the remaining period for which the pseudo consecutive presentation is executed is notified by the display position of the image representing the hold icon relative to the specific image.

Specific icon stock effects A to C will be explained below using Figures 59 to 61. In Figures 59 to 61, for example, the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, and other movable parts arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing.

This specific icon stock effect is one of several pseudo consecutive effects, and during the relevant variable effect (during the relevant variable display), the variable effect (variable display) using decorative patterns is performed multiple times in succession. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a specific icon stock effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image used in the specific icon stock performance (referred to as the "specific background image") is a specific image not included in the normal background image, such as a lunar surface image, a space image, or an image of the inside of a spaceship. The normal background image is a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, an ocean image, an ocean floor image, or an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be a still image or a video.

Here, we will first explain specific icon stock effect A, then specific icon stock effect B, and finally specific icon stock effect C.

[Specific Icon Stock Effects A]
The specific icon stock effect A will be described with reference to Fig. 59. Fig. 59 is a diagram for explaining the specific icon stock effect A. The specific icon stock effect A is one of a plurality of pseudo consecutive effects, and during the corresponding change effect (during the corresponding change display), a change effect (change display) by a decorative pattern is performed continuously for a plurality of times.

First, as shown in FIG. 59(A), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a normal background image, and a decorative pattern (pattern: numbers "1" to "9") variation performance (variable display) is started in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with a left decorative pattern 8L of a three-dimensional image, a center decorative pattern 8C of a three-dimensional image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of a three-dimensional image. When the variation performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern displayed as stopped changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, and changes at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates just before stopping, changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed as a temporary stop, or is displayed as a stop (is displayed as a temporary stop, and then is displayed as a stop). In addition, when the decorative pattern is displayed as a temporary stop, it is displayed as a display mode in which it moves slowly in small vertical movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icon is displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state spaced apart from each other. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts in Figure 59 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L is then stopped and displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3", resulting in a miss, and the changing icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, a city image THG1, is switched to a lunar image THG2 as a specific background image, and the white spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the white spherical variable icon 9C, and a number image (here, the number 4) 9Cz is displayed in front of the variable icon 9C, and a message MG1 saying "Stock icons!" is displayed in a line approximately in the center of the display screen 7a, and further the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a.

The size of the variable icon 9C and the size of the number image 9Cz may be the same, or one may be larger. In addition, when the number image 9Cz is placed behind the variable icon 9C, it is better to make the size of the number image 9Cz larger than the size of the variable icon 9C in terms of visibility of the number image 9Cz.

At this point, the number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz indicates the remaining number of consecutive changes due to the pseudo consecutive combination. In other words, it informs the player that in the change performance (change display) at this point, the change performance (change display) using the decorative pattern will be performed continuously for the remaining four times.

Just before the first (first) decorative pattern change performance (changing display) due to the pseudo consecutive draw begins, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and when the first (first) decorative pattern change performance (changing display) due to the pseudo consecutive draw begins, as shown in FIG. 59(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the first (first) decorative pattern change performance (changing display) due to the pseudo consecutive draw ends, and the number image 9Cz of the change icon 9C changes from the number 4 to the number 3. This informs the player that the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) will continue for the remaining three times in the change performance (change display).

When the second decorative pattern change performance (change display) due to the pseudo consecutive win begins, as shown in FIG. 59(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", and the change icon HI appears as a specific icon from the change area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the change icon HI is activated to consume the change icon HI without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 59(E), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C, causing it to collide with the change icon 9C. Here, although the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, this collision does not cause the white spherical change icon 9C to change into an icon of another shape, resulting in a failure to change the change icon 9C.

As shown in FIG. 59(F), the change in the variable icon 9C fails, the second decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) due to the pseudo consecutive combination ends, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the number 3 to the number 2. This informs the player that the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) will continue for the remaining two times in the variable performance (variable display).

When the third decorative pattern change performance (change display) due to the pseudo consecutive win begins, as shown in Figure 59 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the change icon HI appears again as a specific icon from the change area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, activating the change icon HI to consume it without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 59(H), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C, causing it to collide with the change icon 9C. Here, although the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, this collision does not cause the white spherical change icon 9C to change into an icon of another shape, again resulting in a failure to change the change icon 9C.

As shown in FIG. 59(I), the change in the variable icon 9C fails, the third decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) due to the pseudo consecutive combination ends, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the number 2 to the number 1. This informs the player that there is only one more decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) left in the variable performance (variable display).

When the fourth (last) decorative pattern change performance (change display) by the pseudo consecutive draw starts, as shown in FIG. 59(J), the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped at the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "7", and the fourth (last) decorative pattern change performance (change display) by the pseudo consecutive draw ends, and as shown in FIG. 59(K), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again from the moon surface image THG2 to the normal background image, the city image THG1 (at this time, the normal background image may be switched from the city image THG1 to another normal image (e.g., an underground image)), and the change display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. This ends the specific icon stock performance A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(L), the left decorative pattern 8L stops at the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C stops at the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R stops at the number "7", resulting in a miss. As a result, the white spherical variable icon 9C that was unable to change from a white spherical icon to another icon in the specific icon stock performance A disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Specific Icon Stock Effects B]
Next, the specific icon stock effect B will be described with reference to Fig. 60. Fig. 60 is a diagram for explaining the specific icon stock effect B. The specific icon stock effect B is one of a plurality of pseudo consecutive effects, and during the corresponding change effect (during the corresponding change display), a change effect (change display) by a decorative pattern is performed multiple times in succession.

First, as shown in FIG. 60(A), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a normal background image, and a decorative pattern (pattern: numbers "1" to "9") variation performance (variable display) is started in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with a left decorative pattern 8L of a three-dimensional image, a center decorative pattern 8C of a three-dimensional image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of a three-dimensional image. When the variation performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern displayed as stopped changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, and changes at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates just before stopping, changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed as a temporary stop, or is displayed as a stop (is displayed as a temporary stop, and then is displayed as a stop). In addition, when the decorative pattern is displayed as a temporary stop, it is displayed as a display mode in which it moves slowly in small vertical movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icon is displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state spaced apart from each other. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts in Figure 60 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L is then stopped and displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3", resulting in a miss, and the changing icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the moon image THG2 as the specific background image, and the white spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the white spherical variable icon 9C. The display mode is such that a number image (here, the number 4) 9Cz is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C, and a message MG1 saying "Stock the icon!" is displayed in a line in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a. The size of the variable icon 9C and the size of the number image 9Cz may be the same size, or one may be larger. In addition, when the number image 9Cz is arranged behind the variable icon 9C, it is better to make the size of the number image 9Cz larger than the size of the variable icon 9C in terms of the visibility of the number image 9Cz.

At this point, the number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz indicates the remaining number of consecutive changes due to the pseudo consecutive combination. In other words, it informs the player that in the change performance (change display) at this point, the change performance (change display) using the decorative pattern will be performed continuously for the remaining four times.

Just before the first (first) decorative pattern change performance (changing display) due to the pseudo consecutive draw begins, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and when the first (first) decorative pattern change performance (changing display) due to the pseudo consecutive draw begins, as shown in FIG. 60(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the first (first) decorative pattern change performance (changing display) due to the pseudo consecutive draw ends, and the number image 9Cz of the change icon 9C changes from the number 4 to the number 3. This informs the player that the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) will continue for the remaining three times in the change performance (change display).

When the second decorative pattern change performance (change display) due to the pseudo consecutive win begins, as shown in Figure 60 (D), the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", and the change icon HI appears as a specific icon from the change area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the change icon HI is activated to consume the change icon HI without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 60(E), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C, causing it to collide with the change icon 9C.

When the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), the change icon 9C changes from a white sphere to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and the change of the change icon 9C is successful.

The change in the variable icon 9C is successful, the second decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) due to the pseudo consecutive combination ends, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the number 3 to the number 2. This informs the player that the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) will continue for the remaining two times in the variable performance (variable display).

When the third decorative pattern change performance (change display) due to the pseudo consecutive win starts, as shown in FIG. 60(G), the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped at the number "6", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "4", and the battle performance icon AI appears as a specific icon from the changing area of the center decorative pattern 8C. In order to stock the battle performance icon AI without consuming it, as shown in FIG. 60(H), the battle performance icon AI moves in a curved line toward the lower right corner of the display screen 7a so as to pass between the right decorative pattern 8R where the battle performance icon AI is temporarily stopped and the changing icon 9C. The battle performance icon AI indicates a battle performance that will be developed (started, developed) after the specific icon stock performance B ends, and in this battle performance, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, which is a performance with a high expectation of a big win.

When the battle effect icon AI moves to the bottom right corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 60(I), a text image AIa with the word "Stock" in a predetermined color (e.g., red) appears on the display screen 7a in a display mode that slopes downward to the left (upward to the right) above the battle effect icon AI, indicating that the stock of the battle effect icon AI has been successful.

The stock of the battle effect icon AI is successful, the second decorative pattern change effect (changing display) due to the pseudo consecutive win ends, and the number image 9Cz of the change icon 9C changes from the number 2 to the number 1. This informs the player that there is only one more decorative pattern change effect (changing display) left in the change effect (change display).

When the fourth (last) decorative pattern change performance (change display) by the pseudo consecutive draw starts, as shown in FIG. 60(J), the character image AIa disappears from the display screen, and then the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7". The fourth (last) decorative pattern change performance (change display) by the pseudo consecutive draw ends, and as shown in FIG. 60(K), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again from the moon surface image THG2 to the normal background image, the city image THG1 (at this time, the normal background image may be switched from the city image THG1 to another normal image (e.g., an underground image)), and the change display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. This ends the specific icon stock performance B.

After that, as shown in Figure 60 (L), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R begin to change again, and by activating the stored battle performance icon AI, the battle performance unfolds (starts, develops) as shown in Figures 60 (M) and (N), and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB begin to fight. In the battle performance, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the variable icon 9C (in this embodiment, the reserved icon 9A does not exist at this time, but if the reserved icon 9A exists, the reserved icon 9A also disappears) from the display screen 7a, and when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, after which a jackpot game (jackpot performance) begins, whereas when the ally character CRA loses and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same pattern, resulting in a miss. When the battle performance ends and a jackpot or miss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. In this embodiment, the hold icon 9A does not exist at this point, but if the hold icon 9A exists, the hold icon 9A will also be displayed again on the display screen 7a.

[Specific Icon Stock Effects C]
Next, the specific icon stock effect C will be described with reference to Fig. 61. Fig. 61 is a diagram for explaining the specific icon stock effect C. The specific icon stock effect C is one of a plurality of pseudo consecutive effects, and during the corresponding change effect (during the corresponding change display), a change effect (change display) by a decorative pattern is performed multiple times in succession.

First, as shown in FIG. 61(A), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a normal background image, and a decorative pattern (pattern: numbers "1" to "9") variation performance (variable display) is started in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a with a left decorative pattern 8L of a three-dimensional image, a center decorative pattern 8C of a three-dimensional image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of a three-dimensional image. When the variation performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern displayed as stopped changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, and changes at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates just before stopping, changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed as a temporary stop, or is displayed as a stop (is displayed as a temporary stop, and then is displayed as a stop). In addition, when the decorative pattern is displayed as a temporary stop, it is displayed as a display mode in which it moves slowly in small vertical movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icon is displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a in a state spaced apart from each other. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts in Figure 61 (A), the left decorative pattern 8L is then stopped and displayed as the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "3", resulting in a miss, and the changing icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the moon image THG2 as the specific background image, and the white spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the white spherical variable icon 9C. The display mode is such that a number image (here, the number 4) 9Cz is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C, and a message MG1 saying "Stock the icon!" is displayed in a line in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a. The size of the variable icon 9C and the size of the number image 9Cz may be the same size, or one may be larger. In addition, when the number image 9Cz is arranged behind the variable icon 9C, it is better to make the size of the number image 9Cz larger than the size of the variable icon 9C in terms of the visibility of the number image 9Cz.

At this point, the number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz indicates the remaining number of consecutive changes due to the pseudo consecutive combination. In other words, it informs the player that in the change performance (change display) at this point, the change performance (change display) using the decorative pattern will be performed continuously for the remaining four times.

Just before the first (first) decorative pattern change performance (changing display) due to the pseudo consecutive draw begins, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and when the first (first) decorative pattern change performance (changing display) due to the pseudo consecutive draw begins, as shown in FIG. 61(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", the first (first) decorative pattern change performance (changing display) due to the pseudo consecutive draw ends, and the number image 9Cz of the change icon 9C changes from the number 4 to the number 3. This informs the player that the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) will continue for the remaining three times in the change performance (change display).

When the second decorative pattern change performance (change display) due to the pseudo consecutive win begins, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the left decorative pattern 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "5", and the change icon HI appears as a specific icon from the change area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the change icon HI is activated to consume the change icon HI without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the change icon HI moves downward in an arc toward the change icon 9C, causing it to collide with the change icon 9C.

When the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), the change icon 9C changes from a white sphere to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and the change of the change icon 9C is successful.

The change in the variable icon 9C is successful, the second decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) due to the pseudo consecutive combination ends, and the number image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the number 3 to the number 2. This informs the player that the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) will continue for the remaining two times in the variable performance (variable display).

When the third decorative pattern change effect (changing display) due to the pseudo consecutive reel begins, then, as shown in Figure 61 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the button effect icon BI appears as a specific icon from the changing area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and in order to stock the button effect icon BI without being consumed, as shown in Figure 61 (H), the button effect icon BI moves in a curved manner towards the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, passing between the right decorative pattern 8R where the button effect icon BI is temporarily stopped and the changing icon 9C. The button effect icon BI indicates the button effect that will be deployed (started, developed) after the specific icon stock effect C ends. This button effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63 to intervene in the ongoing effect and cause a change in the effect image. Compared to the battle effect described below, this effect has a lower chance of winning, but because the player's operation (pressing) of the effect button 63 can cause a change in the effect image, the player can fully enjoy a sense of accomplishment from operating (pressing) the effect button 63 as the effect image changes.

When the button performance icon BI moves to the bottom right corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 61(I), a text image BIa with the word "Stock" in a predetermined color (e.g., red) is displayed on the display screen 7a in a left-downward (right-upward) sloping manner above the button performance icon BI, indicating that the button performance icon BI has been successfully stocked.

The button effect icon BI is successfully stocked, the second decorative pattern change effect (changing display) due to the pseudo consecutive combination ends, and the number image 9Cz of the change icon 9C changes from the number 2 to the number 1. This tells the player that there is only one more decorative pattern change effect (changing display) left in the change effect (change display).

When the fourth (last) decorative pattern change performance (change display) due to the pseudo consecutive start is started, as shown in FIG. 61(J), the character image BIa disappears from the display screen, and then the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "5", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "7", and the battle performance icon AI appears as a specific icon from the changing area of the center decorative pattern 8C. In order to stock the battle performance icon AI without consuming it, the battle performance icon AI moves in a curved line from the right corner of the display screen 7a between the temporarily stopped right decorative pattern 8R and the changing icon 9C, toward the top of the button performance icon BI that is already displayed as stock. The battle performance icon AI suggests a battle performance that will be developed (started, developed) after the specific icon stock performance C ends, and in this battle performance, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, which is a performance with a high expectation of a big win.

When the battle effect icon AI moves above the button effect icon BI, as shown in FIG. 61 (K), a text image AIa with the word "Stock" in a predetermined color (e.g., red) is displayed on the display screen 7a in a display mode that slopes downward to the left (upward to the right) above the battle effect icon AI, indicating that the stock of the battle effect icon AI has been successful.

Then, the character image BIa disappears from the display screen, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the number "6", the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "7", the fourth (last) decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) due to the pseudo consecutive win ends, and as shown in FIG. 61(L), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again from the moon surface image THG2 to the normal background image, the city image THG1 (at this time, the normal background image may be switched from the city image THG1 to another normal image (for example, an underground image)), and the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. This ends the specific icon stock performance C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61(M), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R start to change again, and in the order in which they were stored, first, the button effect icon BI that was stored first is activated, and the button effect is deployed (started, developed) as shown in FIG. 61(N), and a large button image BG that resembles the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message MG2 saying "Press it!" is displayed above the button image BG on the display screen 7a. This notifies the player that the button effect has been deployed (started, developed), and further encourages the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. At this time, the button effect icon BI disappears from the display screen 7a, and instead of the button effect icon BI, a character "corner" image CI indicating that activation has been completed is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Once the button effect is complete, the second stored battle effect icon AI is activated, and the battle effect unfolds (starts, develops), although not shown. At this time, the battle effect icon AI disappears from the display screen 7a, and in place of the battle effect icon AI, a text "corner" image CI indicating the completion of activation is displayed on the display screen 7a. As a result, the "corner" image CI is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, arranged side by side above and below. When the battle effect unfolds (starts, develops), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will fight. In the battle presentation, if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, after which the jackpot game (jackpot presentation) begins, whereas if the ally character CRA loses and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a miss.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of specific icon stock effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific icon stock performance A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock performance B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C of FIG. 61, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and a predetermined performance can be executed, and a first performance in which a specific icon can be acquired by displaying a change icon HI or the like as a specific icon that can change (increase) the expectation of a win every time a pseudo consecutive win is performed (FIG. 59 (D) to (I) in the specific icon stock performance A, FIG. 60 (D) to (J) in the specific icon stock performance B, and FIG. 61 (D) to (K) in the specific icon stock performance C) can be executed. According to this configuration, since it is possible to acquire a specific icon that can change (increase) the expectation of a win every time a pseudo consecutive win is performed, it is possible to contribute to eliminating monotony in the performance, and it is possible to grant the acquisition of a change icon HI or the like as a specific icon that can change (increase) the expectation of a win. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific icon stock effect A in Fig. 59, the specific icon stock effect B in Fig. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in Fig. 61, the specific icons can include a first specific icon (change icon HI) that is consumed when a specific icon is acquired, and a second specific icon (battle effect icon AI, etc.) that is stocked without being consumed when a specific icon is acquired. With this configuration, the player does not know what type of specific icon will be displayed, and even if the specific icon stock effect starts, the player cannot predict which specific icon will appear, so that the novelty of the specific icon stock effect is less likely to be lost, and the variety of the specific icon effect can be increased.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first presentation in the specific icon stock presentation A in Fig. 59, the specific icon stock presentation B in Fig. 60, and the specific icon stock presentation C in Fig. 61, when a first specific icon (changing icon HI) is acquired, the display mode of the variable icon 9C can be changed to another display mode. According to this configuration, when the first specific icon (changing icon HI) is acquired, the display mode of the variable icon 9C can be changed to another display mode to increase the expectation, so that the appearance of the first specific icon (changing icon HI) can be focused on.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance of the specific icon stock performance A in Fig. 59, the specific icon stock performance B in Fig. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C in Fig. 61, when a pseudo consecutive win is being performed, a reach is not formed by multiple symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, center decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R). According to this configuration, by performing a pseudo consecutive win without forming a reach, a sense of speed can be given to the player with respect to the progress of the specific icon stock performance, which can contribute to suppressing the player's frustration with the pseudo consecutive win.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific icon stocking effect B in Fig. 60 and the specific icon stocking effect C in Fig. 61, when the pseudo consecutive win ends and the first effect ends, the second effect (Fig. 60 (G) to (J) in the specific icon stocking effect B, Fig. 61 (G) to (K) in the specific icon stocking effect C) related to the second specific icon (battle effect icon AI, button effect icon BI, etc.) stocked by the first effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can experience the effect period in which the second specific icon is stocked by the first effect in the pseudo consecutive win, and the effect period by the activation of the second specific icon stocked by the second effect at the end of the pseudo consecutive win, in succession, and further, since other effects are developed (started, developed) continuously after the specific icon stocking effect, the expectation of a big win for other effects can be increased in the previous effect of the specific icon stocking effect.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance in the specific icon stock performance A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock performance B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C in FIG. 61, the reserved icon 9A may be displayed when there is a reserved ball. According to this configuration, when expressing, for example, a world view by the progress of the second performance, the reserved icon 9A can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 if it is not disturbing, and can be erased from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 if it is disturbing. In other words, when there is a reserved ball, the reserved icon 9A can be prevented from disturbing the second performance by displaying it on the display screen 7a or erasing it from the display screen 7a, thereby preventing the reserved icon 9A from disturbing the second performance. In addition, the variable icon 9C can also be displayed on the display screen 7a or erased from the display screen 7a to prevent the reserved icon 9A from disturbing the second performance. In addition, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad can also be displayed on the display screen 7a or erased from the display screen 7a to prevent the reserved icon 9A from disturbing the second performance.

[Modification]
The following shows modified examples of the variable specific icon stock presentation.
[Modification 1]
The specific icon stock effect A in Fig. 59, the specific icon stock effect B in Fig. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in Fig. 61 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state of so-called left-hand hitting. However, they may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may be performed in a game state of so-called right-hand hitting.

[Modification 2]
In the first performance of the specific icon stock performance A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock performance B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C in FIG. 61, the variable icon 9C is displayed without moving from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to another position. However, in the first performance, when the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to another position, it may be made to approach the variable display position 9Cd each time a pseudo-consecutive is performed. In this way, the variable icon 9C approaches the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) each time a pseudo-consecutive is performed, so that the remaining number of pseudo-consecutive times can be intuitively and easily conveyed to the player the sense of distance between the position where the variable icon 9C is displayed and the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position). In addition, the ``other position'' may be, for example, toward the left or right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position), toward the upper left or upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Modification 3]
In the first performance of the specific icon stock performance A in Fig. 59, the specific icon stock performance B in Fig. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C in Fig. 61, the variable icon 9C was displayed without moving from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to another position. However, in the first performance, when the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) to another position, it approaches the variable display position 9Cd each time a pseudo consecutive win is performed, and further, even if a reserved ball exists, the reserved icon 9A may not be displayed in the area where the variable icon 9C moves. In this way, the variable icon 9C approaches the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position) each time a pseudo-repeat is performed, so that the remaining number of pseudo-repeat times can be intuitively and easily conveyed to the player the distance between the position where the variable icon 9C is displayed and the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position), and further, when the reserved icon 9A indicating the presence of a reserved ball is displayed in the area where the variable icon 9C moves, the reserved icon 9A can be erased from the display screen 7a so as not to interfere with the visibility of the variable icon 9C, thereby preventing the reserved icon 9A from interfering with the moving variable icon 9C. Note that the "other position" may be, for example, closer to the left or right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the variable display position 9Cd (the variable icon display position), or closer to the upper left corner or upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Modification 4]
In the specific icon stock effect A in Fig. 59, the specific icon stock effect B in Fig. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in Fig. 61, the number of pseudo consecutive wins is four. However, the number of pseudo consecutive wins may be five, six, seven, or eight. This can increase the chances of winning a specific icon (such as a change icon HI).

[Modification 5]
In the specific icon stock effect A of Fig. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of Fig. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of Fig. 61, the number of pseudo consecutive wins is fixed at four in advance. However, the number of pseudo consecutive wins may be varied to any number between four and eight each time a specific icon stock effect is performed. In this way, the chance of acquiring a specific icon (such as a change icon HI) can be varied each time a specific icon stock effect is performed, thereby increasing the variety of specific icon stock effects.

[Modification 6]
In the specific icon stock performance A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock performance B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C of FIG. 61, the number image 9Cz is arranged on the front side of the variable icon 9C as the number of pseudo consecutive wins. However, an indicator may be displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a (for example, a position above the variable icon 9C) to display the number of pseudo consecutive wins. In this way, the level gauge of the indicator decreases each time a pseudo consecutive win is performed, so that the remaining number of pseudo consecutive wins can be intuitively and easily conveyed. The indicator may be displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a together with the display mode in which the number image 9Cz is arranged on the front side of the variable icon 9C, or may be displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a together with the state in which the number image 9Cz is removed from the variable icon 9C (the variable icon 9C alone).

[Modification 7]
In the specific icon stock performance A in Fig. 59, the specific icon stock performance B in Fig. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C in Fig. 61, a number image 9Cz is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C as the number of pseudo consecutive wins. However, the variable icon 9C may be moved in the squares of the "sugoroku" each time a pseudo consecutive win is made. In this case, the variable icon 9C may be advanced one square at a time each time a pseudo consecutive win is made to reach the goal, or a dice image may be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the number of squares equal to the number of dots rolled on the dice image may be advanced toward the goal.

[Modification 8]
In the specific icon stock effect A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in FIG. 61, the various symbols are number symbols, and no character images are provided. However, character images may be provided for odd numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9", respectively, and no character images may be provided for even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8", and further, when the specific icon stock effect is started, the character images provided for odd numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" may be deleted. In this way, the state of switching to the special effect of the specific icon stock effect can be easily emphasized to the player. Note that, if the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" all have the same bright green color, and the even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" all have the same bright blue color, even if the specific icon stock effect is started, the various colors of the number symbols are inherited and do not change to other colors. This makes it possible to reduce the influence on the discrimination of the number patterns even if the character images provided for the odd numbers "1,""3,""5,""7," and "9" are deleted by switching to a special presentation called a specific icon stock presentation.

[Modification 9]
In the specific icon stock performance A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock performance B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C in FIG. 61, when a pseudo-consecutive win is being performed, a reach is not formed by multiple symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R). However, a reach may be formed. In this way, when a pseudo-consecutive win is being performed, a sense of speed can be given to the player with respect to the progress of the specific icon stock performance until a reach is formed, which can contribute to suppressing the player's frustration with the pseudo-consecutive win. In addition, when a reach is formed, the specific icon stock performance is stopped and the variable performance (variable display) is continued, and when there is a second specific icon (battle performance icon AI, etc.) that is stocked without being consumed when a specific icon is acquired, the second specific icon (battle performance icon AI, etc.) is activated and consumed.

[Modification 10]
In the specific icon stock performance A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock performance B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock performance C of FIG. 61, the first special chart reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 were displayed as numbers (not shown) at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. These numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, so that they can be easily distinguished from various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. In addition, they are displayed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by other images. In this embodiment, when the specific icon stock performance is started, the display mode is such that the number image 9Cz is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C. The number image 9Cz indicates the remaining number of consecutive variations by pseudo consecutive. As a result, the number (number of reserved balls) displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a may be misunderstood by the player as the remaining number of consecutive changes due to the pseudo-repeat. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sub-display screen 64 (any of the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U (for example, the right sub-display screen 64R)) may display the number of reserved balls as a numerical value. In this way, there is no risk of the player misunderstanding the number of reserved balls as the remaining number of consecutive changes due to the pseudo-repeat, and further, the number of reserved balls as a numerical value can be made difficult to distinguish by blending in with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it easy to understand intuitively.

[Modification 11]
The specific icon stock effect A in Figure 59, the specific icon stock effect B in Figure 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in Figure 61 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A first performance is executed in which a specific icon whose expectation of winning can be changed every time a pseudo consecutive win is performed is displayed and the specific icon can be acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A4-1,
The specific icon may include a first specific icon that is consumed when the specific icon is acquired, and a second specific icon that is not consumed but is stocked when the specific icon is acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A4-1 or A4-2,
In the first performance, when the first specific icon is acquired, it is possible to change the display mode of the variable icon to another display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A4-1 to A4-3,
In the first performance, when the pseudo consecutive win is being performed, a reach may not be formed by a plurality of symbol images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A4-1 to A4-4,
In the first performance, when the (corresponding) variable icon moves from the (corresponding) variable icon display position to another position, the (corresponding) variable icon moves closer to the (corresponding) variable icon display position each time the pseudo consecutive win is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-5,
In the first performance, even if a reserved ball exists, the reserved icon is not displayed in the area where the (corresponding) variable icon moves.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A4-2 to A4-6,
When the pseudo consecutive win is ended and the first performance is ended, a second performance related to the second specific icon stocked by the first performance can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A4-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-7,
In the second performance, a reserved icon may be displayed when a reserved ball exists.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, operation stock performance A (first half), operation stock performance A (second half), and operation stock performance B (second half) are explained using Figures 62 to 64. This operation stock performance can be executed during the performance of the variation of the performance pattern. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute an operation stock performance, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Operation Stock A (first half)]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining operation stock presentation A (first half).
First, as shown in Fig. 62 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figure 62 (B) or Figure 62 (D), a temporary stop effect is executed. A temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect pattern temporarily stops in a predetermined manner. There are two types of temporary stop effects. As shown in Figure 62 (B), a mode in which a special pattern temporarily stops instead of the middle effect pattern 8C, and as shown in Figure 62 (D), a mode in which the middle effect pattern 8C temporarily stops.

In the temporary stop effect shown in Figure 62 (B), the left effect pattern 8L temporarily stops at "1", the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stops at "2", and a special pattern temporarily stops in place of the center effect pattern 8C. The special pattern is a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63. For example, the changing effect patterns temporarily stop in the order of left effect pattern 8L → right effect pattern 8R → special pattern.

When a special symbol temporarily stops instead of the middle symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 62(B), a stock effect is executed as shown in FIG. 62(C). In other words, the stock effect is an effect that is executed when a special symbol temporarily stops in a temporary stop effect. In the stock effect, the button image BG as the special symbol is reduced in size and moves from the center of the display screen 7a to the lower right side as indicated by the arrow Y. Then, a reduced button image BGS is displayed in the lower right side of the display screen 7a.

In the temporary stop effect shown in Figure 62 (D), the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "4", the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at "9", and the center effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at "3". For example, the changing effect patterns temporarily stop in the order of left effect pattern 8L → right effect pattern 8R → center effect pattern 8C.

After the stock effect shown in FIG. 62(C) or the temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 62(D), the variable start effect shown in FIG. 62(A) is executed, resulting in a pseudo consecutive effect. In this embodiment, a repeat pseudo consecutive effect is executed in which such a pseudo consecutive effect is repeated seven times. Then, in the repeat pseudo consecutive effect, the button image BG as the special symbol stops instead of the medium effect symbol 8C (FIG. 62(B)), thereby executing a stock effect (FIG. 62(C)). The following explanation will continue assuming that the stock effect has been executed four times in the repeat pseudo consecutive effect.

After the repeat pseudo consecutive performance ends, a reach formation performance is executed as shown in FIG. 62 (E). The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "5". At this time, the stocked reduced button images BGS are displayed in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), an operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the topmost reduced button image BGS of the reduced button images BGS piled up on the right side of the display screen 7a moves as indicated by arrow Y and is enlarged, and a button image BG displaying the word "PUSH" is displayed. In addition, a message image MSG saying "PUSH" is displayed above the button image BG. The explanation will continue assuming that the player has now pressed the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), a development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect that notifies the player of the development from a normal reach effect to a super reach effect. Here, a message image MSG saying "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, at this time, reduced button images BGS are displayed in a piled-up state on the right side of the display screen 7a. Note that even if the player does not press the effect button 63 during the operation prompting effect of FIG. 62 (F), the development effect will be executed after the effective period of the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(H), a battle performance (start) is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins against the enemy character CRB, a big win is achieved. In the battle performance (start), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed facing each other in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Operation Stock A (Second Half)]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining operation stock presentation A (second half).
First, as shown in Fig. 63(A), an operation prompting effect is executed. In the operation prompting effect, the topmost reduced button image BGS among the reduced button images BGS piled up on the right side of the display screen 7a moves as shown by the arrow Y and is enlarged, and a button image BG with the word "PUSH" displayed is displayed. Also, a message image MSG saying "PUSH" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a battle presentation (initial stage) is executed. In the battle presentation (initial stage), the enemy character CRB moves towards the friendly character CRA side, and the enemy character CRB gains the upper hand. At this time, reduced button images BGS are displayed stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, if the player presses the presentation button 63 in the operation prompting presentation shown in FIG. 63(A), a message image MSG saying "Chance" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. If the player does not press the presentation button 63 in the operation prompting presentation shown in FIG. 63(A), the message image MSG saying "Chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), an operation prompting effect is executed. In the operation prompting effect, the topmost reduced button image BGS of the reduced button images BGS piled up on the right side of the display screen 7a moves as indicated by the arrow Y and is enlarged, and a button image BG displaying the word "PUSH" is displayed. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(D), a battle performance (middle stage) is executed. In the battle performance (middle stage), the ally character CRA moves to the side of the enemy character CRB, and the ally character CRA gains the upper hand. At this time, too, a reduced button image BGS is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, if the player presses the performance button 63 in the operation prompting performance shown in FIG. 63(C), a message image MSG saying "Big Chance" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. If the player does not press the performance button 63 in the operation prompting performance shown in FIG. 63(C), the message image MSG saying "Big Chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(E), an operation prompting effect is executed. In the operation prompting effect, the reduced button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a moves as indicated by the arrow Y and is enlarged, and a button image BG with the word "PUSH" displayed is displayed. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(F), the battle presentation (final stage) is executed. In the battle presentation (final stage), ally character CRA and enemy character CRB fight in the center. If the player presses presentation button 63 during the operation prompting presentation shown in FIG. 63(E), a message image MSG saying "Super Hot" is displayed on the right side of display screen 7a. If the player does not press presentation button 63 during the operation prompting presentation shown in FIG. 63(E), the message image MSG saying "Super Hot" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, a win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed. In the case of a loss, for example, an enemy character is displayed and a message image saying "Defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 63 (H), a confirmed stop performance (win) is executed. In a confirmed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a confirmed winning state. Here, the left, right, and center performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all shown to have stopped at a "5". In the case of a miss, for example, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R stop at a "5", and the center performance symbol 8C stops at a "6".

[Operation Stock Performance B (Second Half)]
64 is a diagram for explaining the operation stock presentation B (second half). The operation stock presentation B (first half) is assumed to be similar to the operation stock presentation A (first half), and a description thereof will be omitted.
In the operation stock performance B (second half), first, as shown in Fig. 64 (A), an operation promotion performance is executed. In the operation promotion performance, the topmost reduced button image BGS among the reduced button images BGS piled up on the right side of the display screen 7a moves as shown by the arrow Y and is enlarged, and a button image BG with the word "PUSH" displayed is displayed. In addition, a message image MSG saying "PUSH" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a battle presentation (initial stage) is executed. In the battle presentation (initial stage), the enemy character CRB moves towards the friendly character CRA side, and the enemy character CRB gains the upper hand. At this time, reduced button images BGS are displayed stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, if the player presses the presentation button 63 in the operation prompting presentation shown in FIG. 64(A), a message image MSG saying "Chance" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. If the player does not press the presentation button 63 in the operation prompting presentation shown in FIG. 64(A), the message image MSG saying "Chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), an operation prompting effect is executed. In the operation prompting effect, the topmost reduced button image BGS of the reduced button images BGS piled up on the right side of the display screen 7a moves as indicated by the arrow Y and is enlarged, and a button image BG displaying the word "PUSH" is displayed. In addition, a message image MSG saying "PUSH" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(D), a battle presentation (middle stage) is executed. In the battle presentation (middle stage), the ally character CRA moves to the side of the enemy character CRB, and the ally character CRA gains the upper hand. At this time, too, a reduced button image BGS is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, if the player presses the presentation button 63 in the operation prompting presentation shown in FIG. 64(C), a message image MSG saying "Big Chance" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. If the player does not press the presentation button 63 in the operation prompting presentation shown in FIG. 64(C), the message image MSG saying "Big Chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), an operation prompting effect is executed. In the operation prompting effect, the reduced button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a moves as indicated by the arrow Y and is enlarged, and a button image BG with the word "PUSH" displayed is displayed. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Press" is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), a win confirmation effect is executed. The win confirmation effect is an effect that notifies definitively that there has been a win. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "It's a win" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 64 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In a fixed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, right, and center are all shown to have fixedly stopped at "5".

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the operation stock effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the temporary stop effect (FIG. 62(B)(D)), a variable start effect (FIG. 62(A)) is executed, thereby executing a repeat pseudo consecutive effect in which the pseudo consecutive effects are repeated. Then, in this repeat pseudo consecutive effect, the button image BG as the special symbol stops instead of the medium effect symbol 8C (FIG. 62(B)), and a stock effect is executed (FIG. 62(C)). This configuration can give the player surprise and expectation, and can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation prompting effect is executed for the number of reduced button images BGS stocked in the stock effect (FIG. 62(B)), and the operation of the effect button 63 is enabled (FIG. 62(F), FIG. 63(A)(C)(E), FIG. 64(A)(C)(E)). With this configuration, the more reduced button images BGS are stocked, the more the player can be given expectations, and the more the interest in the game can be increased.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the repeated pseudo consecutive performance consisting of seven pseudo consecutive performances, the button image BG as the special symbol stops instead of the medium performance symbol 8C (FIG. 62(B)), and the stock performance is executed (FIG. 62(C)). With this configuration, expectations for the pseudo consecutive performances a predetermined number of times are increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button image BG as the special symbol stops instead of the medium performance symbol 8C in the pseudo consecutive performance (FIG. 62(B)), and the stock performance is executed (FIG. 62(C)). In the stock performance, the button image BG as the special symbol is reduced in size and moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the lower right side as indicated by the arrow Y and held there. This configuration makes it easier to understand the number of stocks, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the operation promotion effect, the reduced button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a moves as shown by the arrow Y and is enlarged, and a button image BG with the word "PUSH" displayed is displayed (FIG. 62(F), FIG. 63(A)(C)(E), FIG. 64(A)(C)(E)). With this configuration, the operation of the effect button 63 can be effectively promoted, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation prompting effect (FIG. 62(F), FIG. 63(A)(C)(E), FIG. 64(A)(C)(E)) is executed after the reach formation effect (FIG. 62(E)). This configuration can create a sense of expectation for the reach formation, and can increase the interest in the game.

[Modification]
The following shows modified examples of the operation stock presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the above, an example was given in which the button image BG as a special pattern temporarily stops in place of the middle performance pattern 8C, but the special pattern may also temporarily stop in place of the left performance pattern 8L or the right performance pattern 8R.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the repeated pseudo consecutive performance is composed of seven pseudo consecutive performances, but it may be composed of less than seven or more than seven. Furthermore, the number of pseudo consecutive performances may be dynamically changed. For example, the more the number of pseudo consecutive performances, the higher the expectation of a win.

[Modification 3]
Although the above description has been given with an example in which the stock effect is performed four times, the number of times the stock effect is performed is not particularly limited. For example, the more the number of times the stock effect is performed, the higher the expectation of a win may be.

[Modification 4]
In the above, the operation of the effect button 63 is given as an example, however, any operation unit that can be operated by the player is sufficient, and the operation is not limited to the operation of the effect button 63 .

[Modification 5]
Although the above has been given as an example of a presentation for the first special chart reservation, the same may also be used for a presentation for the second special chart reservation.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine having an operation unit that can be operated by a player,
In a repeat pseudo consecutive performance in which the performance pattern that has started to vary temporarily stops and then starts to vary again, a stock performance can be executed in which an operation unit image that imitates the operation unit is displayed and the operation unit image is held on the screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
After the repeat pseudo-repeated performance, an operation part performance can be executed in which the operation of the operation part is valid according to the number of the operation part images held on the screen in the stock performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A5-1 or A5-2,
The repeated pseudo consecutive performance is composed of a predetermined number of the pseudo consecutive performances.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
In the stock effect, when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo consecutive effect, the operation unit image is displayed as a special symbol, and then the operation unit image is reduced and held.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-2 to A5-4,
In the operation unit presentation, the operation unit image held on the screen is enlarged to promote operation of the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-2 to A5-5,
The operation unit performance is executed through a reach formation performance in which the performance pattern is temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode after the repetitive pseudo consecutive performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A5-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-6,
When the operation unit is operated during a period in which the operation of the operation unit is valid in the operation unit performance, a definite notification performance can be executed to definitively notify that a win has been obtained.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The icon number pattern presentation will be explained below using Figures 65 to 67. This icon number pattern presentation can be executed during the special pattern variation presentation, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation presentation start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it is a specified variation pattern, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a, thereby realizing the presentation.

[Icon Number Design A]
Fig. 65 is a diagram for explaining the icon number pattern performance A. In this icon number pattern performance A, first, as shown in Fig. 65 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change. In addition, in the decorative pattern change performance, the change icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), icon movement performance 1 is performed. In this icon movement performance 1, a number pattern 8X having the same form (same shape, same color, same pattern) as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, one reserved icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. This number pattern 8X is a pattern having the same form as one of the decorative patterns of the numbers 1 to 9 of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the example of FIG. 65(B), a pattern having the same form as the decorative pattern "6" is displayed. In addition, this number pattern 8X randomly moves or stops on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, one reserved icon 9A displayed in the icon movement performance 1 is one reserved icon among the reserved icons 9A displayed in the decorative pattern change performance, and in the example of FIG. 65(B), it corresponds to the reserved icon closest to the change icon 9C in FIG. 65(A). The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A is arranged inside a cylinder. The hold icon 9A then moves a predetermined distance toward the variable icon display area that displays the variable icon, and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), icon movement performance 2 is performed. In this icon movement performance 2, the number pattern 8X moves randomly from right to left and then stops. Also, in icon movement performance 2, the reserved icon 9A moves a predetermined distance along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 toward the variable icon display area and then stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), icon movement performance 3 is performed. In this icon movement performance 3, the number pattern 8X moves randomly while the reserved icon 9A moves along the guide rail image XA1 and stops when it reaches the variable icon display area. In this case, from then on, this reserved icon 9A functions as the variable icon 9C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(E), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that had been changing stop, forming a stopped pattern arrangement. In the example of FIG. 65(E), the stopped pattern arrangement is "6 7 6", which is a losing pattern arrangement. Also, in this decorative pattern stop effect, the reserved icon 9A that had moved in the icon movement effect becomes the changing icon 9C.

In addition, in this icon number pattern performance A, the more times the reserved icon 9A moves and stops, the higher the chance of a big win.

[Icon Number Design Presentation B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the icon number pattern performance B. In this icon number pattern performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 66(A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change. In addition, in the decorative pattern change performance, the change icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are displayed below the display screen 7a. These icons are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), icon movement performance 1 is performed. In this icon movement performance 1, a number pattern 8X having the same form (same shape, same color, same pattern) as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, one reserved icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. This number pattern 8X is a pattern having the same form as one of the decorative patterns of the numbers 1 to 9 of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the example of FIG. 66(B), a pattern having the same form as the decorative pattern "6" is displayed. In addition, this number pattern 8X and one reserved icon 9A are arranged adjacent to each other in correspondence. One reserved icon 9A displayed in the icon movement performance 1 is one reserved icon among the reserved icons 9A displayed in the decorative pattern change performance, and in the example of FIG. 66(B), it corresponds to the reserved icon closest to the change icon 9C in FIG. 66(A). The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A (number design 8X) is arranged inside a cylinder. The hold icon 9A (number design 8X) moves toward the variable icon display area that displays the variable icon and stops there. Note that this hold icon 9A remains white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), icon movement performance 2 is performed. In this icon movement performance 2, the number pattern 8X and the reserved icon 9A are continuously placed adjacent to each other. In this case, the number pattern 8X changes from a "6" pattern to a "5" pattern. Also, the reserved icon 9A changes from white to blue (usually shown by hatching in FIG. 66(C)). In icon movement performance 2, the reserved icon 9A moves along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 toward the variable icon display area and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), icon movement performance 3 is performed. In this icon movement performance 3, the reserved icon 9A associated with the number pattern 8X moves along the guide rail image XA1 and stops when it reaches the variable icon display area. In this case, from then on, this reserved icon 9A functions as the variable icon 9C. Note that this reserved icon 9A changes from blue to green (indicated by cross-hatching in FIG. 66 (D)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that had been changing stop, forming a stopped pattern arrangement. In the example of FIG. 66(E), the stopped pattern arrangement is "6 7 6", which is a losing pattern arrangement. Also, in this decorative pattern stop effect, the reserved icon 9A (green) that was moving in the icon movement effect becomes the changing icon 9C.

In addition, in this icon number pattern performance B, the more the reserved icon 9A moves and stops, the higher the chance of a big win. Also, the more the reserved icon 9A moves and stops, the more chances there are for the reserved icon 9A to change.

[Icon Number Design Presentation C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the icon number pattern performance C. In this icon number pattern performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 67(A), a decorative pattern change performance is performed. In this decorative pattern change performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change. In addition, in the decorative pattern change performance, the change icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are displayed below the display screen 7a. These icons are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), icon movement performance 1 is performed. In this icon movement performance 1, a number pattern 8X having the same form (same shape, same color, same pattern) as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, one reserved icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. This number pattern 8X is a pattern having the same form as one of the decorative patterns of the numbers 1 to 9 of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the example of FIG. 67(B), a pattern having the same form as the decorative pattern "6" is displayed. In addition, this number pattern 8X is arranged in one reserved icon 9A. In this case, it can be said that the number pattern 8X is associated with this reserved icon 9A. One reserved icon 9A displayed in the icon movement performance 1 is one reserved icon among the reserved icons 9A displayed in the decorative pattern change performance, and in the example of FIG. 67(B), it corresponds to the reserved icon closest to the change icon 9C in FIG. 67(A). The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A (number design 8X) is arranged inside a cylinder. The hold icon 9A (number design 8X) moves toward the variable icon display area that displays the variable icon and stops there. Note that this hold icon 9A remains white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), icon movement performance 2 is performed. In this icon movement performance 2, the number symbol 8X is continuously placed within the reserved icon 9A. In this case, the number symbol 8X changes from a "6" symbol to a "5" symbol. Also, the reserved icon 9A changes from white to blue (usually shown by hatching in FIG. 67(C)). In icon movement performance 2, the reserved icon 9A moves along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 toward the variable icon display area and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), icon movement performance 3 is performed. In this icon movement performance 3, the reserved icon 9A containing the number pattern 8X moves along the guide rail image XA1 and stops when it reaches the variable icon display area. In this case, this reserved icon 9A functions as the variable icon 9C from then on. Note that this reserved icon 9A changes from blue to green (indicated by cross-hatching in FIG. 67(D)). Also, the reserved icon 9A contains the number pattern 8X even when it reaches the variable icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that were changing stop changing to form a stopped pattern array. In the example of FIG. 67(E), the stopped pattern array is "6 7 6", which is a losing pattern array. Also, in this decorative pattern stop effect, the reserved icon 9A (green) that was moving in the icon movement effect becomes the changing icon 9C. Note that even in this case, the reserved icon 9C contains the number pattern 8X even when it reaches the changing icon display area.

In addition, in this icon number pattern performance C, the more the reserved icon 9A moves and stops, the higher the expectation of a big win. Also, the more the reserved icon 9A moves and stops, the more chances the reserved icon 9A will change.
In addition, the icon number pattern presentation is a presentation that is performed with the same change.

[Modification]
In the icon number pattern presentation of the above embodiment, the number pattern 8X has the same form as the decorative pattern, but this is not limited to this, and the number pattern 8X may have the same form as part of the decorative pattern, but the part may be different from the decorative pattern.
In the above embodiments of icon number pattern performances B and C, when icon movement performance 1 is changed to icon movement performance 2, the reserved icon 9A changes and the number pattern 8X associated with the reserved icon 9A also changes, but this is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the number pattern 8X does not change even if the reserved icon 9A changes.

[Example of effect]
In the icon number pattern effect of the above embodiment, the reserved icon 9A and the number pattern 8X move. According to this configuration, an interesting effect can be realized by the movement of the reserved icon 9A and the number pattern 8X, and the interest of the game can be improved.
In addition, in the icon number pattern performances B and C, the reserved icon 9A and the number pattern 8X are associated with each other and move together, so that the movement of the reserved icon 9A and the number pattern 8X can be emphasized to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game.
Furthermore, since the number pattern 8X has the same appearance (shape, color) as the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a new presentation in which the reserved icon and the decorative pattern are combined can be displayed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.
In addition, in icon number pattern performances B and C, after the reserved icon 9A and the number pattern 8X move in correspondence with each other, the appearance (color, shape) of the reserved icon 9A changes, so the more the reserved icon and the number pattern 8X move, the more the player's expectations for a change in the reserved status increase, increasing the player's interest in the game.
In addition, in icon number pattern presentations B and C, after the reserved icon 9A and the number pattern 8X are associated and moved, even if the appearance (color, shape) of the reserved icon 9A changes, the appearance of the number pattern 8X does not change, so that the change in the reserved icon 9A can be more impressive to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game.
In addition, in the icon number pattern performances B and C, when the reserved icon 9A and the number pattern 8X move in association with each other, when the number pattern 8X changes, the reserved icon 9A may also change. With this configuration, when the number pattern changes, the reserved icon 9A can be expected to change, so that the player will focus on both the number pattern and the reserved icon, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display performance may be performed as one of the plurality of display performances,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of varying a decorative pattern,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined icon, which is an icon representing a hold or the change, and a number pattern including a number,
The third display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon moves,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the number pattern moves,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed.
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed, the second display performance is performed, and then the third display performance and the fourth display performance are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-1,
In the combination performance, the fourth display performance is performed when the third display performance is being performed, and the predetermined icon in the third display performance and the number pattern in the fourth display performance move in association with each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-2,
The number pattern is the same as the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-3,
In the combination performance, when the predetermined icon in the third display performance and the number pattern in the fourth display performance move in association with each other, the predetermined icon changes after moving.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
In the combination performance, the predetermined icon in the third display performance and the number pattern in the fourth display performance move in association with each other, and when the predetermined icon changes after moving, the number pattern does not change.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XA-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect XA-5,
In the combination performance, when the predetermined icon in the third display performance and the number pattern in the fourth display performance move in association with each other, the number pattern may change, and when the number pattern changes, the predetermined icon also changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The reach-time reserved icon effects A to C are explained below using Figures 68 to 70. These reach-time reserved icon effects can be executed during the decorative pattern change effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute the reach-time reserved icon effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Reach-time reserved icon production A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon performance A at the time of reaching. The pending icon performance at the time of reaching is a performance in which only the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is newly displayed from a state in which no pending icon is displayed in the pending performance executed when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reaching state. First, as shown in FIG. 68(A), when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reaching state (here, the reaching of "2↓2"), the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. The pending icons 9A and 9B are in a state in which they have disappeared from the display screen 7a. The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is a square shape and is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digestion image display area) at the center lower part of the display screen 7a. Below this pending display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the pending display area.

As shown in FIG. 68(B), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (is no longer displayed) from the display screen 7a. In other words, all reserved icons (reserved icons 9A, 9B, and the reserved icon 9C) are not displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 68(C), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a. In other words, among the reserved icons, only the reserved icon 9C is displayed, and the reserved icons 9A and 9B are not displayed. The reserved icon (variable icon) 9C that is displayed again has the same appearance as before it disappeared. The appearance here includes the shape, color, action, size, etc. of the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(D), the state of the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C changes, and a text image representing the state of the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C after the change is displayed. Here, "representing the state" includes not only the shape, color, action, and size of the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C, but also the content, name (e.g., character name), nickname, etc. represented by the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C. The order in which the state of the reserved icon 9C changes is from the state with the lowest expectation of a jackpot to the state with the highest. Here, the color of the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C changes, and a "red square" text image representing the shape and color of the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(E), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the reach state, an effect is executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C and the text image rotate together. During the rotation, as shown in FIG. 68(F), (G), and (H), an effect is executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C changes. Specifically, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is split (divided) into two pieces, and a new star-shaped reserved icon (variable icon) 9C appears from the split, and a text image representing the form of the new reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Here, a "star-shaped" text image representing the shape of the new reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. The two square-shaped pieces after the split and the "square red" text image frame out. The new reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the reserved display area (variable icon display area, reserved consumption image display area).

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(I), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the reach state, an effect is executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C and the text image rotate together. During the rotation, as shown in FIG. 68(J), an effect is executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C changes. Specifically, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C and the text image are enlarged and displayed. After that, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped in the form of a jackpot (here, "222").

[Reach-time reserved icon effect B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon performance B at the time of reaching. The pending icon performance at the time of reaching is a performance in which only the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is newly displayed from a state in which no pending icon is displayed in the pending performance executed when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reaching state. First, as shown in FIG. 69(A), four pending icons 9A and the pending icon (variable icon) 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Both the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, the pending icon 9C and the pending icon 9A have the same shape (pending icon shape), so they are also simply referred to as "pending icons 9A, 9C" collectively. The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digestion image display area) at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below this pending display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the pending display area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state (here, a reach of "2↓2"), and the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the rectangular image for indicating the position of the reserved display area disappear from the display screen 7a, and only the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. As shown in FIG. 69(C), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (is no longer displayed) from the display screen 7a. That is, all reserved icons (reserved icons 9A, 9B, the reserved icon 9C) are not displayed. Then, a specific image TG imitating the shape of a bomb is displayed. The specific image TG appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves leftward while drawing a parabola. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(D), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a. In other words, of the hold icons, only the hold icon 9C is displayed, and hold icons 9A, 9B and the horizontally long rectangular image indicating the position of the hold display area are not displayed. When the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again, it has the same appearance as it had before it disappeared. The appearance here includes the shape, color, operation, size, etc. of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C.

After that, as shown in Fig. 69(E)-(G), an effect is executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C changes. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 69(E), a specific image TG resembling a bomb explodes, and as shown in Fig. 69(F), the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C splits (is divided) into two. Then, as shown in Fig. 69(G), the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C of a new doll appears, and a text image representing the state of the new reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Here, "representing the state" includes not only the shape, color, action, and size of the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C, but also the content, name (e.g., character name), nickname, etc., represented by the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C. Here, a text image of "Character reserved" is displayed, representing the content of the new reserved icon (variable icon) 9C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(H), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the ready state, an effect is executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C and the text image rotate together. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(I), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the ready state and the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C continues to rotate, the text image "Character reserved" disappears from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped in the jackpot mode (here, "222").

[Reach-time reserved icon production C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon performance C at the time of reaching. The pending icon performance at the time of reaching is a performance in which only the pending icon (variable icon) 9C is newly displayed from a state in which no pending icon is displayed in the pending performance executed when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reaching state. First, as shown in FIG. 70(A), four pending icons 9A and the pending icon (variable icon) 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Both the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, the pending icon 9C and the pending icon 9A have the same shape (pending icon shape), so they are also simply referred to as "pending icons 9A, 9C" collectively. The pending icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the pending display area (variable icon display area, pending digestion image display area) at the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Below this pending display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the pending display area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state (here, a reach of "2↓2"), and the reserved icons 9A and 9B and the rectangular image for indicating the position of the reserved display area disappear from the display screen 7a, and only the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. As shown in FIG. 70(C), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (is no longer displayed) from the display screen 7a. That is, all the reserved icons (reserved icons 9A, 9B, the reserved icon 9C) are not displayed. Then, a specific image TG that resembles a person holding a sword is displayed. The specific image TG appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and runs to the left. After that, as shown in FIG. 70(D), while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a. In other words, of the hold icons, only the hold icon 9C is displayed, and hold icons 9A, 9B and the horizontally long rectangular image indicating the position of the hold display area are not displayed. When the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again, it has the same appearance as it had before it disappeared. The appearance here includes the shape, color, operation, size, etc. of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C.

After that, as shown in Fig. 70(E)-(G), a performance is executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C changes. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 70(E), a specific image TG that resembles a person holding a sword passes over the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C, and then, as shown in Fig. 70(F), the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C splits (is divided) into two. Then, as shown in Fig. 70(G), a new face-shaped reserved icon (variable icon) 9C appears, and a text image that represents the appearance of the new reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Here, "representing the appearance" includes not only the shape, color, action, and size of the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C, but also the content, name (e.g., character name), nickname, etc., represented by the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C. Here, a text image of "face reserved" that represents the content of the new reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(H), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the reach state, an effect is executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C and the text image rotate together. After that, as shown in FIG. 70(I), while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be in the reach state and the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C continues to rotate, the text image "Face reserved" disappears from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 70(J), an effect is executed in which a background image corresponding to the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Specifically, a background image of the same face as the face represented by the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped in a jackpot state (here, "222").

[Example of effect]
Below is an example of the effect of the hold icon presentation when a reach occurs.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 68(B), (C), 69(C), (D), 70(C), (D), during reach performance, a first performance can be executed in which only the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C corresponding to the change is newly displayed from a state in which no reserved icon is displayed on the display screen 7a. With this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 68(E)-(H), 69(E)-(G), and 70(E)-(G), after the first performance, the second performance can be executed in which the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C changes. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 68(E)-(H), 69(E)-(G), and 70(E)-(G), in the second performance, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C in the first mode is divided into multiple reserved icons 9C, and then changes to the second mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 69(C) to (G) and 70(E) to (G), in the second performance, the specific image TG moves and passes the reserved icon 9C, and then the reserved icon 9C in the first mode is divided into multiple parts. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented and novel performance, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 68(H), 69(G), and 70(G), in the second performance, the reserved icon 9C of the second mode is displayed, and a text image representing the second mode is displayed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 68(I), Fig. 69(H), and Fig. 70(H), the reserved icon 9C of the second mode rotates, and the character image also rotates. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel presentation that has not been seen before, and the interest can be increased.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the hold icon presentation when a reach is reached are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the reach-time hold icon performances A to C, a first performance is executed in which only the hold icon 9C is newly displayed from a state in which none of the hold icons 9A, 9B, or 9C are displayed. However, in the reach-time hold icon performances A to C, a first performance may be executed in which only the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9B is newly displayed from a state in which none of the hold icons 9A, 9B, or 9C are displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the effect of changing the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C shown in Fig. 68 (F) and (G) of the reserved icon effect A at the time of reach, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is split (divided) into two, and a new star-shaped reserved icon (variable icon) 9C appears from the split. However, it may be considered that the effect is being executed in which the square part of the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is split (divided) into two, and a new star-shaped figure appears from the split.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, during a reach performance, a first performance can be executed in which, from a state in which none of the reserved icons are displayed on the display means, only the reserved icon corresponding to the change is newly displayed.
◇[Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-1,
A gaming machine characterized in that, after the first effect, a second effect can be executed in which the reserved icon changes.
◇[Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-2,
A gaming machine characterized in that in the second presentation, the reserved icon in a first state is divided into multiple pieces and then changed to a second state.
◇[Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image,
A gaming machine characterized in that in the second presentation, the specific image moves and passes over the reserved icon, and then the reserved icon of the first aspect is divided into multiple parts.
◇[Aspect A7-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect A7-3 or A7-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second presentation, the pending icon of the second aspect is displayed and a text image representing the second aspect is displayed.
◇[Aspect A7-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A7-5 to A7-6,
The gaming machine of the second aspect, wherein the hold icon rotates and the text image also rotates.

The special hold effect will be explained below with reference to Figures 71 to 73. This special hold effect can be executed during the special symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a, thereby realizing the effect. The special hold effect is an effect that is performed with the same variation of the special symbol.

[Special Hold Performance A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the special reserved performance A. In this special reserved performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), an icon display performance is executed. In this icon display performance, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. In addition, a decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white in appearance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the ally character CRA is displayed. In this case, the reserved icon 9A is not displayed, and the variable icon 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop pattern arrangement. In the example of FIG. 71(D), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each 7 symbols and are displayed stopped in a jackpot pattern arrangement. In this case, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.

[Special Hold Performance B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the special reserved performance B. In this special reserved performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), an icon display performance is executed. In this icon display performance, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. In addition, a decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white in appearance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the ally character CRA is displayed. In this case, the reserved icon 9A is not displayed, and the variable icon 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), a super reach performance is performed. In this super reach performance, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed. Also, in this super reach performance, the third movable part 13 is moved from the home position (retracted position) to the deployed position (deployed position) on the display screen 7a, and a part of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop pattern arrangement. In the example of FIG. 72(D), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each 7 symbols and are displayed stopped in a jackpot pattern arrangement. In this case, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.

[Special Hold Performance C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the special reserved performance C. In this special reserved performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), an icon display performance is executed. In this icon display performance, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white. At this time, the number of reserved icons 9A is four, that is, the number of reserved is four.
In addition, in the special reserved performance C, the change icon XB1 and the reserved icon XB2 are displayed on the right sub display screen 64R. The change icon XB1 represents the performance status in the change and is an icon corresponding to the reserved icon 9C. The reserved icon XB2 is an icon representing the reserved state and is an icon corresponding to the reserved icon 9A. The reserved icon XB2 indicates the reserved number by the number of icons like the reserved icon 9A, and has the same number of icons as the reserved icon 9A. That is, when the reserved number is 3, the number of reserved icons 9A is three, but the number of reserved icons XB2 is also three. This reserved icon XB2 does not change the reserved status. The reserved icon XB2 may change the reserved status corresponding to the reserved icon 9A, or may change the reserved status differently from the reserved icon 9A. For example, the reserved icon XB2 may change the reserved status after a while after the reserved icon 9A changes the reserved status.

Next, as shown in Fig. 73 (B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the ally character CRA is displayed. In this case, the reserved icon 9A is not displayed, and the variable icon 9C is displayed.
In addition, in this reach performance, the variable icon XB1 and the reserved icon XB2 are continuously displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R.

Next, as shown in Fig. 73(C), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed. In addition, in this super reach effect, the third movable role 13 is moved from the home position (retracted position) to the deployed position (deployed position) on the display screen 7a, and a part of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are hidden.
In addition, in this reach performance, the variable icon XB1 and the reserved icon XB2 are continuously displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R.

Next, as shown in Fig. 73(D), a decorative pattern stop effect is performed. In this decorative pattern stop effect, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop pattern arrangement. In the example of Fig. 73(D), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are each 7 patterns and are displayed in a big win pattern arrangement. In this case, reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.
In addition, in this reach effect, the variable icon XB1 and the reserved icon XB2 are continuously displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned special hold effect C, the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, but this is not limited to this and they may also be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L or the main display screen 7a.
In addition, the hold icon XB2 may be displayed in a manner that allows the number of holds to be known. For example, when there are three hold icons XB2, the number "3" may be displayed.
In the above-mentioned special reserved performance, the reserved icon 9A is not displayed and the variable icon 9C is displayed during the reach performance, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the variable icon 9C is in a form different from the normal form (circular and white in the embodiment) (for example, rectangular and red), the reserved icon 9A may not be displayed.

[Example of effect]
In the special reserved performance of the above embodiment, in the same change, an icon display performance in which the reserved icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are displayed, and a reach performance in which the reserved icon 9C is displayed without displaying the reserved icon 9A is performed. Then, the reach performance is performed after the icon display performance. According to this configuration, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are recognized by the player during the icon display performance, and the variable icon 9C is emphasized more than the reserved icon 9A during the reach performance, so that the importance of the reach performance itself can be recognized by the player, and the expectation of the reach performance can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the special reserved performance of the above embodiment, in the same change, an icon display performance in which the reserved icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are displayed, a reach performance in which the reserved icon 9C is displayed without displaying the reserved icon 9A, and a super reach performance in which the reserved icon 9A and the reserved icon 9C are not displayed are performed. In this case, the reach performance is performed after the icon display performance, and then the super reach performance is performed. According to this configuration, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are recognized by the player during the icon display performance, the variable icon 9C is emphasized more than the reserved icon 9A during the reach performance, and further, the super reach performance can be emphasized during the super reach performance, so that the importance of the super reach performance itself can be recognized by the player, and the expectation of the super reach performance can be improved. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In addition, in the special reserved performance, in the super reach performance in which the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, the third movable role 13 moves in front of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, since the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, the performance of the third movable role 13 can be emphasized to the player, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display performance may be performed as one of the plurality of display performances,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a change icon representing the change and a hold icon representing the hold;
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the variable icon without displaying the reserved icon;
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance and the second display performance are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect in which the variable icon and the reserved icon are not displayed,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination performance, after the first display performance, the second display performance is performed, and then the third display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
In the combination performance, the second display performance is performed after the first display performance, and the third display performance is performed after the second display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XB-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
In the combination performance, when the third display performance is being performed, a movable role performance in which a movable role moves in front of the display means is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The icon success/failure effect will be explained below using Figures 74 to 76. This icon success/failure effect can be executed during the special symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a.

[Icon success/failure presentation A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the icon success/failure performance A. In this icon success/failure performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 74(A), a decorative pattern change performance is executed. In this decorative pattern change performance, a reserved icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed. These reserved icons 9A and the change icon 9C are circular and white. In addition, the change of the decorative pattern is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), an icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the variable icon 9C changes from a circular white form to a form representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), an icon enlargement effect is performed. In this icon enlargement effect, the variable icon 9C (also called the ally character 9C) jumps out of the variable icon display area where the variable icon is normally displayed, and then becomes even larger.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), a success/fail effect is performed. In this success/fail effect, enemy character XC1 appears and engages in a battle with ally character 9C to see who will be victorious; in other words, this is an effect that determines whether or not the battle will be successful. Note that success/fail effect broadly includes effects that determine success or failure, such as battle effects, or effects in which a specified game is played to determine whether the player will win or lose. Note that during this success/fail effect, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, but the reserved icon 9A continues to be displayed in the reserved icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), a success presentation is performed. In this success presentation, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a, text indicating victory and a speed line are displayed, and a scene of celebrating the victory unfolds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 1, the icon 9C that was an ally character changes to a premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C indicates an increased chance and an increased likelihood of winning a jackpot. This premium icon 9C may also indicate that a jackpot has been confirmed. Furthermore, the premium icon 9C is circular and white in appearance before it changes in the icon change effect, and is in an appearance different from that of an ally character after it changes in the icon change effect, and is composed of an image that combines a circular image and a triangular image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (G), icon promotion performance 2 is performed. In this icon promotion performance 2, the premium icon C that changed in icon promotion performance 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Icon success/failure presentation B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the icon success/failure performance B. In this icon success/failure performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 75(A), a decorative pattern change performance is executed. In this decorative pattern change performance, a reserved icon 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are displayed. These reserved icons 9A and the corresponding change icon 9C are circular and white. In addition, a change display of the decorative pattern is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), an icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the variable icon 9C changes from a circular white form to a form representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), an icon enlargement effect is performed. In this icon enlargement effect, the variable icon 9C (also called the ally character 9C) jumps out of the variable icon display area where the variable icon is normally displayed, and then becomes even larger.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), a success/fail effect is performed. In this success/fail effect, enemy character XC1 appears and engages in a battle with ally character 9C to see who will be victorious; in other words, this is an effect that determines whether or not the battle will be successful. Note that success/fail effect broadly includes effects that determine success or failure, such as battle effects, or effects in which a specified game is played to determine whether the player will win or lose. Note that during this success/fail effect, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, and the reserved icon 9A is not displayed in the reserved icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), a success presentation is performed. In this success presentation, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a, text indicating victory and a speed line are displayed, and a scene of celebrating the victory unfolds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 1, the icon 9C that was an ally character changes to a premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C indicates that the chances of winning have increased, and that the likelihood of winning a jackpot has increased. This premium icon 9C may also indicate that a jackpot has been confirmed. Furthermore, the premium icon 9C has a different appearance from the circular, white appearance before it changes in the icon change effect, and the appearance of the ally character after it changes in the icon change effect, and is composed of an image that combines a circular image, a triangular image, and a sword image that is part of the enemy character XC1. Without being limited to this, the premium icon 9C may include the entire enemy character XC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), icon promotion performance 2 is performed. In this icon promotion performance 2, the premium icon C that changed in icon promotion performance 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Icon success/failure presentation C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the icon success/failure performance C. In this icon success/failure performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 76(A), a decorative pattern change performance is executed. In this decorative pattern change performance, a reserved icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed. These reserved icons 9A and the change icon 9C are circular and white. In addition, a change display of the decorative pattern is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), an icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the variable icon 9C changes from a circular white form to a form representing an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), an icon enlargement effect is performed. In this icon enlargement effect, the variable icon 9C (also called the ally character 9C) jumps out of the variable icon display area where the variable icon is normally displayed, and then becomes even larger.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), a success/fail effect is performed. In this success/fail effect, enemy character XC1 appears and engages in a battle with ally character 9C to see who will be victorious; in other words, this is an effect that determines whether or not the battle will be successful. Note that success/fail effect broadly includes effects that determine success or failure, such as battle effects, or effects in which a specified game is played to determine whether the player will win or lose. Note that during this success/fail effect, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, and the reserved icon 9A is not displayed in the reserved icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(E), a success presentation is performed. In this success presentation, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a, text indicating victory and a speed line are displayed, and a scene of celebrating the victory unfolds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(F), icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 1, the icon 9C that was an ally character changes to a premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C indicates that the chances of winning have increased, and that the likelihood of winning a jackpot has increased. This premium icon 9C may also indicate that a jackpot has been confirmed. Furthermore, the premium icon 9C is in a different form from the circular, white form before it changes in the icon change effect, and the ally character after it changes in the icon change effect, and is composed of an image that combines a circular image, a triangular image, a sword image that is part of the enemy character XC1, and a star-shaped emblem image that is part of the ally character 9C. Without being limited to this, the premium icon 9C may include the entire ally character 9C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (G), icon promotion performance 2 is performed. In this icon promotion performance 2, the premium icon C that changed in icon promotion performance 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned icon success/failure performance, the variable icon 9C undergoes a first change in the icon change performance, and if the success/failure performance is successful (if it wins), a success performance is performed and a second change is performed in the icon promotion performance 1, but this is not limited to this, and one of the reserved icons 9A may be targeted for a first change in the icon change performance, and if the success/failure performance is successful (if it wins), a success performance is performed and a second change is performed in the icon promotion performance 1. In this case, in the icon promotion performance 2, the changed icon may return to the position where it was originally displayed, or may move to the position of a different icon and change with the icon displayed in that position.
In the above-mentioned icon success/failure performance, the variable icon 9C is moved to the variable icon display area in the icon promotion performance 2, but this is not limited to this, and the variable icon 9C may be moved to one of the other pending icons 9A and changed into that pending icon 9A.
In the above-mentioned icon success/failure presentation, the variable icon 9C undergoes its first change in an icon change presentation, but this is not limited to this. The pending icon 9A may undergo an icon change presentation to undergo its first change, and then after it becomes the variable icon 9C, an icon enlargement presentation, a success/failure presentation, a success presentation, an icon promotion presentation 1, and an icon promotion presentation 2 may be performed.

[Example of effect]
In the icon success/failure presentation of the above embodiment, the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is displayed, and then one of these icons changes, and then the success/failure presentation is performed. If the success/failure presentation is successful (if the battle is won), the one icon changes again. According to this configuration, the success/failure presentation is performed by changing one icon, and if the success/failure presentation is successful, the icon changes again, so that the gradual changes of the icon can be made more varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.
In addition, when the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is displayed and one of these icons changes thereafter, the changed icon changes to an icon representing an ally character, and a success/failure presentation is performed using this ally character and an enemy character. According to this configuration, since the success/failure presentation is performed using an icon representing a character whose one icon has changed and an enemy character, the success/failure presentation and the change in one icon can be linked, and the success/failure presentation can make the player feel like rooting for the ally character, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XC-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display performance may be performed as one of the plurality of display performances,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect in which a predetermined icon among an icon group consisting of a change icon representing the change or a hold icon representing a hold is displayed in a first form,
the second display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon displayed in the first form is changed and displayed in a second form,
The third display effect is an effect in which a success/fail effect is performed to determine success or failure using the predetermined icon displayed in the second form,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed, then the second display performance is performed, and then the third display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon displayed in the second form is changed to be displayed in a third form when the success/failure effect is successful,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed, and then the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-2,
The predetermined icon of the second form is a first character.
A gaming machine characterized by the above [Aspect XC-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-3,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an effect of displaying a second character different from the first character,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XC-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XC-4,
In the combination presentation, in the third display presentation, the success/failure presentation is performed using the first character and the second character.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The icon selection effect will be explained below using Figures 77 to 79. This icon selection effect can be executed during the special symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a, thereby realizing the effect.

[Icon selection effect A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection performance A. In this icon selection performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a decorative pattern change performance is executed. In this decorative pattern change performance, a reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. These reserved icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white. Among the reserved icons 9A, the reserved icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first reserved icon 9A, the reserved icon 9A second closest to the variable icon is also called the second reserved icon 9A, the reserved icon 9A third closest to the variable icon is also called the third reserved icon 9A, and the reserved icon 9A furthest from the variable icon is also called the fourth reserved icon 9A. The reserved icon corresponding to the first reserved icon 9A is the oldest reserved icon, the reserved icon corresponding to the second reserved icon 9A is the second oldest reserved icon, the reserved icon corresponding to the third reserved icon 9A is the third oldest reserved icon, and the reserved icon corresponding to the fourth reserved icon 9A is the newest reserved icon. In the example of FIG. 77(A), the first reserved icon 9A to the third reserved icon 9A are displayed. In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner by the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), icon selection performance 1 is performed. In this icon selection performance 1, the third hold icon 9A changes to a selection image XD1 including a character A and a star image. The character A included in the selection image XD1 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character A has a relatively low likelihood of a jackpot. The star image included in the selection image XD1 also represents the likelihood of a jackpot by the number of stars, and as this star image has only one star, the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively low. In the selection image XD1, the character A and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), icon selection performance 2 is performed. In this icon selection performance 2, the third hold icon 9A changes to a selection image XD2 including a character B and a star image. The character B included in the selection image XD2 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character B has a medium likelihood of a jackpot. The star image included in the selection image XD2 represents the likelihood of a jackpot by the number of stars, and as this star image has two stars, the likelihood of a jackpot is medium. In the selection image XD2, character B and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), icon selection performance 3 is performed. In this icon selection performance 3, the third hold icon 9A changes to a selection image XD3 including a character C and a star image. The character C included in the selection image XD3 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character C has a relatively high likelihood of a jackpot. The star image included in the selection image XD3 also represents the likelihood of a jackpot by the number of stars, and as this star image has three stars, the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively high. In the selection image XD3, the character C and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

After that, icon selection effects 1 to 3 are executed repeatedly, that is, the third hold icon 9A is displayed changing rapidly between selection image XD1 to selection image XD3. Next, as shown in FIG. 77(E), an icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination effect, the third hold icon 9A is determined to be any of the third hold icons 9A in icon selection effects 1 to 3, and stops. In this case, the following description will be given assuming that the third hold icon 9A has been determined to be selection image XD2, as shown in FIG. 77(E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), an icon movement effect is performed. In this icon movement effect, the third reserved icon 9A that was determined to be the selected image XD2 in the icon determination effect described above shifts to the second reserved icon 9A, then to the first reserved icon 9A, and finally to the variable icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(G), a battle presentation is performed. In this battle presentation, the selection image XD2, which has shifted to the variable icon display area in the state of the selection image XD2, jumps out of the variable icon display area, moves to approximately the center of the main display screen 7a, and is enlarged and displayed as the selection image XD22. In this selection image XD22, a giant character B and a star image representing two giant stars are displayed together with the word "expectation level". In the selection image XD22, the character B and the star image representing two stars indicate that the expectation level of a big win is medium, as in the selection image XD2. In addition, in the battle presentation, a smiley face image XD4 is displayed, and a battle is conducted between the smiley face image XD4 and the character B of the selection image XD22. If the player wins this battle, the player wins, and a big win pattern arrangement is displayed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. If the player loses the battle, the player loses, and a lose pattern arrangement is displayed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Icon selection effect B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection performance B. In this icon selection performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a decorative pattern change performance is executed. In this decorative pattern change performance, a reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. These reserved icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white. Among the reserved icons 9A, the reserved icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first reserved icon 9A, the reserved icon 9A second closest to the variable icon is also called the second reserved icon 9A, the reserved icon 9A third closest to the variable icon is also called the third reserved icon 9A, and the reserved icon 9A furthest from the variable icon is also called the fourth reserved icon 9A. The reserved icon corresponding to the first reserved icon 9A is the oldest reserved icon, the reserved icon corresponding to the second reserved icon 9A is the second oldest reserved icon, the reserved icon corresponding to the third reserved icon 9A is the third oldest reserved icon, and the reserved icon corresponding to the fourth reserved icon 9A is the newest reserved icon. In the example of FIG. 78(A), the first reserved icon 9A to the third reserved icon 9A are displayed. In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner by the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), icon selection performance 1 is performed. In this icon selection performance 1, the third hold icon 9A changes to a selection image XD1 including a character A and a star image. The character A included in the selection image XD1 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character A has a relatively low likelihood of a jackpot. The star image included in the selection image XD1 also represents the likelihood of a jackpot by the number of stars, and as this star image has only one star, the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively low. In the selection image XD1, the character A and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), icon selection performance 2 is performed. In this icon selection performance 2, the third hold icon 9A changes to a selection image XD2 including a character B and a star image. The character B included in the selection image XD2 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character B has a medium likelihood of a jackpot. The star image included in the selection image XD2 represents the likelihood of a jackpot by the number of stars, and as this star image has two stars, the likelihood of a jackpot is medium. In the selection image XD2, character B and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (D), icon selection performance 3 is performed. In this icon selection performance 3, the third hold icon 9A changes to a selection image XD3 including a character C and a star image. The character C included in the selection image XD3 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character C has a relatively high likelihood of a jackpot. The star image included in the selection image XD3 also represents the likelihood of a jackpot by the number of stars, and as this star image has three stars, the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively high. In the selection image XD3, the character C and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

After that, icon selection effects 1 to 3 are executed repeatedly, that is, the third hold icon 9A is displayed changing rapidly between selection image XD1 to selection image XD3. Next, as shown in FIG. 78(E), an icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination effect, the third hold icon 9A is determined to be any of the third hold icons 9A in icon selection effects 1 to 3, and stops. In this case, the following description will be given assuming that the third hold icon 9A is determined to be selection image XD1, as shown in FIG. 78(E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (F), icon movement performance 1 is performed. In this icon movement performance 1, the third reserved icon 9A, which was determined to be the selected image XD1 in the icon determination performance described above, changes (is promoted) to the selected image XD2 when it shifts to the second reserved icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), icon movement performance 2 is performed. In this icon movement performance 2, the second reserved icon 9A, which changed to the selection image XD2 in the above-mentioned icon movement performance 1, shifts in this state to the first reserved icon 9A, and finally shifts to the variable icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(H), a battle presentation is performed. In this battle presentation, the selection image XD2, which has shifted to the variable icon display area in the state of the selection image XD2, jumps out of the variable icon display area, moves to approximately the center of the main display screen 7a, and is enlarged and displayed as the selection image XD22. In this selection image XD22, a giant character B and a star image representing two giant stars are displayed together with the word "expectation level". In the selection image XD22, the character B and the star image representing two stars indicate that the expectation level of a big win is medium, as in the selection image XD2. In addition, in the battle presentation, a smiley face image XD4 is displayed, and a battle is conducted between the smiley face image XD4 and the character B of the selection image XD22. If the player wins this battle, the player wins, and a big win pattern arrangement is displayed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. If the player loses the battle, the player loses, and a lose pattern arrangement is displayed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Icon selection effect C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection performance C. In this icon selection performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a decorative pattern change performance is executed. In this decorative pattern change performance, a reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. These reserved icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white. Among the reserved icons 9A, the reserved icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first reserved icon 9A, the reserved icon 9A second closest to the variable icon is also called the second reserved icon 9A, the reserved icon 9A third closest to the variable icon is also called the third reserved icon 9A, and the reserved icon 9A furthest from the variable icon is also called the fourth reserved icon 9A. The reserved icon corresponding to the first reserved icon 9A is the oldest reserved icon, the reserved icon corresponding to the second reserved icon 9A is the second oldest reserved icon, the reserved icon corresponding to the third reserved icon 9A is the third oldest reserved icon, and the reserved icon corresponding to the fourth reserved icon 9A is the newest reserved icon. In the example of FIG. 79(A), the first reserved icon 9A to the third reserved icon 9A are displayed. In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner by the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), icon selection performance 1 is performed. In this icon selection performance 1, the variable icon 9C changes to a selection image XD1 including a character A and a star image. The character A included in the selection image XD1 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character A has a relatively low likelihood of a jackpot. The star image included in the selection image XD1 represents the likelihood of a jackpot by the number of stars, and as this star image has only one star, the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively low. In the selection image XD1, the character A and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), icon selection performance 2 is performed. In this icon selection performance 2, the variable icon 9C changes to a selection image XD2 including a character B and a star image. The character B included in the selection image XD2 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character B has a medium likelihood of a jackpot. The star image included in the selection image XD2 represents the likelihood of a jackpot by the number of stars, and as this star image has two stars, the likelihood of a jackpot is medium. In the selection image XD2, character B and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), icon selection performance 3 is performed. In this icon selection performance 3, the variable icon 9C changes to a selection image XD3 including a character C and a star image. The character C included in the selection image XD3 represents the likelihood of a jackpot, and this character C has a relatively high likelihood of a jackpot. The star image included in the selection image XD3 also represents the likelihood of a jackpot by the number of stars, and as this star image has three stars, the likelihood of a jackpot is relatively high. In the selection image XD3, the character C and the star image are displayed in correspondence with each other.

After that, icon selection effects 1 to 3 are executed repeatedly, that is, the variable icon 9C is displayed changing rapidly between selection image XD1 to selection image XD3. Next, as shown in FIG. 79(E), an icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination effect, the variable icon 9C is determined to be one of the variable icons 9C in icon selection effects 1 to 3, and stops. In this case, the following description will be given assuming that the variable icon 9C is determined to be selection image XD2, as shown in FIG. 79(E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(F), a battle presentation is performed. In this battle presentation, the selection image XD2 jumps out of the variable icon display area, moves to approximately the center of the main display screen 7a, and is enlarged and displayed as the selection image XD22. In this selection image XD22, a giant character B and a star image representing two giant stars are displayed together with the word "Expectation". In the selection image XD22, the character B and the star image representing two stars indicate that the expectation of a big win is medium, as in the selection image XD2. In addition, in the battle presentation, a smiley face image XD4 is displayed, and a battle is conducted between the smiley face image XD4 and the character B of the selection image XD22. If the player wins this battle, it is a big win, and a big win pattern arrangement is displayed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and if the player loses the battle, it is a loss, and a loss pattern arrangement is displayed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Modification]
In the icon selection performance A, the star image (expectation level display) is in a different position during the battle performance than when the variable icon 9C is displayed (during the icon movement performance), but this is not limited thereto and may be in the same position as when the variable icon 9C is displayed (during the icon movement performance). Also, during the battle performance, the variable icon 9C is not displayed in the variable icon display area, but may be displayed. In this case, the same icon as the selection image XD2 during the icon movement performance is displayed.
In the above-mentioned icon selection effects, icon selection effects 1 to 3 each have different characters A to C, or star images each have a different number of stars, but this is not limited to this and the same character or star images with the same number of stars may also exist.
In the above-mentioned icon selection presentation, after the icon movement presentation, a battle presentation is performed using character B of the selected image XD22, but this is not limited to this, and a super reach presentation may be performed using character B.
In the above-mentioned icon selection performance, the selection images XD1 to XD3 are displayed in association with characters and star images in which the number of stars indicates the degree of expectation. However, this is not limited to this, and the selection images XD1 to XD3 may be displayed in association with the number of rounds when a jackpot is hit, the degree of expectation of a special chance, etc.

[Example of effect]
In the icon selection performance, a decorative pattern change performance is performed to display the change icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A, and an icon selection performance 1 is performed in which a predetermined icon, which is one of the icons, is changed to one star and character A, which indicates that the expectation level is relatively low, an icon selection performance 2 is performed in which the predetermined reserved icon 9A is changed to two stars and character B, which indicates that the expectation level is medium, and an icon selection performance 3 is performed in which the predetermined reserved icon 9A is changed to three stars and character C, which indicates that the expectation level is relatively high. Then, the icon selection performances 1 to 3 are repeated, and one icon is determined from the predetermined icons displayed in the icon selection performances 1 to 3 in the icon determination performance. According to this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to which icon of which expectation level will be determined, or which character icon will be determined, and interest in the game can be increased. As a result, the fun and excitement of the game can be increased.
In the icon selection performance A, after one reserved icon 9A is determined in the icon determination performance by performing icon selection performances 1 to 3, the reserved icon 9A is moved in the icon movement performance (reserved shift). With this configuration, the player can predict that the reserved icon 9A will become the variable icon 9C, and the player can continue to be interested in the subsequent progress. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XD-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display performance may be performed as one of the plurality of display performances,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a group of icons consisting of a plurality of icons,
The second display effect is an effect in which a predetermined icon among the group of icons changes in a plurality of ways,
The third display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon that changes in the plurality of modes is determined to be one mode among the plurality of modes,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed, then the second display performance is performed, and then the third display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-1,
In the second display performance, when the predetermined icon changes in the plurality of modes, an expectation display indicating a jackpot expectation is included in each of the plurality of modes.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-2,
In the second display performance, when the predetermined icon changes in the plurality of modes, each of the plurality of modes includes the expectation display and a character display representing a character,
The expectation level display and the character display are associated with each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XD-3,
The predetermined icon is a hold icon representing a hold.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XD-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XD-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon determined in one of the plurality of aspects moves in a state of the determined aspect,
The combination effect includes the fourth display effect,
In the combination performance, the fourth display performance is performed after the third display performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The special icon change effect will be explained below with reference to Figures 80 to 82. This special icon change effect can be executed during the special symbol change effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a.

[Expected jackpot by icon]
FIG. 80 is a jackpot expectation table XE1 by icon. Specifically, the jackpot expectation table XE1 by icon shown in FIG. 80 shows a plurality of patterns in which the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C changes and the corresponding jackpot expectation. For example, the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C may be circular or rectangular, and may be blue, green, or red in the case of a circular shape, and may be green, red, or gold in the case of a rectangular shape. Also, when the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C changes to a circular shape and blue, the jackpot expectation is 10%, when the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C changes to a circular shape and blue, the jackpot expectation is 30%, when the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C changes to a circular shape and green, the jackpot expectation is 50%, when the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C changes to a rectangular shape and green, the jackpot expectation is 40%, when the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C changes to a rectangular shape and red, the jackpot expectation is 60%, and when the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C changes to a rectangular shape and gold, the jackpot expectation is 80%. The sub-control board 90 distinguishes in advance whether the icon is a big win or a miss based on the variation pattern command sent from the image control microcomputer 101, and changes the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C so that it becomes like the icon-specific big win expectation table XE1. The reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is usually circular and white, but can change to any of the modes in the icon-specific big win expectation table XE1, and can then change to another mode in the icon-specific big win expectation table XE1. In this case, when the icon changes, it changes to a mode in which the big win expectation does not decrease from the previous big win expectation. For example, when the icon changes from a circular white to a circular green (big win expectation 30%), the icon then changes to any of the following colors, which have a higher big win expectation than the circular green: a circular red (big win expectation 50%), a square green (big win expectation 40%), a square red (big win expectation 60%), or a square gold (big win expectation 80%).

The icon-specific jackpot expectation table XE1 has the following characteristics: Among multiple circular icon patterns, the red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation, has a higher jackpot expectation than the green square icon, which is the pattern with the lowest jackpot expectation among multiple square icon patterns.
Furthermore, among the multiple patterns of circular icons, the red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest probability of winning, has a configuration with a lower probability of winning than the red square icon, which is the pattern with the second highest probability of winning among the multiple patterns of square icons.
Furthermore, among the multiple patterns of circular icons, the red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest probability of winning, has a configuration with a lower probability of winning than the gold square icon, which is the pattern with the highest probability of winning among the multiple patterns of square icons.
Additionally, square icons are configured to be larger than circular icons.

[Special Icon Change A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the icon special change performance A. In this icon special change performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is executed. In this decorative pattern change performance, a reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. These reserved icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white in the normal state. Among the reserved icons 9A, the reserved icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first reserved icon 9A, the reserved icon 9A second closest to the variable icon is also called the second reserved icon 9A, the reserved icon 9A third closest to the variable icon is also called the third reserved icon 9A, and the reserved icon 9A farthest from the variable icon is also called the fourth reserved icon 9A. The reserved icon corresponding to the first reserved icon 9A is the oldest reserved icon, the reserved icon corresponding to the second reserved icon 9A is the second oldest reserved icon, the reserved icon corresponding to the third reserved icon 9A is the third oldest reserved icon, and the reserved icon corresponding to the fourth reserved icon 9A is the newest reserved icon. In the example of Fig. 81 (A), the first reserved icon 9A to the third reserved icon 9A are displayed. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used to perform a variable display of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), icon change effect 1 is performed. In this icon change effect, the third reserved icon 9A continues to be circular and turns blue. At this point, the probability of a big win is 10%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), icon change effect 2 is performed. In this icon change effect 2, the third reserved icon 9A shifts to become the second reserved icon 9A, and while continuing to be circular, it changes to green. At this point, the probability of a big win is 30%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), icon change effect 3 is performed. In this icon change effect 3, the second reserved icon 9A shifts and becomes the first reserved icon 9A, and the green color continues while changing from a circle to a square. The probability of a big win at this point is 40%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(E), the change performance is performed. In this change performance, the first reserved icon 9A shifts to become the change performance icon 9C, and various performances using the character CRA are performed. After that, in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot pattern arrangement is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the case of a miss, a miss pattern arrangement is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Special Icon Change Performance B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the icon special change performance B. In this icon special change performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is executed. In this decorative pattern change performance, a reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. These reserved icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are circular and white in the normal state. Among the reserved icons 9A, the reserved icon 9A closest to the variable icon is also called the first reserved icon 9A, the reserved icon 9A second closest to the variable icon is also called the second reserved icon 9A, the reserved icon 9A third closest to the variable icon is also called the third reserved icon 9A, and the reserved icon 9A farthest from the variable icon is also called the fourth reserved icon 9A. The reserved icon corresponding to the first reserved icon 9A is the oldest reserved icon, the reserved icon corresponding to the second reserved icon 9A is the second oldest reserved icon, the reserved icon corresponding to the third reserved icon 9A is the third oldest reserved icon, and the reserved icon corresponding to the fourth reserved icon 9A is the newest reserved icon. In the example of Fig. 82 (A), the first reserved icon 9A to the third reserved icon 9A are displayed. In addition, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used to perform a variable display of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), icon change effect 1 is performed. In this icon change effect, the third reserved icon 9A continues to be circular and turns blue. At this point, the probability of a big win is 10%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), icon change effect 2 is performed. In this icon change effect 2, the third reserved icon 9A shifts to become the second reserved icon 9A, and changes from a circle to a square while also turning green. The probability of a jackpot at this point is 40%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), icon change effect 3 is performed. In this icon change effect 3, the second reserved icon 9A shifts to become the first reserved icon 9A, and changes to red while continuing to be a square. At this point, the probability of a big win is 60%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), the change performance is performed. In this change performance, the first reserved icon 9A shifts to become the change performance icon 9C, and changes to gold while continuing to be a square. The expected probability of a big win at this point is 80%. In addition, in the change performance, various performances using the character CRA are performed. After that, in the case of a big win, a big win pattern arrangement is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the case of a loss, a loss pattern arrangement is formed using the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Modification]
In the special icon change performance, the icon may be changed from a low probability of winning to a high probability of winning, and then changed back to a low probability of winning. In this case, the icon may be configured to have a higher probability of winning after changing from a low probability of winning to a high probability of winning, than when changing to a high probability of winning.
In the above-mentioned special icon change performance, the icon is changed so that the probability of winning a jackpot does not decrease from the previous probability of winning a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the icon may be changed so that the probability of winning a jackpot decreases from the previous probability of winning a jackpot. In this case, it may be determined that the jackpot has been won as a special case that breaks the rule.
In the special icon change performance, the icon may be changed to a different shape (e.g., triangle) in addition to a circle or a square. In that case, if the colors are the same, the square may have a higher chance of winning than the circle, and the triangle may have a higher chance of winning than the square.

[Example of effect]
In the above-mentioned special icon change performance, one of the reserved icons 9A or the variable icons 9C may be displayed in a circular or square shape, or in a different color. In addition, if the reserved icon 9A or one of the variable icons 9C is circular, it may be displayed in a plurality of patterns, such as blue, green, and red. Furthermore, if the reserved icon 9A or one of the variable icons 9C is square, it may be displayed in a plurality of patterns, such as green, red, and gold. According to this configuration, the reserved icon 9A or the variable icon 9C can be changed in various patterns, and various icon change modes can be provided to the player. As a result, the player's interest in the icons can be increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XE-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a predetermined icon among an icon group consisting of the change icon representing the change or a hold icon representing a hold is displayed in either a first form or a second form different from the first form.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-1,
the predetermined icon of the first form has a plurality of patterns;
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the first form each have the same shape and each have a different aspect portion.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-2,
the predetermined icon of the second form has a plurality of patterns;
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the second form each have the same shape and each have a different aspect portion.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XE-3,
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the first form each have the same shape and a different color.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XE-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-4,
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the second form each have the same shape and a different color.
A gaming machine characterized by:
The above aspect may be modified as follows.
The icon may change from a predetermined icon in a first form to an icon in a second form.
The pattern having the highest expectation of winning among the plurality of patterns of the icon in the first form may be configured to have a higher expectation of winning than the pattern having the lowest expectation of winning among the plurality of patterns of the icon in the second form.
Among the multiple patterns of the icon in the first form, the pattern with the highest expectation of a jackpot may be configured to have a lower expectation of a jackpot than the pattern with the second highest expectation of a jackpot among the multiple patterns of the icon in the second form.
Among the multiple patterns of the icon in the first form, the pattern with the highest expectation of winning may be configured to have a lower expectation of winning than the pattern with the highest expectation of winning among the multiple patterns of the icon in the second form.
The icon in the second form is larger than the icon in the first form.

The floating icon jump effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 83 to 85. In Figures 83 to 85, for example, the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, and other movable parts arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing.

This variable icon jump performance can be executed while the decorative pattern is performing a variable performance (during variable display). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command to execute the variable icon jump performance is included, it reads out corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission mode of the second movable role 15 provided on the game board 2.

Here, we will first explain the variable icon jump effect A, then explain variable icon jump effect B, and finally explain variable icon jump effect C.

[The variable icon jump performance A]
The variable icon jump performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 83. Fig. 83 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump performance A. The variable icon jump performance A is performed during the variable performance (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 83(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (change display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the change performance (change display) of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

In addition, a sub-variable area is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a in which small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz, which correspond to left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed (displayed). The small decorative patterns are always opaque, and do not become semi-transparent even when they start to change, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the display (display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R starts, the display (display) of the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz starts in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as stopped, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz are also displayed as stopped.

Even if any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as provisional stops (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as provisional stops with the same pattern, forming a reach), the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz (for example, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as provisional stops, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as provisional stops, the small right decorative pattern 8Rz) are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) continues.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, but do not match the same pattern, resulting in a miss, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz may be the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or they may be completely different patterns.

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, and no reserved icons are displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there are no reserved icons that have been stocked and have not been consumed. For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a with a space between them. These numbers are displayed as numbers representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In FIG. 83(A), the decorative pattern change performance (change display) starts, and the change icon jump performance A starts. Then, as shown in FIG. 83(B), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the change performance (change display) by the middle decorative pattern 8C continues, and a flash FH1 is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the change display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad are not at all difficult to see due to the flash FH1, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. Also, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are made difficult to see due to the flash FH1, and disappear completely from the display screen 7a. In contrast, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz are not difficult to see due to the flash FH1, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, when the flash FH1 disappears, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R remain completely disappeared from the display screen 7a, and the size of the variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd increases as it jumps up (starts to move) toward the center of the display screen 7a.

When the change icon 9C reaches the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 83(C), the size of the change icon 9C becomes approximately 2.5 times larger than the size of the change icon 9C at the change display position 9Cd.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), a flash of light FH2 is emitted from the center of the variable icon 9C. Then, as shown in FIG. 83(E), the variable icon 9C becomes difficult to see due to the flash of light FH2 and disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad also become difficult to see due to the flash of light FH2 and temporarily disappear from the display screen 7a. In contrast, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz are not difficult to see due to the flash of light FH2 and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the flash FH2 disappears, as shown in FIG. 83(F), the left decorative pattern 8L stopped at the number "1" and the right decorative pattern 8R stopped at the number "3" are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the white spherical variable icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C. In other words, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful. This star-shaped variable icon 9C repeatedly rotates in a display mode in which its left side passes through the front side and faces its right side. Note that in FIG. 83(F), the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful by changing from the white spherical variable icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C, but if the white spherical variable icon 9C does not change to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C and remains as the white spherical variable icon 9C, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is unsuccessful.

Next, when cracks run through the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8 and they are shattered, the variable icon 9C starts to move down (starts to move) while shrinking toward the variable display position 9Cd while still spinning. As the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8 are shattered, the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts again.

Next, when the variable icon 9C has completed moving to the variable display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 83(G), the size of the variable icon 9C returns to the size it had before it jumped up (i.e., the size of the white spherical variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd shown in FIG. 83(B)), and it begins to spin around.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a temporary stop with the same pattern (number) (here, they are temporarily stopped with the number "7"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a variable effect (variable display) to form a reach. At this time, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as a temporary stop, and the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz continue to display as a variable effect (variable display).

Then, as shown in FIG. 83(I), the second movable prop 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position (lower advance position (lower performance position)) in front of (in front of) the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and near the bottom edge, where it stops for a predetermined period of time (e.g., about 1.5 seconds), and then, as shown in FIG. 83(J), it returns to the retracted position (home position).

Then, various effects may continue. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), a jackpot is awarded and a jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins. On the other hand, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same pattern (here, the number "7"), a miss is awarded. When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, a small left decorative pattern 8L, a small middle decorative pattern 8C, and a small right decorative pattern 8R are also stopped and displayed. When a jackpot or a miss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the second movable device 15 is stopped in front of the display screen 7a at a position (lower advance position (lower performance position)) near the bottom edge for a predetermined period of time (e.g., about 1.5 seconds), the second movable device 15 is positioned in front of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad, making the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad difficult for the player to see. Of course, if the reserved icon 9A is present, the second movable device 15 is positioned in front of the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad, making the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad difficult for the player to see.

When the second movable device 15 stops in front of the display screen 7a at a position (lower advance position (lower performance position)) near the bottom edge for a predetermined time (e.g., about 1.5 seconds), the variable icon 9C may change to another icon, suggesting an increase in the likelihood of a big win. By positioning the second movable device 15 in front of the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad are difficult for the player to see, allowing the player to expect an increase in the likelihood of a big win. At this time, the variable icon 9C may not change, and the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad may change color or shape. Even in this case, the player can expect an increase in the likelihood of a big win.

[The variable icon jump performance B]
Next, the variable icon jump performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 84. Fig. 84 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump performance B. The variable icon jump performance B is performed during the variable performance (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 84(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (change display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the change performance (change display) of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

In addition, a sub-variable area is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a in which small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz, which correspond to left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed (displayed). The small decorative patterns are always opaque, and do not become semi-transparent even when they start to change, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the display (display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R starts, the display (display) of the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz starts in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as stopped, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz are also displayed as stopped.

Even if any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as provisional stops (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as provisional stops with the same pattern, forming a reach), the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz (for example, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as provisional stops, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as provisional stops, the small right decorative pattern 8Rz) are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) continues.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, but do not match the same pattern, resulting in a miss, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz may be the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or they may be completely different patterns.

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, and no reserved icons are displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there are no reserved icons that have been stocked and have not been consumed. For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a with a space between them. These numbers are displayed as numbers representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In Figure 84 (A), the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts, and then when the changing icon jump performance B starts, as shown in Figure 84 (B), a disk image EG appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the disk image EG moves at high speed toward the changing icon 9C at the changing display position 9Cd and collides with it. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R during the change performance (changing display) all disappear from the display screen 7a before the disk image EG appears.

When the disk image EG collides with the variable icon 9C, the variable icon 9C flies up (starts moving) toward the center of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 84(C), a flash of light FH is emitted from the variable display position 9Cd to the top edge of the display screen 7a, making the variable icon 9C difficult to see due to the flash of light FH. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd may temporarily become difficult to see due to the flash of light FH and disappear from the display screen 7a, whereas the pending display position 9Ad is not difficult to see due to the flash of light FH and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Also, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz are not difficult to see due to the flash of light FH and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, when the flash FH1 starts to disappear, the presence of the variable icon 9C can be gradually seen in the center of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 84(D), the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and a message MG1 saying "UP!", which indicates an increase in the probability of a big win, is displayed on the display screen 7a in a state of inclination upward to the right above the variable icon 9C. In other words, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful. This star-shaped variable icon 9C repeatedly rotates around in a display mode in which its left side passes through the front side and faces its right side. Note that in FIG. 84(D), the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful by changing from the white spherical variable icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C, but if the white spherical variable icon 9C does not change to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C and remains the white spherical variable icon 9C, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is unsuccessful.

When the change icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the size of the star-shaped change icon 9C becomes approximately 2.5 times larger than the size of the white spherical change icon 9C at the change display position 9Cd.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), when the variable icon 9C starts to move down (starts moving) toward the variable display position 9Cd while still spinning, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, when the variable icon 9C has completed moving to the variable display position 9Cd, the variable icon 9C maintains its spinning state as shown in FIG. 84(F).

Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R that are undergoing a variable performance (variable display) are displayed again and appear on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 84(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a temporary stop with the same pattern (number) (here, they are temporarily stopped with the number "7"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a variable effect (variable display) to form a reach. At this time, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as a temporary stop, and the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz continue to display as a variable effect (variable display).

Then, as shown in Figure 84 (I), the second movable prop 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position (lower advance position (lower performance position)) in front of (in front of) the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and near the bottom edge, where it stops for a predetermined period of time (e.g., about 1.5 seconds), and then, as shown in Figure 84 (J), it returns to the retracted position (home position).

Then, various effects may continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "7"), a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins, whereas when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "7"), a miss occurs. When a jackpot or miss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the second movable device 15 is stopped in front of the display screen 7a at a position (lower advance position (lower performance position)) near the bottom edge for a predetermined period of time (e.g., about 1.5 seconds), the second movable device 15 is positioned in front of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad, making the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad difficult for the player to see. Of course, if the reserved icon 9A is present, the second movable device 15 is positioned in front of the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad, making the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad difficult for the player to see.

When the second movable device 15 stops in front of the display screen 7a at a position (lower advance position (lower performance position)) near the bottom edge for a predetermined time (e.g., about 1.5 seconds), the variable icon 9C may change to another icon, suggesting an increase in the likelihood of a big win. By positioning the second movable device 15 in front of the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad are difficult for the player to see, allowing the player to expect an increase in the likelihood of a big win. At this time, the variable icon 9C may not change, and the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad may change color or shape. Even in this case, the player can expect an increase in the likelihood of a big win.

[The variable icon jump performance C]
Next, the variable icon jump performance C will be described with reference to Fig. 85. Fig. 85 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump performance C. The variable icon jump performance C is performed during the variable performance (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 85(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (change display) of the decorative pattern (pattern: number "1" to number "9") starts. When the change performance (change display) of the decorative pattern starts, the decorative pattern displayed as stopped changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, and changes at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping, changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is displayed as a temporary stop, or is displayed as a stop (is displayed as a temporary stop, and then is displayed as a stop). In addition, when the decorative pattern is displayed as a temporary stop, it is displayed as a display mode in which it moves slowly in small vertical movements.

In addition, a sub-variable area is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a in which small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz, which correspond to left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed (displayed). The small decorative patterns are always opaque, and do not become semi-transparent even when they start to change, and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the display (display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R starts, the display (display) of the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz starts in the sub-variable area, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all displayed as stopped, and at the same time, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz are also displayed as stopped.

Even if any one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as provisional stops (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as provisional stops with the same pattern, forming a reach), the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz (for example, even if the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as provisional stops, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, and even if the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as provisional stops, the small right decorative pattern 8Rz) are all in a state where the variable performance (variable display) continues.

In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, but do not match the same pattern, resulting in a miss, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz may be the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, or they may be completely different patterns.

In contrast, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and they line up to form the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz will line up to form the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, and no reserved icons are displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there are no reserved icons that have been stocked and have not been consumed. For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a with a space between them. These numbers are displayed as numbers representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In Figure 85 (A), the decorative pattern change performance (change display) starts, and then when the change icon jump performance C starts, as shown in Figure 85 (B), the change display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a. Then, the change icon 9C that was displayed at the change display position 9Cd jumps up (starts moving) toward the center of the display screen 7a.

When the variable icon 9C reaches the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 85(C), the variable icon 9C swells (i.e., the size of the white spherical icon increases) and explodes. At this time, the size of the variable icon 9C is approximately 2.5 times larger than the size of the variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd. Note that in FIG. 85(C), there are also cases where the variable icon 9C does not swell (i.e., the size of the white spherical icon increases) and explodes, but instead cracks and shatters.

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R during the change performance (change display) disappear from the display screen 7a before the change icon 9C swells (i.e. the white spherical icon gets larger) and explodes, or before the change icon 9C swells (i.e. the white spherical icon gets larger) and cracks and shatters. In contrast, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz during the change performance (change display) do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, when the variable icon 9C swells (i.e., the size of the white spherical icon becomes larger) and explodes, or when the variable icon 9C swells (i.e., the size of the white spherical icon becomes larger) and cracks run through the variable icon 9C and it is shattered, as shown in FIG. 85(D), the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical variable icon 9C to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C. That is, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful. This star-shaped variable icon 9C repeatedly rotates around in a display mode in which its left side passes through the front side and faces its right side. Note that in FIG. 85(D), the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical variable icon 9C to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C, and the icon change of the variable icon 9C is successful, but if the white spherical variable icon 9C does not change to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C and remains as a white spherical variable icon 9C, the icon change of the variable icon 9C is unsuccessful. Also, in FIG. 85(C), if the variable icon 9C does not expand (i.e. the size of the white spherical icon increases) and instead shrinks back to its original size, the variable icon 9C will remain in the form of a white sphere, and the icon change of the variable icon 9C will have failed.

Then, while the variable icon 9C is still spinning, it starts to shrink and move down (starts moving) towards the variable display position 9Cd, and when the variable icon 9C has completed moving to the position before it jumped up, the size of the variable icon 9C returns to the size it was before it jumped up (i.e., the size of the white spherical variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd shown in Figure 85 (B)), and the spinning state is maintained. After that, as shown in Figure 85 (E), the variable display position 9Cd and the pending display position 9Ad are displayed and appear again on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), the second movable part 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position (lower advance position (lower performance position)) in front of (in front of) the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and near the bottom, where it stops for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then, as shown in FIG. 85(G), it returns to the retreat position (home position), and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R during the variable performance (variable display) are displayed and appear again on the display screen 7a.

When the second movable device 15 is stopped in front of the display screen 7a at a position (lower advance position (lower performance position)) near the bottom edge for a predetermined period of time (e.g., about 1.5 seconds), the second movable device 15 is positioned in front of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad, making the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad difficult for the player to see. Of course, if the reserved icon 9A is present, the second movable device 15 is positioned in front of the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad, making the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad difficult for the player to see.

When the second movable device 15 stops for a predetermined time (e.g., about 1.5 seconds) in front of the display screen 7a and in a position near the bottom edge (lower advance position (lower performance position)), the variable icon 9C may change to another icon, suggesting an increase in the likelihood of a big win. By positioning the second movable device 15 in front of the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad are difficult for the player to see, allowing the player to expect an increase in the likelihood of a big win. At this time, the variable icon 9C may not change, and the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad may be changed in color or shape. Even in this case, the player can be expected to expect an increase in the likelihood of a big win.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as a temporary stop with the same pattern (number) (here, they are temporarily stopped with the number "7"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a variable (variable display) to form a reach. At this time, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as a temporary stop, and the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and small right decorative pattern 8Rz continue to display as a variable (variable display).

Then, various effects may continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "7"), a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins, whereas when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as the same pattern (here, the number "7"), a miss occurs. When a jackpot or miss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Example of effect]
An example of the effect of the variable icon jump presentation is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable icon jump performance A of Figure 83, the variable icon jump performance B of Figure 84, and the variable icon jump performance C of Figure 85, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying multiple types of images is provided, and after the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display mode of the variable icon 9C is changed from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon (another display mode), and the first performance (Figures 83 (B) to (G) in the variable icon jump performance A, Figures 84 (B) to (F) in the variable icon jump performance B, and Figures 85 (B) to (E) in the variable icon jump performance C) in which the variable icon 9C moves back to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) can be executed. According to this configuration, the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the display mode changes to another display mode and returns to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position). Therefore, by giving the variable icon 9C a dynamic movement, the presentation variation of the variable icon 9C can be increased, and further, the change of the variable icon 9C due to the dynamic movement of the variable icon 9C can suggest to the player the possibility of increasing the expectation of a hit for the variable. Therefore, the interest can be increased.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance of the variable icon jump performance A in FIG. 83 and the variable icon jump performance C in FIG. 85, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are not displayed. Specifically, no image indicating the center position is displayed on the display screen 7a at the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Also, for example, in the first performance of the variable icon jump performance A in FIG. 83 (B) to (G), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) may not be displayed, and in the first performance of the variable icon jump performance B in FIG. 84 (B) to (F), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) may not be displayed. Therefore, in the first performance, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may not be displayed. According to this configuration, when the variable icon 9C is present in the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to draw attention to the change in the variable icon 9C.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance of the variable icon jump performance A of Fig. 83, the variable icon jump performance B of Fig. 84, and the variable icon jump performance C of Fig. 85, when the variable icon 9C that has changed from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon (another display mode) in the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 moves again to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed, and the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is not displayed. Specifically, no image indicating the center position is displayed on the display screen 7a at the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Also, for example, in the first performance of the variable icon jump performance A in Fig. 83 (B) to (G), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in Fig. 83 (G), in the first performance of the variable icon jump performance B in Fig. 84 (B) to (F), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in Fig. 84 (F), and in the first performance of the variable icon jump performance C in Fig. 85 (B) to (E), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in Fig. 85 (E). According to this configuration, when the variable icon 9C returns to the variable display position 9Cd, the completion of the change of the variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (first display position), and further, by not displaying any image indicating the center position at the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 on the display screen 7a, it is possible to notify using the existing image, that is, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position), without displaying a dedicated image.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable icon jump performance A of Fig. 83 and the variable icon jump performance C of Fig. 85, there is a reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) that represents the display position of the reserved icon 9A, and in the first performance, when the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed, the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) is displayed, and when the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is not displayed, the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) is not displayed. Specifically, in the first performance of the variable icon jump performance A in Fig. 83 (B) to (G), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) are displayed in Fig. 83 (B), whereas the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) are not displayed in Fig. 83 (E). In addition, in the first performance of the variable icon jump performance C in Fig. 85 (B) to (E), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) are displayed in Fig. 85 (B), whereas the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) are not displayed in Fig. 85 (D). Therefore, in the first performance, when the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed, the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) may be displayed, and when the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is not displayed, the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) may not be displayed. According to this configuration, by performing a performance in which the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) are displayed or not displayed, it is possible to contribute to improving the performance effect in combination with the movement or change of the variable icon 9C.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable icon jump performance A of Figure 83, the variable icon jump performance B of Figure 84, and the variable icon jump performance C of Figure 85, there is a second movable part 15 (movable body) that can appear on the front side of the image display device 7 (display means), and when the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) are displayed after the first performance, the second movable part 15 (movable body) can be operated to execute a second performance (Figure 83 (I) in the variable icon jump performance A, Figure 84 (I) in the variable icon jump performance B, and Figure 85 (F) in the variable icon jump performance C) in which the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) are covered to make them difficult to see. According to this configuration, the operation of the second movable device 15 (movable body) can suggest an increased likelihood of a jackpot by changing the color or shape of the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position), thereby making the player anticipate an increased likelihood of a jackpot.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance in the variable icon jump performance A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump performance B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump performance C in FIG. 85, the second movable role 15 (movable body) is operated to cover the variable icon 9C and make it difficult to see. Specifically, in FIG. 83 (I) in the variable icon jump performance A, FIG. 84 (I) in the variable icon jump performance B, and FIG. 85 (F) in the variable icon jump performance C, the second movable role 15 (movable body) covers the variable icon 9C and makes it difficult to see. According to this configuration, the operation of the second movable role 15 (movable body) can suggest an increase in the expectation of a big win by changing the variable icon 9C to another icon, so that the player can be made to expect an increase in the expectation of a big win.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the variable icon jump performance A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump performance B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump performance C in FIG. 85, when the variable icon 9C is moved again from the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position), it can be rotated in a predetermined direction at the variable display position 9Cd (first display position). Specifically, in FIG. 83 (G) in the variable icon jump performance A, FIG. 84 (F) in the variable icon jump performance B, and FIG. 85 (E) in the variable icon jump performance C, the variable icon 9C is in a display mode in which the left side passes through the front side and faces the right side, and rotates repeatedly (rotates in a predetermined direction). According to this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the variable icon 9C after the change.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the floating icon jump effect are shown.
[Modification 1]
The variable icon jump performance A in Fig. 83, the variable icon jump performance B in Fig. 84, and the variable icon jump performance C in Fig. 85 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state of so-called left-handed hitting. However, they may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may be performed in a game state of so-called right-handed hitting.

[Modification 2]
In the second performance in the variable icon jump performance A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump performance B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump performance C of FIG. 85 (FIG. 83(I) in the variable icon jump performance A, FIG. 84(I) in the variable icon jump performance B, and FIG. 85(F) in the variable icon jump performance C), when the reserved icon 9A exists, the second movable role 15 (movable body) may be operated to cover the reserved icon 9A at the reserved display position 9Ad (third display position) to make it difficult to see. In this way, it is possible to suggest that the reserved icon 9A changes to another icon, thereby increasing the expectation of a big win. Therefore, by arranging the second movable role 15 in front of the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad become difficult to see for the player, and the player can expect an increase in the expectation of a big win.

[Modification 3]
In the second performance of the variable icon jump performance A in Fig. 83, the variable icon jump performance B in Fig. 84, and the variable icon jump performance C in Fig. 85, the second movable role 15 (movable body) stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds) at a position (lower advance position (lower performance position)) in front of the display screen 7a and near the lower edge from the retreat position (home position), making the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad difficult to see for the player. If the reserved icon 9A exists, of course, the second movable role 15 (movable body) is positioned in front of the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad, making the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the reserved display position 9Ad difficult to see for the player. However, the second movable part 15 (movable body) may be configured to move from the retracted position (home position) to a position near the bottom edge of the front (forward) of the display screen 7a (lower advance position (lower performance position)) (for example, by moving from the retracted position (home position) to an advance position (lower performance position) that is in the center of the front (forward) of the display screen 7a) and return to the retracted position (home position). In this case, even when the second movable device 15 (movable body) operates, it does not cover the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, or the reserved display position 9Ad, and even if the reserved icon 9A is present, it does not cover the variable icon 9C, the reserved icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, or the reserved display position 9Ad. Therefore, although there is no indication of an increased likelihood of a jackpot, such as the variable icon 9C or the reserved icon 9A changing to another icon, or the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad changing in color or shape, the player can be given the expectation that an indication of an increased likelihood of a jackpot may be made, even when the second movable device 15 (movable body) simply operates.

[Modification 4]
In the first performance of the icon jump performance A in Figure 83, the icon jump performance B in Figure 84, and the icon jump performance C in Figure 85 (Figures 83 (B) to (G) for the icon jump performance A, Figures 84 (B) to (F) for the icon jump performance B, and Figures 85 (B) to (E) for the icon jump performance C), the white spherical icon 9C at the icon jump display position 9Cd jumps up toward the center of the display screen 7a, and then changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon 9C as another icon, resulting in a successful icon change of the icon of the icon 9C. However, when the reserved icon 9A has already changed from a white spherical icon to a blue smiling spherical icon, and this blue smiling spherical reserved icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable icon jump effect is performed, and the variable icon 9C of the blue smiling spherical icon jumps up toward the center of the display screen 7a, and then changes to another icon, for example, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C, and the icon change of the variable icon 9C may be successful or unsuccessful. In this way, the dynamic movement of the variable icon 9C can suggest to the player the possibility of an increased expectation of a hit for the variable icon. Therefore, the interest can be increased.

[Modification 5]
In the variable icon jump performance C of FIG. 85, when the variable icon 9C arrives at the center of the display screen 7a, the variable icon 9C swells (i.e., the size of the white spherical icon becomes larger) and explodes, or the variable icon 9C cracks and is crushed without exploding. However, when the white spherical variable icon 9C swells and explodes, the shell of the white spherical variable icon 9C peels off due to this explosion, and the variable icon 9C in a yellow (gold) star shape, for example, may appear as another icon, or the white spherical variable icon 9C swells, is torn and explodes, and the variable icon 9C in a yellow (gold) star shape, for example, may appear as another icon. In this way, the variation of the change of the variable icon 9C can be increased, which can contribute to improving the performance effect of the change of the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 6]
In the variable icon jump performance A in Fig. 83, the variable icon jump performance B in Fig. 84, and the variable icon jump performance C in Fig. 85, the reserved icon 9A does not exist, but for example, when the reserved icon 9A exists at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the third reserved display position 9Ad, that is, when there are three reserved icons 9A, or when the reserved icon 9A exists at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, that is, when there are four reserved icons 9A, the size of the reserved icon 9A may be increased by the pre-reading performance as the reserved icon 9A is consumed and shifted as the game progresses, as a suggestion (preview) of the variable icon jump performance. In this way, the start time of the variable icon jump performance can be suggested to the player, which can contribute to increasing the expectation of the change in the variable icon 9C due to the variable icon jump performance.

[Modification 7]
In the variable icon jump performance A of Fig. 83, the variable icon jump performance B of Fig. 84, and the variable icon jump performance C of Fig. 85, the white spherical variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd jumps up toward the center of the display screen 7a, and then changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C as another icon, successfully changing the variable icon 9C. The size of the variable icon 9C may be increased or decreased before and after this change. This can increase the variation of the change of the variable icon 9C, which can contribute to improving the performance effect of the change of the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
In the variable icon jump performance A of Fig. 83, the variable icon jump performance B of Fig. 84, and the variable icon jump performance C of Fig. 85, after the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped, the variable icon 9C may jump up (start moving) from the variable display position 9Cd toward the center of the display screen 7a just before the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped. In this case, at the same time (or almost at the same time) when the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped, the variable display position 9Cd may change to another icon (for example, from the white spherical variable icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C) in the center of the display screen 7a and return to the variable display position 9Cd again. In this way, after the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display mode changes to another display mode and returns to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) again, so that by giving the variable icon 9C a dynamic movement, the presentation variation of the variable icon 9C can be increased, and further, the change of the variable icon 9C due to the dynamic movement of the variable icon 9C can suggest to the player the possibility of increasing the expectation of a hit for the variable. Therefore, the interest can be improved.

[Modification 9]
In the floating icon jump performance A in Fig. 83(I), the floating icon jump performance B in Fig. 84(I), and the floating icon jump performance C in Fig. 85(F), the second movable role 15 advances (moves) from a stationary state in a retreat position (home position) above the image display device 7 to a position (lower advance position (lower performance position)) in front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and near the bottom edge, stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then returns to the retreat position (home position) again. However, the second movable role 15 may be replaced by another movable role provided on the game board 2. For example, a lower movable part may be provided below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the lower movable part may move from a stationary state at a retreat position (home position) to the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to cover all of the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A (there may be up to four reserved balls), and may stop for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then may return to the retreat position (home position) again. In this way, the operation of the lower movable part may suggest an increase in the expectation of a big win by changing the color or shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad, so that the player may expect an increase in the expectation of a big win, and the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A may be changed to other icons, so that the player may expect an increase in the expectation of a big win.

[Modification 10]
The variable icon jump performance A in Figure 83, the variable icon jump performance B in Figure 84, and the variable icon jump performance C in Figure 85 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect A12-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
When the display mode of the variable icon is changed to another display mode after the variable icon has moved from the first display position to the second display position, a first performance of moving the variable icon to the first display position again can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A12-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A12-1,
In the first performance, the first display position and the second display position may not be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A12-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A12-1 or A12-2,
In the first performance, when the variable icon that has changed to the other display mode at the second display position moves back to the first display position, the first display position is displayed and the second display position is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A12-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A12-1 to A12-3,
There is a third display position representing the display position of the hold icon,
In the first performance, when the first display position is displayed, the third display position may be displayed, and when the first display position is not displayed, the third display position may not be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A12-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A12-4,
a movable body that can appear in front of the display means,
When the first display position and the third display position are displayed after the first performance, a second performance can be executed in which the movable body is operated to cover the first display position and the third display position to make them difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A12-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A12-5,
In the second performance, the movable body may be operated to cover the variable icon and make it difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A12-7]
A gaming machine according to aspect A12-5 or A12-6,
In the second performance, the movable body may be operated to cover the hold icon at the third display position to make it difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect A12-8]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A12-1 to A12-7,
In the first performance, when the variable icon is moved from the second display position to the first display position again, the variable icon is rotated in a predetermined direction at the first display position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation means appearance effects A to C are explained below using Figures 86 to 88. The operation means appearance effect can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the operation means appearance effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Operation Means Appearance Presentation A]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the operation means appearance performance A. The operation means appearance performance is a performance when an operation means image BTN, which is an image imitating an operation means such as the performance button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 98, appears. First, as shown in FIG. 86(A), in a state where nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state (here, the reach of "2↓2") on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 86(B), an operation prompting image SG is displayed to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Here, the operation prompting image SG is a text image of "Press!!" and is displayed enlarged across three screens, the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. The operation prompting image SG is also displayed beyond the three screens. At this time, the operation means image BTN has not yet been displayed. That is, in this presentation, the operation prompting image SG is displayed before the operation means image BTN. Therefore, the player who sees the operation prompting image SG is confused for a moment about what to operate. This can increase interest in the operation target and improve the excitement. The operation prompting image SG is displayed partially overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in front of the operation prompting image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86(C), the operation prompting image SG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire operation prompting image SG fits inside the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. At this time, it is still enlarged and displayed across the three screens. The operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. A part of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8R are displayed in front of the operation prompting image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86(D), the operation prompting image SG is further reduced in size until the entire operation prompting image SG fits inside the display screen 7a. At this time, the operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. A part of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in front of the operation prompting image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86(E), on the display screen 7a, the operation prompting image SG is further reduced in size and moves to a position where it does not overlap with the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. Also, the operation means image BTN is newly displayed below the operation prompting image SG. Here, the operation means image BTN is an image that imitates the effect button 63. The display of the operation means image BTN makes the player aware that he is being prompted to operate the effect button 63, and his attention is focused on the effect button 63. After that, as shown in FIG. 86(F), both the operation means image BTN and the operation prompting image SG are reduced in size. Normally, the operation means image BTN and the operation prompting image SG are not reduced in size after being displayed together, so the player's attention can be attracted again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(G), the specific image TG is displayed behind the operation means image BTN and the operation prompt image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter, and is composed of multiple scale panels. As shown in FIG. 86(G) and (H), the specific image TG executes an effect in which the scale panels are displayed in order from the left, and are gradually completed. When all the scale panels (six in this case) are gathered and the specific image TG is completed, as shown in FIG. 86(I), the specific image TG changes its appearance in conjunction with the operation of the operation means (the effect button 63 in this case) by the player. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, the color of the scale panels of the specific image TG changes in order from the left, notifying that the remaining period in which the effect button 63 needs to be operated is getting shorter. If the player does not press the effect button 63, the color of the scale panels of the specific image TG does not change in order from the left.

After that, when the period during which the effect button 63 needs to be operated expires, the display of the operation means image BTN, operation prompt image SG, and specific image TG disappears. Then, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. In this case, they are fixed and stopped in a losing mode.

[Operation Means Appearance Presentation B]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the operation means appearance effect B. The operation means appearance effect is an effect when an operation means image BTN, which is an image imitating an operation means such as the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 98, appears. First, as shown in FIG. 87(A), in a state where nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state (here, the reach of "2↓2") on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 87(B), an operation prompting image SG is displayed to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Here, the operation prompting image SG is a text image of "Continuous hits!!", "Press!!", and "Long press!", and these texts are displayed in turn at a predetermined timing. Here, the order is "Continuous hits!!" → "Press!!" → "Long press!" → "Continuous hits!!". The operation prompting image SG is enlarged and displayed across three screens, the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. In addition, the operation prompting image SG is displayed beyond the three screens. At this time, the operation means image BTN has not yet been displayed. That is, in this performance, the operation prompting image SG is displayed before the operation means image BTN. Therefore, the player who sees the operation prompting image SG is confused for a moment as to what to operate. Furthermore, since the content of the operation prompting image SG is periodically changed, the player is also confused as to how to operate it. This can heighten interest in the operation target and operation method, and improve interest. The operation prompting image SG is displayed partially overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in front of the operation prompting image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(C), the operation prompting image SG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire operation prompting image SG fits inside the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. The text content of the operation prompting image SG continues to change. At this time, it is still enlarged and displayed across the three screens. The operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. A part of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8R are displayed in front of the operation prompting image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(D), the operation prompting image SG is further reduced in size, and the entire operation prompting image SG fits inside the display screen 7a. The text content of the operation prompting image SG continues to change. At this time, the operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. A part of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8R are displayed in front of the operation prompting image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(E), on the display screen 7a, the operation prompting image SG is further reduced in size and moves to a position where it does not overlap the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. Also, the operation means image BTN is newly displayed below the operation prompting image SG. Here, the operation means image BTN is an image that imitates the effect button 63. The display of the operation means image BTN makes the player aware that he is being prompted to operate the effect button 63, and his attention is focused on the effect button 63. After that, as shown in FIG. 87(F), both the operation means image BTN and the operation prompting image SG are reduced in size. Normally, after both the operation means image BTN and the operation prompting image SG are displayed, they are not reduced in size, so the player's attention can be attracted again. Even at this time, the text content of the operation prompting image SG continues to change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(G), a specific image TG is displayed on the back side of the operation means image BTN and the operation prompt image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter and is composed of multiple scale panels. The specific image TG is displayed in order from the left side as shown in FIG. 87(G) and (H) by the player operating the performance button 63 in accordance with the contents of the operation prompt image SG that change sequentially, and gradually completes the performance. That is, when the operation prompt image SG is "Continuous hit!!", the performance button 63 is repeatedly hit, when it is "Press!!", the performance button 63 is pressed, when it is "Long press!", the performance button 63 is pressed and long pressed, and when it is "Long press!", the scale panels are displayed in order from the left side. If the player does not operate according to the display contents of the operation prompt image SG, the scale panels will not increase. If all the scale panels (here, six) are collected within a predetermined period, the specific image TG is completed. If all scale panels are not collected within the specified period, the operation means image BTN, operation prompt image SG, and specific image TG will disappear at that point.

As shown in Figure 87 (I), the specific image TG changes appearance in response to the player's operation of the operating means (here, the effect button 63). Here, the specific image TG stops changing with "Continuous tap!!" displayed. In this state, when the player repeatedly taps the effect button 63, the color of the scale panels of the specific image TG changes in order from the left, and when all the scale panels have changed color, the operation means image BTN, operation prompt image SG, and specific image TG disappear. Then, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, they are fixed and stopped in a losing mode.

[Operation Means Appearance Presentation C]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the operation means appearance effect C. The operation means appearance effect is an effect when an operation means image ASI, which is an image imitating an operation means such as the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 98, appears. First, as shown in FIG. 88(A), in a state where nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state (here, the reach of "2↓2") on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 88(B), an operation prompting image SG is displayed to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Here, the operation prompting image SG is a text image of "Push!" and is displayed enlarged across three screens, the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. The operation prompting image SG is also displayed beyond the three screens. At this time, the operation means image ASI has not yet been displayed. That is, in this presentation, the operation prompting image SG is displayed before the operation means image ASI. Therefore, the player who sees the operation prompting image SG is confused for a moment about what to operate. This can increase interest in the operation target and improve the excitement. The operation prompting image SG is displayed partially overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in front of the operation prompting image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88(C), the operation prompting image SG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire operation prompting image SG fits inside the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. At this time, it is still enlarged and displayed across the three screens. The operation means image ASI is not yet displayed. A part of the operation prompting image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8R are displayed in front of the operation prompting image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88(D), the operation prompting image SG is further reduced in size until the entire operation prompting image SG fits inside the display screen 7a. At this time, the operation means image ASI is not yet displayed. The operation prompting image SG is reduced in size and displayed in a position that does not overlap the decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88(E), the operation means image ASI is newly displayed below the operation prompting image SG. The operation means image ASI is displayed overlapping the operation prompting image SG. At this time, the operation means image ASI is displayed on the front side. This allows the operation means image ASI to have an impact. Here, the operation means image ASI is an image imitating the sword member 65. The display of the operation means image ASI makes the player realize that he is being prompted to operate the sword member 65, and his attention is focused on the sword member 65. After that, as shown in FIG. 88(F), both the operation means image ASI and the operation prompting image SG are reduced in size and displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Normally, the operation means image ASI and the operation prompting image SG are not reduced in size after being displayed together, so the player's attention can be attracted again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(G), the specific image TG is displayed behind the operation means image ASI and the operation prompting image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter made up of multiple scale panels. As shown in FIG. 88(G) and (H), the specific image TG executes an effect in which the scale panels are displayed in order from the left, and are gradually completed. When all the scale panels are assembled (six in this case) and the specific image TG is completed, as shown in FIG. 88(I), the specific image TG changes its appearance in conjunction with the operation of the operation means (sword member 65 in this case) by the player. Here, when the player presses the sword member 65 downward, the color of the scale panels of the specific image TG changes in order from the left, notifying the player that the remaining period in which the sword member 65 needs to be operated is getting shorter.

After that, when the period during which the sword member 65 needs to be operated expires, the operation means image ASI, operation prompt image SG, and specific image TG disappear. Then, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. In this case, they are fixed and stopped in a losing mode.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the control means appearance.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 86(B)-(D), 87(B)-(D), and 88(B)-(D), it is possible to execute a first effect in which an operation prompting image SG is displayed when the operation means images BTN and ASI are not displayed on the display screen 7a, and a second effect in which the operation means images BTN and ASI are displayed after the first effect. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel effect, and to increase the interest of the player.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 86(B)-(D), 87(B)-(D), and 88(B)-(D), in the first effect, the operation prompting image SG is displayed across at least one of the sub-display screens 64R and 64L and the display screen 7a, and then reduced and displayed on the display screen 7a. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player, and interest can be increased.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 86(B)-(D), 87(B)-(D), and 88(B)-(D), in the first effect, the operation prompting image SG is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a, and is then displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and is then reduced and displayed on the display screen 7a. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and interest can be enhanced.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 86(B)-(E), 87(B)-(E), and 88(B)-(D), in the first performance, the operation prompt image SG is displayed overlapping the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped in the reach state, and then it is reduced and displayed in a position where it does not overlap the decorative symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel performance that has never been seen before, and to increase the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the second effect, the operation means images BTN and ASI and the operation prompting image SG are displayed in reduced size, as shown in Figures 86(E)-(F), 87(E)-(F), and 88(E)-(F). With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 86(F)-(I), 87(F)-(I), and 88(F)-(I), after the second performance, a specific image TG whose appearance changes in conjunction with the operation of the operation means by the player is displayed on the back side of the operation means images BTN and ASI. With this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the player's interest.

[Modification]
The following describes modified examples of the operation means appearance effect.
[Modification 1]
In the operation means appearance effects A to C, the operation prompting image SG is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a, and is then displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and is then reduced and displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the operation prompting image SG may be displayed across either the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and may not be displayed on the other sub-display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the operation means appearance presentation A, as shown in Fig. 86 (I), the specific image TG changes its appearance in conjunction with the operation of the operation means (presentation button 63) by the player. That is, when the player presses the presentation button 63, the color of the scale panels of the specific image TG changes in sequence from the left, shortening the remaining period during which the presentation button 63 needs to be operated. However, even if the player does not press the presentation button 63, the color of the scale panels of the specific image TG may change in sequence from the left over time.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Mode B1-1]
An operation means operable by a player;
A gaming machine including a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image that imitates the operation means;
one of the plurality of types of images is an operation prompting image for prompting a player to operate the operation means;
a first effect in which the operation prompting image is displayed in a state in which the operation means image is not displayed on the display means;
A second performance in which the operation means image is displayed after the first performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Mode B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 further comprises:
A sub-display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided,
In the first performance, the operation prompting image is displayed across the sub-display means and the display means, and then is reduced in size and displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-2,
The sub-display means are provided on both sides of the display means,
In the first performance, the operation prompting image is displayed across both the sub-display means and the display means, and then is reduced in size and displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B1-1 to B1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern;
In the first performance, the operation prompting image is displayed overlapping the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped in a reach state, and then the operation prompting image is reduced in size and displayed in a position where it does not overlap the decorative pattern.
◇[Aspect B1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
After the second effect, both the operation means image and the operation prompting image are displayed in a reduced size.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B1-1 to B1-5,
After the second performance, a specific image whose appearance changes in response to the operation of the operation means by the player is displayed on the back side of the image of the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The part assembly performances A to C are explained below using Figures 89 to 91. In Figures 89 to 91, for example, the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, and other movable parts arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing.

This part assembly performance is performed during the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a specific area variable performance is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

Here, we will first explain part assembly performance A, then part assembly performance B, and finally part assembly performance C.

[Parts assembly performance A]
The part assembly performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 89. Fig. 89 is a diagram for explaining the part assembly performance A. The part assembly performance A is performed during a variable performance (during a variable display) by a decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 89(A), a variable presentation (variable display) of decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, with the left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of a stereoscopic image being displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. At this time, no decorative patterns are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, appearing as a temporary stop, or as a stopped display (temporarily displayed, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed stationary, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. Note that, for ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts in FIG. 89(A), the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, which imitates a sword component 65, are then displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a display mode in which they gather from the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 89(B). The five part images PT1 to PT5 are based on a silver color. At this time, the changing display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the changing icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operating part that resembles a sword and can be pushed downward by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. For this reason, the sword member 65 is a movable part that can be pushed downward in its entirety by the player. A sword button (not shown) is provided on the upper end portion of the sword member 65, i.e., the end of the sword handle. This sword button is an operating part that is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses.

Of the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, part image PT1 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, part image PT2 enters the right sub-display screen 64R from the right and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, part image PT3 enters the display screen 7a from the lower right and moves toward the center, part image PT4 enters the display screen 7a from the upper left and moves toward the center, and part image PT5 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89(C), the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are arranged such that part image PT1 is positioned toward the lower center of each display screen across the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Part image PT2 is positioned toward the upper center of each display screen across the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Part image PT3 is positioned toward the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is ultimately displayed directly on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without passing through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. Part image PT4 is positioned toward the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is ultimately displayed directly on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without passing through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. The part image PT5 is placed in the center of the left sub-display screen 64L, and is displayed directly on the left sub-display screen 64L without protruding from the left sub-display screen 64L onto the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right sub-display screen 64R. The part image PT1 rotates three-dimensionally and is placed toward the lower center of each display screen, straddling the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. The part image PT2 also rotates three-dimensionally and is placed toward the upper center of each display screen, straddling the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. The part images PT1 to PT5 are moved so as not to interfere with each other.

Then, when the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved to the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sword image KG is assembled in a lying state as shown in FIG. 89(D). The assembled sword image KG is silver because the five part images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver, and the handle has a smooth surface. When the sword image KG is assembled, the part images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIG. 89(B) and (C) become smaller in size, and the assembled sword image KG is smaller than the part images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIG. 89(B) and (C).

Next, as shown in Figures 89 (E) and (F), the end of the sword handle in the sword image KG lying on its side is rotated clockwise so that it faces upward, and the sword image KG is moved downward so that the end of the sword handle in the sword image KG is positioned in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, resulting in a display mode in which the end of the sword handle in the sword image KG (the portion including the sword button KBG) is illuminated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(G), the sword image KG is enlarged, and the end of the sword handle in the sword image KG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, a message MG "Press Here" is displayed near the top edge of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, encouraging the operation (pressing) of the sword button (the sword button KBG provided at the end of the sword handle in the sword image KG) provided at the top end of the sword component 65, i.e., the end of the sword handle. The message MG is split into three characters "Here" and two characters "Press", and the three characters "Here" are arranged to the left of the sword button KBG of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG, and the two characters "Press" are arranged to the right of the sword button KBG of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. By arranging it in this way, the message "Press here" encouraging the player to operate (press) the sword button on the sword member 65 can be clearly emphasized to the player without being obstructed in visibility by the sword image KG, and furthermore, the position of the sword button KBG on the sword image KG that imitates the sword button on the sword member 65 that is the object of operation can be clearly emphasized to the player without being obstructed in visibility by the message MG.

An indicator image IG showing the period during which operation (pressing) of the sword button of the sword member 65 is accepted (hereinafter referred to as the "operation acceptance period") is displayed near the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to cover a part of the sword image KG (specifically, a part of the sword handle). By arranging it in this manner, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation acceptance period can be clearly and emphatically communicated to the player.

When the player operates (presses) the sword button of the sword member 65, or when the operation acceptance period has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the sword button of the sword member 65, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped number "7", resulting in a miss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variable. Next, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R begins.

[Parts assembly performance B]
Next, the part assembly performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 90. Fig. 90 is a diagram for explaining the part assembly performance B. The part assembly performance B is performed during a variable performance (during a variable display) by a decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 90(A), a variable presentation (variable display) of decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, with the left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of a stereoscopic image being displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. At this time, no decorative patterns are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, appearing as a temporary stop, or as a stopped display (temporarily displayed, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed stationary, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icon is displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. Note that, for ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change performance (change display) starts in FIG. 90(A), the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG imitating the sword part 65 are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a display mode in which the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG imitating the sword part 65 gather from the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 90(B). The five part images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver. At this time, the change icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, while the change display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. As a result, by displaying only the change icon 9C that has become a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the change icon 9C can be easily highlighted. In this case, the variable icon 9C is positioned at the frontmost side on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so that its visibility is not obstructed by other images.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operating part that resembles a sword and can be pushed downward by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. For this reason, the sword member 65 is a movable part that can be pushed downward in its entirety by the player. A sword button (not shown) is provided on the upper end portion of the sword member 65, i.e., the end of the sword handle. This sword button is an operating part that is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses.

Of the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, part image PT1 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, part image PT2 enters the right sub-display screen 64R from the right and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, part image PT3 enters the display screen 7a from the lower right and moves toward the center, part image PT4 enters the display screen 7a from the upper left and moves toward the center, and part image PT5 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90(C), the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are arranged such that part image PT1 is positioned toward the lower center of each display screen across the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Part image PT2 is positioned toward the upper center of each display screen across the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Part image PT3 is positioned toward the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is ultimately displayed directly on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without passing through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. Part image PT4 is positioned toward the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is ultimately displayed directly on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is ultimately displayed directly on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without passing through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. The part image PT5 is positioned in the center of the left sub-display screen 64L, and is ultimately displayed directly on the left sub-display screen 64L without extending beyond the left sub-display screen 64L onto the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right sub-display screen 64R. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C remains displayed.

The part image PT1 rotates three-dimensionally and is positioned toward the lower center of each display screen, straddling the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. The part image PT2 also rotates three-dimensionally and is positioned toward the upper center of each display screen, straddling the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. The part images PT1 to PT5 are moved so as not to interfere with each other.

Then, when the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved to the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sword image KG is assembled in a lying state as shown in FIG. 90(D). The assembled sword image KG is silver in color because the five part images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver, and the shape of the handle has a smooth surface. When the sword image KG is assembled, the part images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIG. 90(B) and (C) become smaller in size, and the assembled sword image KG is smaller than the part images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIG. 90(B) and (C). At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Next, as shown in Figures 90 (E) and (F), the end of the handle of the sword image KG lying on its side is rotated clockwise so that it faces upward, and then the entire sword image KG is further reduced in size and placed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is maintained in its displayed state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(G), the sword image KG is enlarged and the entire sword image KG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, a message MG "push" encouraging the player to push the entire sword member 65 downward (push) is displayed near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The message MG is divided into two characters, "push" and "fill in", and the two characters "push" are placed to the left of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG, and the two characters "fill in" are placed to the right of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. By arranging the message in this way, the content of "push in", which encourages the player to push the entire sword member 65 downward (push), can be easily emphasized to the player without being obstructed by the sword image KG. Furthermore, the sword image KG, which imitates the sword member 65 being operated, can be easily emphasized to the player without being obstructed by the message MG.

An indicator image IG, which indicates the period during which an operation to push the entire sword member 65 downward (a push) is accepted (hereinafter referred to as the "operation acceptance period"), is displayed near the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to cover a portion of the sword image KG (specifically, a portion of the sword handle). By arranging it in this manner, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation acceptance period can be clearly and emphatically communicated to the player. Note that the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is still displayed in Figure 90 (G).

When the player performs an operation to push (push) the entire sword member 65 downward, or when the operation acceptance period has elapsed without the player performing an operation to push (push) the entire sword member 65 downward, as shown in FIG. 90 (H), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while emitting a flash of light FH. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(I), a battle presentation begins. In the battle presentation, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, and the expectation of a big win is high. Note that in the battle presentation, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A remain in a state of having disappeared from the display screen 7a.

When the friendly character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a big win and then a big win game (big win performance) begins. On the other hand, when the friendly character CRA loses and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a miss. When the battle performance ends and a big win or miss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. Next, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and a variable performance (variable display) using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R begins.

[Parts assembly production C]
Next, the part assembly performance C will be described with reference to Fig. 91. Fig. 91 is a diagram for explaining the part assembly performance C. The part assembly performance C is performed during a variable performance (during a variable display) by a decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 91(A), a variable presentation (variable display) of decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, with the left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of a stereoscopic image being displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. At this time, no decorative patterns are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, and changes at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and is displayed as temporarily stopped, or as stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. Note that, for ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change performance (change display) starts in FIG. 91(A), the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG imitating the sword part 65 are displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a display mode in which the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG imitating the sword part 65 gather from the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 91(B). The five part images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver (silver). At this time, the change icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, while the change display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. As a result, by displaying only the change icon 9C that has become a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the change icon 9C can be easily highlighted. In this case, the variable icon 9C is positioned at the frontmost side on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so that its visibility is not obstructed by other images.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operating part that resembles a sword and can be pushed downward by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. For this reason, the sword member 65 is a movable part that can be pushed downward in its entirety by the player. A sword button (not shown) is provided on the upper end portion of the sword member 65, i.e., the end of the sword handle. This sword button is an operating part that is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses.

Of the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, part image PT1 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, part image PT2 enters the right sub-display screen 64R from the right and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, part image PT3 enters the display screen 7a from the lower right and moves toward the center, part image PT4 enters the display screen 7a from the upper left and moves toward the center, and part image PT5 enters the left sub-display screen 64L from the left and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91C, the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are arranged such that part image PT1 is positioned toward the lower center of each display screen across the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Part image PT2 is positioned toward the upper center of each display screen across the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. Part image PT3 is positioned toward the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is ultimately displayed directly on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without passing through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. Part image PT4 is positioned toward the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is ultimately displayed directly on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without passing through the left sub-display screen 64L and the right sub-display screen 64R. The part image PT5 is positioned in the center of the left sub-display screen 64L, and is ultimately displayed directly on the left sub-display screen 64L without extending beyond the left sub-display screen 64L onto the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right sub-display screen 64R. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C remains displayed.

The part image PT1 rotates three-dimensionally and is positioned toward the lower center of each display screen, straddling the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. The part image PT2 also rotates three-dimensionally and is positioned toward the upper center of each display screen, straddling the left sub-display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub-display screen 64R. The part images PT1 to PT5 are moved so as not to interfere with each other.

Then, when the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved to the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sword image KG is assembled in a lying state as shown in FIG. 91(D). The assembled sword image KG is silver in color because the five part images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver, and the shape of the handle has a smooth surface. When the sword image KG is assembled, the part images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIG. 91(B) and (C) become smaller in size, and the assembled sword image KG is smaller than the part images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIG. 91(B) and (C). At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Next, as shown in Figures 91 (E) and (F), the end of the handle of the sword image KG lying on its side is rotated clockwise so that it faces upward, and then the entire sword image KG is further reduced in size and placed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is maintained in its displayed state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), the sword image KG is enlarged and the entire sword image KG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, in order to disassemble the assembled sword image KG, the previous steps are retraced one by one, as shown in FIG. 91(F) → FIG. 91(E) → FIG. 91(D) → FIG. 91(C) (FIG. 91(H)) (FIG. 91(H) is the same as FIG. 91(C)), and part images PT1 to PT5 appear. Even when steps are retraced one by one in this manner, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C remains displayed.

Then, in order to assemble the sword image KG from the part images PT1 to PT5 again, the steps are repeated one by one, from FIG. 91(C) (FIG. 91(H)) → FIG. 91(D) → FIG. 91(E) → FIG. 91(F), and then, as shown in FIG. 91(I), the sword image KG is enlarged again, and the entire sword image KG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even when the steps are repeated one by one in this manner, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is maintained in its displayed state. Note that the color and shape of the handle of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91(G) are silver (silver) because the five part images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver (silver), and the shape of the handle has a smooth surface. In contrast, the color and handle shape of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91(I) change from silver to gold, and the handle shape changes from a smooth surface to an uneven shape wrapped in rope. In other words, the color and handle shape of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91(G) are different from the color and handle shape of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91(I). This clearly emphasizes and suggests that the expectation of a big win has increased.

In FIG. 91(I), a message MG urging the player to push the entire sword member 65 downward (pushing it in) is displayed near the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The message MG is split into two characters, "push" and "fill in", with the two characters "push" being placed to the left of the sword image KG without covering it, and the two characters "fill in" being placed to the right of the sword image KG without covering it. By arranging the message in this way, the message urging the player to push the entire sword member 65 downward (pushing it in), "push in", can be easily emphasized to the player without being obstructed by the sword image KG, and furthermore, the sword image KG modeled after the sword member 65 being operated can be easily emphasized to the player without being obstructed by the message MG.

An indicator image IG showing the period during which an operation to push the entire sword member 65 downward (a push) is accepted (hereinafter referred to as the "operation acceptance period") is displayed near the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to cover a portion of the sword image KG (specifically, a portion of the sword handle). By arranging it in this manner, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation acceptance period can be clearly and emphatically communicated to the player.

When the player performs an operation to push (push) the entire sword member 65 downward, or when the operation acceptance period has elapsed without the player performing an operation to push (push) the entire sword member 65 downward, as shown in FIG. 91 (J), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while emitting a flash of light FH. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (K), a battle presentation begins. In the battle presentation, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, and the expectation of a big win is high. Note that in the battle presentation, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A remain in a state of having disappeared from the display screen 7a.

When the friendly character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a big win and then a big win game (big win performance) begins. On the other hand, when the friendly character CRA loses and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a miss. When the battle performance ends and a big win or miss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. Next, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and a variable performance (variable display) using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R begins.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of part assembly.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the part assembly presentation A of FIG. 89, the part assembly presentation B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly presentation C of FIG. 91, the image display device 7 capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (including a plurality of display means), the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (a plurality of display means) include the image display device 7 (main display means) and one or more right sub-display screens 64R and left sub-display screens 64L (sub-display means) excluding the image display device 7 (main display means), and the part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) of the sword image KG (operation means image) simulating a sword member 65 (operation means) operable by a player move from the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means) toward the image display device 7 (main display means) in the first presentation (in the part assembly presentation A, FIG. 8 9(B), (C), for part assembly presentation B, Fig. 90(B), (C), for part assembly presentation C, Fig. 91(B), (C)), and after the first presentation, a second presentation can be executed in which part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) are assembled on the image display device 7 (main display means) to complete a sword image KG (operation means image) (Fig. 89(D) for part assembly presentation A, Fig. 90(D) for part assembly presentation B, Fig. 91(D) for part assembly presentation C. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented and innovative presentation in which part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) of the sword image KG (operation means image) simulating the sword component 65 (operation means) are assembled to form the sword image KG (operation means image) using the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (multiple display means). This can increase the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance of the part assembly performance A of Fig. 89, the part assembly performance B of Fig. 90, and the part assembly performance C of Fig. 91, a part of the part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) displayed on the image display device 7 (main display means) is displayed protruding onto the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means). According to this configuration, the part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) can be displayed large using the image display device 7 (main display means) and further the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means), which contributes to clearly and emphatically conveying to the player what parts the sword member 65 is actually made up of.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the part assembly performance A of FIG. 89, the part assembly performance B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly performance C of FIG. 91, there are part images PT4 and PT5 (parts) that are displayed directly on the image display device 7 (main display means) without going through the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means). According to this configuration, among the part images PT1 to PT5 (parts), there are those that are displayed on the image display device 7 (main display means) through the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means), and those that are displayed directly on the image display device 7 (main display means) without going through the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means), so that the direction in which the part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) enter the image display device 7 (main display means) can be made diverse. In other words, the various effects produced by the part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) can be emphasized to the player by using the image display device 7 (main display means), the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance of the part assembly performance A in Fig. 89, the part assembly performance B in Fig. 90, and the part assembly performance C in Fig. 91, when the sword image KG (operation means image) imitating the sword member 65 (operation means) is completed, the size of the sword image KG (operation means image) is displayed large, and a message MG (operation prompt image) that prompts the operation of the sword member 65 (operation means) is displayed. According to this configuration, the size of the sword image KG (operation means image) is displayed large, in other words, the sword image KG (operation means image) is displayed in an enlarged manner, and a message MG (operation prompt image) that prompts the operation of the sword member 65 (operation means) is displayed, so that the start time of the operation timing of the sword member 65 (operation means) can be clearly conveyed to the player, and the action that the player will perform from now on can be emphasized to the player.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second presentation of the part assembly presentation A in Fig. 89, the part assembly presentation B in Fig. 90, and the part assembly presentation C in Fig. 91, when the sword member 65 (operation means) is operated, the sword image KG (operation means image) disappears. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the operation of the sword member 65 (operation means) has been accepted.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second presentation of the part assembly presentation A in Fig. 89, the part assembly presentation B in Fig. 90, and the part assembly presentation C in Fig. 91, an indicator image IG (acceptance period image) indicating the period during which the operation of the sword member 65 (operation means) is accepted is displayed. With this configuration, the player can grasp the remaining time of the period during which the operation of the sword member 65 (operation means) is accepted, and therefore can calmly operate the sword member 65 (operation means) at his/her own timing.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second presentation of the part assembly presentation A in Fig. 89, the sword image KG (operation means image) can be displayed in such a way that the end (part including the sword button KBG) of the sword handle in the sword image KG (operation means image) is illuminated. This configuration can contribute to making it easier for the player to recognize which part of the sword member 65 (operation means) imitated by the sword image KG (operation means image) is to be operated by the player.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of specific area variable effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the part assembly presentation A in Fig. 89, the part assembly presentation B in Fig. 90, and the part assembly presentation C in Fig. 91, the presentation is performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, the presentation is performed in a game state called left-handed hitting. However, the presentation may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, the presentation may be performed in a game state called right-handed hitting.

[Modification 2]
In the part assembly performance A of FIG. 89, the part assembly performance B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly performance C of FIG. 91, the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is assembled from the part images PT1 to PT5. However, instead of the sword member 65, a decorative pattern may be assembled from a plurality of images. For example, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is in a variable performance (displayed in a variable manner), a reach is formed, and in order to assemble the middle decorative pattern 8C, a plurality of fragment images are gathered from all directions toward the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 using the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L (a plurality of display means), and finally, the assembled middle decorative pattern 8C may be displayed as a confirmed big win or a miss. In this case, while the intermediate decorative pattern 8C is being assembled, the color of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C may be changed (for example, to red or rainbow) to indicate to the player the likelihood of a jackpot.

[Modification 3]
In the part assembly performance A of FIG. 89, the part assembly performance B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly performance C of FIG. 91, the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is assembled using the part images PT1 to PT5. However, other parts arranged on the game board 2 or the front frame 53 may be used instead of the sword member 65. For example, the images imitating the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and other movable roles arranged on the game board 2 may be assembled from the part images, or the image imitating the handle 60 arranged on the front frame 53 may be assembled from the part images. In this way, the variation of the performance can be increased. In addition, a plurality of parts to be assembled, such as the sword member 65, the handle 60, the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and other movable roles, may be prepared, and the expectation degree of the big win may be set in advance for each of them. In this way, it is possible to contribute to the player himself finding the relationship between the parts to be assembled and the expectation degree of the big win.

[Modification 4]
In the part assembly performance A of Fig. 89, the part assembly performance B of Fig. 90, and the part assembly performance C of Fig. 91, the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is assembled using the part images PT1 to PT5, and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to inform the player of the result of the winning or losing judgment (big win or loss). However, when a part assembly performance is performed in which the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is assembled using the part images PT1 to PT5, a suggestion image (for example, a winged-man-shaped ally character is displayed to suggest a big win, and an enemy character is displayed to suggest a loss) may be displayed on any one of the display screens of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L during or immediately after the assembly, suggesting the result of the winning or losing judgment (big win or loss). When a part assembly presentation is performed, the subsequent development of the presentation is of major interest to the player, so the appearance of suggestive images allows the player to predict how the presentation will develop, and furthermore, can contribute to the player discovering for himself the correlation and patterns between the part assembly presentation and the subsequent presentation.

[Modification 5]
In part assembly presentation A in Fig. 89, part assembly presentation B in Fig. 90, and part assembly presentation C in Fig. 91, a sword image KG that imitates a sword component 65 is assembled using part images PT1 to PT5. However, instead of the sword component 65, a presentation button image that imitates the presentation button 63 can be assembled using part images, or a lever image that imitates a lever provided on the front frame 53 can be assembled using part images. In this way, the variety of presentations can be increased. The lever provided on the front frame 53 may be a joystick or a rotating lever, which can be operated by the player during presentations that are executed as the game progresses.

[Modification 6]
In the part assembly performance A of FIG. 89, the part assembly performance B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly performance C of FIG. 91, the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is assembled using the part images PT1 to PT5. However, an operation unit other than the sword member 65 may be displayed on any of the display screens of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L. For example, a select button image imitating the select button 68 may be displayed on any of the display screens of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L as an operation unit other than the sword member 65. Unlike the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65, the select button image is not assembled using part images in the part assembly performance, but rather informs the player that, for example, the performance mode can be changed (accepted) at the player's timing (for example, to one of the spring mode, summer mode, autumn mode, and winter mode). In other words, when the select button image is displayed, the performance mode can be changed (accepted) at the player's timing. The sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 and the select button image imitating the select button 68 may be displayed separately on one of the display screens of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L, or may be displayed on the same display screen. Thus, among the sword members 65 and the select buttons 68 that the player can operate, there are the sword members 65 that are assembled by the part images in the part assembly performance, and the select buttons 68 that are not assembled by the part images in the part assembly performance. However, the operation of the sword member 65 is not accepted unless the indicator image IG of FIG. 89(G) is displayed in the part assembly performance A, FIG. 90(G) in the part assembly performance B, and FIG. 91(I) in the part assembly performance C, even if the sword image KG is displayed, whereas the operation of the select button 68 is accepted if the select button image is displayed. Therefore, even if the sword members 65 and the select buttons 68 as the operation parts happen to be displayed at the same time, the sword members 65 and the select buttons 68 as the operation parts can be used differently in the performance.

[Modification 7]
In the part assembly performance B of Fig. 90 (B) to (G) and the part assembly performance C of Fig. 91 (B) to (I), the white spherical variable icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, for example, the star-shaped variable icon 9C may be displayed in an animated display mode in which it shrinks and expands up and down as if bouncing up and down, or it may be displayed in an animated display mode in which it spins around. This can contribute to improving the presentation effect by the display mode of the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
In the part assembly presentation B of Fig. 90 (B) to (G) and the part assembly presentation C of Fig. 91 (B) to (I), the white spherical variable icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the size of the variable icon 9C may be made a predetermined times (for example, about 5 to 8 times) larger than the size of the white spherical icon. In this way, the change in the variable icon 9C can be easily emphasized to the player.

[Modification 9]
In the part assembly performance A of FIG. 89, the part assembly performance B of FIG. 90, and the part assembly performance C of FIG. 91, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 were displayed as numbers (not shown) at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. These numbers are displayed as numbers representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. In addition, the numbers are displayed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by other images. In this embodiment, when the part assembly performance is started, the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved to the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the sword image KG is assembled. As a result, the number (the number of reserved balls) displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a may be mistaken by the player as the total number of part images constituting the sword image KG. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a number that represents the number of reserved balls as a numerical value may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64 (one of the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U (for example, the right sub-display screen 64R). In this way, there is no risk that the number that represents the number of reserved balls as a numerical value will be mistaken by the player as the total number of part images constituting the sword image KG, and further, the number that represents the number of reserved balls as a numerical value can be made difficult to distinguish by being mixed up with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it easy to understand intuitively.

[Modification 10]
Part assembly presentation A in Figure 89, part assembly presentation B in Figure 90, and part assembly presentation C in Figure 91 may not include some of the presentations described above, or other presentations may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine having a plurality of display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
The display means includes a main display means and one or more sub-display means other than the main display means,
a first effect in which a component of an operation means image imitating an operation means operable by a player moves from the sub-display means to the main display means;
a second performance of assembling the parts on the main display means to complete the operation means image, after the first performance;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
In the second representation, a part of the part displayed on the main display means is displayed protruding onto the sub-display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or B2-2,
In the first representation, the part is directly displayed on the main display means without passing through the sub-display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B2-1 to B2-3,
In the second performance, when the operation means image is completed, the size of the operation means image is displayed larger, and further, an operation prompting image for prompting the user to operate the operation means is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
In the second performance, when the operation means is operated, the operation means image disappears.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4 or B2-5,
In the second performance, an acceptance period image indicating a period during which the operation of the operation means is accepted is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by

◇[Aspect B2-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects B2-4 to B2-6,
In the second effect, a part of the operation means image is displayed in a light-emitting manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The reach-time decorative pattern effects A to C are explained below using Figures 92 to 94. These reach-time decorative pattern effects can be executed during decorative pattern variation effects, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if the command includes an instruction to execute a reach-time decorative pattern effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Reach-time decorative pattern production A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the ready-to-win decorative pattern performance A. The ready-to-win decorative pattern performance is a performance in which a pattern different from the ready-to-win pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L in the ready-to-win performance executed when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-win state, and then the ready-to-win pattern of the decorative pattern changes to that pattern. First, as shown in FIG. 92(A), in a state in which nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-win state (here, the ready-to-win pattern of "2↓2") on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 92(B), pattern 8M frames in from the top of the display screen 7a and moves downward. Pattern 8M is a number (here, "6") different from the reach patterns (here, "2") of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. As shown in FIG. 92(C)-(D), after framing in, pattern 8M is enlarged and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92(E), the pattern 8M moves leftward and stops in a state where it straddles the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a. At this time, the left side of the pattern 8M is displayed outside the left sub-display screen 64L. After that, the pattern 8M moves rightward and returns to the inside of the display screen 7a, and then moves further rightward, and as shown in FIG. 92(F), it stops in a state where it straddles the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. At this time, the right side of the pattern 8M is displayed outside the right sub-display screen 64R. After that, as shown in FIG. 92(G), the pattern 8M disappears (is not displayed) from the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be displayed in the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the reach pattern move toward the center of the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 92(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R switch (are changed) to a pattern with the same number as the pattern 8M (here, "6"). Then, as shown in FIG. 92(J), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are now in a reach state with the switched number, move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a and stop there. After that, a predetermined reach performance is executed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped in a winning or losing state.

[Reach-time decorative pattern production B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the ready-to-win decorative pattern performance B. The ready-to-win decorative pattern performance is a performance in which a pattern different from the ready-to-win pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L in the ready-to-win performance executed when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-win state, and then the ready-to-win pattern of the decorative pattern changes to that pattern. First, as shown in FIG. 93(A), in a state in which nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-win state (here, the ready-to-win pattern of "2↓2") on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 93(B), multiple symbols 8M enter the frame from the right side of the right sub-display screen 64R and move leftward. The symbols 8M are numbers (here, "6") different from the reach symbols (here, "2") of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The multiple symbols 8M include symbols 8M that move not only leftward, but also upward and downward, and move radially from the right sub-display screen 64R to the display screen 7a. When the symbols 8M move from the right sub-display screen 64R to the display screen 7a, they are temporarily displayed straddling the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. The symbols 8M also move while diffusing leftward, upward and downward on the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 93(C), the pattern 8M further moves while diffusing from the display screen 7a towards the left sub-display screen 64L. When the pattern 8M moves from the display screen 7a to the left sub-display screen 64L, it is temporarily displayed straddling the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. Also, part of the pattern 8M temporarily overlaps the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R while moving. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the front side. The pattern 8M gradually becomes larger as it moves (it is displayed enlarged as it moves).

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(D), all of the multiple patterns 8M move out of the frame of the three screens, the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a, and disappear (are not displayed) from the three screens. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be displayed in the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(E), multiple symbols 8M frame in from below the display screen 7a and move upward. The symbols 8M are numbers (here, "6") different from the reach symbols (here, "2") of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The multiple symbols 8M include symbols 8M that move not only upward, but also to the upper right and upper left, and move radially toward the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L as well as upward on the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 93(F), when the pattern 8M moves from the display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R, it is temporarily displayed straddling both the display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R. When the pattern 8M moves from the display screen 7a to the left sub-display screen 64L, it is temporarily displayed straddling both the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. In addition, some of the patterns 8M temporarily overlap with the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R during movement. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the front side. The pattern 8M gradually becomes larger as it moves (it is enlarged and displayed as it moves).

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(G), all of the multiple patterns 8M move out of the frame of the three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. They then disappear (are not displayed) from the three screens. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be displayed in the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the reach pattern move toward the center of the display screen 7a while rotating horizontally in a three-dimensional manner. Then, as shown in FIG. 93(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R stop in the center of the display screen 7a in a state where the left and right are reversed. Then, as shown in FIG. 93(J), the pattern is switched (changed) to a pattern with the same number as the pattern 8M (here, "6"). Then, as shown in FIG. 92(J) of the reach-time decorative pattern performance A, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which have entered the reach state with the switched number, move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a and stop there. Then, a predetermined reach performance is executed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped in a winning or losing state.

[Reach-time decorative pattern production C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the ready-to-win decorative pattern performance C. The ready-to-win decorative pattern performance is a performance in which a pattern different from the ready-to-win pattern is displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L in the ready-to-win performance executed when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-win state, and then the ready-to-win pattern of the decorative pattern changes to that pattern. First, as shown in FIG. 93(A) of the ready-to-win decorative pattern performance A, in a state where nothing is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the ready-to-win state (here, the ready-to-win pattern of "2↓2") on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 94(A), pattern 8M comes into the frame from the top of the display screen 7a and moves downward. Pattern 8M is a number (here, "6") that is different from the reach pattern (here, "2") of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

As shown in Figures 94 (B) to (C), after the pattern 8M is framed in, it is enlarged and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result of this enlarged display, the left side of the pattern 8M straddles the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right side of the pattern 8M straddles the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 94 (C). Furthermore, the enlarged display causes the pattern 8M to overlap the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the front side.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(D), the pattern 8M is enlarged to a certain extent and then disappears (is not displayed) from the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be displayed in the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(E), multiple symbols 8M frame in from above the display screen 7a and move downward. The symbols 8M are numbers (here, "6") that are different from the reach symbols (here, "2") of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The multiple symbols 8M include symbols 8M that move not only downward, but also to the lower right and lower left, and move radially toward the right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L as well as downward on the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 94(F), when the pattern 8M moves from the display screen 7a to the right sub-display screen 64R, it is temporarily displayed straddling both the display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R. Also, when the pattern 8M moves from the display screen 7a to the left sub-display screen 64L, it is temporarily displayed straddling both the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. The pattern 8M gradually becomes larger as it moves (it is enlarged and displayed as it moves).

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(G), all of the multiple patterns 8M move out of the frame of the three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. They then disappear (are not displayed) from the three screens. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R continue to be displayed in the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the reach pattern move toward the center of the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 94(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R switch (are changed) to a pattern with the same number as the pattern 8M (here, "6"). Then, as shown in FIG. 94(J), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are now in a reach state with the switched number, move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a and stop there. After that, a predetermined reach performance is executed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped in a winning or losing state.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the decorative pattern effects that occur when a win is reached.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 92 to 94, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the first symbol (for example, "2") and in a ready-to-win state on the display screen 7a, a first effect is displayed on the display screen 7a, a second effect is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R after the first effect, and a third effect is displayed, in which the decorative symbol in the ready-to-win state is changed from the first symbol to the second symbol after the second effect. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and an increase in interest can be achieved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second effect, the second symbol (symbol 8M) is also displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in Figures 92 to 94. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and the player's interest can be enhanced.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 92 to 94, in the first effect, the second symbol (symbol 8M) gradually becomes larger after being displayed on the display screen 7a. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest of the player.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first effect, a plurality of second symbols (symbol 8M) are displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in Figures 93 and 94. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, some of the second symbols (symbol 8M) are displayed overlapping with the decorative symbols in the reach state, as shown in Figures 93 and 94. This configuration allows the player to be visually entertained by a novel presentation that has never been seen before, and can increase the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second effect, the second symbol (symbol 8M) is also displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, as shown in Figures 92 to 94. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen before can be visually entertaining for the player, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

[Modification]
The following shows modified examples of the decorative pattern presentation when a win occurs.
[Modification 1]
The effects of the reach-time decorative pattern effects A to C may be appropriately combined. For example, in the reach-time decorative pattern effect C, the effects of the reach-time decorative pattern effect A shown in Fig. 92 (B) to (G) may be executed instead of the effects of Fig. 94 (A) to (D). Also, in the reach-time decorative pattern effect A, the effects of the reach-time decorative pattern effect B shown in Fig. 93 (H) to (J) may be executed instead of the effects of Fig. 92 (H) to (J).

[Modification 2]
The aspect of the pattern 8M may be the same as or different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The aspect here refers to the shape, font, color, size, and the like.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect C1-1]
a first display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine including a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern;
a first effect in which, when the decorative symbol is a first symbol and in a ready-to-win state, a second symbol different from the first symbol is displayed on the first display means;
a second effect in which the second symbol is displayed on the second display means after the first effect;
and a third performance in which the decorative symbol in a reach state is changed from the first symbol to the second symbol after the second performance.
◇[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
In the second presentation, the second symbol is also displayed on the first display means.
◇[Aspect C1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or C1-2,
In the first performance, the second symbol gradually becomes larger after being displayed on the first display means.
◇[Aspect C1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
In the first presentation, a plurality of the second symbols are displayed on the first display means.
◇[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4,
A gaming machine, characterized in that some of the plurality of second symbols are displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols in a reach state.
◇[Aspect C1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects C1-1 to C1-5 further comprises:
a third display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
In the second presentation, the second symbol is also displayed on the third display means.

The group promotion effects A to C are explained below using Figures 95 to 97. These group promotion effects can be executed during the performance of the changing performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a group promotion effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Group Promotion Performance A]
Figure 95 is a diagram for explaining group promotion effect A.
First, as shown in Fig. 95(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the corresponding change image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reservation and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(C), the group performance (first half) is executed. In the group performance (first half), a button image BGS that resembles the performance button 63 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The button images BGS form a group and move to the left as shown by the arrow YG. At this time, the performance patterns 8L and 8R that have formed a reach are displayed at the top of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (D), the group performance (middle stage) is executed. In the group performance (middle stage), the button image BGS moves in the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the button image BGS moves to the left as shown by the arrow YG. At this time, the performance patterns 8L and 8R that have formed a reach are displayed in the upper left and right parts of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (E), the group performance (later stage) is executed. In the group performance (later stage), the button image BGS moves along the left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the button image BGS moves to the left as shown by the arrow YG and disappears off the screen. At this time, the performance patterns 8L and 8R that have formed a reach are still displayed at the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (F), a symbol effect is executed. In the symbol effect, the symbol may be upgraded. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are upgraded from "4" to "7". These effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed at the top of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a. If a "7" symbol is hit, a jackpot play is played, and a transition to a high probability, high base state is confirmed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 95(G), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. In the battle performance, a win is achieved when the ally character CRA wins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 95(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (win), the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning state. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all shown to be fixed and stopped at "7". In the case of a miss, for example, the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are fixed and stopped at "7", and the center effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "8".

[Group Promotion Performance B]
Figure 96 is a diagram to explain group promotion effect B.
First, as shown in Fig. 96 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the corresponding change image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special reserved symbol and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), the group performance (first half) is executed. In the group performance (first half), a button image BGS that resembles the performance button 63 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The button images BGS form a group and move to the left as shown by the arrow YG. At this time, the performance patterns 8L and 8R that have formed a reach are displayed at the top of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), the group performance (middle stage) is executed. In the group performance (middle stage), the button image BGS moves in the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the button image BGS moves to the left as shown by the arrow YG. At this time, the performance patterns 8L and 8R that have formed a reach are displayed in the upper left and right parts of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), the group performance (later stage) is executed. In the group performance (later stage), the button image BGS moves along the left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the button image BGS moves to the left as shown by the arrow YG and disappears off the screen. At this time, the performance patterns 8L and 8R that have formed a reach are still displayed at the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (F), a symbol effect is executed. In the symbol effect, the symbol may be upgraded. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R remain at "4" and have not been upgraded. These effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed at the top of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Fig. 96(G), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. In the battle performance, a win is achieved when the ally character CRA wins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 96(H), a fixed stop performance (miss) is executed. In the fixed stop performance (miss), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a miss mode. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are fixed and stopped at "4", and the center performance symbol 8C is fixed and stopped at "3". In addition, in the case of a win, for example, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped at "4".

[Group Promotion Performance C]
Figure 97 is a diagram to explain group promotion effect C.
First, as shown in Fig. 97(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reservation and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), the group performance (first half) is executed. In the group performance (first half), a 7 symbol image ZGS that imitates the "7" symbol appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The 7 symbol images ZGS form a group and move to the left as shown by the arrow YG. At this time, the performance symbols 8L and 8R that have formed a reach are displayed at the top of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(D), a group performance (middle stage) is executed. In the group performance (middle stage), the 7 symbol image ZGS moves in the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the 7 symbol image ZGS moves to the left as shown by the arrow YG. At this time, the performance symbols 8L and 8R that have formed a reach are displayed in the upper left and right parts of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), the group performance (later stage) is executed. In the group performance (later stage), the 7 symbol image ZGS moves along the left side of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the 7 symbol image ZGS moves to the left as shown by the arrow YG and disappears off the screen. At this time, the performance symbols 8L and 8R that have formed a reach are still displayed at the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(F), a symbol effect is executed. In the symbol effect, the symbol may be upgraded. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are upgraded from "4" to "7". These effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed at the top of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a. If a "7" symbol is hit, a jackpot play is played, and a transition to a high probability, high base state is confirmed.

Next, as shown in Fig. 97(G), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. In the battle performance, a win is achieved when the ally character CRA wins.
Next, as shown in FIG. 97(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (win), the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning state. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all shown to be fixed and stopped at "7". In the case of a miss, for example, the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are fixed and stopped at "7", and the center effect pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at "8".

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of group promotion.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, group performance (early stage), group performance (middle stage), and group performance (late stage) can be executed (FIG. 95(C)(D)(E), FIG. 96(C)(D)(E), FIG. 97(C)(D)(E)). Then, this is used as a trigger to execute a pattern performance that can upgrade the pattern (FIG. 95(F), FIG. 96(F), FIG. 97(F)). With this configuration, it is possible to expect the pattern to be upgraded as a result of the group performance, and therefore it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect symbols 8L and 8R that are temporarily stopped in a reach state due to the reach formation effect (FIG. 95(B), FIG. 97(B)) are upgraded (FIG. 95(F), FIG. 97(F)). According to this configuration, since there is hope for the upgrade of the effect symbols after the reach, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the seven symbol image ZGS, which imitates the "7" symbol, crosses the display screen 7a from right to left in a group effect (FIG. 97(C)(D)(E)), and the effect symbols 8L and 8R are upgraded from "4" to "7" (FIG. 97(F)). According to this configuration, a relationship is created between the group effect and the promotion of the symbols, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R are upgraded from "4" to "7" (Fig. 95 (F), Fig. 97 (F)). If the "7" symbol is a hit, a transition to a high probability high base state is confirmed after a big win game. With this configuration, expectations for the upgrade of the performance symbols are increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the group performance (Fig. 95(C)(D)(E), Fig. 96(C)(D)(E), Fig. 97(C)(D)(E)), the performance symbols 8L and 8R may be promoted from "4" to "7" in the symbol performance (Fig. 95(F), Fig. 97(F)), or the performance symbols 8L and 8R may remain at "4" without being promoted (Fig. 96(F)). This configuration makes the player feel nervous and excited, and increases the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of group promotion effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the effect symbols 8L and 8R that have become reach states due to reach formation effects (FIGS. 95(B), 96(B), and 97(B)) are promoted. In contrast, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have temporarily stopped in a winning state may be promoted by the group effect.

[Modification 2]
In the above, in the group performance (FIGS. 95(C)(D)(E), 96(C)(D)(E), 97(C)(D)(E)), the performance symbols 8L and 8R were displayed at the top of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a. In contrast, in the group performance, the performance symbols 8L and 8R may be temporarily hidden. Also, in the group performance, the button image BGS or the 7-symbol image ZGS may cover the performance symbols 8L and 8R.

[Modification 3]
Although the above has been given as an example of a presentation for the first special chart reservation, the same may also be used for a presentation for the second special chart reservation.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine,
A group movement effect can be executed in which specific images move in a grouped state, and a promotion effect can be executed in which the pattern is promoted to a more advantageous pattern, using the group movement effect as a trigger.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The promotion effect is an effect of promoting the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped in a reach state in the reach formation effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or C2-2,
The promotion effect is an effect of promoting a performance pattern that is temporarily stopped in a winning state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
The specific image is an image related to the advantageous symbol after promotion in the promotion performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4,
The advantageous symbol after the promotion in the promotion performance is a symbol that suggests a transition to a specific game state through a special game in which a game ball can be acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-5,
When the group performance is executed, the promotion performance may be executed, or the promotion performance may not be executed even if the group performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The stop decorative pattern appearance effects A to C are explained below using Figures 98 to 100. These stop decorative pattern appearance effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the stop decorative pattern appearance effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Stop decoration pattern appearance effect A]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the stop decorative pattern appearance performance A. The stop decorative pattern appearance performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a state of being stopped and displayed in a winning state without displaying the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R after the special pattern starts to change (after the special pattern lottery starts), as shown in FIG. 98 (A), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, even after the variable display (variable display) of the special pattern (identification information) is started in the special pattern display device 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, as shown in Figures 98 (B) to (D), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed stationary in the winning state (here, "777") fade in on the display screen 7a. That is, the images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become darker and gradually become visible. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In this manner, in this effect, after the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the fluctuating display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed stationary in the winning state are displayed.

After the fade-in effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is completed and the image is displayed at normal density, an enlarged display effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is executed as shown in FIG. 98 (E). At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special pattern variation ends and the special symbol for the jackpot is displayed stopped.

Figures 98 (F) to (J) show another example of the stopped decorative pattern appearance performance A. After the special pattern different from those shown in Figures 98 (A) to (E) starts to change (after the special pattern lottery starts), as shown in Figure 98 (F), the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continues to be hidden on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, as shown in Figures 98 (G) to (J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in a stopped state in the winning state (here, "777") fade in in order on the display screen 7a. Here, the image of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R gradually becomes darker in order, and an effect is executed in which they become gradually more visible in order from left to right. , The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a stationary state. In this way, in this effect, after the special chart starts to fluctuate, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed in a changing state, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in a stopped state in the winning state are displayed.

After the fade-in effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is completed and the image is displayed at normal density, an enlarged display effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is executed as shown in FIG. 98(E) described above. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special pattern variation ends and the special symbol for the jackpot is displayed stopped.

[Stop decoration pattern appearance effect B]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the stop decorative pattern appearance performance B. The stop decorative pattern appearance performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a state of being stopped and displayed in a winning state without displaying the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R after the special pattern starts to change (after the special pattern lottery starts), as shown in FIG. 99 (A), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, even after the variable display (variable display) of the special pattern (identification information) is started in the special pattern display device 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, as shown in Figures 99 (B) to (D), on the display screen 7a, parts of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in the winning state (here, "777") are displayed, and the display range gradually increases until the entirety is finally displayed. Here, parts of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the vertical direction, thereby executing an effect in which the visible area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R expands. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In this way, in this effect, after the special chart starts to fluctuate, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in the winning state are displayed without the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuating.

After the above-mentioned effect in which the range of the visible parts of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually expands is completed and the entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, an enlarged display effect of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is executed as shown in FIG. 99(E). At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special pattern variation ends and the special pattern for the jackpot is displayed.

Figures 99(F)-(J) show another example of the stopped decorative pattern appearance performance B. After the special pattern different from those shown in Figures 99(A)-(E) starts to change (after the special pattern lottery starts), as shown in Figure 99(F), the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continues to be hidden on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

After the start of the fluctuation, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Fig. 99(G)-(J), a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in the winning mode "here, "777"" is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the display range gradually increases until the entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are finally displayed. Here, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the left and right directions, thereby executing an effect in which the visible area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R expands. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In Fig. 99(H), the visible part of the left decorative pattern 8L and the visible part of the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state different from each other. That is, in Fig. 99(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state in which different parts of the decorative patterns are displayed. In this performance, after the special chart starts to change, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and instead the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped in a winning state.

After the above-mentioned effect in which the visible range of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually expands is completed and the entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, an enlarged display effect is executed in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R extend beyond the frame image WG, as shown in Figure 99 (J). At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special pattern variation ends and the special pattern for the jackpot is displayed.

[Stop decoration pattern appearance effect C]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the stop decorative pattern appearance performance C. The stop decorative pattern appearance performance is a performance in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a state of being stopped and displayed in a winning state without displaying the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R after the special pattern starts to change (after the special pattern lottery starts), as shown in FIG. 100(A), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, even after the variable display (variable display) of the special pattern (identification information) is started in the special pattern display device 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation, as shown in Fig. 100 (B) to (D), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a in the winning state "here, "777"" fade in, and first a part of them is displayed, and the display range gradually expands until the entirety is finally displayed. Here, a part of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the vertical direction, and the visual area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R expands, and the images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become darker and gradually become visible. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In this way, in this performance, after the special chart starts to fluctuate, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the winning state are displayed.

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fade in and the range of the visible portion gradually expands, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in their entirety at normal density, an enlarged display effect of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is executed as shown in FIG. 100(E). At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special pattern variation ends and the special jackpot pattern is displayed stopped.

Figures 100 (F) to (J) show another example of the stopped decorative pattern appearance performance C. After the special pattern different from those shown in Figures 100 (A) to (E) starts to change (after the special pattern lottery starts), as shown in Figure 100 (F), the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continues to be hidden on the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

After the start of the fluctuation, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Fig. 100 (G) to (J), on the display screen 7a, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in the winning mode "here, "777"" is displayed while fading in, and the display range gradually increases until the entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are finally displayed. Here, a part of the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the left and right directions, and the effect of expanding the visible area of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is executed in combination with the effect of gradually darkening the images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and gradually becoming visible. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stationary. In Fig. 100 (H), the visible part of the left decorative pattern 8L and the visible part of the right decorative pattern 8R are in different states from each other. That is, in FIG. 100(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are in a state where different parts of the decorative pattern are displayed. In this performance, after the special pattern starts to change, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a stopped state in a winning state are displayed.

After the above-mentioned effect in which the visible range of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually expands is completed and the entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed, an enlarged display effect is executed in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R extend beyond the frame image WG, as shown in FIG. 100(J). At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed across the left sub-display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed across the right sub-display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special pattern variation ends and the special pattern for the jackpot is displayed.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the stop decorative pattern appearance.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 98 to 100, after the start of the variation, the first effect can be executed in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stationary in a winning state without displaying the varying display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can be visually entertaining to the player, and can increase the interest of the player.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 98 and 100, in the first performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in a stopped state in a winning state are displayed by fading in. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 99 and 100, in the first performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in a winning state are partially displayed and then the entirety is displayed. With this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player and increase the interest.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 99(H) and 100(H), in the first performance, when a part of the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in a winning state is displayed, the part displayed in one of the multiple patterns included in the decorative pattern is different from the part displayed in the other pattern. With this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 98 to 100, in the first performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed until the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in a winning state are displayed after the start of the variation. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 98 to 100, in the first performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed in a winning state are enlarged and displayed across the display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R, and across the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. With this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the player's interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the stop decorative pattern appearance performance are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the stopped decorative pattern appearance performances A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed until the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed after the special pattern starts to change (after the special pattern lottery starts). However, in the stopped decorative pattern appearance performances A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in a form other than the changing display may be displayed until the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed after the special pattern starts to change (after the special pattern lottery starts). For example, only the stopped decorative pattern 8L may be displayed until the stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed after the special pattern starts to change (after the special pattern lottery starts).

[Modification 2]
In the stop decorative pattern appearance performances A to C, there is a period of time between the start of the special pattern variation (the start of the special pattern lottery) and the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped. However, in the stop decorative pattern appearance performances A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed may be displayed immediately after the start of the special pattern variation.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern;
The gaming machine is characterized in that after the start of variation, a first performance is executed in which the decorative symbol displayed stopped in a winning state is displayed without displaying a variation display of the decorative symbol.
◇[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1,
In the first performance, the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in a winning mode is displayed in a fade-in manner.
◇[Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or C3-2,
In the first performance, the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in a winning mode is displayed in its entirety after a part of it is displayed.
◇[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3,
In the first performance, when a part of the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in a winning mode is displayed, a part displayed in one of the multiple patterns included in the decorative pattern and a part displayed in another pattern are different from each other.
◇[Aspect C3-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4,
In the first performance, the decorative symbols are not displayed until the decorative symbols displayed in a stopped state in a winning mode are displayed after the start of the variation.
◇[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects C3-1 to C3-5 further comprises:
A sub-display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided,
In the first performance, the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in a winning state is enlarged and displayed across the display means and the sub-display means.

The pattern color change effects A to C are explained below using Figures 101 to 103. This pattern color change effect can be executed during the performance of the changing pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the pattern color change effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Pattern color change effect A]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the pattern color change effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 101(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the corresponding change image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special reserved symbol and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(C), a reach development effect is executed. The reach development effect is an effect that notifies the development from a normal reach to a super reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Final battle begins" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the effect patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in the upper left and right parts of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect that changes the display color of the effect pattern that has reached a reach state. Here, the display color of the effect patterns 8L, 8R displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a is changed. Specifically, the display color of the effect patterns 8L, 8R is changed from "blue" to "red."

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(E), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. In the battle performance, a win occurs when the ally character CRA wins. Note that here too, performance patterns 8L and 8R, which are displayed in red, are displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (F), a win/loss notification display is executed. The win/loss notification display is a display that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, a win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (G), the winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect that notifies the winning/losing result using effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are displayed at the top of the left and right sides of the display screen, and the center effect pattern 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4" and are displayed in the color "red."

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In a fixed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, right, and center are all shown to have stopped at "4". Note that, even here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed in "red". This confirms the transition to a high probability, high base state after a jackpot game.

[Pattern color change effect B]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the pattern color change effect B.
First, as shown in Fig. 102 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special reserved symbol and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), a reach development effect is executed. The reach development effect is an effect that notifies the development from a normal reach to a super reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Final battle begins" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the effect patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in the upper left and right parts of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect that changes the display color of the effect pattern that has reached a reach state. Here, the display color of the effect patterns 8L, 8R displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a is changed. Specifically, the display color of the effect patterns 8L, 8R is changed from "blue" to "red."

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(E), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. In the battle performance, a win occurs when the ally character CRA wins. Note that here too, performance patterns 8L and 8R, which are displayed in red, are displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (F), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, a win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has been defeated. At this time, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), the winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect that notifies the winning/losing result using effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are displayed at the top of the left and right sides of the display screen, and the center effect pattern 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are "5", and the center effect pattern 8C is "5". Additionally, the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in "red", and the center effect pattern 8C is displayed in "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (H), a confirmed stop performance (miss) is executed. In a confirmed stop performance (miss), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a confirmed miss mode. Here, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R stop at a confirmed "4", and the center performance symbol 8C stops at a confirmed "5". At this time, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R change back from "red" to "blue" display color just before the confirmed stops.

[Pattern color change effect C]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the pattern color change effect C.
First, as shown in Fig. 103 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the corresponding change image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reservation and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), a reach development effect is executed. The reach development effect is an effect that notifies the development from a normal reach to a super reach. Here, a message image MSG saying "Final battle begins" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, the effect patterns 8L and 8R are displayed in the upper left and right parts of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. In the battle performance, a win occurs when the ally character CRA wins. Note that here too, the performance patterns 8L and 8R are displayed at the top left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (E), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, a win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also, a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed. Note that here too, the effect patterns 8L, 8R are displayed in the upper left and right parts of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (F), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the display color of the effect patterns is changed following the win/loss notification effect. Here, the display color of the effect patterns 8L, 8R displayed at the top of the left and right sides of the display screen 7a is changed. Specifically, the display color of the effect patterns 8L, 8R is changed from "blue" to "red."

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (G), the winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect that notifies the winning/losing result using effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are displayed at the top of the left and right sides of the display screen, and the center effect pattern 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4" and are displayed in the color "red."

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In a fixed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a fixed winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, right, and center are all shown stopping at "4". Note that, even here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed in "red". This confirms the transition to a high probability, high base state after a jackpot game.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effect of changing the color of the patterns.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R that are temporarily stopped in a reach state is changed when a specific effect occurs (FIGS. 101(C)(D), 102(C)(D), 103(E)(F)). This configuration increases the expectation of a win, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R that are temporarily stopped in the reach state is changed when the reach development effect is triggered (FIGS. 101(C)(D), 102(C)(D)). According to this configuration, the display color of the effect symbols is changed as the game develops to a super reach, so that the expectation of a win is further increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the number image constituting the effect pattern is changed (FIGS. 101(C)(D), 102(C)(D), 103(E)(F)). With this configuration, the change in the display color of the effect pattern becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, if a win occurs after the color change performance (Fig. 101(D), Fig. 102(D), Fig. 103(F)), a transition to a high probability high base state is confirmed through a big win game (Fig. 101(H), Fig. 103(H)). With this configuration, the change in the display color of the performance pattern becomes even more anticipated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the winning/losing notification effect (FIG. 102(G)) is a losing combination, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R, which was changed to "red" in the fixed stop effect, is returned to "blue" (FIG. 102(H)). With this configuration, the fixed stop display of the effect symbols becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R, which has been changed to "red" in the fixed stop effect, is returned to "blue" just before the fixed stop (FIG. 102(H)). With this configuration, the fixed stop display of the effect symbols becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the pattern color change performance are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the display color of the performance pattern was changed (FIGS. 101(D), 102(D), 103(F)) in response to the reach development performance (FIG. 101(C), 102(C)) or the win/lose notification performance (FIG. 103(E)). However, the timing of changing the display color of the performance pattern is not limited to this. For example, the display color of the performance pattern may be changed in response to the reach formation performance.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the display color of the number image was changed, but if the performance pattern has components other than the number image, the display color of the part other than the number image may be changed. Also, the display color of both the number image and the part other than the number image may be changed.

[Modification 3]
The above has been given as an example of a presentation for the first special chart reservation, but it may also be a presentation for the second special chart reservation.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C4-1]
A gaming machine,
After executing a reach formation effect in which the performance pattern is temporarily stopped in the reach state, a display color change effect can be executed in which the display color of the performance pattern temporarily stopped in the reach state is changed in response to a predetermined effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1,
The predetermined performance is a development performance from a normal reach performance to a super reach performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C4-1 or C4-2,
The display color of the performance pattern is the display color of the number image constituting the performance pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3,
When a winning notification effect is executed, which indicates that the lottery result is a win, after the display color change effect is executed, a transition to a specific game state is confirmed through a special game in which a game ball can be acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-4,
When a losing notification effect is executed, which indicates that the winning or losing result is a losing result, after the display color change effect is executed, a color restoration effect is executed, which returns the display color of the effect pattern to the original display color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-5,
The color return effect is executed prior to the determination stop effect of the effect pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The color-change reach effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 104 to 106. These color-change reach effects can be executed during the variation of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a color-change reach effect, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Color change reach performance A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the color change reach presentation A.
First, as shown in Fig. 104 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), the left pattern stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop effect is an effect in which the left performance pattern 8L temporarily stops. Here, the left performance pattern 8L is shown temporarily stopping at "4". In addition, the movement of the right performance pattern 8R slows down, and it is shown moving as indicated by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in Fig. 104 (C), a right symbol reversal effect is executed. In the right symbol reversal effect, the right symbol 8R, which had been moving toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, reverses its direction of movement and moves toward the top of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y.
Next, as shown in Fig. 104(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the right effect pattern 8R, which has been moving toward the top of the display screen 7a, changes the display color of the number image. For example, the right effect pattern 8R, which is normally "blue", becomes "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "4". Here, the "4" symbol, whose display color has been changed, moves (for example, moves as if vibrating) to tease whether or not it will become a reach, and while it is temporarily stopping, its display color is also changed. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol, which has been changed to "red", is changed to the normal "blue".

Next, as shown in Fig. 104 (F), a middle symbol stirring effect is executed. The middle symbol stirring effect is an effect in which the "4" symbol moving in the direction of the arrow Y in a normal reach moves in a stirring manner (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) to see whether it will stop or not.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(G), the winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect that notifies the winning/losing result using the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the center effect pattern 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a compared to the effect patterns 8L and 8R on the left and right. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In a fixed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all shown to be fixedly stopped at "4".

[Color change reach performance B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the color change reach presentation B.
First, as shown in Fig. 105 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), a left pattern stop effect is executed. A left pattern stop effect is an effect in which the left performance pattern 8L temporarily stops. Here, the left performance pattern 8L is shown temporarily stopping at "4". In addition, the movement of the right performance pattern 8R slows down, and it moves as indicated by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in Fig. 105 (C), a right symbol reversal effect is executed. In the right symbol reversal effect, the right symbol 8R, which had been moving toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, reverses its direction of movement and moves toward the top of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y.
Next, as shown in Fig. 105(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the right effect pattern 8R, which has been moving toward the top of the display screen 7a, changes the display color of the number image. For example, the right effect pattern 8R of the "4" that is "blue" during normal times becomes "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(E), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "4". Here, the "4" symbol, whose display color has been changed, moves (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) as if to tease whether or not it will be a reach, and while it is temporarily stopping, its display color is also changed. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol, which has been changed to "red", is changed to the normal "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(F), a middle symbol stirring effect is executed. The middle symbol stirring effect is an effect in which the "4" symbol moving in the direction of the arrow Y in a normal reach moves in a stirring manner (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) to see whether it will stop or not. At this time, the display color of the "4" symbol is changed. For example, the "4" symbol, which is normally "blue", becomes "red".
Next, as shown in FIG. 105(G), the winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect that notifies the winning/losing result using the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the center effect pattern 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, compared to the effect patterns 8L and 8R on the left and right. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4". At this time, the display color of the center effect pattern 8C is the original display color. For example, the display color of the "4" pattern that has been changed to "red" is changed to the normal "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In a fixed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, right, and center are all shown to be fixedly stopped at "4".

[Color change reach effect C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the color change reach presentation C.
First, as shown in Fig. 106 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), a left pattern stop effect is executed. A left pattern stop effect is an effect in which the left performance pattern 8L temporarily stops. Here, the left performance pattern 8L is shown temporarily stopping at "4". In addition, the movement of the right performance pattern 8R slows down, and it moves as indicated by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), a right symbol reversal effect is executed. In the right symbol reversal effect, the right symbol 8R, which had been moving toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, reverses its direction of movement and moves toward the top of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y. At this time, the left symbol 8L is expanded. The timing of the expansion may be before, during, or after the right symbol 8R is reversed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the right effect pattern 8R, which has been moving toward the top of the display screen 7a, changes the display color of its number image. For example, the "4" pattern, which is normally "blue", becomes "red". At this time, the right effect pattern 8R is enlarged in the same way as the left effect pattern 8L. The size of the right effect pattern 8R after enlargement may be larger, smaller, or the same as the size of the left effect pattern 8L after enlargement.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(E), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "4". Here, the display color is changed, and the enlarged "4" symbol moves (for example, moves as if vibrating) to tease whether or not it will be a reach, and when it temporarily stops, the display color is changed. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol that has been changed to "red" is changed to the normal "blue".

Next, as shown in Fig. 106 (F), a middle symbol stirring effect is executed. The middle symbol stirring effect is an effect in which the "4" symbol moving in the direction of the arrow Y in a normal reach moves in a stirring manner (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) to see whether it will stop or not.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(G), the winning/losing notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect that notifies the winning/losing result using the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, the center effect pattern 8C is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a compared to the effect patterns 8L and 8R on the left and right. Here, the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In a fixed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, right, and center are all shown to be fixedly stopped at "4".

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of color-changing reach effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the right performance symbol 8R is stopped, the display color of the right performance symbol 8R is changed and then the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped (Fig. 104 (D) (E), Fig. 105 (D) (E), Fig. 106 (D) (E)). Also, when the middle performance symbol 8C is stopped, the display color of the middle performance symbol 8C is changed and then the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped (Fig. 105 (F) (G)). According to this configuration, the temporary stop of the performance symbol stands out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the effect symbols is changed, and when the effect symbols are temporarily stopped, the display color is returned to the original color (FIG. 104(E), FIG. 105(E)(G), FIG. 106(E)). With this configuration, the temporary stop of the effect symbols is more prominent, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right performance symbol 8R is moved in the opposite direction to the moving direction, the display color of the right performance symbol 8R is changed, and the right performance symbol 8R is moved in the same direction as the moving direction to be temporarily stopped (FIGS. 104(C)(D)(E), 105(C)(D)(E), 106(C)(D)(E)). According to this configuration, since the performance symbol moves in the opposite direction to the moving direction, the temporary stop of the performance symbol is more prominent, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the reach formation presentation, the "4" symbol with its display color changed moves (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) to indicate whether or not it will be a reach, and then temporarily stops and changes its display color (Fig. 104(D)(E), Fig. 105(D)(E), Fig. 106(D)(E)). With this configuration, the reach formation presentation stands out, and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right effect symbol 8R is expanded and then temporarily stopped (FIG. 106 (D) (E)). With this configuration, the temporary stop of the effect symbol is more prominent, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the reach formation performance, the expanded right performance pattern 8R of "4" moves (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) to incite whether or not it will be a reach, and temporarily stops (FIG. 106 (E)). With this configuration, the temporary stop of the performance pattern is more prominent, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the color change reach presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the color change effect is followed by the reach formation effect (Fig. 104 (D) (E), Fig. 105 (D) (E), Fig. 106 (D) (E)), but the reach formation effect is not always performed. For example, if the reach formation is not performed, the right performance pattern 8R will stop at something other than "4", and then the center performance pattern 8C will stop, resulting in a miss.

[Modification 2]
The above example shows changing the display color of the right performance pattern 8R and the middle performance pattern 8C, but the display color of the left performance pattern 8L may also be changed.

[Modification 3]
The above has been given as an example of a presentation for the first special chart reservation, but it may also be a presentation for the second special chart reservation.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C5-1]
A gaming machine,
When stopping the changing performance pattern, it is possible to execute a color change stop performance in which the performance pattern is temporarily stopped after changing the display color of the performance pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-1,
In the color change stop performance, the display color of the performance pattern is temporarily changed, and when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped, the display color of the performance pattern is returned to the original display color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-2,
In the color change stop performance, the performance pattern is moved in the direction opposite to the fluctuation direction, and the display color of the performance pattern is temporarily changed, and the pattern is moved in the same direction as the fluctuation direction and temporarily stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-3,
The color change stop effect constitutes a part of the reach effect in which the effect pattern is temporarily stopped in a predetermined manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-4,
When stopping the varying performance pattern, it is possible to execute a size change stop performance in which the performance pattern is temporarily stopped after changing the size of the performance pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C5-5,
The size change stop effect constitutes a part of the reach effect in which the effect pattern is temporarily stopped in a predetermined manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The character attack effects A to C are explained below with reference to Figures 107 to 109. These character attack effects can be executed during the performance of the changing performance of the performance pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the character attack performance, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Character attack effect A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining character attack presentation A.
First, as shown in Fig. 107(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B) or FIG. 107(D), a temporary stop effect is executed. A temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect pattern temporarily stops in a predetermined manner. There are two types of temporary stop effects. As shown in FIG. 107(B), a mode in which a special pattern temporarily stops instead of the middle effect pattern 8C, and as shown in FIG. 107(D), a mode in which the middle effect pattern 8C temporarily stops.

In the temporary stop effect A shown in Figure 107 (B), the left effect pattern 8L temporarily stops at "1", the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stops at "2", and a special pattern temporarily stops in place of the center effect pattern 8C. The special pattern is an enemy character pattern CRBG that imitates an enemy character. For example, the changing effect patterns temporarily stop in the order of left effect pattern 8L → right effect pattern 8R → special pattern.

When a special symbol temporarily stops instead of the middle symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 107(B), an attack effect (before reach) is executed as shown in FIG. 107(C). In other words, the attack effect (before reach) is an effect that is executed when a special symbol temporarily stops in the temporary stop effect. In the attack effect (before reach), an attack line AL indicating an attack is displayed superimposed on the enemy character symbol CRBG. Also, a message image MSG saying "ATTACK" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a.

In the temporary stop effect B shown in Figure 107 (D), the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "4", the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at "9", and the center effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at "3". For example, the changing effect patterns temporarily stop in the order of left effect pattern 8L → right effect pattern 8R → center effect pattern 8C.

After the attack effect (before the reach) shown in FIG. 107(C) or after the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 107(D), the variable start effect shown in FIG. 107(A) is executed, resulting in a pseudo consecutive effect. In this embodiment, a repeat pseudo consecutive effect is executed in which such a pseudo consecutive effect is repeated seven times. Then, in the repeat pseudo consecutive effect, the enemy character image CRBG stops instead of the middle effect pattern 8C (FIG. 107(B)), and an attack effect (before the reach) is executed (FIG. 107(C)).

After the repeat pseudo consecutive performance ends, a reach formation performance is executed as shown in FIG. 107 (E). The reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(F), an attack performance (after reach) is executed. The attack performance (after reach) is a performance in which a further attack is made on the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, an attack image AG is displayed, which indicates an attack on the enemy character CRB. Multiple attack images AG are displayed in sequence, and damage is inflicted on the enemy character CRB when the enemy character CRB and the attack image AG overlap.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (G), a win/loss notification display is executed. The win/loss notification display is a display that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, a win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In a fixed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, right, and center are all shown to be fixedly stopped at "5".

[Character attack effect B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining character attack presentation B.
First, as shown in Fig. 108 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(B) or FIG. 108(D), a temporary stop effect is executed. A temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect pattern temporarily stops in a predetermined manner. There are two types of temporary stop effects. As shown in FIG. 108(B), a mode in which a special pattern temporarily stops instead of the middle effect pattern 8C, and as shown in FIG. 108(D), a mode in which the middle effect pattern 8C temporarily stops.

In the temporary stop effect A shown in Figure 108 (B), the left effect pattern 8L temporarily stops at "1", the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stops at "2", and a special pattern temporarily stops in place of the center effect pattern 8C. The special pattern is an enemy character pattern CRBG that imitates an enemy character. For example, the changing effect patterns temporarily stop in the order of left effect pattern 8L → right effect pattern 8R → special pattern.

When a special symbol temporarily stops instead of the middle symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 108(B), an attack effect (before reach) is executed as shown in FIG. 108(C). In other words, the attack effect (before reach) is an effect that is executed when a special symbol temporarily stops in the temporary stop effect. In the attack effect (before reach), an attack line AL indicating an attack is displayed superimposed on the enemy character symbol CRBG. Also, a message image MSG saying "ATTACK" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a.

In the temporary stop effect B shown in Figure 108 (D), the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "4", the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at "9", and the center effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at "3". For example, the changing effect patterns temporarily stop in the order of left effect pattern 8L → right effect pattern 8R → center effect pattern 8C.

After the attack effect (before the reach) shown in FIG. 108(C) or after the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 108(D), the variable start effect shown in FIG. 108(A) is executed, resulting in a pseudo consecutive effect. In this embodiment, a repeat pseudo consecutive effect is executed in which such a pseudo consecutive effect is repeated seven times. Then, in the repeat pseudo consecutive effect, the enemy character image CRBG stops instead of the middle effect pattern 8C (FIG. 108(B)), and an attack effect (before the reach) is executed (FIG. 108(C)).

After the repeat pseudo consecutive performance ends, a reach formation performance is executed as shown in FIG. 108 (E). A reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(F), an attack effect (after reach) is executed. The attack effect (after reach) is an effect in which a further attack is made on the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen 7a. Also, a message image MSG saying "Continuous hit" is displayed above the button image BG. Then, each time the player presses the effect button 63, an attack image AG indicating an attack on the enemy character CRB is displayed. Multiple attack images AG are displayed in sequence, and damage is inflicted on the enemy character CRB when the enemy character CRB and the attack image AG overlap.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (G), a win/loss notification display is executed. The win/loss notification display is a display that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, a win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has won. At this time, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In a fixed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, right, and center are all shown to have fixedly stopped at "5".

[Character attack effect C]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining character attack presentation C.
First, as shown in Fig. 109 (A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(B) or FIG. 109(D), a temporary stop effect is executed. A temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect pattern temporarily stops in a predetermined manner. There are two types of temporary stop effects. As shown in FIG. 109(B), a mode in which a special pattern temporarily stops instead of the middle effect pattern 8C, and as shown in FIG. 109(D), a mode in which the middle effect pattern 8C temporarily stops.

In the temporary stop effect A shown in Figure 109 (B), the left effect pattern 8L temporarily stops at "1", the right effect pattern 8R temporarily stops at "2", and a special pattern temporarily stops in place of the center effect pattern 8C. The special pattern is an enemy character pattern CRBG that imitates an enemy character. For example, the changing effect patterns temporarily stop in the order of left effect pattern 8L → right effect pattern 8R → special pattern.

When a special symbol temporarily stops instead of the middle symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 109(B), an attack effect (before reach) is executed as shown in FIG. 109(C). In other words, the attack effect (before reach) is an effect that is executed when a special symbol temporarily stops in the temporary stop effect. In the attack effect (before reach), a message image MSG1 saying "ATTACK" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG2 saying "Press" is displayed above the button image BG. Then, when the player presses the effect button 63, an attack line AL indicating an attack is displayed superimposed on the enemy character symbol CRBG.

In the temporary stop effect B shown in Figure 109 (D), the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "4", the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at "9", and the center effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at "3". For example, the changing effect patterns temporarily stop in the order of left effect pattern 8L → right effect pattern 8R → center effect pattern 8C.

After the attack effect (before the reach) shown in FIG. 109(C) or after the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 109(D), the variable start effect shown in FIG. 109(A) is executed, resulting in a pseudo consecutive effect. In this embodiment, a repeat pseudo consecutive effect is executed in which such a pseudo consecutive effect is repeated seven times. Then, in the repeat pseudo consecutive effect, the enemy character image CRBG stops instead of the middle effect pattern 8C (FIG. 109(B)), and an attack effect (before the reach) is executed (FIG. 109(C)).

After the repeat pseudo consecutive performance ends, a reach formation performance is executed as shown in Figure 109 (E). A reach formation performance is a performance in which the performance symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(F), an attack effect (after reach) is executed. The attack effect (after reach) is an effect in which a further attack is made on the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a button image BG that imitates the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image saying "Continuous hit" is displayed above the button image BG. Then, each time the player presses the effect button 63, an attack image AG is displayed indicating an attack on the enemy character CRB. Multiple attack images AG are displayed in sequence, and damage is inflicted on the enemy character CRB when the enemy character CRB and the attack image AG overlap.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player of the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. If the ally character CRA wins, a win is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the ally character CRA has been defeated. At this time, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG saying "Defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 109 (H), a confirmed stop effect (miss) is executed. In a confirmed stop effect (miss), the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped in a missing state. Here, the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R are confirmed and stopped at "5", and the center effect pattern 8C is confirmed and stopped at "6".

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of character attack effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a series of effects can be executed (FIGS. 107(C)(F), 108(C)(F), 109(C)(F)) before and after the reach formation effect (FIGS. 107(E), 108(E), 109(E)). With this configuration, a unified effect can be executed within a single change, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the same enemy character CRB appears before and after the reach formation performance (Fig. 107(E), Fig. 108(E), Fig. 109(E)) (Fig. 107(C)(F), Fig. 108(C)(F), Fig. 109(C)(F)). With this configuration, a more unified performance can be performed within one change, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, before and after the reach formation presentation (Fig. 107(E), Fig. 108(E), Fig. 109(E)), a presentation in which the same enemy character CRB is attacked is executed (Fig. 107(C)(F), Fig. 108(C)(F), Fig. 109(C)(F)). According to this configuration, a more unified presentation can be performed in one change, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a pseudo consecutive performance (FIGS. 107(A)(B)(C)(D), 108(A)(B)(C)(D), 108(A)(B)(C)(D)) is included before the reach formation performance (FIGS. 107(E), 108(E), 109(E)). With this configuration, the performance including the pseudo consecutive performance can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute an effect in which an enemy character pattern CRBG imitating an enemy character is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect pattern 8C (FIG. 107(B), FIG. 108(B), FIG. 109(B)). With this configuration, the pseudo consecutive effects are highly likely to be interesting, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the attack effect (before the reach) is effected using the effect button 63 (FIG. 109(C)). Also, the attack effect (after the reach) is effected using the effect button 63 (FIG. 108(F), FIG. 109(F)). This configuration can increase the interest in the game.

[Modification]
The following shows modified examples of the operation stock presentation.
[Modification 1]
In the above, in the attack effect (after reach), a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed, and a message image MSG saying "Continuous hit" is displayed to encourage the player to make a continuous hit. In contrast to this, a message image saying "Press and hold" may be displayed to encourage the player to make a long press.

[Modification 2]
Although not specifically mentioned above, when attacking the enemy character CRB (attack performance (before the attack), attack performance (after the attack)), a display showing the vitality of the enemy character CRB may be performed. For example, the vitality may be displayed by a horizontal bar.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the operation of the effect button 63 is given as an example, however, any operation unit that can be operated by the player is sufficient, and the operation is not limited to the operation of the effect button 63 .

[Modification 4]
The above has been given as an example of a presentation for the first special chart reservation, but it may also be a presentation for the second special chart reservation.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C6-1]
A gaming machine,
In a variation period including a first period from the start of variation of the performance symbols to the formation of a reach where the performance symbols stop in a predetermined manner, and a second period from the formation of the reach to the announcement of a win or loss, a series of performances spanning the first period and the second period can be executed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-1,
The series of effects is an effect in which a specific character appears.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C6-1 or C6-2,
The series of effects is an attack effect that attacks a specific character.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-3,
The series of effects includes a pseudo-repeated effect in which the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and re-changed during the first period.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C6-4,
In the pseudo consecutive performance, when the performance pattern is temporarily stopped, a character pattern stop performance in which a pattern imitating a specific character is temporarily stopped can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C6-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-5,
The series of effects includes an operation unit effect using an operation unit that can be operated by a player during at least one of the first period and the second period.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern color-changing effects A to C are explained below using Figures 110 to 112. In Figures 110 to 112, for example, the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, and other movable parts arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing.

The occurrence of this decorative pattern color change effect is first predicted by a pre-reading effect, and then the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable effect start command, a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a decorative pattern color change effect is included, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image used in the decorative pattern color change performance (referred to as a "specific background image") is a specific image not included in the normal background image, such as an image of the surface of the moon, an image of entering a dark space, an image of escaping a dark space, or an image of the inside of a spaceship. The normal background image is a normal image such as an image of a city, a forest, an ocean, an ocean floor, or an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be a still image or a video.

Here, we will first explain decorative pattern color change performance A, then decorative pattern color change performance B, and finally decorative pattern color change performance C.

[Decorative pattern color change effect A]
The decorative pattern color change performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 110. Fig. 110 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern color change performance A. The decorative pattern color change performance A is first notified of its occurrence by a pre-reading performance, and the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in FIG. 110(A), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a normal background image, and a varying presentation (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, with a left three-dimensional decorative pattern 8L, a middle three-dimensional decorative pattern 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative pattern 8R.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" all have the same bright green color, except for the number "7". The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, appearing as a temporary stop, or as a stopped display (temporarily displayed, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed stationary, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R for the first special reserved icon 9C are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved icon in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a. In addition, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad are always displayed without disappearing from the display screen 7a when the decorative pattern color change performance A is being performed.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a blue spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special chart hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special chart hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative pattern change performance (change display), the first special chart hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are each displayed as numbers (not shown) located at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of reserved first special figures based on balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as blue numbers (which may be light blue, dark blue, or a blue color between light and dark blue), and the number of reserved second special figures based on balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as red numbers (which may be light red, dark red, or a red color between light and dark red). These numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are displayed on the forefront side of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by other images.

Here, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icons") are briefly explained. The differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the six icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling spherical icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

The blue spherical icon is always in a flashing display mode, and when it is off it has a dark blue display mode, and when it is on it has a bright blue display mode, and when it goes from off to on it gradually changes to bright blue, and when it goes from on to off it gradually changes to dark blue.

The red spherical icon is always in a flashing display mode, and when it is off it is in a dark red display mode, and when it is on it is in a bright red display mode, and when it goes from off to on it gradually changes to a bright red, and when it goes from on to off it gradually changes to a dark red.

In FIG. 110(A), a blue spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. This suggests that the game ball will enter the first starting hole 20, and a decorative pattern color change performance A will begin as a result of a pre-reading performance. When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the left decorative pattern 8L is then stopped and displayed as the bright green number "5", the bright blue central decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "6", and the bright red right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "7", resulting in a miss, and the changing icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(B), when the blue spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the corresponding variable display position 9Cd and becomes the blue spherical variable icon 9C, and the decorative pattern color change performance A starts, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the normal background image, the city image THG1 displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the dark space entry image THG2 as the first specific background image, and the character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a blinking a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 to 15 times). Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRB first blinks widely (e.g., once or twice), then blinks slowly, and finally blinks widely again (e.g., two or three times). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of the decorative pattern color change performance A.

When the character CRB has flashed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times), as shown in FIG. 110(C), the first specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, the dark space entry image THG2, is switched to the second specific background image, the dark space escape image THG3, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "5" in a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "4" in a dark blue color.

The number "5", as described above, has a bright green color, but when the decorative pattern color change performance A starts, it is forcibly changed from bright green to dark blue, so that it does not appear as bright green in the decorative pattern color change performance A. Also, the number "4", as described above, has a bright blue color, but when the decorative pattern color change performance A starts, it is forcibly changed from bright blue to dark blue, so that it does not appear as bright blue in the decorative pattern color change performance A. In other words, when the decorative pattern color change performance A starts, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with the same color, dark blue. The bright blue and dark blue are blue-based colors and are similar to each other.

When decorative pattern color change performance A begins, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes slightly larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R that were normally displayed in the background image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(D), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" that was temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as a result, an opaque number "5" with a dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R and is temporarily stopped, and as shown in FIG. 110(E), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, and are temporarily stopped as an opaque number "5" with a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(F), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "5" that was temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and an opaque number "6" with a dark blue color appears from behind as the left decorative pattern 8L and is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 110(G), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "6" with a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "5" with a dark blue color. As mentioned above, the number "6" has a light blue color, but when the decorative pattern color change performance A starts, it is forcibly changed from light blue to dark blue, and does not appear as light blue in the decorative pattern color change performance A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(H), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" that was temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as a result, an opaque number "6" with a dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R and is temporarily stopped, and the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern and are displayed as an opaque number "6" with a dark blue color.

Then, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" that was temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and an opaque number "7" with a bright red color appears from behind as the left decorative pattern 8L and is temporarily stopped, and the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "7" with a bright red color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "6" with a dark blue color. As mentioned above, the number "7" has a bright red color, and when the decorative pattern color change performance A starts, it does not change from bright red to dark blue, meaning that it is the only one that appears without changing color even when the decorative pattern color change performance A starts.

Then, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "6" that was displayed as a temporary stop becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as a result, an opaque number "7" with a bright red color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R. As shown in FIG. 110(I), it appears to be displayed as a temporary stop, but becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as shown in FIG. 110(J), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "7" is displayed as a temporary stop on the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R and the center decorative pattern 8C are not displayed on the display screen 7a.

Then, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "7" starts to decrease, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 110(K), the dark space escape image THG3, which is the second specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched back to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (e.g., an underground image) as the normal background image), and an opaque number "8" with a bright blue color appears on the display screen 7a as the right decorative pattern 8R and temporarily stops, and then the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "7" returns to its original size (the size of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in the normal background image), and an opaque number "3" with a bright green color appears on the display screen 7a as the middle decorative pattern 8C and temporarily stops. This ends the decorative pattern color change performance A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(L), the left decorative pattern 8L stops at the bright red number "7," the center decorative pattern 8C stops at the bright green number "3," and the right decorative pattern 8R stops at the bright blue number "6," resulting in a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern color change effect B]
Next, the decorative pattern color change performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 111. Fig. 111 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern color change performance B. The decorative pattern color change performance B is first notified of its occurrence by a pre-reading performance, and the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in FIG. 111(A), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a normal background image, and a varying presentation (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, with a left three-dimensional decorative pattern 8L, a middle three-dimensional decorative pattern 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative pattern 8R.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" all have the same bright green color, except for the number "7". The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, appearing as a temporary stop, or as a stopped display (temporarily displayed, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed stationary, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R for the first special reserved icon 9C are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved icon in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a. In addition, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad are always displayed without disappearing from the display screen 7a when the decorative pattern color change performance B is being performed.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a blue spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special chart hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special chart hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative pattern change performance (change display), the first special chart hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are each displayed as numbers (not shown) located at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of reserved first special figures based on balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as blue numbers (which may be light blue, dark blue, or a blue color between light and dark blue), and the number of reserved second special figures based on balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as red numbers (which may be light red, dark red, or a red color between light and dark red). These numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. These numbers are displayed on the forefront side of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by other images.

Here, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icons") are briefly explained. The differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the six icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling spherical icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

The blue spherical icon is always in a flashing display mode, and when it is off it has a dark blue display mode, when it is on it has a bright blue display mode, and when it goes from off to on it gradually changes to bright blue, and when it goes from on to off it gradually changes to dark blue.

The red spherical icon is always in a flashing display mode, and when it is off it is in a dark red display mode, and when it is on it is in a bright red display mode, and when it goes from off to on it gradually changes to a bright red, and when it goes from on to off it gradually changes to a dark red.

In FIG. 111(A), a blue spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. This suggests that the game ball will enter the first starting hole 20, and a decorative pattern color change performance B will begin as a result of a pre-reading performance. When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the left decorative pattern 8L is then stopped and displayed as the number "5" in bright green, the center decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "6" in bright blue, and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "7" in bright red, resulting in a miss, and the changing icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(B), when the blue spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the blue spherical variable icon 9C, and the decorative pattern color change performance B starts, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the dark space entry image THG2 as the first specific background image, and the character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a blinking a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 to 15 times). Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRB first blinks widely (e.g., once or twice), then blinks slowly, and finally blinks widely again (e.g., two or three times). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of the decorative pattern color change performance B.

When the character CRB has flashed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times), as shown in FIG. 111(C), the first specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, the dark space entry image THG2, is switched to the second specific background image, the dark space escape image THG3, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "5" in a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "4" in a dark blue color.

The number "5", as described above, has a bright green color, but when the decorative pattern color change performance B starts, it is forcibly changed from bright green to dark blue, and does not appear as bright green in the decorative pattern color change performance B. Also, the number "4", as described above, has a bright blue color, but when the decorative pattern color change performance B starts, it is forcibly changed from bright blue to dark blue, and does not appear as bright blue in the decorative pattern color change performance B. In other words, when the decorative pattern color change performance B starts, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with the same color, dark blue. The bright blue and dark blue are blue-based colors and are similar to each other.

When decorative pattern color change performance B begins, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes slightly larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R that were normally displayed in the background image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(D), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" that was temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as a result, an opaque number "5" with a dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R and is temporarily stopped, and as shown in FIG. 111(E), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, and are temporarily stopped as an opaque number "5" with a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(F), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "5" that was temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and an opaque number "6" with a dark blue color appears from behind as the left decorative pattern 8L and is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 111(G), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "6" with a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "5" with a dark blue color. As mentioned above, the number "6" has a bright blue color, but when the decorative pattern color change performance B starts, it is forcibly changed from bright blue to dark blue, and does not appear as bright blue in the decorative pattern color change performance B.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(H), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" that was displayed as a temporary stop becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as a result, an opaque number "6" with a dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R, and as shown in FIG. 111(I) and (J), it appears to be displayed as a temporary stop, but becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as shown in FIG. 111(K), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" is displayed as a temporary stop on the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R and the center decorative pattern 8C are not displayed on the display screen 7a.

Then, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" starts to decrease, and after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 111(L), the dark space escape image THG3, which is the second specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched back to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image) as the normal background image), and an opaque number "7" with a bright red color appears on the display screen 7a as the right decorative pattern 8R and temporarily stops, and then the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "6" with a dark blue color returns to its original size (the size of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in the normal background image) and returns from dark blue to bright blue, and an opaque number "3" with a bright green color appears on the display screen 7a as the middle decorative pattern 8C and temporarily stops. This ends the decorative pattern color change performance B.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(M), the left decorative pattern 8L stops at the bright blue number "6," the center decorative pattern 8C stops at the bright green number "3," and the right decorative pattern 8R stops at the bright red number "7," resulting in a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern color change effect C]
Next, the decorative pattern color change performance C will be described with reference to Fig. 112. Fig. 112 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern color change performance C. The decorative pattern color change performance C is first notified of its occurrence by a pre-reading performance, and the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in FIG. 112(A), a city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a normal background image, and a varying presentation (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") begins in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, with a left three-dimensional decorative pattern 8L, a middle three-dimensional decorative pattern 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative pattern 8R.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" all have the same bright green color, except for the number "7". The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, appearing as a temporary stopped pattern, or as a stopped pattern (temporarily displayed, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed temporarily, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R for the first special reserved icon 9C are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved icon in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a. In addition, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad are always displayed without disappearing from the display screen 7a when the decorative pattern color change performance C is being performed.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a blue spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition, in addition to the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special chart hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special chart hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21, which are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the decorative pattern change performance (change display), the first special chart hold based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart hold based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 are each displayed as numbers (not shown) located at the top center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of reserved first special figures based on balls entering the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as blue numbers (which may be light blue, dark blue, or a blue color between light and dark blue), and the number of reserved second special figures based on balls entering the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as red numbers (which may be light red, dark red, or a red color between light and dark red). These numbers are always displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them intuitively easy to understand. These numbers are displayed on the forefront side of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by other images.

Here, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icons") are briefly explained. The differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the six icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling spherical icon, the red spherical icon, the blue spherical icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of winning, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling spherical icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

The blue spherical icon is always in a flashing display mode, and when it is off it has a dark blue display mode, when it is on it has a bright blue display mode, and when it goes from off to on it gradually changes to bright blue, and when it goes from on to off it gradually changes to dark blue.

The red spherical icon is always in a flashing display mode, and when it is off it is in a dark red display mode, and when it is on it is in a bright red display mode, and when it goes from off to on it gradually changes to a bright red, and when it goes from on to off it gradually changes to a dark red.

In FIG. 112(A), a blue spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. This suggests that the game ball will enter the first starting hole 20, and a decorative pattern color change display C will begin as a result of a pre-reading display. When the decorative pattern change display (changing display) begins, the left decorative pattern 8L is then stopped and displayed as the bright green number "5," the bright blue central decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "6," and the bright red right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "7," resulting in a miss, and the changing icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(B), when the blue spherical reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the blue spherical variable icon 9C, and the decorative pattern color change performance C starts, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the dark space entry image THG2 as the first specific background image, and the character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, flashing a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 to 15 times). Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRB first flashes widely (e.g., once or twice), then flashes slowly, and finally flashes widely again (e.g., two or three times). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of the decorative pattern color change performance C.

When the character CRB has flashed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times), as shown in FIG. 112(C), the first specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, the dark space entry image THG2, is switched to the second specific background image, the dark space escape image THG3, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "5" in a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "4" in a dark blue color.

The number "5", as described above, has a bright green color, but when the decorative pattern color change performance C starts, it is forcibly changed from bright green to dark blue, and does not appear as bright green in the decorative pattern color change performance C. Also, the number "4", as described above, has a bright blue color, but when the decorative pattern color change performance C starts, it is forcibly changed from bright blue to dark blue, and does not appear as bright blue in the decorative pattern color change performance C. In other words, when the decorative pattern color change performance C starts, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with the same color, dark blue. The bright blue and dark blue are blue-based colors and are similar to each other.

When the decorative pattern color change performance C starts, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes slightly larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R that were normally displayed in the background image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(D), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" that was temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as a result, an opaque number "5" with a dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R and is temporarily stopped, and as shown in FIG. 112(E), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, and are temporarily stopped as an opaque number "5" with a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(F), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "5" that was temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward, escaping from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and an opaque number "6" with a dark blue color appears from behind as the left decorative pattern 8L and is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 112(G), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "6" with a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "5" with a dark blue color. As mentioned above, the number "6" has a bright blue color, but when the decorative pattern color change performance C starts, it is forcibly changed from bright blue to dark blue, and does not appear as bright blue in the decorative pattern color change performance C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(H), the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "5" that was temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward to escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and an opaque number "6" with a dark blue color appears from behind as the right decorative pattern 8R. As a result, as shown in FIG. 112(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R approach each other, and return from the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "6" with a dark blue color to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "6" with a light blue color, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move away from each other again and return to their original positions. Then, as shown in FIG. 112(J), a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a and moves in an arc toward the blue spherical variable icon 9C located below and collides with the variable icon 9C.

As a result of this collision, the relevant variable icon 9C changes from a blue sphere to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon, as shown in Figure 112 (K).

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(L), the dark space escape image THG3, which is the second specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched back to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (e.g., an underground image) as the normal background image). This ends the decorative pattern color change performance C.

After that, when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will start again. At this time, the colors of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R will return to their original colors, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" except for the number "7" will all return to the same bright green, and the even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" will all return to the same bright blue. Note that the number "7" will always remain bright red regardless of whether or not the decorative pattern color change performance C is present.

After that, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a jackpot is awarded and a jackpot game (jackpot performance) begins. On the other hand, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a miss is awarded. When a jackpot or miss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the decorative pattern color change effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change performance A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C of FIG. 112, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and among the variable performances (variable displays) using one or more of the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first patterns) having a bright blue color (first color) and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second patterns) excluding the odd number "7" having a bright green color (second color) different from the bright blue color (first color), a specific performance (FIGS. 110(C) to (H) for the decorative pattern color change performance A, FIG. 111(C) to (K) for the decorative pattern color change performance B, and FIG. 112(C) to (H) for the decorative pattern color change performance C) in which the first and second patterns can be changed to a dark blue color (third color) similar to the bright blue color (first color) can be executed. According to this configuration, in the specific performance, the first and second symbols can be changed to a dark blue (third color) similar to the bright blue (first color), so that the change in the color of the symbols can contribute to eliminating monotony in the variable performance (variable display) of the symbols. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change performance A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C of FIG. 112, the bright blue (first color) is the same color as the color of the blue spherical variable icon 9C. The blue spherical icon is always in a flashing display mode, and is in a display mode with a dark blue color when turned off, and is in a display mode with a bright blue color when turned on, and gradually changes from a turned off state to a bright blue color when turned on, and gradually changes from a turned on state to a dark blue color when turned off. In other words, since the blue spherical variable icon 9C is in a flashing display mode, when it flashes, it may be the same color as the bright blue (first color) of the even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" (first pattern). According to this configuration, it is possible to make a display mode in which the color of the blue spherical variable icon 9C is partially linked to the flashing of the blue spherical variable icon 9C and the colors of the even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" (first pattern).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change performance A in Fig. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B in Fig. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C in Fig. 112, the specific performance is started from a combination of the first and second symbols, in which the left decorative pattern 8L is an odd number "5" (second symbol) and the right decorative pattern is an even number "4" (first symbol). According to this configuration, since the start of the specific performance is a predetermined combination of the first and second symbols, the start time of the specific performance can be easily conveyed to the player.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol color change presentation C of FIG. 112, when a reach is formed with an even number "6" (first symbol) having a dark blue color in the specific presentation, the even number "6" (first symbol) can be changed from dark blue (third color) to bright blue (first color) again. With this configuration, when a reach is formed with the first symbol in the specific presentation, the color change can make the formation of the reach more noticeable, and the color change can contribute to giving the player a premonition of an increase in the expectation of a win.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change performance A in Fig. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B in Fig. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C in Fig. 112, when the specific performance ends, the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first patterns) that have been changed to dark blue (third color) can be changed back to bright blue (first color), and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second patterns) except for the odd number "7" that has been changed to dark blue (third color) can be changed back to bright green (second color). This configuration contributes to a seamless transition from the end of the specific performance to another performance when the specific performance ends.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change performance A in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C in FIG. 112, the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second pattern) further include the odd number "7" having a bright red (fourth color) different from the bright blue (first color), the bright green (second color) and the dark blue (third color), and in the specific performance, the odd number "7" (second pattern) having a bright red (fourth color) is not changed to a dark blue (third color). With this configuration, the odd number "7" (second pattern) that does not change color in the specific performance can be the only pattern, and the presence of the odd number "7" (second pattern) can be made more noticeable, which can contribute to making the player feel an increase in the expectation of winning when the odd number "7" (second pattern) appears in the specific performance.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of decorative pattern color changing effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
The decorative pattern color change performance A in Fig. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B in Fig. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C in Fig. 112 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state of so-called left-handed hitting. However, they may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may be performed in a game state of so-called right-handed hitting.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern color change performance A in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C in FIG. 112, the various patterns are number patterns, and no character images are provided. However, character images are provided only for the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second patterns), and in the specific performance (FIGS. 110(C)-(H) in the decorative pattern color change performance A, FIG. 111(C)-(K) in the decorative pattern color change performance B, and FIG. 112(C)-(H) in the decorative pattern color change performance C), the character images provided for the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second patterns) may be deleted. In this way, since it is not the character images that change color in the specific performance but the number parts such as odd and even numbers, deleting the character images makes it easier for the player to understand the occurrence of the color change in the number parts. In addition, when a character image is provided for the odd number "7" (second symbol), the character image provided for the odd number "7" (second symbol) is not deleted in the special presentation. This allows the odd number "7" (second symbol) to be the only symbol provided with a character image in the special presentation, making the odd number "7" (second symbol) more noticeable, and contributing to giving the player a sense of increased expectation of a win when the odd number "7" (second symbol) appears in the special presentation.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern color change performance A in Fig. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B in Fig. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C in Fig. 112, a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and a blue spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the reserved display position 9Ad by the pre-reading performance, suggesting a notice that the decorative pattern color change performance will start. However, a notice that the decorative pattern color change performance will start may be suggested when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and a red spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the reserved display position 9Ad by the pre-reading performance. In this case, in a specific presentation, except for the odd number "7", the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" and the even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" may be forcibly changed to dark blue, similar to the decorative pattern color change presentation A in Figure 110, the decorative pattern color change presentation B in Figure 111, and the decorative pattern color change presentation C in Figure 112, or, since the red spherical reserve icon 9A has a higher expectation of a win compared to the blue spherical reserve icon 9A, the odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" and the even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" may be forcibly changed to bright red so that they are the same color as the bright red of the odd number "7".

[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern color change performance A in Fig. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B in Fig. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C in Fig. 112, when the specific performance ends, the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first pattern) that have been changed to dark blue (third color) are changed back to light blue (first color), and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second pattern) except the odd number "7" that has been changed to dark blue (third color) are changed back to light green (second color). However, the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first pattern) that have been changed to dark blue (third color) may be maintained as dark blue without being changed to light blue (first color), or the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second pattern) except the odd number "7" that has been changed to dark blue (third color) may be maintained as dark blue without being changed to light green (second color). This makes it possible to increase the variety of effects that can be given after the end of a specific effect, and to provide the player with a variety of effects depending on the color of the symbols.

[Modification 5]
In the decorative pattern color change performance A in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C in FIG. 112, in the specific performance, the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first pattern) are forcibly changed from light blue to dark blue, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second pattern) except for the odd number "7" are forcibly changed from light green to dark blue. However, in the specific performance, the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first pattern) may be forcibly changed from light blue to dark green, and the odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second pattern) except for the odd number "7" may be forcibly changed from light green to dark green. Note that light green and dark green are green-based colors and are similar to each other.

[Modification 6]
In the decorative pattern color change performance A in Fig. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B in Fig. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C in Fig. 112, in the specific performance, the number pattern (e.g., the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4") that was temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward to escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and accordingly, an opaque number pattern (e.g., the number "5" as the right decorative pattern 8R) with a dark blue color appears from the rear and is temporarily stopped. However, it is also possible to use a display mode in which the size of the number pattern (e.g., the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4") gradually increases when the number pattern (e.g., the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4") that was temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward. In this way, the provisionally displayed number patterns become semi-transparent and can rapidly move forward while becoming larger, so that it is possible to realize the expression that the provisionally displayed number patterns are approaching the player, and a dynamic performance can be provided to the player by the high-speed movement of the number patterns.

[Modification 7]
In the specific performances of the decorative pattern color change performance A in Fig. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B in Fig. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C in Fig. 112, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R is one size larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the normal background image. However, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in the specific performance may be the same as the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the normal background image, or the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in the specific performance may be one size smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the normal background image.

[Modification 8]
In the decorative pattern color change performance A in Fig. 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B in Fig. 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C in Fig. 112, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in a state in which they have the same color, dark blue. However, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed on the display screen 7a in a state in which they have the same color, bright blue. This bright blue is the same color as the bright blue of the even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" in the normal background image.

[Modification 9]
The decorative pattern color change performance A in Figure 110, the decorative pattern color change performance B in Figure 111, and the decorative pattern color change performance C in Figure 112 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C7-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
Among the variable displays using one or more of a first pattern having a first color and a second pattern having a second color different from the first color, a specific performance can be executed in which the first pattern and the second pattern can be changed to a third color similar to the first color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C7-1,
The first color may be the same color as the color of the variable icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C7-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C7-1 or C7-2,
The specific performance starts from a predetermined combination of the first and second symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C7-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-3,
In the specific performance, when a reach is formed by the first pattern, the first pattern may be changed from the third color to the first color again.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C7-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-4,
Only the second pattern is provided with a character image,
In the specific performance, the character image provided on the second pattern is deleted.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C7-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-5,
When the specific performance ends, the first pattern that has been changed to the third color may be changed back to the first color, and the second pattern that has been changed to the third color may be changed back to the second color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C7-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-6,
The second pattern further includes a fourth color different from the first color, the second color, and the third color,
In the specific performance, the second symbol having a fourth color is not changed to the third color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The special pattern effects A to C are explained below using Figures 113 to 115. These special pattern effects can be executed during the performance of the varying performance patterns. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the varying performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a special pattern performance, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Special design effect A]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol effect A. The special symbol effect A is executed in a low probability low base state where the game proceeds by hitting from the left. In addition, the special symbol effect A is executed using a special effect pattern. Therefore, first, the special effect pattern will be explained.

The special effect symbols are made up of number images "0-9", with the number images "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" indicating odd numbers being smaller than the number images "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" indicating even numbers. When the number images indicating odd numbers appear in a specific pattern (doublets) to indicate a jackpot, a transition to a high probability, high base game state is confirmed after the jackpot game is played.

First, as shown in FIG. 113(A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start changing. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special symbol reservation and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(B), a left pattern stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop effect is an effect in which the left performance pattern 8L temporarily stops. The left performance pattern 8L moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, the left performance pattern 8L is shown temporarily stopping at "4". At this time, the pattern "3" is displayed below the pattern "4", and the pattern "5" is displayed above the pattern "4". These patterns "3" and "5" become hidden or semi-transparent almost at the same time as the temporary stop. Here, in particular, among the number images "0 to 9" that make up the left performance pattern 8L, the number images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the number images indicating even numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(C), a right pattern movement effect is executed. The right pattern movement effect is an effect in which the right performance pattern 8R moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y. Here, the pattern "3" is moving near the center, with the pattern "2" displayed below the pattern "3" and the pattern "4" displayed above the pattern "3". Here, in particular, of the number images "0 to 9" that make up the right performance pattern 8R, the number images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the number images indicating even numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(D), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, following the left effect symbol 8L, the right effect symbol 8R is shown temporarily stopping at "4". At this time, the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4". These symbols "3" and "5" become hidden or semi-transparent almost at the same time as they temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(E), a middle symbol movement effect is executed. The middle symbol movement effect is an effect in which the middle performance symbol 8C moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. Here, the symbol "2" is moving near the center, with the symbol "1" displayed below the symbol "2" and the symbol "3" displayed above the symbol "2". Here, in particular, of the number images "0 to 9" that make up the middle performance symbol 8C, the number images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the number images indicating even numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(F), a middle symbol provocation effect is executed. The middle symbol provocation effect is an effect in which, in a normal reach, the middle performance symbol 8C moving in the direction of arrow Y moves in a provocative manner (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) to see whether it will stop at "4". Here, the symbol "4" is moving near the center, and the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4".

Next, as shown in Fig. 113(G), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. If the ally character CRA wins the battle performance, it is a win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, right, and center are all shown to have been fixed and stopped at "4".

[Special design effect B]
114 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol effect B. The special symbol effect B is another example of the special symbol effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 114(A), the change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special pattern reservation and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(B), a left pattern stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop effect is an effect in which the left performance pattern 8L temporarily stops. The left performance pattern 8L moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, the left performance pattern 8L is shown temporarily stopping at "4". At this time, the pattern "3" is displayed below the pattern "4", and the pattern "5" is displayed above the pattern "4". These patterns "3" and "5" become hidden or semi-transparent almost at the same time as the temporary stop. Here, in particular, among the number images "0 to 9" that make up the left performance pattern 8L, the number images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the number images indicating even numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(C), a right pattern movement effect is executed. The right pattern movement effect is an effect in which the right performance pattern 8R moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y. Here, the pattern "3" is moving near the center, with the pattern "2" displayed below the pattern "3" and the pattern "4" displayed above the pattern "3". Here, in particular, of the number images "0 to 9" that make up the right performance pattern 8R, the number images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the number images indicating even numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), a reach formation effect is executed. A reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, following the left effect symbol 8L, the right effect symbol 8R is shown temporarily stopping at "4". At this time, the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4". These symbols "3" and "5" become hidden or semi-transparent at almost the same time as they temporarily stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(E), a middle symbol movement effect is executed. The middle symbol movement effect is an effect in which the middle performance symbol 8C moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, as indicated by the arrow Y. Here, the symbol "2" is moving near the center, with the symbol "1" displayed below the symbol "2" and the symbol "3" displayed above the symbol "2". In particular, of the number images "0-9" that make up the middle performance symbol 8C, the number images indicating odd numbers are smaller than the number images indicating even numbers. Also, the number images "0-9" that make up the middle performance symbol 8C are each smaller than the number images "0-9" that make up the performance symbols 8L and 8R on the left and right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(F), a middle symbol provocation effect is executed. The middle symbol provocation effect is an effect in which, in a normal reach, the middle performance symbol 8C moving in the direction of arrow Y moves in a provocative manner (for example, moves in a vibrating manner) to see whether it will stop at "4". Here, the symbol "4" is moving near the center, and the symbol "3" is displayed below the symbol "4", and the symbol "5" is displayed above the symbol "4".

Next, as shown in Fig. 114(G), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. If the ally character CRA wins the battle performance, it is a win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, right, and center are all shown to have been fixed and stopped at "4".

[Special Design Effects C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol effect C. The special symbol effect C is executed in a high probability high base state where the game proceeds by hitting right. In addition, the special symbol effect C is executed using a normal effect pattern. Therefore, first, the normal effect pattern will be described.

Normally, the effect symbols are made up of number images from "0 to 9," and all the number images are the same size. When the number images showing odd numbers appear in a specific pattern (double numbers) to indicate a jackpot, a transition (continuation) to a high probability, high base game state is confirmed after the jackpot game is played.

First, as shown in FIG. 115(A), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start changing. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(B), a confirmed stop performance (miss) is executed. In a confirmed stop performance (miss), the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped in a miss mode. Here, the left performance pattern 8L is shown to have stopped at "4", the center performance pattern 8C is shown to have stopped at "1", and the right performance pattern 8R is shown to have stopped at "5". At this time, the variable image 9C disappears, and three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special chart reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(C), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. At this time, the reserved image is shifted, and two reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special reserved image and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), a confirmed stop performance (miss) is executed. In a confirmed stop performance (miss), the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped in a missing state. Here, the left performance pattern 8L is shown to have stopped at "0", the center performance pattern 8C is shown to have stopped at "3", and the right performance pattern 8R is shown to have stopped at "6". At this time, the variable image 9C disappears, and two reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special chart reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), a change start effect is executed. The change start effect is an effect in which the effect symbols start to change. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. At this time, the hold is shifted, and one hold image 9B corresponding to the second special symbol hold and the corresponding change image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "4". At this time, one reserved image 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Fig. 115(G), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. If the ally character CRA wins the battle performance, it is a win.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (win), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a winning state. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left, right, and center are all shown to have been fixed and stopped at "4".

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of special pattern effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when looking at the number images of the left performance pattern 8L, the right performance pattern 8R, and the center performance pattern 8C, certain number images are smaller than the remaining number images (Fig. 113 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F), Fig. 114 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)). With this configuration, the fluctuation of the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when looking at the number images of the left performance pattern 8L, the right performance pattern 8R, and the center performance pattern 8C, the number images showing odd numbers are smaller than the number images showing even numbers (Fig. 113 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F), Fig. 114 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)). With this configuration, the fluctuation of the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number image that determines the transition to the high probability high base state in the case of a big win is smaller than the remaining number images (Fig. 113 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F), Fig. 114 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)). With this configuration, the fluctuation of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is changed, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number image "0-9" constituting the center effect pattern 8C is smaller than the number images "0-9" constituting the left and right effect patterns 8L, 8R (FIG. 114 (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)). With this configuration, the fluctuation of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, 8R creates more variety, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, there are cases where the special effect symbols are used for variable display (Fig. 113, Fig. 114) and cases where the normal effect symbols are used for variable display (Fig. 115). With this configuration, the variation of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R creates further changes, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the low probability low base state, the special effect symbols are displayed (Fig. 113, Fig. 114), and in the high probability high base state, the normal effect symbols are displayed (Fig. 115). With this configuration, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change depending on the game state, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Modification]
The following are modified examples of special symbol effects.
[Modification 1]
In the above, in the special effect symbols, the size of the number image showing an odd number is smaller than the size of the number image showing an even number. In contrast, the size of the number image showing an odd number may be larger than the size of the number image showing an even number.

[Modification 2]
In the above, in the special performance pattern, the number image that determines the transition to the high probability high base state when a jackpot is hit is smaller than the remaining number images. In contrast, the number image that determines the transition to the high probability high base state when a jackpot is hit may be larger than the remaining number images.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the special symbol presentation C (FIG. 115) is executed in the high probability high base state, but is not limited to this. That is, the special symbol presentation C may be executed in any of the game states of the low probability low base state (normal game state), the high probability high base state (probability change game state), and the low probability low base state (time-saving game state), and the special symbol presentation A (special symbol presentation B) may be executed in any of the game states.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C8-1]
A gaming machine that informs a winning or losing result by changing and stopping a plurality of rows of performance symbols,
The performance pattern is composed of number images,
In each of the plurality of columns, a special effect pattern is displayed in which a specific number image among the number images is smaller than the remaining number images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C8-1,
the specific number image is a number image indicating an odd number, and the remaining number images are number images indicating an even number;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C8-1,
When notifying that the winning result is a win, the specific number image is a number image that determines a transition to a specific game state through a special game in which a game ball can be acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C8-1 to C8-3,
A specific column among the plurality of columns has a smaller size of the specific number image and the remaining number images than the remaining columns.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C8-1 to C8-4,
In each of the plurality of columns, there are cases where the variable display is performed with the special performance pattern, and cases where the variable display is performed with a normal performance pattern in which a specific number image and the remaining number images among the number images are of the same size.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C8-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C8-5,
In the first gaming state, a variable display is performed with the special performance symbol, and in the second gaming state, a variable display is performed with the normal performance symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern visibility change performances A to C are explained below using Figures 116 to 118. In Figures 116 to 118, for example, the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, and other movable parts arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing.

This decorative pattern visibility change performance is performed during the decorative pattern variable performance (variable display). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the decorative pattern visibility change performance is included, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission state of the left movable role 14L and right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 provided on the game board 2.

Here, we will first explain decorative pattern visibility change performance A, then decorative pattern visibility change performance B, and finally decorative pattern visibility change performance C.

[Decorative pattern visibility change performance A]
The decorative pattern visibility change performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 116. Fig. 116 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern visibility change performance A. The decorative pattern visibility change performance A is performed during a change performance (during a change display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 116(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left three-dimensional decorative pattern 8L, a middle three-dimensional decorative pattern 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each of the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" all have the same bright green color, except for the number "7". The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, appearing as a temporary stop, or as a stopped display (temporarily displayed, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed stationary, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special chart reservation is consumed is displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The change icon 9C and the change display position 9Cd are called the change display area. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd, that is, the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display area, a reservation display area is provided as the first special chart reservation. In this reservation display area, reservation icons can be displayed at each of the four reservation display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reservation icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a. Here, the area composed of the variable display area and the hold display area is referred to as the variable and hold display area THA. The variable and hold display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The change display area and the hold display area are transparent areas, and the background image behind can be seen through the change display area and the hold display area. When the change display position 9Cd is displayed in the change display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the change display position 9Cd, and when the change icon 9C is displayed in the change display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the change icon 9C. When the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the hold icon 9A.

The variable area 8Lr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a where the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed (displayed), has an area that overlaps with the variable and reserved display area THA at the front and rear, and is disposed behind the variable and reserved display area THA. As a result, since the reserved display area is a transparent area, the variable performance (displayed) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be seen through the reserved display area. When the reserved display position 9Ad is displayed in the reserved display area, the variable performance (displayed) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be seen through the reserved display position 9Ad, and when the reserved icon 9A is not displayed in the reserved display area (i.e., when there is no game ball (reserved ball) that has not yet been used in the game), the variable performance (displayed) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be seen through the reserved display area, but when multiple reserved icons 9A are displayed in the reserved display area, the variable performance (displayed) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be seen through the reserved icon 9A.

The variable area 8Cr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a where the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed (displayed), overlaps with the variable and pending display area THA at the front and rear, and is located behind the variable and pending display area THA. As a result, since the pending display area is a transparent area, the variable performance (displayed) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be seen through the pending display area. Note that when the pending display position 9Ad is displayed in the pending display area, the variable performance (displayed) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the pending display position 9Ad, and when the pending icon 9A is displayed in the pending display area, the variable performance (displayed) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the pending icon 9A.

In addition, because the variable display area is a transparent area, the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be seen through the variable display area. When the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the variable display position 9Cd, and when the variable icon 9C is displayed in the variable display area, the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the variable icon 9C.

The variable area 8Rr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a in which the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed (displayed), does not overlap with the variable and pending display area THA at the front or back. This allows the right decorative pattern 8R's variable performance (displayed) to be viewed without being obstructed by the variable and pending display area THA.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. Note that, for ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins in FIG. 116(A), then, as shown in FIG. 116(B), a mini-character performance area MHG appears on the display screen 7a, surrounded by a smooth, bow-shaped curve (an arched curve) connecting the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (a position equivalent to half the distance dimension of the left side of the display screen 7a) to the right center of the bottom side (a position from the left of the bottom side of the display screen 7a equivalent to two-thirds the distance dimension of the bottom side of the display screen 7a), the left side of the display screen 7a, and the bottom side of the display screen 7a. Various mini-characters appear in the mini-character performance area MHG, and performances using the mini-characters are performed.

This mini character performance area MHG overlaps with the variable area 8Lr where the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed (displayed), the variable area 8Cr where the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed (displayed), and the variable area 8Rr where the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed (displayed), and is positioned in front of these variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr, and also overlaps with the variable and pending display area THA, and is positioned behind the variable and pending display area THA. In other words, the mini character performance area MHG is positioned between the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr and the variable and pending display area THA.

The mini character performance area MHG is provided with a colored, opaque background image. Therefore, when the mini character performance area MHG appears, in the area where the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R overlap with the mini character performance area MHG, the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R cannot be seen through the mini character performance area MHG. In contrast, the variable and pending display area THA is positioned in front of the mini character performance area MHG, so that even if the mini character performance area MHG appears, the visibility is not hindered by the mini character performance area MHG. In this way, the change and pending display area THA is positioned so that it overlaps with the change areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and the mini character performance area MHG, but the change display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A in the change and pending display area THA are not difficult to see due to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, and the mini character performance area MHG.

Note that although the mini-characters that appear in the mini-character performance area MHG are positioned on the front side of the mini-character performance area MHG, they are positioned on the rear side of the change and hold display area THA, so even if a mini-character appears in the mini-character performance area MHG, the visibility of the change and hold display area THA is not obstructed by the mini-character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1", and the variable performance (variable display) of the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R continues. At the position of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L, the lower part of the left decorative pattern 8L (part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered by the mini character performance area MHG located in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, so the lower part of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L (part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered by the mini character performance area MHG located in front of the left decorative pattern 8L and cannot be seen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116(D), a colored, opaque ally character CRA appears as a mini character in the mini character performance area MHG and moves around. When the ally character CRA appears in the mini character performance area MHG, at a specified timing, the ally character CRA's sword can change the variable icon 9C to another icon. Here, the ally character CRA's sword changes the white spherical variable icon 9C to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and the change of the variable icon 9C is successful. Note that there are also cases where the ally character CRA's sword does not change the white spherical variable icon 9C to another icon, and the change of the variable icon 9C fails.

When an ally character CRA appears in the mini character performance area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA may be displayed on the display screen 7a beyond the mini character performance area MHG, straddling the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. For example, in FIG. 116(D), when an ally character CRA appears in the mini character performance area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA covers the part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and is not covered by the mini character performance area MHG. In other words, when an ally character CRA is displayed in a state that straddles the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L and the mini character performance area MHG, the exposed part of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered by the mini character performance area MHG overlaps with the ally character CRA and cannot be seen. Furthermore, as the ally character CRA moves around, the exposed part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and not covered by the mini character performance area MHG does not overlap with the ally character CRA, so that the exposed part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and not covered by the mini character performance area MHG can be viewed without being obstructed by the ally character CRA.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to change (change) and a reach is formed. The position of the temporarily stopped right decorative pattern 8R is not covered by the mini character performance area MHG located in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, so the temporarily stopped right decorative pattern 8R can be seen in its entirety. Even at this point, the ally character CRA moves around the mini character performance area MHG, and the upper body of the ally character CRA may be displayed on the display screen 7a beyond the mini character performance area MHG, straddling the change areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

In addition, if the right decorative pattern 8R is not displayed as a temporary stop at the bright green number "1" but is displayed as a temporary stop at, for example, the bright green number "9", the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues, and no reach is formed, the mini character performance area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, and then when the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as the same pattern, which may result in a miss.

Also, if the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1" but is temporarily stopped at, for example, the bright green number "9", the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues, and no reach is formed, the ally character CRA moving around in the mini character performance area MHG may jump over the mini character performance area MHG, and in the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R (or straddling the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R and the variable area 8Cr of the middle decorative pattern 8C), the ally character CRA may use its sword to send the number "9" to the bottom of the variable area 8Rr, pull in the number "1" from the top of the variable area 8Rr and temporarily stop it, forming a reach, and then the ally character CRA may return to the mini character performance area MHG again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116(F), when the mini character performance area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. This ends the decorative pattern visibility change performance A. Note that when the decorative pattern visibility change performance A is being performed and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the mini character performance area MHG displayed, the lower parts of the left decorative pattern 8L and middle decorative pattern 8C (part of the left decorative pattern 8L and part of the middle decorative pattern 8C) of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are covered by the mini character performance area MHG and cannot be seen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), when the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 1.5 seconds) (it may be displayed flashing), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with the number "1" in bright red temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 116 (H), and the variable presentation (variable display) of the center decorative pattern 8C continues.

Before the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 116(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1" having a bright green color in FIG. 116(F). In contrast, after the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 116(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1" having a bright red color, which is the same color as the number "7", in FIG. 116(H). This increases the expectation of a big win by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R from the normal color (bright green) to the bright red color, which is the same color as the number "7" (i.e., the color change of the decorative pattern). Note that when a reach is formed by the number "7" having a bright red color, the expectation of a big win is preset higher than when a reach is formed by other numbers.

In FIG. 116(H), the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be changed from the normal color (bright green) to bright red, the same color as the number "7" (i.e., the color of the decorative pattern is changed) to display an image on the display screen 7a suggesting one of five levels of likelihood of a jackpot (for example, five facial images of ally character CRA may be lined up, and an image suggesting an likelihood of a jackpot of 3.5 out of five levels may be displayed in which three facial images are yellow, half the facial images are yellow and half the facial images are black, and the remaining facial image is black).

After that, various effects may continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins, whereas when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a miss occurs.

[Decorative pattern visibility change performance B]
Next, the decorative pattern visibility change performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 117. Fig. 117 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern visibility change performance B. The decorative pattern visibility change performance B is performed during the change performance (during the change display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 117(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left three-dimensional decorative pattern 8L, a middle three-dimensional decorative pattern 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each of the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" all have the same bright green color, except for the number "7". The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, appearing as a temporary stopped pattern, or as a stopped pattern (temporarily displayed, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed temporarily, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special chart reservation is consumed is displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The change icon 9C and the change display position 9Cd are called the change display area. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd, that is, the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display area, a reservation display area is provided as the first special chart reservation. In this reservation display area, reservation icons can be displayed at each of the four reservation display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reservation icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a. Here, the area composed of the variable display area and the hold display area is referred to as the variable and hold display area THA. The variable and hold display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The change display area and the hold display area are transparent areas, and the background image behind can be seen through the change display area and the hold display area. When the change display position 9Cd is displayed in the change display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the change display position 9Cd, and when the change icon 9C is displayed in the change display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the change icon 9C. When the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the hold icon 9A.

The variable area 8Lr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a where the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed (displayed), overlaps with the variable and reserved display area THA at the front and rear, and is disposed behind the variable and reserved display area THA. As a result, since the reserved display area is a transparent area, the variable performance (displayed) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be seen through the reserved display area. When the reserved display position 9Ad is displayed in the reserved display area, the variable performance (displayed) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be seen through the reserved display position 9Ad, and when the reserved icon 9A is not displayed in the reserved display area (i.e., when there is no game ball (reserved ball) that has not yet been used in the game), the variable performance (displayed) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be seen through the reserved display area, but when multiple reserved icons 9A are displayed in the reserved display area, the variable performance (displayed) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be seen through the reserved icon 9A.

The variable area 8Cr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a where the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed (displayed), overlaps with the variable and pending display area THA at the front and rear, and is located behind the variable and pending display area THA. As a result, since the pending display area is a transparent area, the variable performance (displayed) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be seen through the pending display area. Note that when the pending display position 9Ad is displayed in the pending display area, the variable performance (displayed) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the pending display position 9Ad, and when the pending icon 9A is displayed in the pending display area, the variable performance (displayed) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the pending icon 9A.

In addition, because the variable display area is a transparent area, the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be seen through the variable display area. When the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the variable display position 9Cd, and when the variable icon 9C is displayed in the variable display area, the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the variable icon 9C.

The variable area 8Rr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a in which the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed (displayed), does not overlap with the variable and pending display area THA at the front or back. This allows the right decorative pattern 8R's variable performance (displayed) to be viewed without being obstructed by the variable and pending display area THA.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icon is displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. Note that, for ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts in FIG. 117(A), then, as shown in FIG. 117(B), a smooth curve with a gentle concave shape connecting the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (a position corresponding to half the distance dimension of the left side of the display screen 7a) to the center of the right side of the display screen (a position corresponding to half the distance dimension of the left side of the display screen 7a), and a mini character performance area MHG surrounded by the left side of the display screen 7a, the bottom side of the display screen 7a, and the right side of the display screen 7a, appears on the display screen 7a. Various mini characters appear in the mini character performance area MHG, and performances are performed by the mini characters.

This mini character performance area MHG overlaps with the variable area 8Lr where the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed (displayed), the variable area 8Cr where the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed (displayed), and the variable area 8Rr where the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed (displayed), and is positioned in front of these variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr, and also overlaps with the variable and pending display area THA, and is positioned behind the variable and pending display area THA. In other words, the mini character performance area MHG is positioned between the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr and the variable and pending display area THA.

The mini character performance area MHG is provided with a colored, opaque background image. Therefore, when the mini character performance area MHG appears, in the area where the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R overlap with the mini character performance area MHG, the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R cannot be seen through the mini character performance area MHG. In contrast, the variable and pending display area THA is positioned in front of the mini character performance area MHG, so that even if the mini character performance area MHG appears, the visibility is not hindered by the mini character performance area MHG. In this way, the change and pending display area THA is positioned so that it overlaps with the change areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, and the mini character performance area MHG, but the change display position 9Cd, pending display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A in the change and pending display area THA are not difficult to see due to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R, and the mini character performance area MHG.

Note that although the mini-characters that appear in the mini-character performance area MHG are positioned on the front side of the mini-character performance area MHG, they are positioned on the rear side of the change and hold display area THA, so even if a mini-character appears in the mini-character performance area MHG, the visibility of the change and hold display area THA is not obstructed by the mini-character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1", and the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R continues. At the position of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L, the lower part of the left decorative pattern 8L (part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered by the mini character performance area MHG located in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, so the lower part of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L (part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered by the mini character performance area MHG located in front of the left decorative pattern 8L and cannot be seen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(D), a colored, opaque ally character CRA appears as a mini character in the mini character performance area MHG and moves around. When the ally character CRA appears in the mini character performance area MHG, at a specified timing, the ally character CRA's sword can change the variable icon 9C to another icon. Here, the ally character CRA's sword changes the white spherical variable icon 9C to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and the change of the variable icon 9C is successful. Note that there are also cases where the ally character CRA's sword does not change the white spherical variable icon 9C to another icon, and the change of the variable icon 9C fails.

When an ally character CRA appears in the mini character performance area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA may be displayed on the display screen 7a beyond the mini character performance area MHG, straddling the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. For example, in FIG. 117(D), when an ally character CRA appears in the mini character performance area MHG, the upper body of the ally character CRA covers the part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and is not covered by the mini character performance area MHG. In other words, when an ally character CRA is displayed in a state where it straddles the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L and the mini character performance area MHG, the exposed part of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L that is not covered by the mini character performance area MHG overlaps with the ally character CRA and cannot be seen. Furthermore, as the ally character CRA moves around, the exposed part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and not covered by the mini character performance area MHG does not overlap with the ally character CRA, so that the exposed part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and not covered by the mini character performance area MHG can be viewed without being obstructed by the ally character CRA.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C continues to change (change) and a reach is formed. At the position of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped, the lower part of the right decorative pattern 8R (part of the right decorative pattern 8R) is covered by the mini character performance area MHG located in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, so the lower part of the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stopped (part of the right decorative pattern 8R) is covered by the mini character performance area MHG located in front of the right decorative pattern 8R and cannot be seen. Even at this point, the ally character CRA moves around the mini character performance area MHG, and the upper body of the ally character CRA may be displayed on the display screen 7a beyond the mini character performance area MHG and across the change areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R.

In addition, if the right decorative pattern 8R is not displayed as a temporary stop at the bright green number "1" but is displayed as a temporary stop at, for example, the bright green number "9", the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues, and no reach is formed, the mini character performance area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, and then when the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as the same pattern, which may result in a miss.

Also, if the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1" but is temporarily stopped at, for example, the bright green number "9", the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues, and no reach is formed, the ally character CRA moving around in the mini character performance area MHG may jump over the mini character performance area MHG, and in the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R (or straddling the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R and the variable area 8Cr of the middle decorative pattern 8C), the ally character CRA may use its sword to send the number "9" to the bottom of the variable area 8Rr, pull in the number "1" from the top of the variable area 8Rr and temporarily stop it, forming a reach, and then the ally character CRA may return to the mini character performance area MHG again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117(F), when the mini character performance area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. This ends the decorative pattern visibility change performance B. Note that when the decorative pattern visibility change performance B is being performed, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the mini character performance area MHG displayed, the lower parts of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R (part of the left decorative pattern 8L, part of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and part of the right decorative pattern 8R) are covered by the mini character performance area MHG and cannot be seen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(G), when the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 1.5 seconds) (it may be displayed flashing), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with the number "1" in bright red temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 117(H), and the variable presentation (variable display) of the center decorative pattern 8C continues.

Before the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 117(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1" having a bright green color in FIG. 117(F). In contrast, after the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 117(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1" having a bright red color, which is the same color as the number "7", in FIG. 117(H). This increases the expectation of a big win by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R from the normal color (bright green) to the bright red color, which is the same color as the number "7" (i.e., the color change of the decorative pattern). Note that when a reach is formed by the number "7" having a bright red color, the expectation of a big win is preset higher than when a reach is formed by other numbers.

In FIG. 117(H), the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be changed from the normal color (bright green) to bright red, the same color as the number "7" (i.e., the color of the decorative pattern is changed) to display an image on the display screen 7a suggesting one of five levels of likelihood of a jackpot (for example, five facial images of ally character CRA may be lined up, and an image suggesting an likelihood of a jackpot of 3.5 out of five levels may be displayed in which three facial images are yellow, half the facial images are yellow and half the facial images are black, and the remaining facial image is black).

After that, various effects may continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins, whereas when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a miss occurs.

[Decorative pattern visibility change performance C]
Next, the decorative pattern visibility change performance C will be described with reference to Fig. 118. Fig. 118 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern visibility change performance C. The decorative pattern visibility change performance C is performed during the change performance (during the change display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 118(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left three-dimensional decorative pattern 8L, a middle three-dimensional decorative pattern 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each of the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" all have the same bright green color, except for the number "7". The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, and changes at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and is displayed as temporarily stopped, or as stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The change icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R currently changing as the first special chart reservation is consumed is displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The change icon 9C and the change display position 9Cd are called the change display area. In the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd, that is, the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display area, a reservation display area is provided as the first special chart reservation. In this reservation display area, reservation icons can be displayed at each of the four reservation display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four reservation icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, starting from the position closest to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a. Here, the area composed of the variable display area and the hold display area is referred to as the variable and hold display area THA. The variable and hold display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The change display area and the hold display area are transparent areas, and the background image behind can be seen through the change display area and the hold display area. When the change display position 9Cd is displayed in the change display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the change display position 9Cd, and when the change icon 9C is displayed in the change display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the change icon 9C. When the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind cannot be seen through the hold icon 9A.

The variable area 8Lr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a where the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed (displayed), has an area that overlaps with the variable and reserved display area THA at the front and rear, and is disposed behind the variable and reserved display area THA. As a result, since the reserved display area is a transparent area, the variable performance (displayed) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be seen through the reserved display area. When the reserved display position 9Ad is displayed in the reserved display area, the variable performance (displayed) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be seen through the reserved display position 9Ad, and when the reserved icon 9A is not displayed in the reserved display area (i.e., when there is no game ball (reserved ball) that has not yet been used in the game), the variable performance (displayed) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be seen through the reserved display area, but when multiple reserved icons 9A are displayed in the reserved display area, the variable performance (displayed) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be seen through the reserved icon 9A.

The variable area 8Cr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a where the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed (displayed), overlaps with the variable and pending display area THA at the front and rear, and is located behind the variable and pending display area THA. As a result, since the pending display area is a transparent area, the variable performance (displayed) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be seen through the pending display area. Note that when the pending display position 9Ad is displayed in the pending display area, the variable performance (displayed) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the pending display position 9Ad, and when the pending icon 9A is displayed in the pending display area, the variable performance (displayed) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the pending icon 9A.

In addition, because the variable display area is a transparent area, the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be seen through the variable display area. When the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the variable display position 9Cd, and when the variable icon 9C is displayed in the variable display area, the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C cannot be seen through the variable icon 9C.

The variable area 8Rr, which extends from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a in which the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed (displayed), does not overlap with the variable and pending display area THA at the front or back. This allows the right decorative pattern 8R's variable performance (displayed) to be viewed without being obstructed by the variable and pending display area THA.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. Note that, for ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change performance (change display) starts in FIG. 118(A), as shown in FIG. 118(B), the left movable part image KGL imitating the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 appears from the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (a position corresponding to half the distance dimension of the left side of the display screen 7a) toward the right side of the front screen 7a, covering the change area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L so as to correspond to the operation area of the left movable part 14L. Furthermore, the right movable part image KGR imitating the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 appears from the center of the right side of the display screen 7a (a position corresponding to half the distance dimension of the right side of the display screen 7a) toward the left side of the front screen 7a, covering the change area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R so as to correspond to the operation area of the right movable part 14R. When the left movable part image KGL and the right movable part image KGR appear separated from each other, a lightning bolt appears on the left movable part image KGL and the right movable part image KGR.

The left movable role image KGL has an area where it overlaps with the variable area 8Lr where the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed (displayed), and is positioned in front of the variable area 8Lr, and is positioned so as not to overlap with the variable and pending display area THA. The right movable role image KGR has an area where it overlaps with the variable area 8Rr where the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed (displayed), and is positioned in front of the variable area 8Rr, and is positioned so as not to overlap with the variable and pending display area THA.

The left movable part image KGL imitates the left movable part 14L and is colored and opaque. Therefore, when the left movable part image KGL appears, in the area where the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L and the left movable part image KGL overlap, the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be seen through the left movable part image KGL. Also, the right movable part image KGR imitates the right movable part 14R and is colored and opaque. Therefore, when the right movable part image KGR appears, in the area where the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R and the right movable part image KGR overlap, the variable performance (variable display) of the right decorative pattern 8R cannot be seen through the right movable part image KGR.

Note that the left movable part image KGL and the right movable part image KGR appear spaced apart from each other, and a lightning bolt appears in the left movable part image KGL and the right movable part image KGR, but since the left movable part image KGL and the right movable part image KGR are positioned so that they do not overlap the change and pending display area THA in the front and back, the lightning does not overlap the change and pending display area THA in the front and back, and the change and pending display area THA does not have its visibility impeded by the lightning, even though the left movable part image KGL and the right movable part image KGR appear spaced apart from each other and a lightning bolt appears in the change and pending display area THA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(C), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1", and the variable performance (variable display) of the center decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R continues. At the position of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L, the left side of the left decorative pattern 8L (part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered by the left movable role image KGL located in front of the left decorative pattern 8L, so the left side of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L (part of the left decorative pattern 8L) is covered by the left movable role image KGL located in front of the left decorative pattern 8L and cannot be seen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(D), when the left movable part image KGL and the right movable part image KGR appear in a state separated from each other, the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part of the left movable part image KGL, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part of the right movable part image KGR, can run appropriately in the area (i.e., the area extending from the upper side to the lower side of the left decorative part and the area extending from the upper side to the lower side of the right decorative part). When the lightning SND runs, at a predetermined timing, the variable icon 9C can be changed to another icon under the influence of the lightning SND. Here, the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon under the influence of the lightning SND, and the change of the variable icon 9C is successful. Note that there are also cases where the variable icon 9C does not change from a white spherical icon to another icon even under the influence of the lightning SND, and the change of the variable icon 9C fails.

When the left movable role image KGL and the right movable role image KGR appear in a state separated from each other and a lightning bolt SND runs, the lightning bolt SND may be displayed on the display screen 7a across the left movable role image KGL and the right movable role image KGR and across the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. For example, in FIG. 118(D), when the left movable role image KGL and the right movable role image KGR appear in a state separated from each other and a lightning bolt SND runs, the left movable role image KGL covers the part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed that is not covered by the left movable role image KGL. In other words, when the lightning SND is displayed across the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L and the left movable role image KGL, the exposed part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and not covered by the left movable role image KGL overlaps with the lightning SND and cannot be seen. Note that the lightning SND runs appropriately in a range from the top to the bottom of the semicircular part of the left movable role image KGL and the right movable role image KGR, so that the exposed part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and not covered by the left movable role image KGL does not overlap with the lightning SND, and the exposed part of the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and not covered by the left movable role image KGL can be seen without being obstructed by the lightning SND (see FIG. 118 (E)).

After that, as shown in Fig. 118(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1", the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues, and a reach is formed. At the position of the temporarily stopped right decorative pattern 8R, the right part of the right decorative pattern 8R (part of the right decorative pattern 8R) is covered by the right movable role image KGR located in front of the right decorative pattern 8R, so the right part of the temporarily stopped right decorative pattern 8R (part of the right decorative pattern 8R) is covered by the right movable role image KGR located in front of the right decorative pattern 8R and cannot be seen. Even at this point, the lightning SND may run appropriately in the range from the top to the bottom of the semicircular portion of the left movable part image KGL and the right movable part image KGR, so that the lightning SND may be displayed on the display screen 7a across the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, going beyond the left movable part image KGL and the right movable part image KGR.

In addition, if the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1" but is temporarily stopped at, for example, the bright green number "9", the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues, and no reach is formed, the left movable role image KGL and the right movable role image KGR disappear from the display screen 7a, and then when the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped at the same pattern, which may result in a miss.

In addition, if the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped at the bright green number "1" but is temporarily stopped at, for example, the bright green number "9", the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues, and no reach is formed, the lightning bolt SND running appropriately in the range from the top to the bottom of the semicircular portion of the left movable part image KGL and the right movable part image KGR may send the number "9" in the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R to the bottom of the variable area 8Rr, pull in the number "1" from the top of the variable area 8Rr, temporarily stop and display, forming a reach, and then the lightning bolt SND may subside.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118(F), when the lightning SND subsides, the left movable part image KGL and the right movable part image KGR disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable performance (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues. This ends the decorative pattern visibility change performance C. Note that when the decorative pattern visibility change performance C is being performed, if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the left movable part image KGL and the right movable part image KGR displayed, the left part of the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L and the right part of the right decorative pattern 8R (part of the left decorative pattern 8L and part of the right decorative pattern 8R) are covered by the left movable part image KGL and the right movable part image KGR, respectively, and cannot be seen, whereas the middle decorative pattern 8C is not covered by the left movable part image KGL and the right movable part image KGR, respectively, and can be seen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(G), in the center of the display screen 7a, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R each advance (move) from their home positions toward (approaching each other) an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advance position (deployed position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative member (combined part) having a ring shape made up of the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R.

When the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring becomes an area having a circular shape (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area"). The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

When a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the ally character CRA was displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R move away from each other, with the left movable part 14L retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (forward) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable part 14R retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (forward) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a with the number "1" having a bright red color temporarily stopped, and the variable performance (variable display) of the center decorative pattern 8C continues.

Before the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 118(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1" having a bright green color in FIG. 118(F). In contrast, after the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 118(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both changed to the number "1" having a bright red color, which is the same color as the number "7", and are displayed as a temporary stop in FIG. 118(H). This increases the expectation of a big win by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R from the normal color (bright green) to the bright red color, which is the same color as the number "7" (i.e., the color change of the decorative pattern). Note that when a reach is formed by the number "7" having a bright red color, the expectation of a big win is preset higher than when a reach is formed by other numbers.

In FIG. 118(H), the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be changed from the normal color (bright green) to bright red, the same color as the number "7" (i.e., the color of the decorative pattern is changed) to display an image on the display screen 7a suggesting one of five levels of likelihood of a jackpot (for example, five facial images of ally character CRA may be lined up, and an image suggesting an likelihood of a jackpot of 3.5 out of five levels may be displayed in which three facial images are yellow, half the facial images are yellow and half the facial images are black, and the remaining facial image is black).

After that, various effects may continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a jackpot is awarded and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins, whereas when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a miss occurs.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of changing the visibility of decorative patterns.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern visibility change performance A of FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change performance B of FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change performance C of FIG. 118, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and a specific image (a mini character, an ally character CRA, in the decorative pattern visibility change performances A and B, and a lightning bolt SND in the decorative pattern visibility change performance C) is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variable area 8Lr (first area) in which the variable display by the left decorative pattern 8L (pattern image) is performed. A possible second area (mini-character performance area MHG in decorative pattern visibility change performances A and B, and left-side movable character image KGL in decorative pattern visibility change performance C) is positioned in front of the variable area 8Lr (first area), making it possible to execute a first performance (Figure 116 (C) in decorative pattern visibility change performance A, Figure 117 (C) in decorative pattern visibility change performance B, Figure 118 (C) in decorative pattern visibility change performance C) in which part of the left decorative pattern 8L (pattern image) is made difficult to see due to the second area. According to this configuration, the second area is purposely arranged in front of the variable area 8Lr (first area) so as to overlap with a part of the variable area 8Lr (first area) of the left decorative pattern 8L (pattern image), so that a part of the left decorative pattern 8L (pattern image) can be made difficult to see by the second area, and the player can imagine the whole image of the left decorative pattern 8L (pattern image) by himself. This makes it possible to provide the player with a variable performance (variable display) by a novel pattern image that has never been seen before. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the decorative pattern visibility change performance A in FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change performance B in FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change performance C in FIG. 118, the change and reservation display area THA (third area) capable of displaying the change icon 9C and the reservation icon 9A is arranged in front of the second area so as to overlap a part of the change area 8Lr (first area) of the left decorative pattern 8L and a part of the second area, so that the change icon 9C and the reservation icon 9A are not difficult to see due to the left decorative pattern 8L (pattern image) and the specific image. The change icon 9C may be used as a notice ("change performance" that changes the display mode) for the change performance (change display), and the reservation icon 9A may be used as a performance that suggests a future performance by a look-ahead performance when it has not yet been actually used in the game. This prevents the visibility of the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A from being obstructed by the pattern image and specific image when a variable display is being performed using the pattern image, thereby making it harder for the player to overlook changes in the variable icon 9C or the reserved icon.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance of the decorative pattern visibility change performance A in FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change performance B in FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change performance C in FIG. 118, when a specific image (the ally character CRA, which is a mini character, in decorative pattern visibility change performances A and B, and the lightning bolt SND in decorative pattern visibility change performance C) is displayed across the variable area 8Lr (first area) and the second area of the left decorative pattern 8L, other parts that are different from a part of the left decorative pattern 8L (pattern image) due to the specific image (the part where the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in a temporary stop overlaps with the ally character CRA in FIG. 116 (D) of decorative pattern visibility change performance A and FIG. 117 (D) of decorative pattern visibility change performance B, and the part where the left decorative pattern 8L overlaps with the lightning bolt SND in FIG. 118 (D) of decorative pattern visibility change performance C) are made difficult to see. According to this configuration, a part of the pattern image is made difficult to see by the second area, and further, other parts different from that part can be made difficult to see by the specific image, so that a player can be provided with a more innovative changing presentation (changing display) using the pattern image than has been seen before.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the decorative pattern visibility change effect A in Fig. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B in Fig. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C in Fig. 118, the second area disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L (pattern image) becomes easily visible in its entirety. With this configuration, since a part of the pattern image is difficult to see due to the second area, the player can imagine the whole image of the pattern image, and further, since the second area disappears from the display screen 7a, the player can check the answer with what he imagined, which contributes to reducing the monotony of the variable display by the pattern image.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first performance in the decorative pattern visibility change performance A in Fig. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change performance B in Fig. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change performance C in Fig. 118 can be executed after the variable display by the pattern image starts and before the temporary stop display. According to this configuration, since a part of the pattern image can be made difficult to see by the second area before the pattern image is temporarily stopped, it is possible to give a change to the variable display by the pattern image, which can contribute to making the variable display by the pattern image less monotonous.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the variable icon 9C in the decorative pattern visibility change performance A in FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change performance B in FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change performance C in FIG. 118 can change to a higher expectation of winning when a specific image (a mini character, the ally character CRA, in the decorative pattern visibility change performance A and B, and a lightning bolt SND in the decorative pattern visibility change performance C) is displayed. According to this configuration, the variable icon 9C can be used as a notice (a "change performance" that changes the display mode) during the variable performance (during the variable display). In addition, when a specific image is displayed on the display screen 7a, it may change to a higher expectation of winning, so even if the specific image is only displayed on the display screen 7a, a sense of expectation can be given to the player.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the first performance in the decorative pattern visibility change performance A in FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change performance B in FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change performance C in FIG. 118, the second performance (FIG. 116(H) in the decorative pattern visibility change performance A, FIG. 117(H) in the decorative pattern visibility change performance B, and FIG. 118(H) in the decorative pattern visibility change performance C) can be executed, in which the color of the pattern image is changed to another color (for example, the color of the number "1" is changed from the normal color (bright green) to bright red) to increase the expectation of a win. According to this configuration, since there is a possibility that the second performance in which the color of the pattern image is changed is executed after the end of the first performance, when the first performance is started, the player can enjoy the first performance while also looking forward to the second performance that has not yet been executed but may be executed in the future.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of decorative pattern visibility change presentations are shown.
[Modification 1]
The decorative pattern visibility change performance A in Fig. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change performance B in Fig. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change performance C in Fig. 118 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state of so-called left-handed hitting. However, they may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may be performed in a game state of so-called right-handed hitting.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol visibility change performance A of FIG. 116(E) and (F) and the decorative symbol visibility change performance B of FIG. 117(E) and (F), when a reach is formed, the mini character performance area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a. However, the mini character performance area MHG may disappear from the display screen 7a before the reach is formed. Also, in the decorative symbol visibility change performance C of FIG. 118(E) and (F), when a reach is formed, the left movable role image KGL and the right movable role image KGR disappear from the display screen 7a. However, the left movable role image KGL and the right movable role image KGR may disappear from the display screen 7a before the reach is formed. In this way, the time of the temporary stop display of the right decorative symbol 8R can be suggested to the player.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern visibility change performance A in Fig. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change performance B in Fig. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change performance C in Fig. 118, the left decorative pattern 8L is first displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1" having a bright green color, and then the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop at the number "1" having a bright green color, and a reach is formed by the odd decorative pattern (pattern image). However, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2" having a bright blue color, and then the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed as a temporary stop at the number "2" having a bright blue color, that is, a reach may be formed by the even decorative pattern (pattern image).

[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern visibility change performance C of FIG. 118 (B) to (E), the left movable part image KGL imitating the left movable part 14L of the first movable part 14 appears to cover the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L, and further, the right movable part image KGR imitating the right movable part 14R of the first movable part 14 appears to cover the variable area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R. However, the left movable part image KGL may be replaced with the left movable part 14L, and the right movable part image KGR may be replaced with the right movable part 14R. By covering a part of the left decorative pattern 8L with the left movable part 14L, it is possible to make a part of the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see, and by covering a part of the right decorative pattern 8R with the right movable part 14R, it is possible to make a part of the right decorative pattern 8R difficult to see, so that the player himself can imagine the whole image of the left decorative pattern 8L and the whole image of the right decorative pattern 8R. This makes it possible to provide players with a novel and unprecedented variation presentation (variable display) using symbol images, thereby enhancing the player's interest.

In addition, the left movable part image KGL is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to correspond to the operating area of the left movable part 14L, and the right movable part image KGR is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to correspond to the operating area of the right movable part 14R. Since the left movable part image KGL and the right movable part image KGR do not overlap with the change and hold display area THA in the front and back, even if the left movable part image KGL is replaced with the left movable part 14L and the right movable part image KGR is replaced with the right movable part 14R, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R do not overlap with the change and hold display area THA in the front and back. In other words, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R do not cover the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A in the change and hold display area THA.

[Modification 5]
Decorative pattern visibility change performance A in Figure 116, decorative pattern visibility change performance B in Figure 117, and decorative pattern visibility change performance C in Figure 118 may not include some of the performances described above, or other performances may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C9-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A second area capable of displaying a specific image is disposed in front of the first area so as to overlap a part of the first area in which a variable display is performed using a pattern image, and a first performance is executed in which a part of the pattern image is difficult to see due to the second area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C9-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C9-1,
In the first performance, a third area capable of displaying the variable icon and the reserved icon is disposed in front of the second area so as to overlap a part of the first area and a part of the second area, and the variable icon and the reserved icon are not difficult to see due to the pattern image and the specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C9-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C9-1 or C9-2,
In the first performance, when the specific image is displayed across the first area and the second area, the specific image may make it difficult to see other parts of the pattern image that are different from the part of the pattern image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C9-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-3,
In the first performance, the second area may disappear and the entire pattern image may be easily visible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C9-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-4,
The first performance can be executed after the variable display of the symbol image is started and before the symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C9-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-5,
The variable icon can be changed to one with a high probability of winning when the specific image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C9-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-6,
After the first performance, a second performance can be executed in which the color of the symbol image is changed to another color to increase the expectation of a win.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern rotation stop display performances A to C are explained below using Figures 119 to 121. In Figures 119 to 121, for example, the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, and other movable parts arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing.

This decorative symbol rotation stop display performance is performed while the decorative symbol is performing a variable performance (during variable display). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the decorative symbol rotation stop display performance is included, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, we will first explain decorative pattern spinning and stopping display performance A, then explain decorative pattern spinning and stopping display performance B, and finally decorative pattern spinning and stopping display performance C.

[Decorative pattern rotation stop display performance A]
The decorative symbol rotation stop display performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 119. Fig. 119 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol rotation stop display performance A. The decorative symbol rotation stop display performance A is performed during a change performance (during a change display) by the decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 119(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a stereoscopic left decorative pattern 8L, a stereoscopic middle decorative pattern 8C, and a stereoscopic right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each of the variable areas extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C includes a special pattern in addition to the number pattern. This special pattern is composed only of character patterns.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except for the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The odd numbers are composed of various character designs (all different character designs) with multiple colors (full color), while the even numbers have no character designs at all. The character designs attached to the odd numbers are displayed large with the character designs as the main focus. Therefore, the odd numbers are smaller in size than the character designs attached to the odd numbers. In contrast, the even numbers are not displayed with the character designs, so the even numbers themselves are displayed large with the main focus. Therefore, the even numbers are about the same size as the character designs attached to the odd numbers. The special designs are winged character designs with multiple colors (full color). The special design is made up of only the design of the winged character, and the size of the special design is the same size as or larger than the size of the character design on the odd-numbered designs.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, and changes at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and is displayed as temporarily stopped, or as stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. Note that, for ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In FIG. 119(A), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the bright blue number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca with a character pattern 8Cb attached, the right decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the bright blue number "6", and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as temporary stops, resulting in a miss. When the miss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the decorative pattern change performance (change display) starts again, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), and the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance A starts.

After that, the left decorative pattern 8L during the change performance (change display) changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 119(C), the left decorative pattern 8L appears in a state where the character pattern 8Lb is attached to the bright green number "1" pattern 8La at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the change area of the left decorative pattern 8L. When the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the change performance (change display) is performed with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La facing forward, and further, the character pattern 8Lb attached to the bright green number "1" pattern 8La has yellow shining eyes but does not face forward, but is tilted forward to the right as seen from the character pattern 8Lb, forming a silhouette like a shadow puppet, and the change performance (change display) is performed. At this time, the changing effect (changing display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 119(D), the left decorative pattern 8L slowly changes its position so that the character pattern 8Lb faces forward from the front right while the bright green number "1" pattern 8La remains facing forward, and when the character pattern 8Lb faces forward, it changes from a shadow-like silhouette to full color, and the entire left decorative pattern 8L moves slowly in small movements up and down. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La and the character pattern 8Lb both facing forward.

Next, the right decorative pattern 8R during the change performance (changing display) changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 119(E), the right decorative pattern 8R appears in a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the change area of the right decorative pattern 8R, with no character attached to the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra. When the right decorative pattern 8R changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra does not face forward, but remains tilted to the left front when viewed from the number "2" pattern 8Ra, and a change performance (changing display) is performed. At this time, the change performance (changing display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 119(F), the right decorative pattern 8R slowly changes position so that the bright blue number "2" 8Ra faces forward from the front left, and when the bright blue number "2" 8Ra faces forward, the entire right decorative pattern 8R moves slowly in small movements up and down. As a result, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright blue number "2" 8Ra facing forward.

Next, the middle decorative pattern 8C during the change performance (change display) changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 119(G), the middle decorative pattern 8C appears in a state where the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca is attached to a character pattern 8Cb at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the change area of the middle decorative pattern 8C. When the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca remains facing forward, and the character pattern 8Cb attached to the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca has yellow shining eyes, but does not face forward, and is tilted forward to the right when viewed from the character pattern 8Cb, forming a silhouette like a shadow puppet, and the change performance (change display) is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 119(H), the central decorative pattern 8C slowly changes position so that the character pattern 8Cb faces forward from the front right while the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca remains facing forward, and when the character pattern 8Cb faces forward, it changes from a silhouette like a shadow puppet to full color, and the entire central decorative pattern 8C moves slowly in small movements up and down. As a result, the central decorative pattern 8C becomes temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca and the character pattern 8Cb both facing forward. This ends the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance A.

Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped, resulting in a loss. When the loss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In this way, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the character pattern 8Lb attached to the odd-numbered pattern 8La slowly changes its posture so that it faces from the right front to the front as seen from the character pattern 8Lb, and in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the character pattern 8Cb attached to the odd-numbered pattern 8Ca slowly changes its posture so that it faces from the right front to the front as seen from the character pattern 8Cb, while in the right decorative pattern 8R, the even-numbered pattern 8Ra slowly changes its posture so that it faces from the left front to the front as seen from the even-numbered pattern 8Ra. In other words, when the character pattern is present in the decorative pattern, the character pattern rotates, and when the character pattern is not present in the decorative pattern, the number pattern rotates, so that the objects that rotate are different. Furthermore, the direction in which the character pattern rotates when the character pattern is present in the decorative pattern is opposite to the direction in which the number pattern rotates when the character pattern is not present in the decorative pattern.

[Decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B]
Next, the decorative symbol rotation stop display performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 120. Fig. 120 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol rotation stop display performance B. The decorative symbol rotation stop display performance B is performed during a variable performance (during a variable display) by the decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 120(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a stereoscopic left decorative pattern 8L, a stereoscopic middle decorative pattern 8C, and a stereoscopic right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each of the variable areas extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C includes a special pattern in addition to the number pattern. This special pattern is composed only of character patterns.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except for the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The odd numbers are composed of various character designs (all different character designs) with multiple colors (full color), while the even numbers have no character designs at all. The character designs attached to the odd numbers are displayed large with the character designs as the main focus. Therefore, the odd numbers are smaller in size than the character designs attached to the odd numbers. In contrast, the even numbers are not displayed with the character designs, so the even numbers themselves are displayed large with the main focus. Therefore, the even numbers are about the same size as the character designs attached to the odd numbers. The special designs are winged character designs with multiple colors (full color). The special design is made up of only the design of the winged character, and the size of the special design is the same size as or larger than the size of the character design on the odd-numbered designs.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, and changes at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and is displayed as temporarily stopped, or as stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. Note that, for ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In FIG. 120(A), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a temporary stop at the bright blue number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the bright green number "3" pattern 8Ca with a character pattern 8Cb attached, the right decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop at the bright blue number "6", and then the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as temporary stops, resulting in a miss. When the miss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the decorative pattern change performance (change display) starts again, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), and the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance B starts.

After that, the left decorative pattern 8L during the change performance (change display) changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 120(C), the left decorative pattern 8L appears in a state where the character pattern 8Lb is attached to the bright green number "1" pattern 8La at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the change area of the left decorative pattern 8L. When the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the change performance (change display) is performed with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La facing forward, and further, the character pattern 8Lb attached to the bright green number "1" pattern 8La has yellow shining eyes but does not face forward, but is tilted forward to the right as seen from the character pattern 8Lb, forming a silhouette like a shadow puppet, and the change performance (change display) is performed. At this time, the changing effect (changing display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 120(D), the left decorative pattern 8L slowly changes its position so that the character pattern 8Lb faces forward from the right front while the bright green number "1" pattern 8La remains facing forward, and when the character pattern 8Lb faces forward, it changes from a shadow-like silhouette to full color, and the entire left decorative pattern 8L moves slowly in small movements up and down. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La and the character pattern 8Lb both facing forward.

Next, the right decorative pattern 8R during the change performance (changing display) changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 120(E), the right decorative pattern 8R appears in a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the change area of the right decorative pattern 8R, with no character attached to the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra. When the right decorative pattern 8R changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra does not face forward, but remains tilted to the left front when viewed from the number "2" pattern 8Ra, and a change performance (changing display) is performed. At this time, the change performance (changing display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 120(F), the right decorative pattern 8R slowly changes position so that the bright blue number "2" 8Ra faces forward from the front left, and when the bright blue number "2" 8Ra faces forward, the entire right decorative pattern 8R moves slowly in small movements up and down. As a result, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright blue number "2" 8Ra facing forward.

Next, during the change performance (change display), the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 120(G), the winged character pattern 8Cb appears in a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the change area of the middle decorative pattern 8C. When the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the winged character pattern 8Cb becomes all silver in color, and a change performance (change display) is performed.

Then, when the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 120(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes larger while emitting a flash of light FH, and the pattern 8Cb of the silver-colored winged character changes to another color (full color), and the color of the eyes also changes from silver to yellow. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. In contrast, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C remain displayed on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are displayed with the flash of light FH positioned behind the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C, so that they are not covered by the flash of light FH and the visibility of the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C is not hindered. Furthermore, when the hold icon 9A is present, the hold icon 9A will of course not disappear from the display screen 7a, and a flashing light FH is positioned and displayed behind the hold icon 9A, so that the hold icon 9A is not covered by the flashing light FH and the visibility of the hold icon 9A is not impeded.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120(I) (in which the flash FH is omitted), when the flash FH is released, the winged character pattern 8Cb in the enlarged middle decorative pattern 8C jumps out forward from the middle decorative pattern 8C and appears even larger, and a video presentation of the winged character pattern 8Cb is performed. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C disappears from the display screen 7a. This ends the decorative pattern rotation stop display presentation B.

In FIG. 120(I), when the winged character pattern 8Cb in the middle decorative pattern 8C does not jump out from the middle decorative pattern 8C, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves downward in its own variable area and appears from above with the character pattern 8Cb attached to the bright green number "1" pattern 8Ca. When the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the bright green number "1" pattern 8Ca remains facing forward, and the character pattern 8Cb attached to the bright green number "1" pattern 8Ca has yellow shining eyes, but does not face forward, and is tilted forward to the right as seen from the character pattern 8Cb, forming a silhouette like a shadow puppet, and is variable displayed (variable displayed). Then, the central decorative pattern 8C slowly changes its posture so that the character pattern 8Cb faces forward from the right front while the bright green number "1" pattern 8Ca remains facing forward, and when the character pattern 8Cb faces forward, it changes from a silhouette like a shadow puppet to full color, and the entire central decorative pattern 8C moves slowly up and down in small movements. As a result, the central decorative pattern 8C becomes a state in which the bright green number "1" pattern 8Ca and the character pattern 8Cb are temporarily stopped and displayed with each facing forward. This ends the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance B. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L, the central decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same pattern, and it is a miss. When the miss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (J), a battle presentation begins. In the battle presentation, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, and the expectation of a big win is high. In the battle presentation, the variable display position 9Cd, reserved display position 9Ad, and variable icon 9C disappear from the display screen 7a. If reserved icon 9A exists, of course, reserved icon 9A also disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB loses, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a jackpot, after which the jackpot game (jackpot performance) begins. On the other hand, when the ally character CRA loses and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed as the same pattern, resulting in a miss. When the battle performance ends and a jackpot or miss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd and reserved display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. Note that if a reserved icon 9A exists, the reserved icon 9A is also displayed again on the display screen 7a.

In this way, in the middle decorative pattern 8C, the winged character pattern 8Cb, which is a special pattern, does not change its posture while facing forward, but in the left decorative pattern 8L, the character pattern 8Lb attached to the odd-numbered pattern 8La slowly changes its posture to face forward from the right front, whereas in the right decorative pattern 8R, the even-numbered pattern 8Ra slowly changes its posture to face forward from the left front. In other words, when a character pattern is present in the decorative pattern excluding the special pattern, the character pattern rotates, and when a character pattern is not present in the decorative pattern, the number pattern rotates, so that the objects that rotate are different. Furthermore, the direction in which the character pattern rotates when a character pattern is present in the decorative pattern excluding the special pattern is opposite to the direction in which the number pattern rotates when a character pattern is not present in the decorative pattern.

Even when a character figure is included in the decorative pattern, there are some in which the character figure rotates, and some special patterns in which the character figure faces forward and does not rotate. Furthermore, in cases where the decorative pattern is composed of a number figure as the only figure, and where the decorative pattern is composed of a winged character figure as the only figure, the only figure rotates.

[Decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C]
Next, the decorative symbol rotation stop display performance C will be described with reference to Fig. 121. Fig. 121 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol rotation stop display performance C. The decorative symbol rotation stop display performance C is performed during the decorative symbol variation performance (during the variation display).

First, as shown in FIG. 121(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of a stereoscopic image in each of the variable regions extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated. Note that here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are card-type decorative patterns, and various characters are attached to the number patterns on the cards. The middle decorative pattern 8C also has a special pattern. This special pattern is composed only of character patterns.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except for the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The numbers (odd numbers and even numbers) are each composed of various character designs (all different character designs) with multiple colors (full color), and the character designs are displayed mainly and large. For this reason, the numbers are smaller in size than the character designs attached to the numbers. The special designs are designs of winged character forms and have multiple colors (full color). The special designs are composed only of winged character designs, and the size of the special designs is the same as or larger than the character designs attached to the numbers.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, and changes at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and is displayed as temporarily stopped, or as stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. Note that, for ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In FIG. 121(A), the left decorative pattern 8L is a light blue number "2" with a character pattern 8Lb attached and displayed as a temporary stop, the middle decorative pattern 8C is a light green number "3" with a character pattern 8Cb attached and displayed as a temporary stop, and the right decorative pattern 8C is a light blue number "6" with a character pattern 8Rb attached and displayed as a temporary stop, after which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped, resulting in a miss. When the miss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the decorative pattern change performance (change display) starts again, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), and the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance C starts.

After that, the left decorative pattern 8L during the change performance (change display) changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 121(C), the left decorative pattern 8L appears in a state where the character pattern 8Lb is attached to the bright green number "1" pattern 8La at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the change area of the left decorative pattern 8L. When the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the change performance (change display) is performed with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La facing forward, and further, the character pattern 8Lb attached to the bright green number "1" pattern 8La has yellow shining eyes but does not face forward, but is tilted forward to the right when viewed from the character pattern 8Lb, forming a silhouette like a shadow puppet, and the change performance (change display) is performed. At this time, the changing effect (changing display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 121(D), the left decorative pattern 8L slowly changes its position so that the character pattern 8Lb faces forward from the front right while the bright green number "1" pattern 8La remains facing forward, and when the character pattern 8Lb faces forward, it changes from a silhouette like a shadow puppet to full color, and the entire card-type left decorative pattern 8L moves slowly in small movements up and down. As a result, the card-type left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright green number "1" pattern 8La and the character pattern 8Lb both facing forward.

Next, the right decorative pattern 8R during the change performance (change display) changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 121(E), the right decorative pattern 8R appears in a state where the character pattern 8Rb is attached to the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the change area of the right decorative pattern 8R. When the right decorative pattern 8R changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra does not face forward, but remains tilted to the left front as seen from the number "2" pattern 8Ra, and the character pattern 8Rb attached to the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra has yellow eyes and is in full color and faces forward, causing a change performance (change display). At this time, the changing effect (changing display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 121(F), the right decorative pattern 8R slowly changes position so that the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra faces forward from the front left, and when the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra faces forward, the entire card-type right decorative pattern 8R moves slowly up and down in small movements. As a result, the card-type right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright blue number "2" pattern 8Ra and the character pattern 8Rb both facing forward.

Next, the middle decorative pattern 8C during the change performance (change display) changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 121 (G), the middle decorative pattern 8C appears in a state where the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca is attached to a character pattern 8Cb at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the change area of the middle decorative pattern 8C. When the middle decorative pattern 8C changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca remains facing forward, and the character pattern 8Cb attached to the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca has yellow shining eyes, but does not face forward, and is tilted forward to the right when viewed from the character pattern 8Cb, forming a silhouette like a shadow puppet, and the change performance (change display) is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 121(H), the central decorative pattern 8C slowly changes position so that the character pattern 8Cb faces forward from the front right while the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca remains facing forward, and when the character pattern 8Cb faces forward, it changes from a silhouette like a shadow puppet to full color, and the entire card-type central decorative pattern 8C moves slowly in small movements up and down. As a result, the card-type central decorative pattern 8C becomes temporarily stopped and displayed with the bright red number "7" pattern 8Ca and the character pattern 8Cb both facing forward. This ends the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance C.

Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as stopped, resulting in a loss. When the loss is confirmed, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In this way, in the left decorative pattern 8L of the card type, the character pattern 8Lb attached to the odd-numbered pattern 8La slowly changes its posture so that it faces from the right front to the front as seen from the character pattern 8Lb, and in the middle decorative pattern 8C of the card type, the character pattern 8Cb attached to the odd-numbered pattern 8Ca slowly changes its posture so that it faces from the right front to the front as seen from the character pattern 8Cb, while in the right decorative pattern 8R of the card type, the even-numbered pattern 8Ra slowly changes its posture so that it faces from the left front to the front as seen from the even-numbered pattern 8Ra. In other words, even if various characters are attached to the odd-numbered and even-numbered patterns, the character pattern rotates in the odd-numbered patterns and the number pattern rotates in the even-numbered patterns, so that the objects that rotate are different. Furthermore, the direction in which the character pattern rotates in the odd-numbered patterns and the direction in which the number pattern rotates in the even-numbered patterns are opposite and different.

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the decorative pattern rotation and stop display presentation.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance A of FIG. 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance B of FIG. 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance C of FIG. 121, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and among the decorative patterns (a plurality of pattern images) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8L, a decorative pattern (first pattern image) in which a character pattern is added to an odd pattern is temporarily stopped in a first stopping mode, and further, a variable performance (FIGS. 119(B) to (H) in the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance A, FIGS. 120(B) to (G) in the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance B, and FIGS. 121(B) to (I) in the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance C) in which a decorative pattern (first pattern image) in which a character pattern is added to an odd pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a second stopping mode (the second stopping mode is different from the first stopping mode) can be executed. According to this configuration, among the decorative patterns (plurality of pattern images) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8L, the decorative pattern (first pattern image) in which a character is added to an odd-numbered pattern temporarily displayed in the first stop mode, and the decorative pattern (second pattern image) in which an even-numbered pattern temporarily displayed in the second stop mode can provide the player with a novel variable presentation (variable display) of the decorative patterns. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance A of FIG. 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance B of FIG. 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance C of FIG. 121, the first pattern image and the second pattern image are number patterns (number images), and the first pattern image further includes a character pattern (decorative image). According to this configuration, the first pattern image is a number pattern (number image) including a character pattern (decorative image), and the second pattern image is a number pattern (number image). Therefore, there is already a difference between the decorative pattern that becomes the first pattern image and the decorative pattern that becomes the second pattern image, and when the decorative pattern variation performance (variable display) starts and is temporarily stopped and displayed, a different impression can be given to the player depending on the combination of the decorative patterns that are temporarily stopped, which can contribute to eliminating the monotony of the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern variation performance (variable display).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable presentation in the decorative pattern rotation stop display presentation A of FIG. 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display presentation B of FIG. 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display presentation C of FIG. 121, as the first stop mode, the character pattern (decorative image) is rotated without rotating the number pattern (number image) in the first pattern image, and then the first pattern image is temporarily stopped and displayed, and as the second stop mode, the number pattern (number image) in the second pattern image is rotated and then the second pattern image is temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the first pattern image in which the character pattern (decorative image) is included in the number pattern (number image) is temporarily stopped and displayed after the character pattern (decorative image) rotates without rotating the number pattern (number image), and the second pattern image which is the number pattern (number image) is temporarily stopped and displayed after the number pattern (number image) rotates, so that the rotating objects are different. As a result, although the variations in which the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed can be based on only the first pattern image, only the second pattern image, or both the first and second pattern images, in any variation, there is always a rotating part in the decorative pattern, so a unified presentation of "rotation" is performed for the decorative pattern change presentation (changing display), and even if the rotating object is different in the first pattern image and the second pattern image, it is possible to make it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable with the decorative pattern change presentation (changing display).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display performance A of Fig. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display performance B of Fig. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display performance C of Fig. 121, the number pattern (number image) in the first pattern image has a bright green (first color) and a bright red (second color), and the number pattern (number image) in the second pattern image has a bright blue (third color). According to this configuration, the first pattern image and the second pattern image have a difference in the manner in which they are temporarily stopped, and further, the color of the number pattern (number image) is also different, and further, the number pattern (number image) in the first pattern image also has two colors, so that depending on the combination of the temporarily stopped display, a more different impression can be given to the player.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance B of Figures 120 (G) to (I), the decorative patterns (multiple pattern images) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8L further include a special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C which has a character pattern (decorative image) but does not have a number pattern (number image), and in the variable performance, the special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed in a third stop mode, and in the third stop mode, when the special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the pattern (decorative image) of the winged character in the special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can jump out outside the special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C and operate. According to this configuration, when the special pattern (third pattern image) of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the pattern (decorative image) of the winged character in the special pattern (third pattern image) of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C suddenly jumps outward from the special pattern (third pattern image) of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C and moves, creating a moving image that the player would never imagine, providing the player with an impactful presentation.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the change performance in the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance A in Fig. 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance B in Fig. 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance C in Fig. 121, when the first pattern image starts to change, a part of the character pattern (decorative image) in the first pattern image is changed to a silhouette (shadow picture image) like a shadow puppet, and in the first stop mode, it is possible to return to the original (full color) character pattern (decorative image). According to this configuration, by returning from the silhouette (shadow picture image) like a shadow puppet to the original (full color) character pattern (decorative image), it is easy to determine which character's pattern it is, so by making it a silhouette (shadow picture image) like a shadow puppet, the effect of the performance can be further enhanced.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance A of FIG. 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance B of FIG. 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance C of FIG. 121, the size of the number pattern (number image) in the first pattern image is smaller than the size of the number pattern (number image) in the second pattern image. Since the first pattern image is a number pattern (number image) including a character pattern (decorative image), the character pattern (decorative image) is mainly large in the first pattern image, and the number pattern is smaller than the character pattern (decorative image). Also, the second pattern image is a number pattern (number image), and the number pattern itself is mainly large. In other words, the first pattern image is designed to draw the player's attention to the character pattern (decorative pattern) displayed large, and the second pattern image is designed to draw the player's attention to the number pattern (number image) displayed large, so that the objects of attention are different. This can help prevent the changing presentation (changing display) of the decorative pattern that becomes the first pattern image and the decorative pattern that becomes the second pattern image from becoming monotonous.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the decorative pattern rotation and stop display performance are shown.
[Modification 1]
The decorative symbol rotation stop display performance A in Fig. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display performance B in Fig. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display performance C in Fig. 121 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state of so-called left-handed hitting. However, they may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may be performed in a game state of so-called right-handed hitting.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance A of FIG. 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance B of FIG. 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance C of FIG. 121, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned in a line at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area of the left decorative pattern 8L. However, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be arranged at a position slightly above this center line, and the middle decorative pattern 8C may be arranged at a position further back, so that the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in a triangular shape with the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R as the base. In this case, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C is made smaller than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged on the front side, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is arranged on the back side, thereby realizing a three-dimensional arrangement.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern rotation stop display performance B of FIG. 120, the special pattern is a pattern of a character in the form of a winged man, and the character in the form of a winged man jumps out from the middle decorative pattern 8C forward, and is further displayed large on the display screen 7a, and a moving image performance of the character in the form of a winged man is performed. However, in addition to the pattern of the character in the form of a winged man, the special pattern may be a pattern of a letter. For example, it may be a pattern of a letter that performs a pseudo-reciprocal (a pattern of the letter "pseudo-reciprocal"), or it may be a pattern that changes the variable icon 9C or the reserved icon 9A (a pattern of the letter "change"). In this way, a performance in which the letter pattern jumps out from the middle decorative pattern 8C forward and operates to activate the content of the letter pattern can be performed, and the effect of the performance by the special pattern can be further enhanced by increasing the variation of the special pattern.

[Modification 4]
Decorative pattern rotating and stopping display performance A in Figure 119, decorative pattern rotating and stopping display performance B in Figure 120, and decorative pattern rotating and stopping display performance C in Figure 121 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C10-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
Among the plurality of symbol images, a first symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in a first stop mode, and a second symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in a second stop mode, thereby executing a variable performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C10-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C10-1,
the first and second design images are number images;
The first design image further includes a decorative image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C10-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C10-2,
In the variable performance, as the first stop mode, the decorative image is rotated without rotating the number image in the first pattern image, and then the first pattern image is temporarily stopped and displayed, and as the second stop mode, the number image in the second pattern image is rotated, and then the second pattern image is temporarily stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C10-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C10-2 or C10-3,
The number image in the first design image may have a first color or a second color,
The number image in the second design image may have a third color.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C10-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-4,
The plurality of pattern images further includes a third pattern image having the decorative image and not having the number image,
In the variation performance, the third symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in a third stopping mode,
In the third stop mode, when the third pattern image is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative image in the third pattern image can jump out to the outside of the third pattern image and move.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C10-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-5,
In the variation performance, when the first pattern image starts to vary, a part of the decorative image in the first pattern image is changed to an image simulating a silhouette image, and in the first stop mode, the decorative image is returned to the original.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect C10-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-6,
The size of the number image in the first design image is smaller than the size of the number image in the second design image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The following describes the likelihood of winning number display effects A to C using Figures 122 to 124. These likelihood of winning number display effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the likelihood of winning number display effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Expectation level number display effect A]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the expectation degree number display performance A. The expectation degree number display performance is a performance in which an image showing the expectation degree at the time of the reach development in numbers is displayed during the reach performance. First, as shown in FIG. 122(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of "2↓2") on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a. After this reach performance, when a predetermined period has passed, a black doll character CRA1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a text image of "Chance of entering the special jackpot" is displayed together with the character CRA1.

The text image of "Chance to enter a special jackpot" is a winning type suggestion image that suggests the type of jackpot at the time of the jackpot. In other words, it suggests that if the jackpot is won in the corresponding variation, it will be a special jackpot. Here, it suggests that if the jackpot is won after the corresponding variation, it will be a 16R (round) V-passing jackpot (effectively 15R or 13R). This text image is displayed during the variation when the jackpot in the corresponding variation is determined by a lottery at the time of winning, and further, the jackpot type is a 16RV-passing jackpot, and when the display of this text image is selected at the time of variation pattern selection, this text image is displayed by lottery. In addition, even when a loss in the corresponding variation is determined by a lottery at the time of winning, this text image is selected to be displayed by lottery. Note that this text image may be set to be displayed only when the jackpot type is a 16RV-passing jackpot at the time of the jackpot, or may be set to be displayed when the jackpot is another type (for example, a 16RV-non-passing jackpot) at the time of the jackpot.

The text image "Chance to enter a guaranteed jackpot" is displayed for a specified period of time, and then disappears from the display screen 7a. After the text image "Chance to enter a guaranteed jackpot" disappears, as shown in FIG. 122(B), character CRA1 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a during the same fluctuation. Character CRA1 is an image representing the same object (a black person) as in FIG. 122(A), but its display position is different (changed) from that in FIG. 122(A). In addition, a text image "Expectation level 40% with smile reach development" is displayed together with character CRA1. The text image "Expectation level 40% with smile reach development" is displayed as a speech bubble for character CRA. The reach state of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continues.

This text image "Expectation 40% with Smile Reach Development" is a winning probability suggestion image that expresses in numbers the probability of a jackpot when the reach development effect is executed when the corresponding variation is in reach. In other words, it suggests that the probability of a jackpot will be 40% when the Smile Reach development effect is executed after this display. Here, this text image is displayed both when a jackpot in the corresponding variation is confirmed by the lottery at the time of winning, and when a miss is confirmed. If displaying this text image during variation pattern selection is selected by lottery, it is displayed during the variation. The ratio of selections to display this text image for the variation pattern during a jackpot and the variation pattern during a miss is set to 4:6.

The text image "Expectation level 40% with Smile Reach development" is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then disappears from the display screen 7a. After the text image "Expectation level 40% with Smile Reach development" disappears, as shown in FIG. 122(C), during the same fluctuation, a text image "Smile Reach Development" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This is an image that notifies the player that a Reach has developed in the Reach performance. After that, as shown in FIG. 122(D), the Reach development performance is executed. Here, multiple smiling face images are displayed. After that, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, it is fixed and stopped in the form of a miss of "282".

Figure 122 (F) shows a variation different from Figures 122 (A) to (E), and the display of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in Figure 122 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state (here, a "6↓6" reach). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move to the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a, respectively, and a special reach performance is executed. Here, first, a battle image of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fighting is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. While this battle image is displayed, a text image of "Expectation 30% with Smile Reach Development" is displayed. The text image of "Expectation 30% with Smile Reach Development" is displayed in a rectangular frame below the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB.

This text image "30% chance of winning if Smile Reach develops" is a winning probability suggestion image that expresses in numbers the chance of a jackpot when the reach development effect is executed during the reach of the corresponding variation. In other words, it suggests that if the Smile Reach development effect is executed after this display, the chance of a jackpot will be 30%. Here, this text image is displayed both when a jackpot is confirmed for the corresponding variation by the lottery at the time of winning, and when a miss is confirmed. If the display of this text image is selected by lottery when the variation pattern is selected, it is displayed during the variation. The ratio of the selection of displaying this text image for the variation pattern during a jackpot and the variation pattern during a miss is set to 3:7.

When comparing this text image of "Smile Reach Development with 30% Expectation" with the text image of "Smile Reach Development with 40% Expectation" in FIG. 122(B), while they are images that represent the expectation when the same reach development performance (smile reach development) is executed, different numerical values are displayed as the expectation. In this way, different numerical values of expectation may be displayed for the same reach development performance (smile reach development), so that the player can be made to pay attention to the numerical values. In addition, this text image of "Smile Reach Development with 30% Expectation" is displayed together with the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, while the text image of "Smile Reach Development with 40% Expectation" in FIG. 122(B) is displayed together with the black doll character CRA1. In this way, the text image of "Smile Reach Development with 30% Expectation" and the text image of "Smile Reach Development with 40% Expectation" in FIG. 122(B) display images that represent different objects. This makes it difficult to tell what image the text image "Expectations for Smile Reach Development are XX%" will be displayed with, increasing the player's expectation of the display.

The text image "Smile reach development with 30% expectation" is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then disappears from the display screen 7a. After the text image "Smile reach development with 30% expectation" disappears, as shown in FIG. 122(H), during the same fluctuation, a text image "Smile reach development" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. This is an image that notifies the player that a reach has developed in the reach performance. After that, as shown in FIG. 122(I), the reach development performance is executed. Here, the ally character CRA throws multiple smiling face images at the enemy character CRB. After that, as shown in FIG. 122(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the image of the ally character CRA being defeated is fixed and stopped in the form of a miss of "686".

[Expectation level number display effect B]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the expectation degree number display performance B. The expectation degree number display performance is a performance in which an image showing the expectation degree at the time of reach development in numbers is displayed during the reach performance. First, as shown in FIG. 123(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state (here, the reach of "2↓2") on the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a. After this reach performance, when a predetermined period has passed, a battle image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. During the display of this battle image, the smile character CRA1 is displayed. In addition, a text image of "Chance to enter RUSH by winning the battle" is displayed together with the smile character CRA1.

This text image of "Chance to enter RUSH with victory in battle" is a winning type suggestion image that suggests the type of jackpot when the ally character CRA wins in the battle performance. In other words, it suggests that if it wins in the change, it will be a jackpot with RUSH. Here, it suggests that if it wins after the change, it will be a 16R (round) V passing planned jackpot (effectively 15R or 13R). This text image is displayed during the change when the jackpot in the change is determined by a lottery at the time of winning, and further, the jackpot type is a 16RV passing planned jackpot, and when the display of this text image is selected at the time of selecting the change pattern, it is displayed. In addition, even when the loss in the change is determined by a lottery at the time of winning, the text image is selected to be displayed by lottery. In this case, an image of the ally character CRA being defeated is displayed. This text image may be set to be displayed only when the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass 16RV during a jackpot, or may be set to be displayed when the jackpot type is a different jackpot (e.g., a jackpot not scheduled to pass 16RV) during a jackpot.

After the text image "Chance to enter RUSH with victory in the battle" is displayed, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 123(B), the smile character CRA2 is further displayed while the text image "Chance to enter RUSH with victory in the battle" continues to be displayed. The smile character CRA2 is an image that shows the same object (a smiling face) as the smile character CRA1, but is displayed in a different position (lined up and down). In addition, a text image "Expectation 60% with Smile Man participation in the reach development" is displayed together with the smile character CRA2. The text image "Expectation 60% with Smile Man participation in the reach development" is displayed as a speech bubble for the smile character CRA2. The reach state of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continues.

This text image "60% chance of winning if Smile Man joins the reach development" is a winning probability suggestion image that expresses in numbers the chance of a jackpot when the reach development performance is executed during the reach of the corresponding variation. In other words, it suggests that if the Smile Man participation reach development performance is executed after this display, the chance of a jackpot will be 60%. Here, this text image is displayed both when a jackpot is confirmed for the corresponding variation by the lottery at the time of winning, and when a loss is confirmed. If the display of this text image is selected by lottery when the variation pattern is selected, it is displayed during the variation. The ratio of the selection of displaying this text image for the variation pattern during a jackpot and the variation pattern during a loss is set to 6:4.

The text image "Smile Man participation reach development with 60% expectation" is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the text image "Chance to enter RUSH with victory in battle" also disappears. After the text images "Smile Man participation reach development with 60% expectation" and "Chance to enter RUSH with victory in battle" disappear, as shown in FIG. 123(C), the text image "Smile Man participates!" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a during the same fluctuation. This is an image that notifies the fact that the reach has developed in the reach performance. Together with this notification image, Smile Man CRC participates in the battle image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. After that, the reach development performance is executed as shown in FIG. 123(D). Here, an image in which the ally character CRA and Smile Man CRC are defeated by the enemy character CRB is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 123(E), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, the result is a confirmed miss of "282".

Figure 123 (F) shows a variation different from that shown in Figures 123 (A) to (E), and the display screen 7a displays the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. After that, as shown in Figure 123 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a reach state (here, a "6↓6" reach). The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R move to the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a, and a special reach performance is executed. Here, first, a battle image of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fighting is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. While this battle image is displayed, a rectangular striped pattern image is displayed. After that, as shown in Figures 123 (H) to (I), when the stripes of the rectangular striped pattern image slide to the left, a text image of "Smile Man Participation Reach Development with Expectation 60%" is displayed from within. The text image of "Smile Man Participation Reach Development with Expectation 60%" is displayed inside the rectangular frame.

This text image "60% chance of winning if Smile Man joins the reach development" is a winning probability suggestion image that expresses in numbers the chance of a jackpot when the reach development performance is executed during the reach of the corresponding variation. In other words, it suggests that if the Smile Man participation reach development performance is executed after this display, the chance of a jackpot will be 60%. Here, this text image is displayed both when a jackpot is confirmed for the corresponding variation by the lottery at the time of winning, and when a loss is confirmed. If the display of this text image is selected by lottery when the variation pattern is selected, it is displayed during the variation. The ratio of the selection of displaying this text image for the variation pattern during a jackpot and the variation pattern during a loss is set to 6:4.

When comparing the text image of "Smile Man participation reach development with 60% expectation" in Fig. 123(G)-(I) with the text image of "Smile Man participation reach development with 60% expectation" in Fig. 123(B), they are images that represent the expectation when the same reach development performance (Smile Man participation reach development) is executed, and the same numerical value is displayed as the expectation. On the other hand, the text image of "Smile Man participation reach development with 60% expectation" in Fig. 123(G)-(I) is displayed from the center when the stripes in the rectangular striped pattern image slide leftward, whereas the text image of "Smile Man participation reach development with 60% expectation" in Fig. 123(B) is displayed as a speech bubble for smile character CRA2. In this way, even though the content is the same, the display format is different. Also, the text image of "Smile Man participation reach development expectation 60%" in Fig. 123(G)-(I) is displayed with the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, while the text image of "Smile Man participation reach development expectation 60%" in Fig. 123(B) is displayed with the smile character CRA2. In this way, the text image of "Smile Man participation reach development expectation 60%" in Fig. 123(G)-(I) and the text image of "Smile Man participation reach development expectation 60%" in Fig. 123(B) display images that represent different objects. This makes it difficult to understand in what form and with what image the text image of "Smile Man participation reach development expectation 60%" is displayed, and increases the player's expectation of the display.

The text image "Smile Man participation in reach development with 60% expectation" is displayed for a specified period of time and then disappears from the display screen 7a. If the reach development performance is not executed (if Smile Man CRC in Figure 123 does not appear) after the text image "Smile Man participation in reach development with 60% expectation" disappears, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped as shown in Figure 123 (J). Here, the image of the ally character CRA being defeated is fixed and stopped in the form of a missing "686".

[Expectation level number display effect C]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the expectation degree number display effect C. FIG. 124(A)-(C) are the same as FIG. 123(A)-(C) of the expectation degree number display effect B. After FIG. 124(C), a reach development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 124(D). Here, an image is displayed in which the ally character CRA and the smile man CRC defeat the enemy character CRB and win. After that, due to this victory, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, because the ally character CRA has won, the winning pattern of "222" is fixed and stopped.

Figures 124 (F) to (G) are the same as Figures 123 (F) to (H) of the expectation level number display performance B. After the text image of "Smile Man Participation Reach Development with Expectation Level of 60%" shown in Figure 124 (G) disappears, a text image of "Smile Man Participation!" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a as shown in Figure 124 (H). This is an image that notifies the fact that the reach has developed in the reach performance. Along with this notification image, Smile Man CRC joins the battle image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. After that, the reach development performance is executed as shown in Figure 124 (I). Here, an image is displayed in which the ally character CRA and Smile Man CRC defeat the enemy character CRB and win. After that, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped as shown in Figure 124 (J). Here, since the ally character CRA has won, the winning pattern of "666" is fixed and stopped.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the expectation level number display.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 122(B), 123(B), and 124(B), a first effect can be executed in which the degree of expectation at the time of the reach development is expressed in numbers. With this configuration, a novel effect not seen in the past can visually entertain the player, and the interest can be enhanced.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 122(A), 123(A), and 124(A), the second effect suggesting the type of win at the time of the win can be executed during the same fluctuation as that in which the first effect is executed and before the first effect. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effect, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 122(A)(B), 123(A)(B), and 124(A)(B), the first and second effects display images of the same object, and the first and second effects display images of the same object at different positions. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effects, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 122 (B) (G), in the first performance, the expectation level when a specific reach development performance is executed is expressed by a number, and when a reach is reached, a third performance can be executed in which the expectation level when a specific reach development performance is executed is expressed by a number different from the number in the first performance. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and to increase the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 122(B) and 122(G), images showing different objects are displayed in the first and third effects. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effects, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 123(B)(G)-(I) and 124(B)(G), in the first effect, the expectation level when a specific reach-development effect is executed is expressed in numbers, and when a reach is reached, a fourth effect can be executed in which the expectation level when a specific reach-development effect is executed is expressed in the same numbers as in the first effect, while being displayed in a manner different from the first effect. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with a novel effect that has never been seen before, and to increase the interest.

[Modification]
The following shows modified examples of the expectation level number display presentation.
[Modification 1]

In FIG. 122(G) of the expectation level number display performance A, the expectation level represented by the text image "Expectation level 30% with smile reach development" may be the same numerical value as the expectation level represented by the text image "Expectation level 40% with smile reach development" in FIG. 122(B). In this case, the performances that represent the expectation level with the same numerical value when a specific reach development performance is executed at the time of reach are executed in different modes from each other, so that the interest can be improved. Also, in FIG. 123(G)-(I) of the expectation level number display performance B, the expectation level represented by the text image "Expectation level 60% with smile man participation reach development" may be a numerical value different from the expectation level represented by the text image "Expectation level 60% with smile man participation reach development" in FIG. 123(B). In this case, the performances that represent the expectation level with different numerical values when a specific reach development performance is executed at the time of reach are executed, so that the interest can be improved.
[Modification 2]
In the expectation degree number display performance A, the performance in which the text image "Expectation degree XX% with Smile Reach development" is displayed may be executed multiple times during one variation. In other words, the expectation degree may change during one variation. In this case, the expectation degree displayed later may be higher or lower than the expectation degree displayed earlier.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
The gaming machine is characterized in that a first performance can be executed in which the expectation level of the reach development is expressed in numbers when the reach is reached.
◇[Aspect D1-2]
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine capable of executing a second performance suggesting a type of winning at the time of winning during the same fluctuation as that during which the first performance is executed and before the first performance.
◇[Aspect D1-3]
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2,
In the first production and the second production, an image showing the same object is displayed,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the image representing the same object is displayed at different positions in the first presentation and the second presentation.
◇[Aspect D1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
In the first performance, the expectation degree when a specific reach development performance is executed is expressed by a number,
A gaming machine capable of executing a third presentation in which, when a reach is reached, an expectation level in the case where the specific reach development presentation is executed is expressed by a number different from the number in the first presentation.
◇[Aspect D1-5]
5. The gaming machine according to claim 4,
The gaming machine, characterized in that images showing different objects are displayed in the first and third effects.
◇[Aspect D1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
In the first performance, the expectation degree when a specific reach development performance is executed is expressed by a number,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when a reach occurs, a fourth presentation is executed in which the expectation level in the case where the specific reach development presentation is executed is expressed by the same number as in the first presentation, while being displayed in a manner different from that of the first presentation.

The specific performance execution suggestion effects A to C are explained below using Figures 125 to 127. These specific performance execution suggestion effects can be executed during the decorative pattern variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a specific performance execution suggestion effect is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L.

[Specific performance execution suggestion performance A]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the specific performance execution suggestion performance A. The specific performance execution suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that a specific performance will be executed in the change. First, as shown in FIG. 125(A), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no change display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, even after the variable display (change display) of the special pattern (identification information) is started in the special pattern display device 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no change display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The reserved icon (change icon) 9C is displayed in the reserved display area (change icon display area, reserved digestion image display area) at the center lower part of the display screen 7a. Below the reserved display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the reserved display area.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variation, a specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is displayed, suggesting that a specific performance will be executed in the variation. Here, the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is a text image of "Smile-kuns assemble!", and notifies that a special reach performance (SP reach performance) will be executed. When the text image of "Smile-kuns assemble!" appears, it is enlarged and displayed across three screens, the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. In addition, the performance execution suggestion image ESG is displayed beyond the three screens. At this time, the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has not yet been displayed. That is, in this performance, after the start of the variation, the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is displayed before the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Therefore, a player who sees the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is informed that a specific performance such as a special reach performance will be executed suddenly without knowing the state of the decorative patterns, such as whether the decorative patterns will be reach or not. This can greatly surprise the player and increase the player's interest. The specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is displayed partially overlapping the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in front of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125(C), the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire specific performance execution suggestion image ESG fits inside the three screens of the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. At this time, it is still enlarged and displayed across the three screens. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has not yet been displayed. A portion of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG continues to be displayed overlapping the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in front of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125(D), the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is further reduced in size, and the entire specific performance execution suggestion image ESG fits inside the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not yet displayed. A portion of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG continues to be displayed overlapping the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C, and the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in front of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125(E), in a state where the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and temporarily stops at a position where it overlaps with the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. The left decorative pattern 8L is "7" here, and is displayed on the front side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. After that, as shown in FIG. 125(F), in a state where the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG and the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L are displayed on the display screen 7a, the right decorative pattern 8R moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and temporarily stops at a position where it overlaps with the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. The right decorative pattern 8R is "7" like the left decorative pattern 8L, and is displayed on the front side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. As a result, a "7↓7" reach is formed in front of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(G), the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG breaks, and a special reach performance as a specific performance starts. The right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L are stopped in a reach mode. Here, the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG breaks, and multiple smiley face images (Smile-kun) that execute the specific performance (special reach performance) appear from the back side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. After that, as shown in FIG. 125(H)(I), a specific performance (special reach performance) is executed by multiple smiley face images. That is, a character corresponding to the content shown in the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG breaks the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special reach performance. Here, a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed in the specific performance. After that, as shown in FIG. 125(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, they are fixed and stopped in the jackpot mode of "777".

[Specific performance execution suggestion performance B]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the specific performance execution suggestion performance B. The specific performance execution suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that a specific performance will be executed in the change. First, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no change display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, even after the variable display (change display) of the special pattern (identification information) is started in the special pattern display device 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no change display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The reserved icon (change icon) 9C is displayed in the reserved display area (change icon display area, reserved digestion image display area) at the center lower part of the display screen 7a. Below the reserved display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the reserved display area.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variation, as shown in FIG. 126(B)(C), a specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is displayed, which suggests that a specific performance will be executed in the variation. Here, the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is a text image of "Smile-kuns assemble!", which notifies that a special reach performance (SP reach performance) will be executed. The text image of "Smile-kuns assemble!" appears while moving from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has not yet been displayed. That is, in this performance, after the start of the variation, the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is displayed before the display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Therefore, a player who sees the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is informed that a specific performance such as a special reach performance will be executed suddenly without knowing the state of the decorative pattern, such as whether the decorative pattern will be reach or not. This can greatly surprise the player, which can increase the interest. When the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG stops at the position shown in FIG. 126(C), a part of it is displayed overlapping the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (D), the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is enlarged and displayed across three screens: the right sub-display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub-display screen 64L. The changing display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has not yet been displayed. A portion of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG continues to be displayed overlapping the reserved icon (changing icon) 9C. At this time, the reserved icon (changing icon) 9C is displayed in front of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126(E), the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is displayed in a reduced size, and the entire specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is again contained within the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not yet displayed. A portion of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG continues to be displayed overlapping the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C, and the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in front of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126(F), in a state where the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and temporarily stops at a position where it overlaps with the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. The left decorative pattern 8L is "7" here, and is displayed on the front side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. After that, as shown in FIG. 126(G), in a state where the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG and the temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L are displayed on the display screen 7a, the right decorative pattern 8R moves from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a and temporarily stops at a position where it overlaps with the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. The right decorative pattern 8R is "7" like the left decorative pattern 8L, and is displayed on the front side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. As a result, a "7↓7" reach is formed on the front side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(H), the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG breaks, and a special reach performance starts as a specific performance. The right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L are stopped in a reach mode. Here, the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG breaks, and multiple smiley face images (Smile-kun) that execute the specific performance (special reach performance) appear from the back side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. After that, as shown in FIG. 126(I), a specific performance (special reach performance) is executed by multiple smiley face images. That is, a character corresponding to the content shown in the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG breaks the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special reach performance. Here, a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed in the specific performance. After that, as shown in FIG. 126(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped. Here, they are fixed and stopped in the jackpot mode of "777".

[Specific performance execution suggestion performance C]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the specific performance execution suggestion performance C. In the specific performance execution suggestion performance C, the specific performance execution suggestion performance and the pseudo consecutive performance are combined and executed. First, as shown in FIG. 127(A), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. That is, even after the variable display (variable display) of the special pattern (identification information) is started in the special pattern display device 41 (FIG. 2), the display screen 7a, the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left sub-display screen 64L continue to display no variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The reserved icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed in the reserved display area (variable icon display area, reserved digestion image display area) at the center lower part of the display screen 7a. Below the reserved display area, a horizontally long rectangular image is displayed to indicate the position of the reserved display area.

After the start of the fluctuation, when a predetermined period has elapsed, the effects shown in Fig. 127 (B) to (D) are executed. The effects shown in Fig. 127 (B) to (D) are the same as Fig. 126 (B) to (H) of the specific effect execution suggestion effect B. As shown in Fig. 127 (D), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG breaks, and a special reach effect (SP reach effect) as a specific effect is started. The right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L are stopped in a reach state. Here, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG breaks, and multiple smiley face images (Smile-kun) that execute the specific effect (special reach effect) appear from the back side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. After that, the specific effect (special reach effect) is executed by multiple smiley face images. That is, a character corresponding to the content shown in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG breaks the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special reach effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 127(E), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stop. Here, they temporarily stop in the losing mode of "767". After that, as shown in FIG. 127(F), a text image of "One more time!" is displayed, and a pseudo consecutive performance is started, and the decorative patterns start to change again. FIG. 127(G)-(I) are the same as FIG. 127(B)-(D). After that, as shown in FIG. 127(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R definitely stop. Here, they definitely stop in the winning mode of "777".

[Example of effect]
Below are examples of the effects of the specific effect suggestion.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 125 to 127, in a state where the decorative pattern change display is not continuously displayed after the start of the change, a first effect is displayed in which a specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed, which suggests that a specific effect will be executed in the change, and after the first effect, a second effect is executed in which the decorative patterns 8L and 8R temporarily stop overlapping with the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. With this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel effect, and to increase the interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 125 to 127, in the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed overlapping with the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG in the reach state. According to this configuration, the unprecedented and novel effect can visually entertain the player and increase the interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 125 to 127, after the second performance, the special performance execution suggestion image ESG breaks in a state where the decorative symbols 8L and 8R overlap, and the SP reach performance is executed, so that the third performance can be executed. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel performance, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 125 to 127, in the third performance, a character (smiling face image) corresponding to the content shown in the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG destroys the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG, and in the SP reach performance, a character (smiling face image) appears. With this configuration, a novel performance that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 125 to 127, in the first effect, the reserved icon (the reserved icon (variable icon) 9C) is displayed overlapping on the front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. With this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented novel effect, and the interest can be increased.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 125 to 127, in the first effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed across the sub-display means of the display screen 7a and the right sub-display screen 64R, and the display screen 7a and the left sub-display screen 64L. With this configuration, a novel effect that has never been seen before can visually entertain the player, and can increase the interest.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the specific effect execution suggestion effect are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the specific performance execution suggestion performances A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in a reach state on the front side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG, but they may be stopped in a state other than reach. For example, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped at "567" on the front side of the specific performance execution suggestion image ESG. Also, for example, after being temporarily stopped at "567", they may be changed again by a pseudo consecutive performance, and the specific performance may be executed at that time.

[Modification 2]
The content of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG may suggest that an effect other than the special reach effect will be executed. For example, it may suggest that a big win confirmation effect or a miss confirmation effect will be executed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern;
A first effect in which a specific effect execution suggestion image is displayed, suggesting that a specific effect will be executed in the change, in a state in which the change display of the decorative pattern has not been displayed continuously since the start of the change;
and a second effect in which the decorative pattern temporarily stops overlapping the specific effect execution suggestion image after the first effect.
◇[Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
In the second performance, the decorative pattern is displayed overlapping the specific performance execution suggestion image in a reach state.
◇[Aspect D2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or D2-2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that after the second performance, the specific performance execution suggestion image breaks with the decorative patterns overlapping, and a third performance is executed in which an SP reach performance is executed.
◇[Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-3,
In the third performance, a character corresponding to the content shown in the specific performance execution suggestion image destroys the specific performance execution suggestion image, and in the SP reach performance, the character appears.
◇[Aspect D2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the hold icon is displayed superimposed on the front of the specific effect execution suggestion image.
◇[Aspect D2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5 further comprises:
The display device includes a sub-display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
In the first effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image is displayed across the display means and the sub-display means.

The special direction suggestion effect will be explained below using Figures 128 to 130. This special direction suggestion effect can be executed during the special symbol variation effect or during a jackpot game. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command or jackpot game start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a.

[Special direction suggestion effect A]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the special direction suggestion performance A. In this special direction suggestion performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 128(A), a time-saving performance is executed. This time-saving performance is performed when the player is in a relatively advantageous time-saving game state, and displays an ally character XF1, a direction suggestion display XF2, and a time-saving number display XF3. The ally character XF1 includes a belt item XF11, which is a predetermined item. The direction suggestion display XF2 includes a direction display XF21. The direction display XF21 is composed of an arrow that suggests the player to hit right and the word "hit right" inside the arrow. The time-saving number display XF3 is a display that indicates the remaining number of time-saving times, and in the example of FIG. 128(A), it is displayed as "50 more times". In addition, in this time-saving performance, a reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure. In addition, a decorative pattern change performance (changing display) is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (B), direction suggestion display performance 1 is executed. This direction suggestion display performance 1 is a continuation of the time-saving performance, and is performed during time-saving play. In this direction suggestion display performance 1, the belt item XF11 of ally character XF1 flies toward the direction suggestion display XF2, and eventually becomes part of the direction suggestion display XF2. In other words, the direction suggestion display XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21. The belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21 are positioned adjacent to each other, and the belt item XF11 is positioned in the shaft (arrow stem) portion of the arrow of the direction display XF21.

128(C), a direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 2 is a continuation of the direction display effect 1, and is executed during time-saving play. In this direction suggestion display effect 2, the ally character XF1, the direction suggestion display XF2, and the time-saving count display XF3 are continuously displayed, and in the direction suggestion display XF2, a movement effect is executed in which the belt item XF11 moves along the shaft portion of the direction display XF21.
This direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed until the time-saving game ends or until a big win occurs.

[Special direction suggestion effect B]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the special direction suggestion performance B. In this special direction suggestion performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 129(A), a normal performance is executed. This normal performance is executed in a normal game state that is relatively unfavorable to the player, and displays an ally character XF1 and a direction suggestion display XF2. The ally character XF1 includes a belt item XF11, which is a predetermined item. The direction suggestion display XF2 includes a direction display XF21. The direction display XF21 is composed of an arrow that suggests the player to hit right, and the word "hit right" inside the arrow. In addition, in this normal performance, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure. In addition, a decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. After this, the following will be explained assuming that a jackpot is won and the time-saving game state is entered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(B), a direction suggestion display performance 1 is executed. This direction suggestion display performance 1 is performed during time-saving play, which is relatively advantageous to the player. In this direction suggestion display performance 1, the belt item XF11 of the ally character XF1 flies toward the direction suggestion display XF2, and eventually becomes part of the direction suggestion display XF2. In other words, the direction suggestion display XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21. The belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the belt item XF11 is arranged in the shaft (arrow stem) portion of the arrow of the direction display XF21. In addition, in this direction suggestion display performance 1, a time-saving number display XF3 is displayed. The time-saving number display XF3 is an indication of the remaining number of time-saving times, and in the example of FIG. 129(B), it is indicated as "50 more times."

129(C), a direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 2 is a continuation of the direction suggestion display effect 1, and is executed during the time-saving game mode. In this direction suggestion display effect 2, the ally character XF1, the direction suggestion display XF2, and the time-saving number display XF3 are continuously displayed, and in the direction suggestion display XF2, a movement effect is executed in which the belt item XF11 moves along the shaft portion of the direction display XF21.
This direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed until the time-saving game ends or until a big win occurs.

[Special Directional Suggestion Effects C]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the special direction suggestion performance C. In this special direction suggestion performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 130(A), a normal performance is executed. This normal performance is executed in a normal game state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and displays an ally character XF1 and a direction suggestion display XF2. The ally character XF1 includes a belt item XF11, which is a predetermined item. The direction suggestion display XF2 includes a direction display XF21. The direction display XF21 is composed of an arrow that suggests the player to hit right and the word "hit right" inside the arrow. In addition, in this normal performance, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but are omitted in the figure. In addition, a decorative pattern variable performance (variable display) is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. After this, the following will be explained assuming that a jackpot is hit and the jackpot game state is entered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(B), a direction suggestion display performance 1 is executed. This direction suggestion display performance 1 is performed during a jackpot game. In this direction suggestion display performance 1, the belt item XF11 of the ally character XF1 flies toward the direction suggestion display XF2, and eventually becomes part of the direction suggestion display XF2. In other words, the direction suggestion display XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21. The belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the belt item XF11 is arranged in the shaft (arrow stem) portion of the arrow of the direction display XF21. In addition, in this direction suggestion display performance 1, the acquired ball output display XF4 is displayed. The acquired ball output display XF4 is an indication of the acquired balls during a jackpot, and in the example of FIG. 130(B), it is indicated as "acquired balls: 1860".

Next, as shown in Fig. 130(C), a direction suggestion display performance 2 is executed. This direction suggestion display performance 2 is a continuation of the direction suggestion display performance 1, and is executed during a jackpot game state. In this direction suggestion display performance 2, the ally character XF1, the direction suggestion display XF2, and the acquired ball display XF4 are continuously displayed, and in the direction suggestion display XF2, a movement performance is executed in which the belt item XF11 moves along the shaft portion of the direction display XF21.
This direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed until the big win game ends.

[Modification]
In the above special direction suggestion performances A to C, the display position of the direction suggestion display XF2 is fixed, but this is not limited to this, and the direction suggestion display XF2 may also move while the belt item XF11 moves.
In addition, in the direction suggestion display XF2, the direction display XF21 may also move. In addition, in the direction suggestion display XF2, the direction display XF21 may blink. In addition, in the direction suggestion display XF2, the belt item XF11 may move to a position where it overlaps with the direction display XF21. In this case, the belt item XF11 may be in front of the direction display XF21. In addition, the belt item XF11 may be behind the direction display XF21. In the direction suggestion display XF2, when another image (such as a character (or the ally character XF1)) moves to a position where it overlaps, the direction suggestion display XF2 is displayed in front of this other image. In other words, the other image moves behind the direction suggestion display XF2. In the direction suggestion display XF2, the belt item XF11, which is a part of the ally character XF1, is included, but it may also include other parts of the ally character XF1 (for example, a sword), the entire ally character XF1, or parts of other characters or other images.

[Example of effect]
In the special direction suggestion effect B, a normal effect is performed in which the ally character XF1 is displayed in a normal game state that is relatively unfavorable to the player, and then, in a time-saving game state that is relatively favorable to the player, a direction suggestion display XF2 including a direction display XF21 that suggests a right hit and XF11 that represents a part of the ally character XF1 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the direction suggestion display XF2 includes a part of the ally character XF1 displayed in a normal game state that is relatively unfavorable to the player, when a player hits right, the player who sees the direction suggestion display XF2 can recognize the ally character XF1 that appeared in the normal game state even during the time-saving mode, and can feel a mysterious atmosphere, and can enjoy the time-saving mode more. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the special direction suggestion effect C, a time-saving effect is performed in which the ally character XF1 is displayed in a normal game state that is relatively unfavorable to the player, and then, during a jackpot game, a direction suggestion display XF2 is displayed, including a direction display XF21 that suggests the direction in which the game ball will be shot and XF11 that represents a part of the ally character XF1. According to this configuration, since the direction suggestion display XF2 includes a part of the ally character XF1 displayed in a normal game state that is relatively unfavorable to the player, when hitting to the right, the player who sees the direction suggestion display XF2 can recognize the ally character XF1 that appeared in the normal game state even during a jackpot game, and can feel a mysterious atmosphere, and can enjoy the jackpot game more. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XF-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display performance may be performed as one of the plurality of display performances,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
the first display effect is an effect of displaying a first image,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a direction suggestion,
The direction suggestion display includes a direction display suggesting a launch direction of the game ball and a second image representing a part of the first image,
After the first display performance, the second display performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
the second display performance is performed in a second gaming state of a first gaming state that is relatively unfavorable to the player and a second gaming state that is relatively favorable to the player;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-2,
The first display performance is performed in the first gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
The second display performance is performed during a big win game.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XF-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects XF-2 to XF-4,
The first image is a character.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The sound effect performances A to C are explained below using Figures 131 to 133. In Figures 131 to 133, for example, the first movable prop 14, the second movable prop 15, and other movable props arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing.

This sound effect performance can be executed across multiple variable performances (variable displays) using decorative patterns. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable performance start command, a pre-determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a sound effect performance is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image used in the sound effect production (referred to as a "specific background image") is a specific image not included in the normal background image, such as a lunar surface image, a space image, or an image of the inside of a spaceship. The normal background image is a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, an ocean image, an ocean floor image, or an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be a still image or a video.

Here, we will first explain sound effect production A, then sound effect production B, and finally sound effect production C.

[Sound Effects A]
The sound effect performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 131. Fig. 131 is a diagram for explaining the sound effect performance A. The sound effect performance A is performed over a plurality of variable performances (variable displays) by decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 131(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (change display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the change performance (change display) of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only two hold icons that have not been consumed and are stored.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icons") are briefly explained. The difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, among the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling spherical icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icon is further set to have a high expectation of winning in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)). In addition, there are also specific icons with various characters. The specific icons are used in the sound effect production where various characters appear in the white spherical icon, and change to one of the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, black spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, and white spherical icon in the sound effect production.

In FIG. 131(A), the city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal background image, and the decorative pattern change performance (change display) starts. Then, during the change performance (change display), as shown in FIG. 131(B), a game ball enters the first start hole 20 and a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad (although a pre-reading performance was performed in connection with this ball entry, there was no change from the white spherical reserved icon 9A to another icon, and the result was a white spherical reserved icon 9A). At this time, a first winning sound of "Pee-yoong" is played from the speaker 67 in connection with the game ball entering the first start hole 20. In other words, the first winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad.

After that, when the game ball enters the first start hole 20 during the change performance (during the change display) and the sound effect performance A is started by the pre-reading performance, a reserve icon 9A having the ally character CRA as a specific icon (hereinafter referred to as the "specific reserve icon 9A") is displayed at the fourth reserve display position 9Ad as shown in FIG. 131 (C). At this time, a second winning sound "squeak squeak" different from the first winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in association with the game ball entering the first start hole 20, and then, following the second winning sound, a first performance sound "OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA, is played from the speaker 67. In other words, when the second winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the specific reserve icon 9A displayed at the fourth reserve display position 9Ad, the first performance sound is played from the speaker 67.

For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

Then, as the reserved amount is consumed, the change performance (change display) continues, and when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad in Figures 131 (A) to (C) moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the corresponding changing icon 9C, the change performance (change display) begins, and then, as shown in Figure 131 (D), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped number "3", resulting in a miss, and the change performance (change display) ends and the corresponding changing icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(E), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, begins to play from the speaker 67.

Then, when the change performance (change display) starts and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and start changing at high speed, as shown in FIG. 131(F), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and the name of the ally character CRA, "OARO", is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a as the name image TIL accompanied by a flash FH for only the first display period (e.g., 1 second). When the city image THG1, which is the normal background image, is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. During the first display period (for example, 1 second), even if the normal background image, city image THG1, is switched to the specific background image, space image THG2, the period during which the space image THG2 is displayed is short, and the space image THG2 may become semi-transparent, allowing the city image THG1 to be seen behind the space image THG2.

The name image TIL and the flashing light FH are positioned and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A are not covered by the name image TIL and the flashing light FH, and visibility is not impaired.

When the first display period (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 131 (G), the name image TIL and the flash FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and at the same time, the specific background image, the space image THG2, displayed on the display screen 7a, gradually switches back to the normal background image, the city image THG1, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R gradually reappear on the display screen 7a, continuing the changing performance (changing display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "1", resulting in a miss, and the changing icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the changing effect (changing display) ends. At this time, the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, stops being played from the speaker 67. In other words, the output of the second sound effect is stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 131(I), when the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, starts to play from the speaker 67. Although the output of this second sound effect was stopped immediately before, it does not restart from the point where it had progressed immediately before it was stopped, but rather returns to the beginning and starts again.

Then, when the change performance (change display) starts and the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and start changing at high speed, as shown in FIG. 131(J), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched again to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and the name of the ally character CRA, "OARO", is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a as a name image TIL accompanied by a flash FH for a second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) that is longer than the first display period. The second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) is different from the first display period (e.g., 1 second), and even if the city image THG1, which is the normal background image, is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the period during which the space image THG2 is displayed becomes longer, so that the space image THG2 does not become semi-transparent but becomes opaque, and the city image THG1 does not become visible behind the space image THG2. Here too, the name image TIL and the flashing light FH are displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the name image TIL and the flashing light FH, and visibility is not impaired.

In a state where the name image TIL and the flash FH are displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed, the third sound effect, "OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA, is played from the speaker 67. The third sound effect ends before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed. This third sound effect is the same as the content conveyed by the first sound effect ("OARO", the name of the ally character CRA), but has a different intonation. The first sound effect is stable and calm without excessive intonation, while the third sound effect is impressive with excessive intonation, which is different from the first sound effect. In addition, the volume of the third sound effect is larger than the volume of the first sound effect, so that even if the content conveyed by the first sound effect and the third sound effect ("OARO", the name of the ally character CRA) is the same, the first sound effect and the third sound effect are conveyed to the player as different impressions.

When the second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 131 (K), the name image TIL and the flash FH disappear from the display screen 7a, and the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched from the space image THG2 to the lunar surface image THG3, which is the same specific background image, and the ally character CRA is displayed large on the display screen 7a. The ally character CRA is displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the ally character CRA, and visibility is not impaired.

Then, in Fig. 131(I), a lyric image TG of the second sound effect (i.e., the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a specific image related to the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA that has begun to play from the speaker 67. The lyric image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a in time with the rhythm of the second sound effect, and is composed of a single character image or multiple character images. Specifically, for example, for the part of the lyrics of the theme song for ally character CRA that reads "One day, start from here..." (13 hiragana characters), the lyrics image TG first displays "One day" in a first position on the display screen 7a (to the left of ally character CRA), then displays "to" in a second position on the display screen 7a (upper left of ally character CRA), then displays "From here" in a third position on the display screen 7a (to the right of ally character CRA), and then displays "Start" in a fourth position on the display screen 7a (upper right of ally character CRA) in time with the rhythm of the second sound effect.

After that, when the output of the second sound effect ends, as shown in FIG. 131 (L), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched back to the normal background image, the city image THG1, from the lunar surface image THG3, and the variable effect (variable display) continues, causing a fireball to appear from the center of the display screen 7a. When the fireball is shot in an arc toward the variable icon 9C, it collides with the variable icon 9C and changes from the variable icon 9C having the ally character CRA to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C. This ends sound effect performance A.

The size of the yellow (gold) star icon is the same as the size of the white spherical variable icon 9C in Figures 131 (A) to (G). After the sound effect A, various effects may continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in the same pattern, a jackpot is awarded and a jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins. However, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same pattern, a miss occurs.

[Sound Effects Production B]
Next, the sound effect performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 132. Fig. 132 is a diagram for explaining the sound effect performance B. The sound effect performance B is performed over a plurality of variable performances (variable displays) by decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 132(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (changing display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the change performance (changing display) of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are changed from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, and are changed at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed as slowly moving up and down in small movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icons are displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one hold icon that has not been consumed and is stored.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icons") are briefly explained. The difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, among the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling spherical icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icon is further set to have a high expectation of winning in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)). In addition, there are also specific icons with various characters. The specific icons are used in the sound effect production where various characters appear in the white spherical icon, and change to one of the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, black spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, and white spherical icon in the sound effect production.

In FIG. 132(A), the city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal background image, and the decorative pattern change performance (change display) starts. Then, during the change performance (change display), as shown in FIG. 132(B), a game ball enters the first start hole 20 and a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad (although a pre-reading performance was performed in connection with this ball entry, the white spherical reserved icon 9A did not change to another icon, and as a result, it became a white spherical reserved icon 9A). At this time, a first winning sound of "Pee-yoong" is played from the speaker 67 in connection with the game ball entering the first start hole 20. In other words, the first winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad.

After that, when the game ball enters the first start hole 20 during the change performance (during the change display) and the sound effect performance B is started by the pre-reading performance, a reserve icon 9A having the ally character CRB as a specific icon (hereinafter referred to as the "specific reserve icon 9A") is displayed at the third reserve display position 9Ad as shown in FIG. 132 (C). At this time, a second winning sound "squeak squeak" different from the first winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in association with the game ball entering the first start hole 20, and then, following the second winning sound, a first performance sound "OARO-B", which is the name of the ally character CRB, is played from the speaker 67. In other words, when the second winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the specific reserve icon 9A displayed at the third reserve display position 9Ad, the first performance sound is played from the speaker 67.

For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

Then, as the reserved amount is consumed, the change performance (change display) continues, and when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad in Figures 132 (A) to (C) moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the corresponding changing icon 9C, the change performance (change display) begins, and then, as shown in Figure 132 (D), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped number "3", resulting in a miss, and the change performance (change display) ends and the corresponding changing icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(E), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRB, begins to play from the speaker 67.

Then, when the change performance (change display) starts and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and start changing at high speed, as shown in FIG. 132(F), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and the name of the ally character CRB, "OARO-B", is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a as a name image TIL accompanied by a flash FH for only the first display period (e.g., 1 second). When the city image THG1, which is the normal background image, is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. During the first display period (for example, 1 second), even if the normal background image, city image THG1, is switched to the specific background image, space image THG2, the period during which the space image THG2 is displayed is short, and the space image THG2 may become semi-transparent, allowing the city image THG1 to be seen behind the space image THG2.

The name image TIL and the flashing light FH are positioned and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A are not covered by the name image TIL and the flashing light FH, and visibility is not impaired.

When the first display period (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 132 (G), the name image TIL and the flash FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and at the same time, the specific background image, the space image THG2, displayed on the display screen 7a, gradually switches back to the normal background image, the city image THG1, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R gradually reappear on the display screen 7a, continuing the changing performance (changing display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 132(H), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "1", resulting in a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends. At this time, the second performance sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRB, stops being played from the speaker 67. In other words, the output of the second performance sound stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132(I), when the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRB, starts to play from the speaker 67. Although the output of this second sound effect was stopped immediately before, it does not restart from the point where it had progressed immediately before it was stopped, but rather returns to the beginning and starts again.

Then, when the change performance (change display) starts and the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and start changing at high speed, as shown in FIG. 132(J), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched back to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and the name of the ally character CRB, "OARO-B", is displayed as a name image TIL accompanied by a flash FH in the center of the display screen 7a for a second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) that is longer than the first display period. The second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) is different from the first display period (e.g., 1 second), and even if the city image THG1, which is the normal background image, is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the period during which the space image THG2 is displayed becomes longer, so that the space image THG2 does not become semi-transparent but becomes opaque, and the city image THG1 does not become visible behind the space image THG2. Here too, the name image TIL and the flashing light FH are displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the name image TIL and the flashing light FH, and visibility is not impaired.

While the name image TIL and the flash FH are displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed, a third sound effect, "OARO-B", which is the name of the ally character CRB, is played from the speaker 67. The third sound effect ends before the second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed. This third sound effect has the same content as that conveyed by the first sound effect ("OARO-B", which is the name of the ally character CRB), but has a different intonation. The difference is that the first sound effect is stable and calm without excessive intonation, whereas the third sound effect is impressive with excessive intonation. In addition, the volume of the third sound effect is louder than the volume of the first sound effect, so that even if the content conveyed by the first and third sound effects is the same (the name of the ally character CRB, "OARO-B"), the first and third sound effects are conveyed to the player as different impressions.

When the second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 132 (K), the name image TIL and the flash FH disappear from the display screen 7a, and the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched from the space image THG2 to the lunar surface image THG3, which is the same specific background image, and the ally character CRB is displayed large on the display screen 7a. The ally character CRB is displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the ally character CRB, and visibility is not impaired.

Then, in Fig. 132(I), a lyric image TG of the second sound effect (i.e., the lyrics of the theme song of ally character CRB) is displayed on display screen 7a as a specific image related to the second sound effect, which is the theme song of ally character CRB that has begun to play from speaker 67. The lyric image TG is displayed on display screen 7a in time with the rhythm of the second sound effect, and is composed of a single character image or multiple character images. Specifically, for example, for the part of the lyrics of the theme song for ally character CRB that reads "Hot passion, not yet..." (12 hiragana characters), the lyrics image TG first displays "hot" lyrics image TG1 in the first position (upper left of ally character CRB) on the display screen 7a in time with the rhythm of the second sound effect, then displays "passion" lyrics image TG2 in the second position (lower right of ally character CRB) on the display screen 7a, then displays "wo" lyrics image TG3 in the third position (right of ally character CRB) on the display screen 7a, and then displays "still" lyrics image TG4 in the fourth position (upper right of ally character CRB) on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the output of the second sound effect ends, as shown in FIG. 132 (L), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, the moon surface image THG3, is switched back to the normal background image, the city image THG1, and the variable effect (variable display) continues, causing a fireball to appear from the center of the display screen 7a. When the fireball is shot in an arc toward the variable icon 9C, it collides with the variable icon 9C and changes from the variable icon 9C having the ally character CRB to the variable icon 9C that is a blue smiling sphere. This ends sound effect performance B.

The size of the blue smiling sphere icon is the same as the size of the white spherical variable icon 9C in Figures 132 (A) to (G). After the sound effect B, various effects may continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in the same pattern, a jackpot is awarded and a jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins, whereas when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same pattern, a miss is awarded.

[Sound Effects Production C]
Next, the sound effect performance C will be described with reference to Fig. 133. Fig. 133 is a diagram for explaining the sound effect performance C. The sound effect performance C is performed over a plurality of variable performances (variable displays) by decorative patterns.

First, as shown in FIG. 133(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (changing display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the change performance (changing display) of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are changed from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, and are changed at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed as slowly moving up and down in small movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only two hold icons that have not been consumed and are stored.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "icons") are briefly explained. The difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, among the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling spherical icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. The smiling spherical icon is further set to have a high expectation of winning in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)). In addition, there are also specific icons with various characters. The specific icons are used in the sound effect production where various characters appear in the white spherical icon, and change to one of the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, black spherical icon, smiling spherical icon, and white spherical icon in the sound effect production.

In FIG. 133(A), the city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as the normal background image, and the decorative pattern change performance (change display) starts. Then, during the change performance (change display), as shown in FIG. 133(B), a game ball enters the first start hole 20 and a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad (although a pre-reading performance was performed in connection with this ball entry, there was no change from the white spherical reserved icon 9A to another icon, and the result was a white spherical reserved icon 9A). At this time, a first winning sound of "Pee-yoong" is played from the speaker 67 in connection with the game ball entering the first start hole 20. In other words, the first winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the reserved icon 9A displayed at the third reserved display position 9Ad.

After that, when the game ball enters the first start hole 20 during the change performance (during the change display) and the sound effect performance C is started by the pre-reading performance, a reserve icon 9A having the ally character CRA as a specific icon (hereinafter referred to as the "specific reserve icon 9A") is displayed at the fourth reserve display position 9Ad as shown in FIG. 133 (C). At this time, a second winning sound "squeak squeak" different from the first winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in association with the game ball entering the first start hole 20, and then, following the second winning sound, a first performance sound "OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA, is played from the speaker 67. In other words, when the second winning sound is played from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the specific reserve icon 9A displayed at the fourth reserve display position 9Ad, the first performance sound is played from the speaker 67.

For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

Then, as the reserved amount is consumed, the change performance (change display) continues, and when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad in Figures 133 (A) to (C) moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the corresponding changing icon 9C, the change performance (change display) begins, and then, as shown in Figure 133 (D), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped number "3", resulting in a miss, and the change performance (change display) ends and the corresponding changing icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(E), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, begins to play from the speaker 67.

Then, when the change performance (change display) starts and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and start changing at high speed, as shown in FIG. 133(F), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and the name of the ally character CRA, "OARO", is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a as the name image TIL accompanied by a flash FH for only the first display period (e.g., 1 second). When the city image THG1, which is the normal background image, is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. During the first display period (for example, 1 second), even if the normal background image, city image THG1, is switched to the specific background image, space image THG2, the period during which the space image THG2 is displayed is short, and the space image THG2 may become semi-transparent, allowing the city image THG1 to be seen behind the space image THG2.

The name image TIL and the flashing light FH are positioned and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A are not covered by the name image TIL and the flashing light FH, and visibility is not impaired.

When the first display period (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 133(G), the name image TIL and the flash FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and at the same time, the specific background image, the space image THG2, displayed on the display screen 7a, gradually switches back to the normal background image, the city image THG1, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R gradually reappear on the display screen 7a, continuing the changing performance (changing display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 133(H), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "1", resulting in a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable performance (variable display) ends. At this time, the second performance sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, stops being played from the speaker 67. In other words, the output of the second performance sound stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133(I), when the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, starts to play from the speaker 67. Although the output of this second sound effect was stopped immediately before, it does not restart from the point where it had progressed immediately before it was stopped, but rather returns to the beginning and starts again.

Then, when the change performance (change display) starts and the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state and start changing at high speed, as shown in FIG. 133(J), the city image THG1, which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is switched again to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and the name of the ally character CRA, "OARO", is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a as a name image TIL accompanied by a flash FH for a second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) that is longer than the first display period. The second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) is different from the first display period (e.g., 1 second), and even if the city image THG1, which is the normal background image, is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the period during which the space image THG2 is displayed becomes longer, so that the space image THG2 does not become semi-transparent but becomes opaque, and the city image THG1 does not become visible behind the space image THG2. Here too, the name image TIL and the flashing light FH are displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the name image TIL and the flashing light FH, and visibility is not impaired.

In a state where the name image TIL and the flash FH are displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed, the third sound effect, "OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA, is played from the speaker 67. The third sound effect ends before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed. This third sound effect is the same as the content conveyed by the first sound effect ("OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA), but has a different intonation. The first sound effect is stable and calm without excessive intonation, while the third sound effect is impressive with excessive intonation, which is different from the first sound effect. In addition, the volume of the third sound effect is larger than the volume of the first sound effect, so that even if the content conveyed by the first sound effect and the third sound effect ("OARO", which is the name of the ally character CRA) is the same, the first sound effect and the third sound effect are conveyed to the player as different impressions.

When the second display period (e.g., 4 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 133 (K), the name image TIL and the flash FH disappear from the display screen 7a, and the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched from the space image THG2 to the lunar surface image THG3, which is the same specific background image, and the ally character CRA is displayed large on the display screen 7a. The ally character CRA is displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the ally character CRA, and visibility is not impaired.

Then, in Fig. 133(I), a lyric image TG of the second sound effect (i.e., the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a specific image related to the second sound effect, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA that has begun to play from the speaker 67. The lyric image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a in time with the rhythm of the second sound effect, and is composed of a single character image or multiple character images. Specifically, for example, as part of the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA, the part "One day, starting from here..." (13 hiragana characters) is replaced with the part "Soon, the winning will come..." (13 hiragana characters), and the lyrics image TG is displayed in accordance with the rhythm of the second performance sound, firstly, a lyrics image TG1 of "Soon" is displayed at the first position (left of the ally character CRA) of the display screen 7a, then a lyrics image TG2 of "Win" is displayed at the second position (upper left of the ally character CRA) of the display screen 7a, then a lyrics image TG3 of "But" is displayed at the third position (right of the ally character CRA) of the display screen 7a, and then a lyrics image TG4 of "It will come" is displayed at the fourth position (upper right of the ally character CRA) of the display screen 7a. Even if the content of the lyrics is partially replaced, since the number of characters (13 characters) is the same in hiragana, it can be displayed in accordance with the rhythm and is unlikely to give the player a sense of incongruity. This replacement content can also suggest to the player that a jackpot has occurred.

After that, when the output of the second sound effect ends, as shown in FIG. 133(L), the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched back to the normal background image, the city image THG1, and the variable effect (variable display) continues, causing a fireball to appear from the center of the display screen 7a. When the fireball is shot in an arc toward the variable icon 9C, it collides with the variable icon 9C and changes from the variable icon 9C having the ally character CRA to the variable icon 9C that is a smiling sphere having seven colors (rainbow). This ends the sound effect C.

The size of the seven-colored (rainbow) smiling sphere icon is approximately twice as large as the white spherical variable icon 9C in Figs. 133(A)-(G). When the seven-colored (rainbow) smiling sphere variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, it is highly likely that a jackpot has been reached, and various effects may continue after the sound effect C. When the left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as the same pattern, a jackpot has been reached, and then a jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of sound effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the sound effect performance A of FIG. 131, the sound effect performance B of FIG. 132, and the sound effect performance C of FIG. 133, a first starting hole 20 (ball entry hole) through which a game ball can enter, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a speaker 67 capable of outputting a plurality of types of sound effects are provided, and a first sound (the name of the ally character CRA in the sound effect performances A and C, and the name of the ally character CRB in the sound effect performance B) corresponding to a specific reserved icon 9A among the reserved icons 9A displayed in association with the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 (ball entry hole) can be output. It is possible to execute a first effect (Figure 131 (C) for sound effect performance A, Figure 132 (C) for sound effect performance B, and Figure 133 (C) for sound effect performance C), and after the first effect, a second effect (Figures 131 (I) to (K) for sound effect performance A, Figures 132 (I) to (K) for sound effect performance B, and Figures 133 (I) to (K) for sound effect performance C) in which the specific hold icon 9A is displayed as the variable icon 9C and a second sound effect (the theme song of ally character CRA in sound effect performances A and C, and the theme song of ally character CRB in sound effect performance B) can be output. According to this configuration, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 20 (ball entry hole) and the number of specific reserved icons increases as reserved icons, the first sound effect is played from the speaker, and when the specific reserved icon becomes the variable icon, the second sound effect is played from the speaker, so that a novel presentation by the first sound effect and the second sound effect can be provided to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the second sound effect may be output before the second effect in the sound effect effect A in Fig. 131, the sound effect effect B in Fig. 132, and the sound effect effect C in Fig. 133, and a third effect (Fig. 131 (E) in sound effect effect A, Fig. 132 (E) in sound effect effect B, Fig. 133 (E) in sound effect effect C) in which the output of the second sound effect is stopped before the specific reserved icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C can be executed. According to this configuration, the second sound effect that is played when the specific reserved icon becomes the variable icon may be played as a notice before the specific reserved icon becomes the variable icon, so the player's expectation of a hit increases for the performance that will be developed from now on.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effects in the sound effect effect A in Fig. 131, the sound effect effect B in Fig. 132, and the sound effect effect C in Fig. 133, a third sound effect (the name of the ally character CRA in the sound effect effects A and C, and the name of the ally character CRB in the sound effect effect B) can be output during output of the second sound effect. According to this configuration, since the third sound effect is played overlapping with the second sound effect, it is possible to provide the player with an impactful sound effect that combines the impressions of the respective sound effects, compared to when the second sound effect and the third sound effect are played separately, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effects in the sound effect effect A in Fig. 131, the sound effect effect B in Fig. 132, and the sound effect effect C in Fig. 133, a lyric image TG (specific image) related to the second sound effect can be displayed. According to this configuration, when the second sound effect is played, a specific image related to the second sound effect is displayed, so that the player can imagine the progress of the second sound effect and imagine the specific image to be displayed, and can imagine the second sound effect played by imagining the progress of the specific image, and the second sound effect and the specific image complement each other to provide the player with an attractive effect.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effects in the sound effect effect A in Fig. 131, the sound effect effect B in Fig. 132, and the sound effect effect C in Fig. 133, the lyric image TG (specific image) can be displayed in time with the rhythm of the second sound effect. With this configuration, the relationship between the second sound effect and the lyric image TG (specific image) can be emphasized in an easier-to-understand manner.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the lyric image TG (specific image) in the sound effect presentation A in Fig. 131, the sound effect presentation B in Fig. 132, and the sound effect presentation C in Fig. 133 is configured to be composed of a single or multiple character images. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of ways to express the lyric image TG (specific image), and it is also possible to individually emphasize the character images of the lyric image TG (specific image) that the player is to pay attention to.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the second effects in the sound effect effect A in Fig. 131, the sound effect effect B in Fig. 132, and the sound effect effect C in Fig. 133, a fourth effect (Fig. 131(L) in sound effect effect A, Fig. 132(L) in sound effect effect B, and Fig. 133(L) in sound effect effect C) that changes the variable icon 9C can be executed. According to this configuration, since the variable icon may change after the second sound effect ends, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the change in the variable icon while the second sound effect is being played.

[Modification]
The following are modified examples of the sound effect presentation.
[Modification 1]
The sound effect A in Fig. 131, the sound effect B in Fig. 132, and the sound effect C in Fig. 133 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state of so-called left-handed hitting. However, they may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may be performed in a game state of so-called right-handed hitting.

[Modification 2]
In the sound effect production A of Fig. 131, the sound effect production B of Fig. 132, and the sound effect production C of Fig. 133, a lyric image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a. However, instead of the lyric image TG, an image related to the second sound (the theme song of the ally character CRA in the sound effect productions A and C, and the theme song of the ally character CRB in the sound effect production B) may be used. For example, a movie or a television broadcast image or one scene thereof in which the second sound is played may be used.

[Modification 3]
In the sound effect A of Fig. 131 (I) to (K), the sound effect B of Fig. 132 (I) to (K), and the sound effect C of Fig. 133 (I) to (K), the second sound effect (the theme music of the ally character CRA in the sound effect A and C, and the theme music of the ally character CRB in the sound effect B) is played from the speaker 67 until the end, and then the variable icon 9C is changed. However, if the second sound effect ends midway, the variable icon 9C may not be changed. In this case, the variable icon 9C is a white sphere with the lowest expectation of winning.

[Modification 3]
In the sound effect performance A of FIG. 131(C), the sound effect performance B of FIG. 132(C), and the sound effect performance C of FIG. 133(C), during the variable performance (during the variable display), the game ball enters the first starting hole 20 and the specific reserved icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a by the pre-reading performance, and at this time, the first performance sound (the name of the ally character CRA in the sound effect performances A and C, and the name of the ally character CRB in the sound effect performance B) is played from the speaker 67. However, the specific reserved icon 9A may be displayed on the display screen 7a and the first performance sound may not be played from the speaker 67. In this case, the second winning sound of "squeak squeak" different from the first winning sound may be played from the speaker 67, or may not be played.

[Modification 4]
The lyrics image TG (specific image) in the sound effect A in Fig. 131(K), the sound effect B in Fig. 132(K), and the sound effect C in Fig. 133(K) is composed of a single or multiple character images and is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the lyrics image TG (specific image) may be rotated or enlarged or reduced in size. In this way, the variation in the expression method of the lyrics image TG (specific image) can be increased, and the character images of the lyrics image TG (specific image) that the player wants to focus on can be individually emphasized.

[Modification 5]
In the sound effect performance A of FIG. 131 (K), the sound effect performance B of FIG. 132 (K), and the sound effect performance C of FIG. 133 (K), the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C were displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a. In this case, when the reserved icon 9A exists, it may disappear from the display screen 7a. This is because the variable icon 9C is used as a notice (a "change performance" that changes the display mode) for the variable performance (variable display), so it does not necessarily have to be displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, the variable display position 9Cd indicates the position (display position) where the variable icon 9C is displayed, so it does not necessarily have to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the reserved display position 9Ad indicates the position (display position) where the reserved icon 9A is displayed, so it does not necessarily have to be displayed on the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the reserved icon 9A needs to be displayed on the display screen 7a to indicate the number of reserved balls that have not yet been used in a game, but as described above, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the reserved icon 9A can also be erased from the display screen 7a. This contributes to drawing attention to the lyrics image TG displayed in accordance with the rhythm of the second sound in the sound effect performance A in Fig. 131(K), the sound effect performance B in Fig. 132(K), and the sound effect performance C in Fig. 133(K).

[Modification 6]
In the sound effect performance A of FIG. 131(L), the sound effect performance B of FIG. 132(L), and the sound effect performance C of FIG. 133(L), the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C were displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad may disappear from the display screen 7a. In this case, when the reserved icon 9A exists, it may disappear from the display screen 7a. In other words, among the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A, only the variable icon 9C may be displayed on the display screen 7a. This allows the fireball to collide with the variable icon 9C when it appears from the center of the display screen 7a, thereby contributing to drawing attention to the change in the variable icon 9C. In addition, the variable display position 9Cd indicates the position (display position) where the variable icon 9C is displayed, so it does not necessarily have to be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the reserved display position 9Ad indicates the position (display position) where the reserved icon 9A is displayed, so it does not necessarily have to be displayed on the display screen 7a, so the variable display position 9Cd and the reserved display position 9Ad can be erased from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the reserved icon 9A needs to be displayed on the display screen 7a to indicate the number of reserved balls that have not yet been used for playing, but as described above, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so the reserved icon 9A can also be erased from the display screen 7a.

[Modification 7]
In the sound effect production A of Figures 131(I)-(K), the sound effect production B of Figures 132(I)-(K), and the sound effect production C of Figures 133(I)-(K), the second sound effect (the theme tune of ally character CRA in sound effect productions A and C, and the theme tune of ally character CRB in sound effect production B) is played from speaker 67. However, the second sound effect may not be played from speaker 67.

[Modification 8]
131(I)-(K), sound effect performance A of FIG. 132(I)-(K), and sound effect performance C of FIG. 133(I)-(K), while the second sound performance (the theme music of ally character CRA in sound effect performances A and C, and the theme music of ally character CRB in sound effect performance B) is being output, a third sound performance (the name of ally character CRA in sound effect performances A and C, and the name of ally character CRB in sound effect performance B) is also played from speaker 67. However, the third sound performance may not be played from speaker 67.

[Modification 9]
In the sound effect A in Fig. 131(L), the sound effect B in Fig. 132(L), and the sound effect C in Fig. 133(L), the variable icon 9C is changed. However, the variable icon 9C may not be changed. In this case, the variable icon 9C is a white sphere with the lowest expectation of winning.

[Modification 10]
In the sound effect performance A in FIG. 131(L), the sound effect performance B in FIG. 132(L), and the sound effect performance C in FIG. 133(L), the first special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 were displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. These numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, so that they can be easily distinguished from various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. In addition, they are displayed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by other images. In this embodiment, when the sound effect performance started, a specific reserved icon 9A having an ally character CRA was displayed as a specific icon at the reserved display position 9Ad. As a result, the number (number of reserved balls) displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a may be misunderstood by the player as a countdown until the specific reserved icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sub-display screen 64 (any of the sub-display screens (for example, the right sub-display screen 64R) among the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U) may display a number that represents the number of reserved balls as a numerical value. In this way, there is no risk that the number that represents the number of reserved balls is misunderstood by the player as a countdown until the specific reserved icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, and further, the number that represents the number of reserved balls as a numerical value can be made difficult to distinguish by being mixed in with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it easy to understand intuitively.

[Modification 11]
The sound effect presentation A of Figure 131, the sound effect presentation B of Figure 132, and the sound effect presentation C of Figure 133 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D4-1]
A gaming machine including an entrance for receiving a gaming ball, a display means for displaying a plurality of types of images, and a speaker for outputting a plurality of types of effect sounds,
A first effect capable of outputting a first effect sound corresponding to a specific reserved icon among reserved icons displayed in relation to the entry of a game ball into the ball entry opening;
After the first performance, a second performance in which the specific hold icon is displayed as the variable icon and a second performance sound is outputted can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-1,
The second sound effect may be output before the second effect, and a third effect may be executed in which the second sound effect is output and the output of the second sound effect is stopped before the specific hold icon becomes the variable icon.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D4-1 or D4-2,
In the second performance, a third performance sound can be further output during output of the second performance sound.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-3,
In the second performance, a specific image related to the second performance sound can be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-4,
In the second performance, the specific image can be displayed in accordance with the rhythm of the second performance sound.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-5,
The specific image is composed of a single or multiple character images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D4-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-6,
After the second performance, a fourth performance that changes the variable icon can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, lyric image effects A to C are explained using Figures 134 to 136. These lyric image effects can be executed during the performance of the changing performance of the performance pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a lyric image performance, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7.

[Lyrics image production A]
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining lyrics image effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 134(A), the change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special pattern reservation and the corresponding change image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(C), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB. In the battle performance, a win occurs when the ally character CRA wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 134 (D), (E), and (F), a lyrics display effect is executed. The lyrics display effect is an effect in which lyrics images are displayed on the display screen 7a in accordance with the music played during the battle effect. Multiple lyrics images are displayed in sequence in accordance with the progress of the music. Here, an example is shown in which the lyrics "Let's live romantically" are displayed in multiple lyrics images in sequence.

First, as shown in FIG. 134(D), the lyrics display effect (first half) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (first half), a lyrics image KG1 saying "Romantically" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Note that, since the battle effect continues, the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (E), the lyrics display performance (middle stage) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (middle stage), a lyrics image KG2 with the word "live" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. In particular, the lyrics image KG2 with the word "live" is a single-character lyrics image, and is larger than the characters that make up the lyrics image KG1 in the lyrics display performance (early stage). Furthermore, the lyrics image KG2 with the word "live" is displayed in a rotated state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (F), the lyrics display performance (late stage) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (late stage), a lyrics image KG3 saying "Let's try" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the characters constituting the lyrics image KG3 saying "Let's try" are smaller than the characters constituting the lyrics image KG2 in the lyrics display performance (middle stage).

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether the ally character CRA has won or lost. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed. If the ally character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed, and a message image saying "Defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (H), a confirmed stop performance (win) is executed. In a confirmed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a confirmed winning state. Here, the left, right, and center performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all shown to have stopped at a confirmed "4". In the case of a miss, for example, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R stop at a confirmed "4", and the center performance symbol 8C stops at a confirmed "5".

[Lyrics image production B]
135 is a diagram for explaining the lyrics image effect B. The lyrics image effect B is another example of the lyrics image effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 135(A), the change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special pattern reservation and the corresponding changing image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(C), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB. In the battle performance, a win occurs when the ally character CRA wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 135 (D), (E), and (F), a lyrics display effect is executed. The lyrics display effect is an effect in which lyrics images are displayed on the display screen 7a in accordance with the music played during the battle effect. Multiple lyrics images are displayed in sequence in accordance with the progress of the music. Here, an example is shown in which the lyrics "Let's live romantically" are displayed in multiple lyrics images in sequence.

First, as shown in FIG. 135 (D), the lyrics display performance (first half) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (first half), a lyrics image KG1 reading "Roman" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, the letters "ro" and "ma" that make up the lyrics image KG1 are transparent except for their outlines, allowing the ally character CRA to be seen as a background image. Note that, since the battle performance continues, the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(E), the lyrics display performance (middle stage) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (middle stage), a lyrics image KG2 with the words "tick" is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a. Also, a lyrics image KG3 with the words "live" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. In particular, the characters constituting the lyrics image KG2 with the words "tick" are smaller than the characters constituting the lyrics image KG1 of the lyrics display performance (first stage), and the lyrics image KG2 moves to the left side of the display screen 7a after being displayed as indicated by the arrow Y1. Also, the lyrics image KG3 with the words "live" is a single-character lyrics image and is larger than the characters constituting the lyrics image KG1 of the lyrics display performance (first stage), and the lyrics image KG3 with the words "live" rotates counterclockwise after being displayed as indicated by the arrow Y2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (F), the lyrics display performance (late stage) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (late stage), a lyrics image KG4 saying "Let's try" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the characters making up the lyrics image KG4 saying "Let's try" are larger than the characters making up the lyrics image KG2 in the lyrics display performance (middle stage) and smaller than the characters making up the lyrics image KG3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether the ally character CRA has won or lost. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed. If the ally character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed, and a message image saying "Defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. In a confirmed stop effect (win), the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a confirmed winning state. Here, the left, right, and center effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all shown to have stopped at a confirmed "4". In the case of a miss, for example, the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R stop at a confirmed "4", and the center effect pattern 8C stops at a confirmed "5".

[Lyrics image production C]
136 is a diagram for explaining the lyric image effect C. The lyric image effect C is another example of the lyric image effects A and B.
First, as shown in FIG. 136(A), a change start performance is executed. The change start performance is a performance in which the performance pattern starts to change. Here, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are shown changing at high speed. In addition, three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special pattern reservation and the corresponding change image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols temporarily stop in a reach state. Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both shown temporarily stopping at "4". In addition, three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special symbol reservation and the corresponding variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(C), a battle performance is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which a battle unfolds between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB. In the battle performance, a win occurs when the ally character CRA wins. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in Figures 136 (D), (E), and (F), a lyrics display effect is executed. The lyrics display effect is an effect in which lyrics images are displayed on the display screen 7a in accordance with the music played during the battle effect. Multiple lyrics images are displayed in sequence in accordance with the progress of the music. Here, an example is shown in which the lyrics "Let's live romantically" are displayed in multiple lyrics images in sequence.

First, as shown in FIG. 136(D), the lyrics display effect (first half) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (first half), a lyrics image KG1 saying "Romantically" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Note that, since the battle effect continues, the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(E), the lyrics display performance (middle stage) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (middle stage), the lyrics image KG2 "Let's try living" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (F), the lyrics display performance (late stage) is executed. In the lyrics display performance (late stage), a lyrics image KG3 with the message "Let's try living" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In particular, the lyrics image KG2 with the message "Let's try living" displayed in the lyrics display performance (middle stage) is gradually enlarged and displayed to become lyrics image KG3. In other words, the lyrics image KG3 is enlarged after being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether the ally character CRA has won or lost. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and a message image MSG saying "Victory" is displayed. If the ally character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed, and a message image saying "Defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (H), a confirmed stop performance (win) is executed. In a confirmed stop performance (win), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stop in a confirmed winning state. Here, the left, right, and center performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all shown to have stopped at a confirmed "4". In the case of a miss, for example, the left and right performance symbols 8L and 8R stop at a confirmed "4", and the center performance symbol 8C stops at a confirmed "5".

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of lyric images.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the lyrics "Let's live romantically" are displayed as a plurality of lyrics images, the sequentially displayed lyrics images can be displayed in various forms (FIGS. 134(D)(E)(F), 135(D)(E)(F), 136(D)(E)(F)). This configuration allows the output music to be more enjoyable, and increases the interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display the lyric image "生" in a rotated state (FIG. 134(E)). With this configuration, the display of the lyric image changes, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display the lyric images in various sizes (FIGS. 134(D)(E)(F), 135(D)(E)(F)). With this configuration, the display of the lyric images is changed, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display a lyric image consisting of one character (FIG. 134(E), FIG. 135(E)). With this configuration, the display of the lyric image can be made impactful, and the interest of the game can be increased.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display the lyric image transparently or semi-transparently so that the background image can be seen (FIG. 135(D)). With this configuration, the background image can be enjoyed along with the lyric image, which can enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the lyrics image is displayed, the appearance of the lyrics image can be changed (FIG. 135(E), FIG. 136(E)(F)). According to this configuration, the lyrics image changes after it is displayed, which can increase the interest of the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the lyrics image is displayed, it is possible to move the lyrics image (FIG. 135(E)). With this configuration, the display of the lyrics image can be made more impactful, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the lyrics image is displayed, the lyrics image can be rotated (FIG. 135(E)). This configuration allows the display of the lyrics image to have an impact, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Effect 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the lyrics image is displayed, the size of the lyrics image can be changed (FIGS. 136(E) and 136(F)). This configuration allows the display of the lyrics image to have more impact, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Modification]
The following are modified examples of the lyrics image presentation.
[Modification 1]
Although not specifically mentioned above, the display color of the lyrics image may be changed after the lyrics image is displayed. For example, it is possible to change the display color of the lyrics image in accordance with the output of the music.

[Modification 2]
While an example has been given above in which the displayed lyrics image is rotated around the front-to-back axis (Figure 135 (E)), it would also be possible to prepare a three-dimensional lyrics image and rotate it around the up-down or left-right axis, for example.

[Modification 3]
Although the above has been given as an example of a presentation for the second special chart reservation, the same may also be used for a presentation for the first special chart reservation.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect D5-1]
A gaming machine that displays lyrics of a song as a plurality of lyrics images in accordance with the output of the song,
When the plurality of lyrics images are sequentially displayed, a display mode effect can be executed in which the sequentially displayed lyrics images are displayed in various modes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D5-1,
The aspect display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyrics image in a rotated state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D5-1 or D5-2,
The aspect display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyric image in various sizes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-3,
The aspect display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyrics image consisting of one character.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-4,
The aspect display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyric image transparently or semi-transparently so that a background image can be seen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-6]
A gaming machine that displays lyrics of a song as a plurality of lyrics images in accordance with the output of the song,
When the plurality of lyrics images are sequentially displayed, after the lyrics images are displayed, a manner change effect can be executed to change the manner of the lyrics images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-5,
When the plurality of lyrics images are sequentially displayed, after the lyrics images are displayed, a manner change effect can be executed to change the manner of the lyrics images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-8]
A gaming machine according to aspect D5-6 or D5-7,
The aspect change effect includes an effect of moving the lyric image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-9]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-8,
The aspect change effect includes an effect of rotating the lyric image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-10]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-9,
The aspect change effect includes an effect of changing the size of the lyrics image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect D5-11]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-10,
The aspect change effect includes an effect of changing a display color of the lyric image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific area variable effects A to C are explained below using Figures 137 to 139. In Figures 137 to 139, for example, the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, and other movable parts arranged around the front (forward) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing.

This specific area variable performance is performed during the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a specific area variable performance is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light emission mode of the left movable role 14L and right movable role 14R of the first movable role 14 provided on the game board 2.

Here, we will first explain specific area variable performance A, then specific area variable performance B, and finally specific area variable performance C.

[Specific area variable performance A]
The specific area variable performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 137. Fig. 137 is a diagram for explaining the specific area variable performance A. The specific area variable performance A is performed during a variable performance (during a variable display) by a decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 137(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left three-dimensional decorative pattern 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative pattern 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each of the variable areas extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, appearing as a temporary stop, or as a stopped display (temporarily displayed, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed stationary, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icon is displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. Note that, for ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change performance (change display) starts in FIG. 137(A), a flash FH is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 137(B). At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8L during the change performance (change display) disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the change display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A also disappear from the display screen 7a. In other words, of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8L, the change display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A, only the change icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. The flash FH is arranged and displayed behind the change icon 9C, so that the change icon 9C is not covered by the flash FH and visibility is not impaired.

After that, when the flash FH gradually disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 137(C), in the center of the display screen 7a, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R each advance (move) from their home positions toward (approaching each other) an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advance position (deployed position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative member (combined part) having a ring shape, consisting of the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R.

When the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring becomes an area having a circular shape (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area"). The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the variable icon 9C is maintained in a state displayed on the display screen 7a.

When a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the ally character CRA was displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R move away from each other, with the left movable part 14L retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (forward) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable part 14R retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (forward) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, suddenly, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, with the number "1" displayed, are displayed large, approaching from the rear to the front of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 137(D), they are displayed as provisional stops slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in their respective variable areas, forming a reach. At this time, the variable icon 9C remains displayed on the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative pattern 8C remains disappeared from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(E), when the left decorative pattern 8L of the tentatively stopped number "1" starts to move downward in its own variable region, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" appears from behind the left decorative pattern 8L, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" starts to move upward in its own variable region. On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R of the tentatively stopped number "1" starts to move upward in its own variable region, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" appears from behind the right decorative pattern 8R, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" starts to move downward in its own variable region.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137(F), when the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" has moved downward to its own variable region and is temporarily stopped and displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" has moved upward to its own variable region and is temporarily stopped and displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a, they are smaller (e.g., about one size smaller) than the normal size when they appear alone (hereinafter referred to as "normal size"). On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" has moved upward to its own variable region and is temporarily stopped and displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" has moved downward to its own variable region and is temporarily stopped and displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a, they are smaller (e.g., about one size smaller) than the normal size, like the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2". As a result, a first reach is formed on a line rising to the right by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" temporarily displayed in the lower left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" temporarily displayed in the upper right, and a second reach is formed on a line falling to the right by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily displayed in the upper left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily displayed in the lower right, resulting in a double reach.

In FIG. 137(F), a double reach is formed by two left decorative patterns 8L and two right decorative patterns 8R, and if the two left decorative patterns 8L and the two right decorative patterns 8R are each considered as vertex images, a first specific area is formed in a square shape connecting the four vertex images. In other words, a first specific area surrounded by the four vertex images is formed. When the first specific area is formed, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed again on the display screen 7a, and a variable performance (variable display) is performed in the first specific area. Since the middle decorative pattern 8C is rapidly varying, it is viewed as an unclear image in the first specific area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137(G), when the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily displayed in the upper left jumps out of its own variable area and starts moving toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a in an arc, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" appears from behind the left decorative pattern 8L, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" remains in place and is displayed temporarily stopped. On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily displayed in the lower right jumps out of its own variable area and starts moving toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in an arc, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" appears from behind the right decorative pattern 8R, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" remains in place and is displayed temporarily stopped.

In FIG. 137(G), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily displayed in the upper left corner is switched to the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily displayed in the lower right corner is switched to the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3". If the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily displayed in the upper left corner, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" temporarily displayed in the lower left corner, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily displayed in the lower right corner, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" temporarily displayed in the upper right corner are taken as vertex images, a second specific area having a rectangular shape is formed by connecting the four vertex images. In other words, a first specific area surrounded by the four vertex images is formed. This second specific area is the same size as the first specific area.

The left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left jumps out of its own variable area and starts to move in an arc toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right jumps out of its own variable area and starts to move in an arc toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, so if the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" that has started to move and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that has started to move are included in the second specific area, the size of the second specific area will be larger than the size of the first specific area.

Because the changing performance (changing display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is being performed in the first specific area, the changing performance (changing display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues in the second specific area as well. Because the middle decorative pattern 8C is changing at high speed, it is viewed as an unclear image even in the second specific area. Note that, although the changing performance (changing display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C continues in the second specific area, instead of this, the middle decorative pattern 8C may be erased from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in Fig. 137(H), when the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" jumps out of its own variable area and completes its movement to the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the left side, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower left are smaller than their normal size (for example, about twice as small). In other words, they are smaller than when a double reach occurred. On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" jumps out of its own variable area and moves to the vicinity of the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, and is temporarily stopped near the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily stopped at the lower right, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped near the center of the right side, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" temporarily stopped at the upper right are smaller than normal (for example, about twice as small). In other words, they are smaller than when a double reach occurs. As a result, a first reach is formed on a line rising to the right by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" temporarily displayed in the lower left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" temporarily displayed in the upper right, a second reach is formed on a line falling to the right by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily displayed in the upper left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily displayed in the lower right, and a third reach is formed on a horizontal line by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily displayed near the center of the left side and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily displayed near the center of the right side, resulting in a triple reach.

In Fig. 137(H), a triple reach is formed by three left decorative symbols 8L and three right decorative symbols 8R, and when the three left decorative symbols 8L and the three right decorative symbols 8R are each regarded as a vertex image, a hexagonal third specific area is formed by connecting the six vertex images. In other words, a third specific area surrounded by the six vertex images is formed. Comparing the sizes of the first specific area (second specific area) and the third specific area, in FIG. 137(G), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" displayed as a temporary stop jumps out of its own variable area and starts moving toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a in an arc-like manner, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" appears from behind this left decorative pattern 8L, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" remains in place and is displayed as a temporary stop, while the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" displayed as a temporary stop jumps out of its own variable area and starts moving toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in an arc-like manner, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" appears from behind this right decorative pattern 8R, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" remains in place and is displayed as a temporary stop, so that the size of the third specific area is larger than the size of the first specific area (second specific area). Although the third specific region has a hexagonal shape when the six vertex images are connected, in reality it has an almost circular shape (a shape similar to a circle) that passes through the six vertex images.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(I), the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" appears as a clear image and is temporarily stopped in a display mode in which it grows larger and approaches from the rear to the front in the center of the display screen 7a in the third specific area. The size of the clear image temporarily stopped is larger than the normal size (for example, about twice as large as the normal size). Then, the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(J), the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "2" appears as a clear image and is temporarily stopped in a display mode in which it grows larger and approaches from the rear to the front in the center of the display screen 7a in the third specific area. The size of the clear image temporarily stopped is larger than the normal size (for example, about twice as large as the normal size). Then, the temporarily stopped central decorative pattern 8C of the number "2" moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 137(K), the central decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" appears as a clear image in a display mode in which it grows larger and approaches from the rear to the front in the center of the display screen 7a within the third specific area, and is temporarily stopped and displayed. The size of the clear image temporarily stopped and displayed is larger than the normal size (for example, about twice as large as the normal size).

When the center decorative pattern 8C of the number "3" that is temporarily stopped moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a, it is a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. This ends the specific area variable performance A. Then, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable performance (variable display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

As shown in FIG. 137(L) following FIG. 137(K), in the center of the display screen 7a, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R advance (move) again from their home positions toward the advance position (approaching each other) in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advance position (deployed position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable part 14R, combine to form one decorative member (combined part) having a ring shape made up of the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R. At this time, the three left decorative patterns 8L, the three right decorative patterns 8R, and the center decorative pattern 8C disappear from the display screen 7a, while the variable icon 9C remains displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, an ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 that corresponds to the circular area formed within the ring. The appearance of the ally character CRA displayed on the left movable part 14L, the right movable part 14R, and the circular area informs the player that a jackpot has been won.

When a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the ally character CRA was displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R move away from each other, with the left movable part 14L retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (forward) of the display screen 7a to its retreated position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable part 14R retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (forward) of the display screen 7a to its retreated position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a. This ends the specific area variable performance A.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137(M), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are larger than their normal size (for example, about twice as large as their normal size) and are arranged in the center of each variable area, and the number "3" is displayed temporarily stopped along a horizontal line. At this time, if the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a number different from the number "3", it is a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad move to the variable display position 9Cd and become the variable icon 9C, and a variable performance (variable display) is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Following FIG. 137(M), when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R stop and display the number "3", a jackpot is generated and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. A jackpot game (jackpot performance) starts, and when it ends, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable performance (variable display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

In Fig. 137(H), after a triple reach is formed, a quadruple reach may be formed. In this case, when the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left corner jumps out of its own variable area and starts moving in an arc toward the upper center of the left side of the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" appears from behind the left decorative pattern 8L, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" remains in place and is temporarily stopped, and the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the left side starts moving toward the lower center of the left side. Meanwhile, when the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" that is temporarily stopped at the bottom right jumps out of its own variable area and starts moving in an arc toward the lower center of the right side of the display screen 7a, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" appears from behind this right decorative pattern 8R, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" remains in place and is temporarily stopped, and the number "2" that is temporarily stopped near the center of the right side starts moving toward the upper center of the right side.

When the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" jumps out of its own variable area and moves to the upper center of the left side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" moves to the lower center of the left side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped. In this state, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" temporarily stopped at the upper left, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped at the upper center of the left side, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped at the lower center of the left side, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" temporarily stopped at the lower left are smaller than their normal size (for example, about two and a half times smaller). In other words, they are smaller than when a triple reach is reached. On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" jumps out of its own variable area and moves to the lower center of the right side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" moves to the upper center of the right side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped. In this state, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" temporarily stopped at the lower right, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily stopped at the lower center of the right side, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily stopped at the upper center of the right side, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" temporarily stopped at the upper right are smaller than the size in normal times (for example, about half a turn smaller). In other words, they are smaller than when a triple reach occurs. As a result, a first reach is formed on a first upward-right line made up of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "1" temporarily displayed at the lower left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" temporarily displayed at the upper right; a second reach is formed on a first downward-right line made up of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" temporarily displayed at the upper left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" temporarily displayed at the lower right; a third reach is formed on a second upward-right line made up of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily displayed near the lower center of the left side and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily displayed near the upper center of the right side; and a fourth reach is formed on a second downward-right line made up of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily displayed near the upper center of the left side and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily displayed near the lower center of the right side, resulting in a quadruple reach.

In this way, a quadruple reach is formed by four left decorative patterns 8L and four right decorative patterns 8R, and when the four left decorative patterns 8L and four right decorative patterns 8R are each regarded as a vertex image, an octagonal fourth specific area is formed by connecting the eight vertex images. In other words, a fourth specific area surrounded by the eight vertex images is formed. When comparing the size of this fourth specific area with the third specific area formed by the triple reach described above, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" displayed as a temporary stop jumps out of its own variable area and starts moving toward the upper center of the left side of the display screen 7a in an arc, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" appears from behind this left decorative pattern 8L, and the number "2" displayed as a temporary stop near the center of the left side starts moving toward the lower center of the left side, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" remains in place and is displayed as a temporary stop. Meanwhile, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" that is temporarily stopped starts moving out of its own variable area in an arc toward the lower center of the right side of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" appears from behind this right decorative pattern 8R, the number "2" that is temporarily stopped near the center of the right side starts moving toward the upper center of the right side, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" stays in place and is temporarily stopped, so the size of the fourth specific area is larger than the size of the third specific area. In other words, the sizes of the first specific area (second specific area) formed by the double reach, the third specific area formed by the triple reach, and the fourth specific area formed by the quadruple reach increase in order.

The likelihood of winning increases in the order of double reach, triple reach, and quadruple reach. In other words, a double reach has four vertex images, a triple reach has six vertex images, and a quadruple reach has eight vertex images, so the more vertex images there are, the higher the likelihood of winning.

In addition, in the fourth specific area formed by the quadruple reach, a variable performance (variable display) is performed using the middle decorative pattern 8C shown in Figures 137 (I) to (K), and a performance is performed using the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R shown in Figure 137 (L).

[Specific area variable performance B]
Next, the specific area variable performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 138. Fig. 138 is a diagram for explaining the specific area variable performance B. The specific area variable performance B is performed during the variable performance (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 138(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left three-dimensional decorative pattern 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative pattern 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each of the variable areas extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, and changes at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and is displayed as temporarily stopped, or as stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. Note that, for ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts in FIG. 138(A), three circular performance images EG (hereinafter referred to as "round performance images EG") appear in a display mode in which they invade the display screen 7a from the periphery into the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 138(B), and are displayed temporarily stopped and positioned on the right side of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other.

The three round performance images EG are maintained in their original positions and each begins to move counterclockwise toward the position of the adjacent round performance image EG a predetermined number of times (e.g., two to three times), and as shown in FIG. 138(C), a straight line RG is formed connecting the three vertex images, with the three round performance images EG acting as vertex images. When the three round performance images EG have moved the predetermined number of times and are temporarily stopped and displayed, the three round performance images EG emit light once in unison. As a result, a first specific area having a triangular shape is formed by the three straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the three round performance images EG.

Just before the three circular performance images EG light up simultaneously in the first specific area, the ally character CRA appears as an unclear image (an unfocused image (out-of-focus image)). The straight line RG is blue in color, and when it is a clear image (an in-focus image (not out-of-focus image)), it is possible to easily distinguish the boundary between the inside and outside of the first specific area. In contrast, the straight line RG is blue in color, and when it is an unclear image (an unfocused image (out-of-focus image)), it is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted on the first specific area from the straight line RG, which is an unclear image.

After that, when the three circular effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the unclear images of the ally character CRA and the three straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first specific area disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(D), four triangular effect images EG (hereinafter referred to as "triangular effect images EG") appear in a display mode in which they invade the display screen 7a from the periphery into the display screen 7a, and are displayed temporarily stopped on the right side of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other. The size of the triangular effect images EG is larger than the size of the round effect images EG, which can contribute to heightening the player's sense of anticipation for a win.

The four triangular effect images EG are maintained in their original positions, and each starts moving clockwise a predetermined number of times (for example, two to three times) toward the position of the adjacent triangular effect image EG. As shown in FIG. 138(E), the four triangular effect images EG are apex images, and a straight line RG is formed connecting the four apex images. When the four triangular effect images EG have moved a predetermined number of times and are temporarily stopped, the four triangular effect images EG emit light once. This forms a second specific area having a square shape by the four straight lines RG connecting the apex images of the four triangular effect images EG. The size of the second specific area is larger than the size of the first specific area formed in FIG. 138(C). This also contributes to increasing the player's sense of expectation for a win.

In the second specific area, just before the four triangular effect images EG light up all at once, the ally character CRA appears again as an unclear image (unfocused image (out-of-focus image)). The straight line RG has a green color, and when it is a clear image (in-focus image (not out-of-focus image)), the boundary between the inside and outside of the second specific area can be made clear. In contrast, when the straight line RG has a green color and it is an unclear image (unfocused image (out-of-focus image)), a display mode can be realized in which some influence is exerted from the straight line RG, which is an unclear image, into the second specific area. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is green instead of blue in FIG. 138(C) can also contribute to increasing the player's anticipation of a win.

After that, when the four triangular effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the unclear images of the ally character CRA and the four straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second specific area disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 138(F), five rectangular effect images EG (hereinafter referred to as "rectangular effect images EG") appear in a display mode in which they invade the display screen 7a from the periphery into the display screen 7a, and are displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the display screen 7a, arranged so as not to overlap each other. The size of the rectangular effect images EG is larger than the size of the triangular effect images EG, which can contribute to heightening the player's sense of anticipation for a win.

The five square effect images EG are maintained in their original positions, and each starts to move counterclockwise toward the position of the adjacent square effect image EG a predetermined number of times (for example, two to three times). As shown in FIG. 138(G), the five square effect images EG are apex images, and a straight line RG is formed connecting the five apex images. When the five square effect images EG have moved a predetermined number of times and are temporarily stopped and displayed, the five square effect images EG emit light all at once. This forms a third specific area having a pentagonal shape by the five straight lines RG connecting the apex images of the five square effect images EG. The size of the third specific area is larger than the size of the second specific area formed in FIG. 138(E). This also contributes to increasing the player's sense of expectation for a win.

In this embodiment, there are three vertex images in Figures 138(B) and (C), four vertex images in Figures 138(D) and (E), and five vertex images in Figures 138(F) and (G). As the number of vertex images increases, the sizes of the first to third specific regions become larger.

Just before the five square effect images EG light up all at once in the third specific area, the ally character CRA appears again as an unclear image (unfocused image (out-of-focus image)). The straight line RG has a red color, and when it is a clear image (in-focus image (not out-of-focus image)), the boundary between the inside and outside of the third specific area can be made clear. In contrast, the straight line RG has a green color, and when it is an unclear image (unfocused image (out-of-focus image)), a display mode can be realized in which some influence is exerted from the straight line RG, which is an unclear image, into the third specific area. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is red instead of green in FIG. 138(E) can also contribute to further increasing the player's anticipation of a win.

After that, when the five square effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the unclear images of the ally character CRA and the five straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the third specific area disappears. This ends the specific area variable effect B.

After that, as shown in FIG. 138(H), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "6", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "5", resulting in a miss, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Specific area variable performance C]
Next, the specific area variable performance C will be described with reference to Fig. 139. Fig. 139 is a diagram for explaining the specific area variable performance C. The specific area variable performance C is performed during the variable performance (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 139(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left three-dimensional decorative pattern 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative pattern 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each of the variable areas extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, and changes at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, and is displayed as temporarily stopped, or as stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed as temporarily stopped, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icons are displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. Note that, for ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) starts in FIG. 139(A), three circular performance images EG (hereinafter referred to as "round performance images EG") appear in a display mode in which they invade the display screen 7a from the periphery into the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 139(B), and are displayed temporarily stopped and positioned on the right side of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other.

The three round performance images EG are maintained in their original positions and each begins to move counterclockwise toward the position of the adjacent round performance image EG a predetermined number of times (e.g., two to three times), and as shown in FIG. 139(C), a straight line RG is formed connecting the three vertex images, with the three round performance images EG acting as vertex images. When the three round performance images EG have moved the predetermined number of times and are temporarily stopped and displayed, the three round performance images EG emit light once at the same time. As a result, a first specific area having a triangular shape is formed by the three straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the three round performance images EG.

Just before the three circular performance images EG light up simultaneously in the first specific area, the ally character CRA appears as an unclear image (an unfocused image (out-of-focus image)). The straight line RG is blue in color, and when it is a clear image (an in-focus image (not out-of-focus image)), it is possible to easily distinguish the boundary between the inside and outside of the first specific area. In contrast, the straight line RG is blue in color, and when it is an unclear image (an unfocused image (out-of-focus image)), it is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted on the first specific area from the straight line RG, which is an unclear image.

After that, when the three circular effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the unclear images of the ally character CRA and the three straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first specific area disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(D), four triangular effect images EG (hereinafter referred to as "triangular effect images EG") appear in a display mode that invades the display screen 7a from the periphery into the display screen 7a, and are displayed temporarily stopped on the right side of the display screen 7a, arranged so as not to overlap each other. The size of the triangular effect images EG is larger than the size of the round effect images EG, which can contribute to heightening the player's sense of anticipation of a win.

The four triangular effect images EG are maintained in their original positions, and each starts moving clockwise a predetermined number of times (for example, two to three times) toward the position of the adjacent triangular effect image EG. As shown in FIG. 139(E), the four triangular effect images EG are apex images, and a straight line RG is formed connecting the four apex images. When the four triangular effect images EG have moved a predetermined number of times and are temporarily stopped, the four triangular effect images EG emit light once. This forms a second specific area having a square shape by the four straight lines RG connecting the apex images of the four triangular effect images EG. The size of the second specific area is larger than the size of the first specific area formed in FIG. 139(C). This also contributes to increasing the player's sense of expectation for a win.

In the second specific area, just before the four triangular effect images EG light up all at once, the ally character CRA appears again as an unclear image (unfocused image (out-of-focus image)). The straight line RG has a green color, and when it is a clear image (in-focus image (not out-of-focus image)), the boundary between the inside and outside of the second specific area can be made clear. In contrast, when the straight line RG has a green color and it is an unclear image (unfocused image (out-of-focus image)), a display mode can be realized in which some influence is exerted from the straight line RG, which is an unclear image, into the second specific area. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is green instead of blue in FIG. 139(C) can also contribute to increasing the player's anticipation of a win.

After that, when the four triangular effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the unclear images of the ally character CRA and the four straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second specific area disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(F), five rectangular effect images EG (hereinafter referred to as "rectangular effect images EG") appear in a display mode in which they invade the display screen 7a from the periphery into the display screen 7a, and are displayed temporarily stopped in the center of the display screen 7a, arranged so as not to overlap each other. The size of the rectangular effect images EG is larger than the size of the triangular effect images EG, which can contribute to heightening the player's sense of anticipation of a win.

The five square effect images EG are maintained in their original positions, and each starts to move counterclockwise toward the position of the adjacent square effect image EG a predetermined number of times (for example, two to three times). As shown in FIG. 139(G), the five square effect images EG are apex images, and a straight line RG is formed connecting the five apex images. When the five square effect images EG have moved a predetermined number of times and are temporarily stopped, the five square effect images EG emit light once. This forms a third specific area having a pentagonal shape by the five straight lines RG connecting the apex images of the five square effect images EG. The size of the third specific area is larger than the size of the second specific area formed in FIG. 139(E). This also contributes to increasing the player's sense of expectation for a win.

In this embodiment, there are three vertex images in Figures 139(B) and (C), four vertex images in Figures 139(D) and (E), and five vertex images in Figures 139(F) and (G). As the number of vertex images increases, the sizes of the first to third specific regions become larger.

Just before the five square effect images EG light up all at once in the third specific area, the ally character CRA appears again as an unclear image (unfocused image (out-of-focus image)). The straight line RG has a red color, and when it is a clear image (in-focus image (not out-of-focus image)), the boundary between the inside and outside of the third specific area can be made clear. In contrast, the straight line RG has a green color, and when it is an unclear image (unfocused image (out-of-focus image)), a display mode can be realized in which some influence is exerted from the straight line RG, which is an unclear image, into the third specific area. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is red instead of green in FIG. 139 (E) can also contribute to further increasing the player's anticipation of a win.

After that, the five square effect images EG do not simply disappear from the display screen 7a, but rather fly away in all directions toward the outside of the display screen 7a, changing the length and direction of the straight line RG and changing the shape of the third specific area. When the five square effect images EG fly away, as shown in FIG. 139(H), the five straight lines RG that formed the third specific area change into a single line RG that is almost circular (or has a shape similar to a circle), and a fourth specific area having an almost circular shape (or has a shape similar to a circle) is formed. The size of the fourth specific area is larger than the size of the third specific area formed in FIG. 139(G), which can contribute to further increasing the player's sense of anticipation of a win.

In the fourth specific area, the ally character CRA appears as a clear image (an in-focus image (not out of focus)). The color of the straight line RG is retained as is and is red, but it may also be yellow (gold). This can contribute to further increasing the player's sense of anticipation for a win.

After that, the clear image of the ally character CRA and the nearly circular (similar to a circular) line RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the fourth specific area disappears. As shown in FIG. 139(I), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the number "6", and before the right decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the number "1", one of the five square effect images EG that flew off in all directions becomes larger (about four times larger than when it was displayed in FIG. 139(F) and (G)) and appears near the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a. Then, when the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "1", lightning is emitted from the square effect image EG to the right decorative pattern 8R, and the right decorative pattern 8R is forcibly changed (changed) and temporarily stopped at the number "6", forming a reach. This ends the specific area variable effect C.

Then, as shown in FIG. 139(K), a battle performance begins. In the battle performance, two characters (ally character CRA and enemy character CRB) fight, and the expectation of a big win is high. In the battle performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C remains displayed. While the battle performance is being performed, the sword of the ally character CRA is swung down, and the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical shape to a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C.

Then, as shown in FIG. 139(L), in the center of the display screen 7a, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R each advance (move) again from their home positions toward (approaching each other) an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advance position (deployed position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative member (combined part) having a ring shape made up of the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R. At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, an ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 that corresponds to the circular area formed within the ring. The appearance of the ally character CRA displayed on the left movable part 14L, the right movable part 14R, and the circular area informs the player that a jackpot has been won.

When a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the ally character CRA was displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R move away from each other, with the left movable part 14L retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (forward) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable part 14R retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (forward) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 139(M), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are placed at the center of each variable area, and the number "6" is displayed in a row on a horizontal line as a temporary stop. At this time, if the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop with a number other than the number "6" and is displayed as a stop, it is a miss. Then, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable performance (variable display) is performed with the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Following FIG. 139(M), if the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R stop and display the number "6", a jackpot will be generated. A jackpot game (jackpot performance) will start, and when it ends, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A will be displayed again on the display screen 7a, and when the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, a variable performance (variable display) will be performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of specific area variable effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable performance A of Figure 137, the specific area variable performance B of Figure 138, and the specific area variable performance C of Figure 139, an image display device 7 (display means) is provided that can display multiple types of images, and it is possible to execute a first performance (Figures 137 (E) to (K) for specific area variable performance A, Figures 138 (C), (E), and (G) for specific area variable performance B, and Figures 139 (C), (E), (G), and (H) for specific area variable performance C) that can display a middle decorative pattern 8C or an ally character CRA (second performance image) in the first specific area to third specific area (specific area) surrounded by multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images). According to this configuration, the first to third specific regions (specific regions) surrounded by a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first performance images) are formed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second performance image) is displayed in the first to third specific regions (specific regions) thus formed, thereby providing the player with a novel performance that has never been seen before. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable performance A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable performance B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable performance C of FIG. 139, the size of the first specific area to the third specific area (specific area) is increased by increasing the number of the multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images). Even if the number of the multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images) is the same, if the positions at which the multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images) are arranged are different, the size of the specific area may become smaller or larger. Therefore, even if the number of the multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images) increases, the size of the specific area may become smaller, which may reduce the expectation for the performance. Therefore, by making the size of the specific area larger as the number of the multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images) increases, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the decrease in the expectation for the performance.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable performance A in Fig. 137, the specific area variable performance B in Fig. 138, and the specific area variable performance C in Fig. 139, the expectation of a win increases as the number of vertex images (the first performance images) increases. With this configuration, the expectation of a win can be easily emphasized by drawing attention to the number of vertex images (the first performance images).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the specific area variable performance A of Figure 137, the specific area variable performance B of Figure 138, and the specific area variable performance C of Figure 139 (Figures 137 (F) to (K) for specific area variable performance A, Figures 138 (C), (E), (G) for specific area variable performance B, and Figures 139 (C), (E), (G) for specific area variable performance C), it is possible to display the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second performance image) unclearly (unfocused image (out-of-focus image)) in the first specific area to the third specific area (specific area). According to this configuration, the intermediate decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second performance image) can be displayed as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) in the first specific area to the third specific area (specific area) to draw the player's attention, so that the player can imagine what the unclear image is like, and when other performances are performed afterwards, the player can find for himself the relationship or pattern between the unclear image and the other performances.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the specific area variable performance A of Figure 137 and the specific area variable performance C of Figure 139 (Figures 137 (H) to (K) for specific area variable performance A, and Figure 139 (H) for specific area variable performance C), after being surrounded by multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images), when the specific area (the third specific area in specific area variable performance A, and the fourth specific area in specific area variable performance C) is formed into a shape similar to a circle, the middle decorative pattern 8C or ally character CRA (second performance image) can be clearly displayed (an in-focus image (not out-of-focus image)) in the specific area. According to this configuration, when a specific area surrounded by multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images) is formed as a polygonal area, it is then formed into a shape similar to a circle, which allows the player to focus on the change from a straight line to a smooth curve caused by the polygon, making it easier for the player to recognize the image change of the central decorative pattern 8C or ally character CRA (second performance image) displayed in the specific area (for example, a change from an unclear image (an unfocused image (a blurry image)) to a clear image (a focused image (a non-blurry image)).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the specific area variable performance A in FIG. 137, the specific area variable performance B in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable performance C in FIG. 139 (FIGS. 137(E) and (G) in the specific area variable performance A, FIG. 138(B), (D), and (F) in the specific area variable performance B, and FIG. 139(B), (D), and (F) in the specific area variable performance C), the multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images) can be moved in a predetermined direction and then temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, by moving in a predetermined direction after the multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images) appear, the first to third specific areas (specific areas) surrounded by the multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images) can be suggested.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable performance A of FIG. 137 and the specific area variable performance C of FIG. 139, the first movable role 14 (movable body) that can appear on the front side of the image display device 7 (display means) is provided, and after the first performance (FIGS. 137(E)-(K) in the specific area variable performance A, and FIGS. 139(C), (E), (G), (H) in the specific area variable performance C), a second performance (FIG. 137(L) in the specific area variable performance A, and FIG. 139(L) in the specific area variable performance C) in which a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first performance images) and a middle decorative pattern 8C or an ally character CRA (a second performance image) are erased and the movable body is operated can be executed. According to this configuration, the operation of the first movable role 14 (movable body), that is, the appearance of the left movable role 14L, the right movable role 14R, and the ally character CRA displayed in the circular area, can inform the player that it is a big win.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first presentation in the specific area variable presentation B of Figure 138 and the specific area variable presentation C of Figure 139 (Figures 138(C), (E), (G) in the specific area variable presentation B, and Figure 139((C), (E)), (G) in the specific area variable presentation C), a straight line RG (line) connecting the vertex images (multiple first presentation images) can be displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the first to third specific areas (specific areas) formed by the straight line RG (line) connecting the vertex images (multiple first presentation images) can be clearly emphasized.

[Effect 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the specific area variable performance B of Fig. 138 and the specific area variable performance C of Fig. 139 (Figs. 138(D)-(G) in the specific area variable performance B, and Figs. 139(B)-(G) in the specific area variable performance C), the number of corners of the polygon increases as the number of vertex images (plurality of first performance images) increases. In Fig. 138(C) in the specific area variable performance B, the polygon has three corners, in Fig. 138(E) in the specific area variable performance B, the polygon has four corners, and in Fig. 138(G) in the specific area variable performance B, the polygon has five corners, so that the number of corners of the polygon increases as the number of vertex images (plurality of first performance images) increases. In addition, in Fig. 139(C) in the specific area variable performance C, the polygon has three corners, in Fig. 139(E) in the specific area variable performance C, the polygon has four corners, and in Fig. 139(G) in the specific area variable performance C, the polygon has five corners, and the number of vertex images (plurality of first performance images) increases, increasing the number of vertex images (plurality of first performance images). With this configuration, the number of corners of the polygon increases as the number of vertex images (plurality of first performance images) increases, so that it is possible to draw attention to the number of corners of the polygon.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of specific area variable effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the specific area variable performance A in Fig. 137, the specific area variable performance B in Fig. 138, and the specific area variable performance C in Fig. 139, these are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, these are performed in a game state called left-handed hitting. However, these may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, these may be performed in a game state called right-handed hitting.

[Modification 2]
In the first performance in the specific area variable performance B of FIG. 138 and the specific area variable performance C of FIG. 139 (FIGS. 138(C), (E), (G) for the specific area variable performance B, and FIG. 139(C), (E), (G) for the specific area variable performance C), the ally character CRA (second performance image) was displayed in the first specific area to the third specific area (specific area) in an unclear manner (unfocused image (out-of-focus image)). However, other images may be used instead of the ally character CRA. For example, when there are multiple enemy characters, the ally character CRA may be displayed in the first specific area to the third specific area in a step-up display mode based on the expectation of a hit set for the enemy character fighting the ally character CRA. Also, instead of the ally character CRA, an image of an icon that can change the variable icon 9C, an image of an icon that can change the reserved icon 9A, an image of an icon that predicts the occurrence of a pseudo consecutive hit, or an image of an icon that predicts the occurrence of a preview performance may be used. This will allow for greater variety in the presentation.

[Modification 3]
In the first performance in the specific area variable performance A of Figure 137, the specific area variable performance B of Figure 138, and the specific area variable performance C of Figure 139 (Figures 137 (F) to (K) for specific area variable performance A, Figures 138 (C), (E), and (G) for specific area variable performance B, and Figures 139 (C), (E), and (G) for specific area variable performance C), the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second performance image) is displayed unclearly (unfocused image (out-of-focus image)) in the first to third specific areas (specific areas). However, a specific portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second performance image) may be unclear (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) and other portions may be clear (in-focus image (not out-of-focus image)). In addition, the sub-control board 90 may independently perform a lottery and, if a lottery is won, the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second performance image) may be made clear. In this way, the variety of performances can be further increased.

[Modification 4]
In the first performance in the specific area variable performance A of Figure 137 and the specific area variable performance C of Figure 139 (Figures 137 (H) to (K) for specific area variable performance A, and Figure 139 (H) for specific area variable performance C), when the specific area (the third specific area in specific area variable performance A, the fourth specific area in specific area variable performance C) is formed into a shape similar to a circle after being surrounded by multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images), the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second performance image) is displayed clearly (in-focus image (not out-of-focus image)) in the specific area. However, a specific portion of the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second performance image) may be made unclear (out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) and other portions may be made clear (in-focus image (not out-of-focus image)). In addition, the sub-control board 90 may independently perform a lottery and, if a lottery is won, make the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second performance image) unclear. In this way, the variety of performances can be further increased.

[Modification 5]
In the first performance of the specific area variable performance A of Figure 137, the specific area variable performance B of Figure 138 and the specific area variable performance C of Figure 139 (Figures 137(E) and (G) for specific area variable performance A, Figures 138(B), (D) and (F) for specific area variable performance B, and Figures 139(B), (D) and (F) for specific area variable performance C), multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images) are moved in a predetermined direction and then temporarily stopped and displayed. However, the multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images) may also be displayed temporarily stopped as they are after appearing on the display screen 7a without being moved in the predetermined direction. This can further increase the variety of performances. The expected direction may be one in which the ball moves in one direction, one in which the ball moves in one direction and then moves back in the opposite direction, a clockwise or counterclockwise rotation (a clockwise rotation and then counterclockwise rotation, or a counterclockwise rotation and then clockwise rotation), a zigzag movement, or a combination of these. Note that the sub-control board 90 independently performs a lottery, and if the ball is selected, the ball can move in a predetermined direction and then be displayed as a temporary stop, or if the ball is not selected, the ball can be displayed as a temporary stop.

[Modification 6]
In the specific area variable performance A of Figure 137, the specific area variable performance B of Figure 138, and the specific area variable performance C of Figure 139, there is a first movable part 14 (movable body) that can appear in front of the image display device 7 (display means), and after the first performance (Figures 137 (F) to (K) for specific area variable performance A, and Figures 139 (C), (E), (G), (H) for specific area variable performance C), a second performance (Figure 137 (L) for specific area variable performance A, and Figure 139 (L) for specific area variable performance C) is executed in which multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images) and middle decorative pattern 8C or ally character CRA (second performance image) are erased and the movable body is operated. However, since the first movable role 14 (movable body) appears on the near side of the image display device 7 (display means), when the left movable role 14L and the right movable role 14R advance (move) from their home positions toward (approaching each other) an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, they may not appear in front (front) of the display screen 7a, but may return to their home positions on the way. In this case, the multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images) and the middle decorative pattern 8C or ally character CRA (second performance image) do not disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable performance (variable display) will proceed. In this way, the variety of performances can be further increased.

[Modification 7]
In the specific area variable performance A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable performance B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable performance C of FIG. 139, the first special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 were displayed as numbers not shown in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. These numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, so that they can be easily distinguished from various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. In addition, since they are displayed on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, visibility is not hindered by other images. In this embodiment, when the specific area variable performance is started, multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As a result, there is a risk that the player will misunderstand the number (number of reserved balls) displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a as the number of multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images). Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a number indicating the number of reserved balls as a numerical value may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64 (one of the sub-display screens (e.g., the right sub-display screen 64R) among the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U). In this way, there is no risk of the player mistaking the number indicating the number of reserved balls as the number of multiple vertex images (multiple first performance images), and further, the number indicating the number of reserved balls as a numerical value can be made difficult to distinguish by blending in with the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it easier to understand intuitively.

[Modification 8]
In the specific area variable performance A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable performance B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable performance C of FIG. 139, the performance image EG, which is a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first performance images), may be a planar image or a three-dimensional image. The straight line RG may be a planar image or a three-dimensional image. The ally character CRA (second performance image) may be a planar image or a three-dimensional image. The sub-control board 90 may independently perform a lottery for these images to determine whether the image is a planar image or a three-dimensional image. In this way, the variety of performances can be further increased.

[Modification 9]
In the first performance in the specific area variable performance A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable performance B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable performance C of FIG. 139 (FIGS. 137(F)-(K) for specific area variable performance A, FIGS. 138(C), (E), (G) for specific area variable performance B, and FIGS. 139(C), (E), (G) for specific area variable performance C), the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second performance image) was displayed unclearly (unfocused image (out-of-focus image)) in the first to third specific areas (specific areas). However, the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second performance image) may not be displayed at all on the display screen 7a, or the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second performance image) may not be displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds). In addition, the sub-control board 90 may independently perform a lottery to determine whether to display or not display the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second performance image). In this way, the variety of performances can be further increased.

[Modification 10]
In the specific area variable performance A in FIG. 137, the specific area variable performance B in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable performance C in FIG. 139, an image that is out of focus (a blurred image) is used as an unclear image. As a method of expressing an image that is out of focus, it may be an image that undulates and sways like a wave, or an image that flickers and shimmers like a heat haze. In this case, it may be a still image or a video. In this way, the variety of the performance can be further increased.

[Modification 11]
Specific area variable performance A in Figure 137, specific area variable performance B in Figure 138, and specific area variable performance C in Figure 139 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D6-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A first effect is executable in which a second effect image is displayed in a specific area surrounded by a plurality of first effect images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D6-1,
As the number of the plurality of first performance images increases, the size of the specific area increases.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D6-1 or D6-2,
As the number of the plurality of first performance images increases, the expectation of a win increases.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D6-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-3,
In the first performance, the second performance image may be displayed unclearly in the specific area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-4,
In the first performance, when the specific area is formed into a shape similar to a circle after being surrounded by the plurality of first performance images, the second performance image may be clearly displayed in the specific area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-5,
In the first performance, the plurality of first performance images may be temporarily stopped after being moved in a predetermined direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-6,
a movable body that can appear in front of the display means,
After the first performance, a second performance can be executed in which the first performance images and the second performance image are erased and the movable body is operated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-8]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-7,
In the first performance, a line connecting the plurality of first performance images is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D6-9]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-8,
In the first effect, the number of corners of the polygon increases as the number of the first effect images increases.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Below, reliability change effects A and B are explained using Figures 140 to 142. In Figures 141 and 142, for example, the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, and other movable parts arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing.

This reliability change performance is performed during the decorative pattern change performance (during change display). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a change performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a reliability change performance is included, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, we will first explain the reliability of each character that appears in the reliability change performance when they appear alone or in double appearances, and then explain reliability change performance A and reliability change performance B in that order.

[Reliability of each character in single and double appearances]
The reliability of each character in a single appearance and a double appearance will be described with reference to Fig. 140. Fig. 140 is a diagram for explaining the reliability of each character in a single appearance and a double appearance.

In the reliability change performance, the balloons covering the card showing the winning or losing result are defeated by a character that appears alone, or by a special character that appears in addition to the character that appeared alone and defeats them together (jointly), and the reliability, which is the expectation of a big win, is different for each.

First, "characters" include symbols such as cross marks, circles, square marks, hearts, and stars, as well as balloons and characters. In this example, characters that belong to the first group are cross marks, circles, square marks, hearts, and stars, and characters that do not belong to the first group are balloons.

The characters that appear alone as mentioned above are characters that belong to the first group, and are the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, square mark, and heart mark. The star mark does not appear alone, and as a specific character, it works in combination with the characters that appear alone to destroy multiple balloons (characters that do not belong to the first group).

The reliability of the characters belonging to the first group, namely the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, square mark and heart mark when they appear alone (i.e. the reliability during a single attack) is as shown in Figure 140 (A) as follows: cross mark 8%, circle mark 16%, triangle mark 12%, square mark 15% and heart mark 50%. When the heart mark appears alone, the reliability is already 50%.

In addition to the individual appearance of the characters belonging to the first group, namely the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, square mark and heart mark, the reliability of the double appearance of the specific character star mark (i.e., reliability during a double attack) is as shown in Figure 140 (B) as follows: cross mark 18% (10% higher than individual), circle mark 23% (7% higher than individual), triangle mark 42% (30% higher than individual), square mark 55% (40% higher than individual), and heart mark 47% (3% lower than individual). The reliability of the double (joint) appearance of the specific character star mark is 7% to 40% higher than when it appears alone.

In contrast, the reliability of the heart mark alone and the specific character star mark double (shared) is 3% lower than when they appear alone. Furthermore, when a heart mark appears alone it has the highest reliability, and when a square mark appears alone it has the second highest reliability, but when it appears double (shared) with a specific character, the reliability of the square mark and the specific character star mark becomes the highest, and the reliability of the heart mark and the specific character star mark becomes the second highest, so the ranking of reliability is reversed between when it appears alone and when it appears double (shared) with a specific character.

In this way, in addition to the individual appearance of the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, and square mark, when the specific character star mark appears double (jointly), the reliability is higher than when the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, and square mark appear alone, and as an exception, only the heart mark has a lower reliability when the specific character star mark appears double (jointly) than when it appears alone. As a result, since the reliability is basically higher when the specific character star mark appears, the player can expect the reliability of the presentation to increase with the appearance of the specific character star mark, and furthermore, can find for himself the correlation and regularity of the expectation level between the individual appearance of the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, square mark, and heart mark and the specific character star mark.

[Trustworthiness Change Production A]
Next, the reliability change performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 141. Fig. 141 is a diagram for explaining the reliability change performance A. The reliability change performance A is performed during the change performance (during the change display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 141(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left three-dimensional decorative pattern 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative pattern 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each of the variable areas extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, appearing as a temporary stop, or as a stopped display (temporarily displayed, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed stationary, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icon is displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. Note that, for ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change performance (change display) starts in FIG. 141(A), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (for example, the number "5"), which is not shown, to form a reach. Then, as shown in FIG. 141(B), the reliability change performance A starts, and the cross mark GZ1 belonging to the first group is displayed and appears alone in the center of the display screen 7a, and a message MS saying "cross mark" is displayed to the right of the cross mark GZ1. The reliability shown in FIG. 140(A) is 8% due to the cross mark GZ1 appearing alone. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R during the change performance (change display) disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the change display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A also disappear from the display screen 7a. In other words, out of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A, only the variable icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that, in this case, the variable icon 9C remains as a white spherical icon, and does not change to any other icon.

After that, when the cross mark GZ1 and message MS disappear from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 141(C), a diamond-shaped double attack chance icon TG with the words "Double Attack Chance" appears in the center of the display screen 7a, emitting a flash of light FH and appearing to blink as it approaches from behind. At this time, the flash of light FH is displayed behind the variable icon 9C, so that the variable icon 9C is not covered by the flash of light FH and visibility is not impaired. This double attack chance icon TG suggests the appearance of a specific character, a star mark, in addition to the cross mark GZ1.

When the double attack chance icon TG disappears from the display screen 7a while blinking and approaching from the rear to the front, the flash FH also disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 141 (D), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped number "5", resulting in a miss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and as the variable performance (variable display) ends, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. This ends the reliability change performance A. Next, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable performance (variable display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts.

On the other hand, following FIG. 141(C), when the double attack chance icon TG blinks and approaches from the rear to the very front, as shown in FIG. 141(E), the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R each advance (move) from their home positions toward an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in the direction of approaching each other), and at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advance position (deployed position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative member (combined part) having a ring shape made up of the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R.

When the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring becomes an area having a circular shape (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area"). A smiling image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 that corresponds to the circular area. At this time, the white spherical variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When a first predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the smiling image was displayed on the display screen 7a, the smiling image disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R move away from each other, with the left movable part 14L retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable part 14R retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in Figure 141 (F), a star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group appears in the center of the display screen 7a emitting a flash of light FH, and the message "star mark" MS is displayed to the right of the star mark GZ2. The appearance of this star mark GZ2 forms a double (joint) with the cross mark GZ1 and star mark GZ2, and the reliability shown in Figure 140 (B) becomes 18% (a 10% increase from when it was alone).

When a second predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) that is longer than the first predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the star mark GZ2 was displayed on the display screen 7a, it appears by displaying and arranging multiple balloons GZ4 on the left side of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 141(G). At this time, the star mark GZ2, which is a specific character, is displayed and arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a reliability image KDG indicating reliability is displayed and arranged on the lower side of the display screen 7a.

The reliability image KDG indicates the reliability that the balloon will be destroyed and the result displayed on the card will be a winning result, due to the double (joint) combination of the cross mark GZ1 and the specific character star mark GZ2. The reliability image KDG indicates this reliability by ranking it on a five-level scale, and indicates it by the number of black circle images out of the five white circle images, and by the number of half black circles and half white circles (hereinafter referred to as "half black circles"). Here, the reliability image KDG is shown as "expectation" in the figure, which means "reliability", and there are three black circle images, suggesting that the expectation (after reliability) is level 3 out of five levels.

Next, when lightning is emitted from the star mark GZ2, which is a specific character, toward the multiple balloons GZ4 and begins to destroy them, as shown in Figure 141 (H), the cross mark GZ1 also begins to emit lightning toward the multiple balloons GZ4 and destroy them.

When multiple balloons GZ4 are destroyed, the smoke from the blast gradually disappears and a card appears. When the winning result displayed on the card is a win, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern (number "5"), resulting in a jackpot. This ends the reliability change presentation A. After that, the jackpot game (jackpot presentation) begins. When the jackpot game (jackpot presentation) ends, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable presentation (variable display) ends. Next, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable presentation (variable display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R begins.

On the other hand, when the winning/losing result displayed on the card is a loss, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped at the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the number "5", resulting in a loss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and as the variable performance (variable display) ends, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. This ends the reliability change performance A. Next, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R begins.

In this way, in reliability change performance A, the cross mark GZ1 belonging to the first group is displayed and appears alone in the center of the display screen 7a. At this point, the reliability is 8%. After that, the star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group is displayed and appears in the center of the display screen 7a, emitting a flash of light FH. The appearance of this star mark GZ2 results in a double (joint) cross mark GZ1 and star mark GZ2. This makes the reliability 18% (a 10% increase from when it was alone).

[Trustworthiness Change Production B]
Next, the reliability change performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 142. Fig. 142 is a diagram for explaining the reliability change performance B. The reliability change performance B is performed during the change performance (during the change display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 142(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left three-dimensional decorative pattern 8L, a center three-dimensional decorative pattern 8C, and a right three-dimensional decorative pattern 8R are displayed in each of the variable areas extending from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a variable performance (variable display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated.

When the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) begins, the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, changing at high speed. This allows the background image placed behind the decorative pattern to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern slows down just before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state back to an opaque state, appearing as a temporary stop, or as a stopped display (temporarily displayed, then stopped). When the decorative pattern is displayed stationary, it moves slowly up and down in small movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a white spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icon is displayed at the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one reserved icon that has not been consumed and is stocked. Note that, for ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

In FIG. 142(A), when the decorative pattern change performance (change display) starts, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (for example, the number "5"), not shown, to form a reach. Then, as shown in FIG. 142(B), the reliability change performance B starts, and the heart mark GZ3 belonging to the first group is displayed and appears alone in the center of the display screen 7a, and the reliability shown in FIG. 140(A) becomes 50% by the appearance of this heart mark GZ3 alone. A message MS "heart mark" is displayed to the right of the heart mark GZ3. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R during the change performance (change display) disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the change display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A also disappear from the display screen 7a. In other words, out of the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the reserved icon 9A, only the variable icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that, here, the variable icon 9C has changed from a white spherical icon to a red smiling spherical icon.

After that, when the heart mark GZ3 and message MS disappear from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 142(C), a diamond-shaped double attack chance icon TG with the words "Double Attack Chance" appears in the center of the display screen 7a, emitting a flash of light FH and blinking as it approaches from behind to the front. At this time, the flash of light FH is displayed behind the variable icon 9C, so that the variable icon 9C is not covered by the flash of light FH and visibility is not impaired. This double attack chance icon TG suggests the appearance of a specific character, a star mark, in addition to the heart mark GZ3.

When the double attack chance icon TG disappears from the display screen 7a while blinking and approaching from the rear to the front, the flash FH also disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 142(D), the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as a stopped number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a stopped number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a stopped number "5", resulting in a miss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and as the variable performance (variable display) ends, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. This ends the reliability change performance B. Next, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable performance (variable display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R starts.

On the other hand, following FIG. 142(C), when the double attack chance icon TG blinks and approaches from the rear to the very front, as shown in FIG. 142(E), the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R each advance (move) from their home positions toward an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in the direction of approaching each other), and at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advance position (deployed position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative member (combined part) having a ring shape, consisting of the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R.

When the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring becomes an area having a circular shape (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area"). A smiling face image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the variable icon 9C, which is a red smiling face sphere, disappears from the display screen 7a.

When a first predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the smiling image was displayed on the display screen 7a, the smiling image disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R move away from each other, with the left movable part 14L retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable part 14R retreating (moving) from its advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a toward a retreated position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in Figure 142 (F), a star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group appears in the center of the display screen 7a emitting a flash of light FH, and the message "star mark" MS is displayed to the right of the star mark GZ2. The appearance of this star mark GZ2 forms a double (joint) with the heart mark GZ3 and star mark GZ2, and the reliability shown in Figure 140 (B) becomes 47% (down 3% from when it was alone).

When a second predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) that is longer than the first predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the star mark GZ2 was displayed on the display screen 7a, it appears by displaying and arranging multiple balloons GZ4 on the left side of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 142(G). At this time, the star mark GZ2, which is a specific character, is displayed and arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a reliability image KDG indicating reliability is displayed and arranged on the lower side of the display screen 7a.

The reliability image KDG indicates the reliability that the balloon will be destroyed and the result displayed on the card will be a winning result, due to the double (joint) combination of the heart mark GZ3 and the specific character star mark GZ2. The reliability image KDG indicates this reliability by ranking it on a five-level scale, and indicates it by the number of black circle images and the number of half black and half white circles (hereinafter referred to as "half black circles") out of the five white circle images. Here, the reliability image KDG is shown as "expectation" in the figure, which means "reliability", and there are three black circle images and one half black circle, suggesting that the expectation (after reliability) is level 3.5 out of five levels, which is an intermediate level between level 3 and level 4.

Next, when lightning is emitted from the star mark GZ2, which is a specific character, toward the multiple balloons GZ4 and begins to destroy them, as shown in Figure 142 (H), the heart mark GZ3 also begins to emit lightning toward the multiple balloons GZ4 and destroy them.

When multiple balloons GZ4 are destroyed, the smoke from the blast gradually disappears and a card appears. When the winning result displayed on the card is a win, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed as the same pattern (number "5"), resulting in a jackpot. This ends the reliability change presentation B. After that, the jackpot game (jackpot presentation) begins. When the jackpot game (jackpot presentation) ends, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable presentation (variable display) ends. Next, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable presentation (variable display) by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R begins.

On the other hand, when the winning/losing result displayed on the card is a loss, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed as the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed as the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed as the number "5", resulting in a loss. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the reserved display position 9Ad, and the reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and as the variable performance (variable display) ends, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. This ends the reliability change performance B. Next, the reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, and the variable performance (variable display) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R begins.

In this way, in reliability change performance B, the heart mark GZ3 belonging to the first group is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and appears alone. At this point, the reliability is 50%. After that, the star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group appears in the center of the display screen 7a, emitting a flash of light FH. The appearance of this star mark GZ2 makes it a double (joint) of the heart mark GZ3 and the star mark GZ2. This brings the reliability down to 47% (down 3% from when it was alone).

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of changing the reliability.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the reliability change presentation A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change presentation B of FIG. 142, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and the first presentation (FIGS. 141(A)-(C) and (D) in the reliability change presentation A, and FIG. 142(A)-(C) and (D) in the reliability change presentation B) can be executed in which when a cross mark GZ1 (first image) is displayed followed by a star mark GZ2 (second image), the expectation of a win increases (reliability is 18% (up 10% from when played alone)), and when a heart mark GZ3 (third image) is displayed followed by a star mark GZ2 (second image), the expectation of a win decreases (reliability is 47% (down 3% from when played alone)). According to this configuration, even if the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed, the expectation of a win may be changed to a higher value or to a lower value, so that a novel presentation can be provided to the player in which the expectation of a win is changed depending on the combination with the star mark GZ2 (second image). Therefore, the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first performance in the reliability change performance A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change performance B of FIG. 142, when the cross mark GZ1 (first image) or the heart mark GZ3 (third image) is displayed, the cross mark GZ1 (first image) or the heart mark GZ3 (third image) is hidden after the variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, and further, the variable display position 9Cd of the variable icon 9C and the variable display position 9Cd can be hidden. According to this configuration, even when the cross mark GZ1 (first image) or the heart mark GZ3 (third image) changes from a displayed state to a non-displayed state, the variable icon 9C is still displayed, so that the player can pay attention to whether the variable icon 9C changes to another icon or not.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the reliability change effect A in Fig. 141 and the reliability change effect B in Fig. 142, a double attack chance icon TG (specific image) can be displayed as a hint for the display of the star mark GZ2 (second image). According to this configuration, the double attack chance icon TG (specific image) is displayed, which can contribute to increasing the expectation that the star mark GZ2 (second image) will be displayed.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the reliability change performance A of Fig. 141 and the reliability change performance B of Fig. 142, the first movable part 14 (movable body) that can appear on the front side of the image display device 7 (display means) is provided, and in the first performance, the first movable part 14 (movable body) can be operated as a suggestion of the display of the star mark GZ2 (second image). According to this configuration, the operation of the first movable part 14 (movable body), that is, the appearance of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R, can contribute to increasing the expectation that the star mark GZ2 (second image) will be displayed.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the first performance in the reliability change performance A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change performance B of FIG. 142, a second performance (FIG. 141(E) in the reliability change performance A, FIG. 142(E) in the reliability change performance B) in which a plurality of balloons GZ4 (fourth image) are displayed in addition to the star mark GZ2 (second image), and a reliability image KDG (image of the expectation of the hit) by the star mark GZ2 (second image) can be executed. According to this configuration, the suggestion that the performance by the star mark GZ2 (second image) and the plurality of balloons GZ4 (fourth image) will start can be easily emphasized to the player. In addition, since the reliability image KDG (image of the expectation of the hit) is displayed, it is possible to easily make the player recognize the reliability of this performance.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second presentation of the reliability change presentation A in Figure 141 and the reliability change presentation B in Figure 142, in addition to multiple balloons GZ4 (fourth image), a cross mark GZ1 (first image) and a star mark GZ2 (second image) may be displayed, or a heart mark GZ3 (third image) and a star mark GZ2 (second image) may be displayed. According to this configuration, the performance is developed in a double (joint) manner by the cross mark GZ1 (first image) and the star mark GZ2 (second image), so that in addition to the cross mark GZ1 (first image), the participation of the star mark GZ2 (second image) in the performance can contribute to mutually enhancing the cross mark GZ1 (first image) and the star mark GZ2 (second image); and, since the performance is developed in a double (joint) manner by the heart mark GZ3 (third image) and the star mark GZ2 (second image), in addition to the heart mark GZ3 (third image), the participation of the star mark GZ2 (second image) in the performance can contribute to mutually enhancing the heart mark GZ3 (third image) and the star mark GZ2 (second image).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the reliability change presentation A of Figure 141 and the reliability change presentation B of Figure 142, the cross mark GZ1 (first image) is a cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, and square mark (other characters) among the cross marks, circle marks, triangle marks, square marks, heart marks, and star marks (multiple characters) belonging to the first group, excluding the star mark (first character) and the heart mark (second character), the star mark GZ2 (second image) is a star mark (first character), the heart mark GZ3 (third image) is a heart mark (second character), and the multiple balloons GZ4 (fourth image) are characters not belonging to the first group. According to this configuration, when any of the characters among the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, and square mark (other character) is displayed as the first image before the second image, the star mark (first character), is displayed, the expectation of winning is changed to high, whereas when the third image, the heart mark (second character), is displayed before the second image, the star mark (first character), is displayed, the expectation of winning is changed to low. Although the first character, the second character, and the other characters belong to the same first group, the expectation of winning can be changed depending on which character is displayed before the second image, the star mark (first character), is displayed. In addition, although the multiple balloons GZ4 (fourth image) are characters that do not belong to the first group, they can contribute to the player finding the relevance to the characters that belong to the first group.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the reliability change presentation are shown.
[Modification 1]
The reliability change performance A in Fig. 141 and the reliability change performance B in Fig. 142 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state of so-called left-hand hitting. However, they may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may be performed in a game state of so-called right-hand hitting.

[Modification 2]
In the reliability change performance A in Fig. 141 and the reliability change performance B in Fig. 142, the characters belonging to the first group are cross marks, circle marks, triangle marks, square marks, heart marks, and star marks, but instead of these, characters may be characters. For example, characters belonging to the first group may be ally character A instead of a cross mark, ally character B instead of a circle mark, ally character C instead of a triangle mark, ally character D instead of a square mark, ally character E instead of a heart mark, and ally character F instead of a star mark. 140(A) and (B), when ally character A (first image) is displayed in place of cross mark GZ1, and then ally character F (second image) is displayed in place of star mark GZ2, the expectation of winning becomes high (reliability is 18% (10% up from when alone)), and when ally character E (third image) is displayed in place of heart mark GZ3, and then ally character F (second image) is displayed in place of star mark GZ2, the expectation of winning becomes low (reliability is 47% (3% down from when alone)). In this way, the variety of presentations can be increased.

Also, although a balloon was used as a character not belonging to the first group, a different character belonging to the first group may be used instead. In this case, multiple characters may be used. For example, the characters not belonging to the first group may be enemy character A, enemy character B, enemy character C, enemy character D, and enemy character E. Then, a performance is performed in which ally character A and enemy character A are associated, a performance is performed in which ally character B and enemy character B are associated, a performance is performed in which ally character C and enemy character C are associated, a performance is performed in which ally character D and enemy character D are associated, and a performance is performed in which ally character E and enemy character E are associated. In this case, if the reliability is the same as that in FIG. 140(A) and (B), ally character F appears as a double (joint) with ally characters A to E, and repels the enemy character. After ally character A (first image) is displayed in place of cross mark GZ1, a performance is performed in which ally character A (first image) and enemy character A (fourth image) are associated, and when ally character F (second image) is displayed in place of star mark GZ2, the expectation of a hit increases (reliability is 18% (10% up from when alone)), and after ally character E (third image) is displayed in place of heart mark GZ3, a performance is performed in which ally character E (third image) and enemy character E (fourth image) are associated, and when ally character F (second image) is displayed in place of star mark GZ2, the expectation of a hit decreases (reliability is 47% (3% down from when alone)). In this way, the variety of performances can be increased.

[Modification 3]
In the reliability change performance A of FIG. 141(C) and the reliability change performance B of FIG. 142(C), the double attack chance icon TG (specific image) was displayed as a suggestion of the display of the star mark GZ2 (second image). However, without displaying the double attack chance icon TG (specific image), the left decorative part of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable role 14R may be made to form one decorative member (combined role) having a ring shape in the reliability change performance A of FIG. 141(D) and the reliability change performance B of FIG. 142(D). This can be determined by a unique lottery by the sub-control board 90. This can increase the variety of performances.

[Modification 4]
In the reliability change performance A of FIG. 141(D) and the reliability change performance B of FIG. 142(D), the left decorative part of the left movable role 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable role 14R form one decorative member (combined role) having a ring shape. However, it is also possible not to form a decorative member (combined role). This can be determined by a unique lottery by the sub-control board 90. This can increase the variety of performances.

[Modification 5]
In the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(B), the variable icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a red smiling spherical icon. At this time, the size of the variable icon 9C may be made a predetermined times (for example, about 5 to 8 times) larger than the size of the white spherical icon. In this way, the change in the variable icon 9C can be easily emphasized to the player.

[Modification 6]
In the reliability change performance A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change performance B of FIG. 142, the first special chart reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 were displayed as numbers not shown in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. These numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, so that they can be easily distinguished from various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. In addition, they are displayed on the forefront side of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by other images. In this embodiment, when the reliability change performance is started, a reliability image KDG indicating the reliability of the winning result displayed on the card by destroying the balloon in five stages is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the number (the number of reserved balls) displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a may be misunderstood by the player as the reliability indicated by these five stages. Therefore, instead of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a number indicating the number of reserved balls as a numerical value may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64 (one of the sub-display screens (e.g., the right sub-display screen 64R) among the right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U). In this way, there is no risk of the player misunderstanding the number indicating the number of reserved balls as a reliability indicating a stage, and further, the number indicating the number of reserved balls as a numerical value can be made difficult to distinguish by blending in with the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it easier to understand intuitively.

[Modification 7]
In the reliability change performance A of FIG. 141(H) and the reliability change performance B of FIG. 142(H), the variable icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a. However, the variable icon 9C may be displayed and appear again on the display screen 7a. In this case, the star mark GZ2, which is a character, emits lightning toward the balloons GZ4 to start destroying them, and in the reliability change performance A of FIG. 141(H), the cross mark GZ1 also emits lightning toward the balloons GZ4 to start destroying them, and in the reliability change performance B of FIG. 142(H), the heart mark GZ3 also emits lightning toward the balloons GZ4 to start destroying them, so that the display mode of the variable icon 9C may be, for example, a display mode of an animation in which a ball shrinks and expands up and down like bouncing up and down, or a display mode of an animation in which the ball spins around. In this way, it is possible to contribute to improving the performance effect by the display mode of the variable icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
In the reliability change performance A of FIG. 141(H) and the reliability change performance B of FIG. 142(H), the variable icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a. However, the variable icon 9C may be displayed and reappeared on the display screen 7a. In this case, the star mark GZ2, which is a character, emits lightning toward the balloons GZ4 to start destroying them, and further, in the reliability change performance A of FIG. 141(H), the cross mark GZ1 also emits lightning toward the balloons GZ4 to start destroying them, and in the reliability change performance B of FIG. 142(H), the heart mark GZ3 also emits lightning toward the balloons GZ4 to start destroying them, so that the variable icon 9C collides toward the balloons GZ4 and explodes, contributing to the destruction of the balloons GZ4. In this way, in addition to the two characters, the variable icon 9C can be used to destroy multiple balloons GZ4, making the performance of destroying multiple balloons GZ4 even more impressive for the player.Furthermore, the contribution of the variable icon 9C to the destruction of multiple balloons GZ4 can give the player the impression that his or her credibility has increased, thereby contributing to improving the presentation effect.

[Modification 9]
Reliability change performance A in Figure 141 and reliability change performance B in Figure 142 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇[Aspect D7-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A first effect can be executed in which the expectation of a win increases when a second image is displayed after a first image is displayed, and the expectation of a win decreases when a third image is displayed and then the second image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D7-1,
In the first performance, when the first image or the third image is displayed, the variable icon is displayed at the variable display position, and then the first image or the third image is hidden, and further, the variable display position of the variable icon and the variable display position is hidden.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect D7-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D7-1 or D7-2,
In the first performance, a specific image can be displayed as a suggestion for displaying the second image.
The gaming machine is characterized by the above.

◇ [Aspect D7-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D7-1 to D7-3,
a movable body that can appear in front of the display means,
In the first performance, the movable body can be operated as a suggestion for displaying the second image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D7-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D7-1 to D7-4,
After the first effect, a fourth image is displayed in addition to the second image, and a second effect is executed in which an image of the expectation degree of the winning based on the second image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D7-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D7-5,
In the second performance, in addition to the fourth image, the first image and the second image may be displayed, or the third image and the second image may be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D7-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects D7-1 to D7-6,
the first image is a character other than the first character and the second character among a plurality of characters belonging to a first group;
the second image is the first character;
the third image is the second character;
The fourth image is a character that does not belong to the first group.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The item superimposition effect will be explained below with reference to Figures 143 to 145. This item superimposition effect can be executed during the special symbol variation effect. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, moves the third movable role piece 13, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a, thereby realizing this effect.

[Item Overlay A]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining the item overlapping performance A. In this item overlapping performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 143 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is executed. In this decorative pattern performance, the reserved icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed, but their display is omitted. In addition, a change display of the decorative pattern is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(B), an item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, a face image XG1 is displayed. This face image XG1 includes a glasses image XG11 that represents glasses as a specified item. The portions of the glasses image XG11 that correspond to the lenses are displayed transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(C), an item role moving performance is performed. In this item role moving performance, the third movable role 13L and the third movable role 13R move from a retracted position to an deployed position, and combine at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image XG11) to form the third movable role 13 representing glasses. In this case, the third movable role 13 is the same size as the glasses image XG11, but may be slightly larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item role moving performance, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. The part of the third movable role 13 that corresponds to the lens is transparent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(D), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the face image XG1 continues to be displayed, but the glasses image XG11 is erased from the face image XG1, and the image of the eyes that were previously hidden by the glasses image XG11 is displayed.

[Item Overlay Feature B]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the item overlapping performance B. In this item overlapping performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 144 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is executed. In this decorative pattern performance, the reserved icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed, but their display is omitted. In addition, a change display of the decorative pattern is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(B), an item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, a facial image XG1 is displayed. This facial image XG1 includes a glasses image XG11 that represents glasses as a specified item. The portion of the glasses image XG11 that corresponds to the lenses is displayed as transparent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(C), an item role moving performance is performed. In this item role moving performance, the third movable role 13L and the third movable role 13R move from a retracted position to an deployed position and combine at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image XG11) to form the third movable role 13 representing glasses. In this case, the third movable role 13 is the same size as the glasses image XG11, but it may be slightly larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item role moving performance, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. The part of the third movable role 13 that corresponds to the lens is transparent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(D), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, character XG2 is displayed in the position where face image XG1 was displayed.

[Item Overlay Rendering C]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the item overlapping performance C. In this item overlapping performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 145 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is executed. In this decorative pattern performance, the reserved icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed, but their display is omitted. In addition, a change display of the decorative pattern is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(B), an item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, a facial image XG1 is displayed. This facial image XG1 includes a glasses image XG11 that represents glasses as a specified item. The portions of the glasses image XG11 that correspond to the lenses are displayed transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(C), an item role moving performance is performed. In this item role moving performance, the third movable role 13L and the third movable role 13R move from a retracted position to an deployed position and combine at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image XG11) to form the third movable role 13 representing glasses. In this case, the third movable role 13 is the same size as the glasses image XG11, but may be slightly larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item role moving performance, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. The part of the third movable role 13 that corresponds to the lens is transparent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(D), item role transparent performance 1 is performed. In this item transparent performance 1, eyes are displayed in the part of the main display screen 7a that corresponds to the lens of the third movable role 13, and the lens part of the third movable role 13 is made transparent so that the player can see the eyes of the face image XG1 through the third movable role 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(E), item role transparent performance 2 is performed. In this item transparent performance 2, the characters "intense" and "hot" are displayed in the part of the main display screen 7a that corresponds to the lens of the third movable role 13, and the lens part of the third movable role 13 is made transparent so that the player can see these characters through the third movable role 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(D), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, character XG2 is displayed in the position where face image XG1 was displayed.

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned item superimposition performance, glasses are used as the item, and the third movable prop 13 representing the glasses is moved to the position of the glasses image XG11, but this is not limited to this, and other items may be used. For example, a mask may be used as the item, and the third movable prop 13 representing the mask may be moved to the position of the mask image to perform a performance similar to the above-mentioned item superimposition performance.
In the above-mentioned item overlay presentation, the portion of the glasses image XG11 corresponding to the lens may be displayed transparently in the item image display presentation, and a predetermined image (for example, an image of an eye or text such as "intense" or "hot") may be displayed in the transparent portion.

[Example of effect]
In the above-mentioned item superimposition effect, a glasses image XG11 representing glasses as an item is displayed, and then the third movable gadget 13 representing glasses is moved to the deployed position and placed in front of the glasses image XG11, and then a predetermined effect (super reach effect) is performed. With this configuration, the glasses image XG11 and the third movable gadget 13 can deliver a three-dimensional image of glasses to the player, making it possible to realize a dynamic display effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the above-mentioned item superimposition performance, the glasses image XG11 is displayed, then the third movable gadget 13 representing glasses is moved to the deployed position and placed in front of the glasses image XG11, then the third movable gadget 13 is returned to the retreat position (home position), and then the character XG2 performing a predetermined performance (super reach performance) is displayed at the position where the glasses image XG11 was displayed. According to this configuration, the glasses image XG11 and the third movable gadget 13 can deliver a three-dimensional glasses image to the player, making it possible to realize a dynamic display performance, and after the third movable gadget 13 returns to the retreat position, the character XG2 performing the super reach performance is displayed instead of the glasses image XG11, so that a performance with good tempo can be provided and a sense of exhilaration can be given to the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the above-mentioned item overlapping performance, the third movable part 13 includes a third movable part 13L and a third movable part 13R, and in the item part moving performance, the third movable part 13L and the third movable part 13R move to the deployed position and are united on the glasses image XG11. According to this configuration, the glasses image XG11 and the third movable part 13 can deliver a more three-dimensional glasses image to the player, and a dynamic display performance can be realized. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XG-1]
A gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of effects,
A first effect may be performed as one of the plurality of effects,
A second effect may be performed as one of the multiple effects,
A third effect may be performed as one of the multiple effects,
the first effect is an effect of displaying a first image representing a predetermined item on a display means,
The second performance is a performance in which a movable character representing the predetermined item is moved to a deployment position on the first image,
The third effect is an effect of performing a predetermined display effect on the display means,
A combination effect including the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XG-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-1,
In the combination performance, the first performance is performed, then the second performance is performed, and then the third performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XG-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-2,
A fourth effect may be performed as one of the multiple effects,
The fourth performance is a performance in which the movable part is moved from the deployed position to the basic position,
The combination effect may include the fourth effect,
In the combination performance, the fourth performance is performed after the second performance, and the third performance is performed after the fourth performance, and in the third performance, the second image in the predetermined performance is displayed in place of the first image displayed on the display means at a position corresponding to the deployed position of the movable role object.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XG-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-3,
The movable part has a first part and a second part,
The movable part represents one part by combining the first part and the second part,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XG-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-4,
In the combination performance, in the second display performance, the first and second movable parts are moved to the deployed position on the first image, and the first and second parts are combined at the deployed position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The movable props decorative lighting performance will be explained below using Figures 146 to 148. In Figures 146 to 148, for example, the second movable prop 15 and other movable props arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing.

This movable role decoration light-emitting performance can be executed during the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the movable role decoration light-emitting performance is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (e.g., a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light-emitting mode of the first movable role 14 provided on the game board 2.

Here, we will explain the game board 2 that has a transparent acrylic plate, and then explain the movable part decorative lighting effect produced by the first movable part 14.

[Game board 2 formed from a transparent acrylic plate]
First, the game board 2 formed from a transparent acrylic plate will be described with reference to Figures 146 and 147. Figure 146 is a diagram for explaining the game board 2 formed from a transparent acrylic plate. Figure 147 is a continuation of the diagram for explaining the game board 2 formed from the transparent acrylic plate of Figure 146.

As shown in FIG. 146(A), the game board 2 is made of a transparent acrylic plate 2z, and a number of game nails are protruding (implanted) into the game area 3 on the front side of the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and the first movable gadget 14, the image display device 7, etc. are arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. A through hole is formed in the approximate center of the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and the image display device 7 is arranged at a position corresponding to this through hole. The first movable gadget 14 is arranged in the space between the transparent acrylic plate 2z and the image display device 7, and the front side is covered by the transparent acrylic plate 2z when it is waiting in the home position, whereas when it has moved forward toward the center of the display screen 7a, it appears in front of the image display device 7, and is not covered by the transparent acrylic plate 2z due to the opening in the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Although the first movable part 14 is positioned behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z, the transparent acrylic plate 2z is transparent, so that the first movable part 14 is easily visible whether it is waiting in the home position or has moved forward toward the center of the display screen 7a. Note that the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate 2z has the same configuration as the game board 2 described above, except for the fact that it has the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and so a description of it will be omitted here.

Although not shown, the first movable accessory 14 is equipped with a decorative board on which multiple full-color LEDs are mounted, and an inner lens is arranged to cover the front of the decorative board, and the inner lens and the decorative board are housed in a decorative member. An opening is formed in the decorative member, and the inner lens is exposed through this opening. The inner lens diffracts the light from the multiple full-color LEDs in a staggered manner, making it difficult to recognize the presence of the decorative board arranged behind the inner lens. For this reason, even when all of the multiple full-color LEDs are turned off, the multiple full-color LEDs are difficult to see through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent. The light emitted by the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board passes through the inner lens and is irradiated forward (hereinafter referred to as "the first movable accessory 14 emits light").

Because a transparent acrylic plate 2z is placed in front of the first movable part 14, when the first movable part 14 emits light, the light passes through the transparent acrylic plate 2z and is irradiated in front of the transparent acrylic plate 2z. As a result, when comparing game balls flowing down the area of the game area 3 that corresponds to the front of the first movable part 14 with game balls flowing down the area of the game area 3 that does not correspond to the front of the first movable part 14, the game balls flowing down the area of the game area 3 that corresponds to the front of the first movable part 14 are brightly illuminated and easily visible.

In addition, multiple game pegs are protruding (implanted) on the front surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and when the first movable device 14 emits light, the light brightly illuminates the game pegs, clearly highlighting to the player the path through which the game balls flow.

Here, we will explain the state in which the first movable part 14 is waiting in the home position. As described above, the first movable part 14 includes a left movable part 14L and a right movable part 14R. The left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R are each configured to be movable in the left-right direction, and half of a ring-shaped decorative part (left decorative part and right decorative part) is attached to the tip side. In other words, the left decorative part and the right decorative part each have an arc shape that is half of a ring shape.

The first movable part 14 is stationary in a retracted position (home position) where the left movable part 14L is stored to the left of the display screen 7a and the right movable part 14R is stored to the right of the display screen 7a.

As shown in Figure 146 (B), the left-side movable part 14L waiting in the home position has a left-side decorative part with an arc shape that is half of a ring shape, and the center point of the vertical distance dimension of the arc is taken on the arc as the rotation center point LKP. At the rotation center point LKP on this arc, it is further divided into an upper arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LU and a lower arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LD, and the upper arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LU rotates counterclockwise and the lower arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LD rotates clockwise, so that the upper arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LD are opened to approximately 180 degrees.

When the left movable part 14L starts to move forward toward the center of the display screen 7a, first, the upper arc-shaped left movable part 14LU rotates clockwise at the rotation center point LKP on the arc, and the lower arc-shaped left movable part 14LD rotates counterclockwise to become a left decorative part with an arc shape that is half a ring shape, and then moves forward toward the center of the display screen 7a.

As shown in the figure, the right-side movable part 14R, which waits in the home position, has a right-side decorative part with an arc shape that is half a ring shape, and the center point of the vertical distance dimension of the arc is taken on the arc as the rotation center point RKP. At this rotation center point RKP on the arc, it is further divided into an upper arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RU and a lower arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RD, and the upper arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RU rotates clockwise and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RD rotates counterclockwise, opening to approximately 180 degrees.

When the right-side movable part 14R starts to move forward toward the center of the display screen 7a, first, the upper arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RU rotates counterclockwise at the rotation center point RKP on the arc, and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RD rotates clockwise to become a right-side decorative part with an arc shape that is half a ring shape, and then moves forward toward the center of the display screen 7a.

When the left movable part 14L, which is waiting in the home position, emits light, the light brightly illuminates the area in front of the upper arc-shaped left movable part 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable part 14LD, while the upper arc-shaped left movable part 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable part 14LD remain open at approximately 180 degrees, as shown in Figure 146 (C).

When the right-side movable part 14R, which is waiting in the home position, emits light, the light brightly illuminates the area in front of the upper arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RD, while the upper arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RD remain open at approximately 180 degrees, as shown in the figure.

As described above, the game area 3 has a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 3B on the right side. A hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called a "left hit," and a hitting style in which the game ball is shot so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called a "right hit."

When the left movable part 14L is waiting in the home position, as shown in FIG. 147(D) and (E), when the left movable part 14L emits light, that is, when the upper arc-shaped left movable part 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable part 14LD emit light, the light brightly illuminates the front area (hereinafter referred to as the "left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF") of the left play area 3A that corresponds to the upper arc-shaped left movable part 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable part 14LD. As a result, when comparing the game balls flowing down the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF of the left play area 3A with the game balls flowing down the other areas of the left play area 3A except the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF, the game balls flowing down the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF are brightly illuminated and easily visible.

In addition, since multiple game nails (indicated by small "○" in the figure) are protruding (planted) in the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF, when the left-hand movable part 14L is illuminated, that is, when the upper arc-shaped left-hand movable part 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left-hand movable part 14LD are illuminated, the light brightly illuminates the game nails in the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF, so that the path through which the game ball flows down can be clearly emphasized to the player. In addition, when the lower arc-shaped left-hand movable part 14LD is illuminated in the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF, in addition to the game nails, a so-called windmill is also arranged in the area brightly illuminated by the light, so that the rotation of the windmill can be clearly emphasized to the player. The windmill is as important to the player as the game nails, because the rolling of the game ball to the first starting hole 20 changes depending on the direction and speed of rotation.

When the right-side movable part 14R is in standby in the home position, as shown in the figure, when the right-side movable part 14R emits light, that is, when the upper-arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RU and the lower-arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RD emit light, the light brightly illuminates the front area of the right play area 3B that corresponds to the upper-arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RU and the lower-arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RD (hereinafter referred to as the "right-side light-emitting area 3BF"). As a result, when comparing the game balls flowing down the right-side light-emitting area 3BF of the right play area 3B with the game balls flowing down other areas of the right play area 3B other than the right-side light-emitting area 3BF, the game balls flowing down the right-side light-emitting area 3BF are brightly illuminated and easily visible.

In addition, since multiple game nails (indicated by small "○" in the figure) are protruding (planted) in the right-hand light-emitting area 3BF, when the right-hand movable role 14R emits light, the light brightly illuminates the game nails in the right-hand light-emitting area 3BF, so that the path along which the game balls flow can be clearly emphasized to the player. Specifically, when the upper arc-shaped right-hand movable role 14RU emits light in the left-hand light-emitting area 3AF, the area brightly illuminated by the light does not have game nails protruding (planted), so that the path along which the game balls flow down along the right outer periphery of the center decoration 10 can be clearly emphasized to the player. When the lower arc-shaped right-hand movable role 14RD emits light in the left-hand light-emitting area 3AF, the area brightly illuminated by the light has multiple game nails protruding (planted) in it, so that the game nails are brightly illuminated, so that the path along which the game balls flow down can be clearly emphasized to the player.

In Figure 147 (E), in the home position, the left-side movable part 14L is illuminated and the right-side movable part 14R is illuminated, so that the left-side light-emitting area 3AF and the right-side light-emitting area 3BF are brightly lit regardless of whether the player is hitting from the left or right, creating the effect of an electric decorative member being placed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, an electric decorative member being fixed to the rear of the transparent acrylic plate 2z) and creating an illumination effect using the electric decorative member. In other words, it is possible to create an illumination effect equivalent to that of an electric decorative member without placing an electric decorative member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Of course, the light emission modes of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R include lighting, gradation lighting, flashing, etc. Also, there are effects where the left movable part 14L is lit and the right movable part 14R is turned off, so that only the left-hand side light emission area 3AF is brightly illuminated, there are effects where the left movable part 14L is turned off and the right movable part 14R is lit, so that only the right-hand side light emission area 3BF is brightly illuminated, and there are effects where the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R are turned off, so that the left-hand side light emission area 3AF and the right-hand side light emission area 3BF are turned off.

[Movable character decorative lighting effect by first movable character 14]
Next, the movable role decoration light emission performance by the first movable role 14 will be described with reference to Fig. 148. Fig. 148 is a diagram for explaining the movable role decoration light emission performance by the first movable role 14 (hereinafter referred to as "movable role decoration light emission performance"). The movable role decoration light emission performance is performed during the variable performance (during variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 148(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (changing display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the change performance (changing display) of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are changed from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, and are changed at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed as slowly moving up and down in small movements.

In FIG. 148 (A), when the decorative pattern change performance (changing display) has started and the movable role decorative light-emitting performance has started, the left-side movable role 14L and the right-side movable role 14R are in a waiting state in their home positions, and when playing with a left hand or a right hand, for example, as shown in the same figure, when the left-side movable role 14L is lit and the right-side movable role 14R is turned off, when the left-side movable role 14L lights up, that is, the upper arc-shaped left-side movable role 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left-side movable role 14LD light up, and the light brightly illuminates the left-side light-emitting area 3AF, which is the front area of the left playing area 3A corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left-side movable role 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left-side movable role 14LD, and the left playing area 3A excluding the left-side light-emitting area 3AF is not brightly illuminated and is darker than the left-side light-emitting area 3AF. On the other hand, the right-side movable device 14R is turned off, so the entire right-side playing area 3B is not brightly lit by the right-side movable device 14R and is dark.

In addition, when the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R are in a waiting state in their home positions, and when playing with a left-hand hit or a right-hand hit, for example, when the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R are in a state where they are illuminated, when the left-side movable part 14L illuminates, that is, the upper arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LD illuminate, the light brightly illuminates the left-side light-emitting area 3AF, which is the area in front of the left playing area 3A corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left-side movable part 14LD, and the left playing area 3A excluding the left-side light-emitting area 3AF is not illuminated brightly and is darker than the left-side light-emitting area 3AF. When the right-side movable part 14R lights up, that is, the upper arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RD light up, and that light brightly illuminates the right-side light-emitting area 3BF, which is the area in front of the right-side play area 3B that corresponds to the upper arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RD. The right-side play area 3B excluding the right-side light-emitting area 3BF is not brightly illuminated, and is darker than the right-side light-emitting area 3BF.

In addition, when the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R are in a standby state in their home positions, when playing with a left-handed hit or a right-handed hit, for example, when the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R are in a turned-off state, the entire left playing area 3A is not brightly lit by the left-side movable part 14L and becomes dark. The entire right playing area 3B is not brightly lit by the right-side movable part 14R and becomes dark.

In this way, when playing with a left-handed or right-handed player, the left-side movable part 14L lights up and the right-side movable part 14R lights up in the home position, so that the left-hand light-emitting area 3AF and the right-hand light-emitting area 3BF are brightly illuminated, creating the effect of an electric decorative member being placed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, an electric decorative member being fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z) and creating an illumination effect using the electric decorative member. In other words, an illumination effect equivalent to that of an electric decorative member can be created without placing an electric decorative member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Next, when the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R advance (move) from their home positions toward the advance position (in the direction approaching each other) in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 148 (B), when playing with a left hand or a right hand, at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (advance position (deployed position)), the left decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the left movable part 14L, and the right decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip of the right movable part 14R, combine to form a single decorative member (combined part) with a ring shape, in which the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R form a ring-shaped member.

When the left decorative part of the left movable part 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable part 14R combine to form a combined part having a ring shape, the area formed within the ring becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as the "circular area"). A smiling image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 that corresponds to the circular area.

At this time, the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R have already advanced (moved) from the home position toward the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction approaching each other). Therefore, even if the left movable part 14L emits light, that is, even if the upper arc-shaped left movable part 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable part 14LD emit light, the light does not brightly illuminate the left-side light-emitting area 3AF, which is the forward area of the left play area 3A corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left movable part 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable part 14LD, but is irradiated forward at the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a without passing through the transparent acrylic plate 2z. Also, even if the right-side movable part 14R emits light, that is, the upper arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RD emit light, the light does not brightly illuminate the right-side light-emitting area 3BF, which is the area in front of the right play area 3B that corresponds to the upper arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right-side movable part 14RD, but is irradiated forward without passing through the transparent acrylic plate 2z at the advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a.

In this embodiment, the effect of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R advancing (moving) from the home position (in a direction approaching each other) toward the advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a indicates the start of an effect with a high expectation of a jackpot, so when the player sees the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R advancing (moving) from the home position (in a direction approaching each other) toward the advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a, the player's anticipation for the ongoing effect increases.

In this way, when playing with a left-handed or right-handed player, when the left-hand movable part 14L and the right-hand movable part 14R advance (move) from their home positions (waiting) toward (approaching each other) an advance position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, even if the left-hand movable part 14L and the right-hand movable part 14R emit light, they do not brightly illuminate the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF and the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF.

When an electric decorative member is disposed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, when an electric decorative member is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z), the light-emitting effect of the electric decorative member can be produced even when the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R have advanced (moved) from their home positions toward an advanced position in the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other); however, this may cause viewers to be distracted by the light-emitting effect of the electric decorative member and not be able to emphasize the attention of the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, when the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R advance (move) from their home positions toward the advance position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction approaching each other), even if the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R emit light, they do not brightly illuminate the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF and the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF. This draws the player's attention to the state in which the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R advance (move) from their home positions toward the advance position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction approaching each other), and the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R can be emphasized.

[Example of effect]
Below, an example of the effect of the movable part decorative lighting effect produced by the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate and the first movable part 14 is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the gaming board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIG. 146 and FIG. 147, and in the movable accessory decorative light-emitting performance of FIG. 148, the gaming board 2 has a transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part) in which the game area 3 is formed, and a plurality of game nails are protruding from the front surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part), and the gaming board 2 has a plurality of left movable accessory 14L (movable body) capable of emitting light behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part) (in addition to the left movable accessory 14L, The left movable part 14R is arranged on the left side of the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and the left movable part 14L (movable body) is visible through the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part). When the left movable part 14L (movable body) is waiting at the home position and emits light, the first performance (FIG. 147(E), FIG. 148(A)) can be executed, which illuminates the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) of the game area 3 corresponding to the left movable part 14L (movable body). According to this configuration, since the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) is brightly illuminated, it is possible to realize an expression in which an electric decoration member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, an electric decoration member is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z) and a light-emitting performance is performed by the electric decoration member. In other words, a light-emitting performance equivalent to that of an electric decoration member can be performed without providing an electric decoration member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the gaming board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate in FIG. 146 and FIG. 147, and the movable accessory decorative light-emitting performance in FIG. 148, when the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) emits light, the gaming ball flowing down the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) is easier to see than the gaming ball flowing down the left game area 3A (area) except the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF that is not illuminated by the light emitted by the left-hand movable accessory 14L (movable body). According to this configuration, the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) is brightly illuminated by the light emitted by the left-hand movable accessory 14L (movable body), which can contribute to emphasizing the rolling tendency of the gaming ball flowing down the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area). Furthermore, when adjusting the launch strength of the gaming ball, when the player operates the handle 60, the rolling direction of the gaming ball depending on the strength of the launch strength can be easily seen, which can contribute to making it easier to adjust the launch strength.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the gaming board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate in Fig. 146 and Fig. 147, and the movable accessory decorative light-emitting performance in Fig. 148, when the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) emits light, the gaming nails protruding (planted) in the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) are illuminated. With this configuration, the path through which the gaming ball flows down can be easily emphasized to the player.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the gaming board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate as shown in Figures 146 and 147 and the movable role decorative light-emitting performance as shown in Figure 148, the gaming area 3 has a left gaming area 3A (first flow-down area) where the gaming ball flows down the left side of the gaming area 3, and a right gaming area 3B (second flow-down area) where the gaming ball flows down the right side of the gaming area 3, and the left movable role 14L and right movable role 14R (movable bodies) arranged in multiple numbers on the gaming board 2 include one that illuminates the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left gaming area 3A (first flow-down area) and one that illuminates the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right gaming area 3B (second flow-down area). According to this configuration, in the left game area 3A, game balls flowing down the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF can be brightly illuminated to make them easy to see, and in the right game area 3B, game balls flowing down the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF can be brightly illuminated to make them easy to see.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the gaming board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate as shown in Figures 146 and 147, and the first performance in the movable role decorative light-emitting performance of Figure 148, when a left-handed hit (first game) is being performed in which the game ball flows down to the left game area 3A (first flow-down area), when movable bodies such as the left-side movable role 14L and the right-side movable role 14R light up, this may illuminate the left-handed side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left game area 3A (first flow-down area) and the right-handed side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow-down area). According to this configuration, when the left-hand side movable part 14L and the right-hand side movable part 14R emit light during left-hand play (first play), the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left play area 3A (first flow-down area) and the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right play area 3B (second flow-down area) are illuminated and brightened. Also, when the left-hand side movable part 14L emits light and the right-hand side movable part 14R is turned off during left-hand play (first play), the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left play area 3A (first flow-down area) is illuminated and brightened, and the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right play area 3B (second flow-down area) is not illuminated and is darkened. Also, when the left hand hit (first game) is being performed, when the left hand movable role 14L is turned off and the right hand movable role 14R is illuminated, the left hand side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left play area 3A (first flow down area) is not illuminated and becomes dark, and the right hand side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right play area 3B (second flow down area) is illuminated and becomes bright. In this way, when the left hand hit (first game) is being performed, it is possible to give variation to the light emitting state of the left hand side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right play area 3B (second flow down area).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the gaming board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate as shown in Figures 146 and 147, and the first performance in the movable role decorative light-emitting performance of Figure 148, when a right-handed hit (second game) is being performed in which the game ball flows down to the right game area 3B (second flow-down area), when movable bodies such as the left-side movable role 14L and the right-side movable role 14R light up, this may illuminate the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left game area 3A (first flow-down area) and the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow-down area). According to this configuration, when the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R emit light during right-hand play (second play), the left-hand play side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left play area 3A (first flow-down area) and the right-hand play side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right play area 3B (second flow-down area) are illuminated and brightened. Also, when the left movable part 14L emits light and the right movable part 14R is turned off during right-hand play (second play), the left-hand play side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left play area 3A (first flow-down area) is illuminated and brightened, and the right-hand play side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right play area 3B (second flow-down area) is not illuminated and is darkened. Also, when the left-hand movable role 14L is turned off and the right-hand movable role 14R is illuminated during right-hand play (second game), the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left game area 3A (first flow-down area) is not illuminated and becomes dark, and the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second flow-down area) is illuminated and becomes bright. In this way, when right-hand play (second game) is being performed, it is possible to provide variation in the light-emitting state of the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right game area 3B (second flow-down area).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable part decorative illumination performance of Figure 148, when movable bodies such as the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R move from the home position to an advanced position (performance position) in the center of the front (forward) of the display screen 7a, a second performance (Figure 148 (B)) can be executed in which they combine to become a single decorative member (combined part) (combined movable body). With this configuration, what the player perceives as an electric decorative member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z suddenly becomes the left movable part 14L or the right movable part 14R and moves from the home position to the advanced position (performance position) in the center of the front (forward) of the display screen 7a, combining to become a single decorative member (combined part) (combined movable body), providing an unexpected performance for the player of the electric decorative member changing into a movable body, and further providing an illumination performance equivalent to that produced by an electric decorative member fixed in a predetermined position, with movable bodies such as the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance of the movable part decorative light-emitting performance of Figure 148, even if a single decorative member (combined part) (combined movable body) consisting of the left-side movable part 14L and the right-side movable part 14R emits light, it does not illuminate the left-side light-emitting area 3AF and the right-side light-emitting area 3BF. According to this configuration, when movable bodies such as the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R emit light when they advance (move) from the home position (in the direction approaching each other) toward the advance position (performance position) in the center of the front (forward) of the display screen 7a, they do not brightly illuminate the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF and the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF. This draws the player's attention to the state in which the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R have advanced (moved) from the home position (in the direction approaching each other) toward the advance position (performance position) in the center of the front (forward) of the display screen 7a, thereby emphasizing movable bodies such as the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R.

[Modification]
Below are shown modified examples of a game board with a transparent acrylic panel and movable gimmick decorations and light-emitting effects.
[Modification 1]
In the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate in FIG. 146 and FIG. 147, and the movable role decoration light-emitting performance in FIG. 148, the effect was performed during the variable performance (variable display) by the decorative pattern. However, it may be performed as a part of the demo performance for waiting for customers. In this way, before playing a game, it is possible to experience the movable role decoration light-emitting performance that can be experienced when actually playing a game. In addition, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) waits for a predetermined waiting time to elapse, sets a customer waiting standby command for displaying a waiting scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and outputs it to the sub-control board 90. The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the customer waiting standby command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the command to execute the movable role decoration light-emitting performance is included, it reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the customer waiting standby command received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the position and light-emitting mode of the first movable role 14 provided on the game board 2.

[Modification 2]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate in FIG. 146 and FIG. 147 and the movable accessory decorative light-emitting performance in FIG. 148, a transparent acrylic plate 2z, which is a transparent acrylic plate, is used as the transparent part formed in the game area 2. However, instead of the transparent acrylic plate 2z, a plywood (so-called plywood) is used as an opaque plate, and further, a through hole is provided in the part corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD, and in the part corresponding to the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD, and a transparent part (which may be transparent or translucent) may be provided at the position of the cel picture pasted on the front of the plywood (so-called plywood) corresponding to this through hole. In addition, this through hole may be configured to be blocked by a transparent member (for example, a transparent acrylic member). This transparent member may be shaped.

[Modification 3]
In the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate in Fig. 146 and Fig. 147, and the movable accessory decoration light-emitting performance in Fig. 148, in the home position, the left decorative part having a half arc shape of the left movable accessory 14L is divided into an upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and a lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD, and the right decorative part having a half arc shape of the right movable accessory 14R is divided into an upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and a lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD. However, the left decorative part having a half arc shape of the left movable accessory 14L may be in a standby state without being divided into upper and lower parts at the home position, and the right decorative part having a half arc shape of the right movable accessory 14R may be in a standby state without being divided into upper and lower parts at the home position.

Even when the left decorative part, which has an arc shape that is half the ring shape of the left movable part 14L, waits in the home position as it is, it may overlap with a part of the left decorative part or the whole of the left decorative part in the front-to-back direction with the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part), so this overlapping area is formed as the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF, and when the left movable part 14L emits light, it can brightly illuminate the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF. Also, even when the right decorative part, which has an arc shape that is half the ring shape of the right movable part 14R, waits in the home position as it is, it may overlap with a part of the right decorative part or the whole of the right decorative part in the front-to-back direction with the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part), so this overlapping area is formed as the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF, and when the right movable part 14R emits light, it can brightly illuminate the right-hand side light-emitting area 3BF.

[Modification 4]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate in FIG. 146 and FIG. 147, the movable bodies such as the left movable part 14L and the right movable part 14R are arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part), and no decorative member is arranged in the space between the back surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part) and the front surface of the movable body. However, a decorative member having a transparent part may be arranged in the space between the back surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part) and the front surface of the movable body, and the decorative member may be fixed so that the positional relationship between the decorative member and the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part) does not change. The decorative member having a transparent part is not equipped with any light-emitting part such as a full-color LED, and is arranged on the back surface side of the transparent acrylic plate 2z via another member. The decorative member having a transparent part may or may not be attached to the back surface side of the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

A decorative member having a transparent part is placed in front of the left movable part 14L at a position corresponding to the home position of the left movable part 14L to hide the presence of the left movable part 14L, and when the left movable part 14L emits light, the light is irradiated forward through the transparent part of the decorative member. The transparent part of the decorative member may be, for example, a transparent acrylic member, which may be shaped, or may be an inner lens. The inner lens refracts light incident from the rear in a staggered manner, and when the left movable part 14L is placed behind the inner lens, it is possible to make the presence of the left movable part 14L difficult to recognize, so that the inner lens of the decorative member makes it difficult to see the left movable part 14L. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent. This makes it possible to realize an expression in which an electric decoration member is placed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, an electric decoration member is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z) and a light-emitting performance is being performed by the electric decoration member. In other words, it is possible to perform the same light-emitting performance as that of the electric decoration member without providing an electric decoration member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. Also, when the left movable part 14L advances (moves) from the home position toward the advance position (performance position) at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other), even if the left movable part 14L emits light, the light does not pass through the transparent part of the decoration member, so that the light emitted from the decoration member having the transparent part disappears, and the left movable part 14L can be emphasized by drawing the player's attention to the state in which the left movable part 14L advances (moves) from the home position toward the advance position (performance position) at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other). In other words, the left-side movable part 14L, which is waiting in the home position, has its presence hidden by the decorative member, so when the left-side movable part 14L emits light, it is possible to emphasize the presence of the decorative member with a transparent part located in front of the left-side movable part 14L, whereas when the left-side movable part 14L, which has advanced (moved) from the home position, emits light, it does not need to hide its own presence by emphasizing the presence of the decorative member with a transparent part, and can now emphasize its own presence.

In addition, by arranging a decorative member having a transparent part in front of the right-side movable part 14R at a position corresponding to the home position of the right-side movable part 14R, the presence of the right-side movable part 14R is hidden (in other words, the right-side movable part 14R is difficult to see due to the decorative member), and when the right-side movable part 14R emits light, the light is irradiated forward through the transparent part of the decorative member. The transparent part of the decorative member may be, for example, a transparent acrylic member, which may be shaped, or may be an inner lens. The inner lens refracts light incident from the rear in a staggered manner, and when the right-side movable part 14R is arranged behind the inner lens, it is possible to make the presence of the right-side movable part 14R difficult to recognize, so that the right-side movable part 14R can be made difficult to see by the inner lens in the decorative member. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent. This makes it possible to realize an expression in which an electric decorative member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, an electric decorative member is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z) and a light-emitting performance is being performed by the electric decorative member. In other words, it is possible to perform the same light-emitting performance as that of the electric decoration member without providing an electric decoration member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. Also, when the right movable role 14R advances (moves) from the home position toward the advance position (performance position) at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other), even if the right movable role 14R emits light, the light does not pass through the transparent part of the decoration member, so there is no light emitted from the decoration member having a transparent part, and the right movable role 14R can be emphasized by drawing the player's attention to the state in which the right movable role 14R advances (moves) from the home position toward the advance position (performance position) at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction of approaching each other). In other words, the right-side movable part 14R, which is waiting in the home position, is hidden by the decorative member, so when the right-side movable part 14R emits light, the presence of the decorative member with a transparent part located in front of the right-side movable part 14R is emphasized, whereas when the right-side movable part 14R emits light and has advanced (moved) from the home position, there is no need to hide its own presence by emphasizing the presence of the decorative member with a transparent part, and it can now emphasize its own presence.

[Modification 5]
In the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate in FIG. 146 and FIG. 147 and the movable role decoration light-emitting performance in FIG. 148, the first movable role 14 is provided with a decorative board on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted, and an inner lens is arranged to cover the front of the decorative board, and the inner lens and the decorative board are housed in a decorative member. An opening is formed in the decorative member, and the inner lens is exposed from the opening. The inner lens diffracts the light from the plurality of full-color LEDs, and is designed to make it difficult to recognize the presence of the decorative board arranged behind the inner lens, so that even when all the plurality of full-color LEDs are turned off, the plurality of full-color LEDs are difficult to see through the inner lens. In other words, in the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate in FIG. 146 and FIG. 147 and the movable role decoration light-emitting performance in FIG. 148, the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board housed in the first movable role 14 are difficult to see through the inner lens. However, in order to make the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board housed in the first movable part 14 easily visible, an inner lens may be formed, or a transparent member with a design may be used instead of the inner lens. This transparent member may be transparent or translucent.

[Modification 6]
In the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate in Fig. 146 and Fig. 147 and the movable accessory decoration light-emitting performance in Fig. 148, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a standby state at the home position, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R may be in a light-emitting state when playing a game by hitting the left or hitting the right. However, when switching from a game by hitting the left to a game by hitting the right, the left movable accessory 14L may be turned off and the right movable accessory 14R may be turned on, or when switching from a game by hitting the right to a game by hitting the left, the left movable accessory 14L may be turned on and the right movable accessory 14R may be turned off. In this way, when switching between a game by hitting the left and a game by hitting the right, the light-emitting state of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R can clearly inform the player which way to play.

[Modification 7]
In the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate in Fig. 147(E) and the movable role decoration light-emitting performance in Fig. 148, when the upper arc-shaped right movable role 14RU in the left-hand side light-emitting area 3AF emits light, the area brightly illuminated by the light does not have game pins protruding (planted). However, game pins may be protruding (planted). In this way, the game pins are brightly illuminated, so that the path through which the game balls flow can be easily highlighted to the player.

[Modification 8]
The movable prop decoration lighting effect of Figure 148 may not include some of the effects described, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine having a transparent portion in which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming board on which a plurality of gaming nails are protruding from a front surface of the transparent portion,
A plurality of movable bodies capable of emitting light are arranged behind the transparent portion on the game board,
The movable body is visible through the transparent portion,
When the movable body emits light while waiting at a home position, a first performance can be executed in which a specific area of the game area corresponding to the movable body is illuminated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1,
When the movable body emits light, the game ball flowing down the specific area is easier to see than the game ball flowing down the area not illuminated by the light emitted by the movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 or E2-2,
When the movable body emits light, the game nails protruding from the specific area are illuminated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3,
The game area has a first flow-down area where game balls flow down the left side of the game area, and a second flow-down area where game balls flow down the right side of the game area,
The movable bodies arranged in plurality on the game board include one that illuminates the specific area in the first flow-down area and one that illuminates the specific area in the second flow-down area,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-4,
In the first performance, when a first game in which a game ball flows down to the first flow-down area is being played, if the movable body emits light, the specific area in the first flow-down area and the specific area in the second flow-down area may be illuminated.
A gaming machine characterized by:
Aspect E2-6
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-4 or E2-5,
In the first performance, when a second game in which a game ball flows down to the second flow-down area is being played, if the movable body emits light, the specific area in the first flow-down area and the specific area in the second flow-down area may be illuminated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E2-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-6,
When the movable body moves from the home position to a performance position, a second performance can be executed in which the movable body combines with the movable body to form a combined movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E2-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-7,
In the second performance, even if the combined movable body emits light, the specific area is not illuminated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The W mode display effect will be explained below with reference to Figures 149 to 151. This W mode display effect can be executed during the special symbol variation effect, etc. In other words, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a, thereby realizing the effect. Note that in the W mode display effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are actually displayed, but are omitted from the figures. Also, the left sub-display screen 64L is configured to have a smaller display screen area than the main display screen 7a.

[W mode display effect A]
FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the W mode display performance A. In this W mode display performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 149 (A), a decorative pattern variation performance is executed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used to perform the variation display of the decorative pattern, and the first mode image XH1, the second mode image XH2, and the button image XH3 are displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and the button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing mode C. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing mode C. In each mode, the background image, music, sound effects, frequency of appearance of a predetermined character, type of character, frequency of appearance of Chance Up, and probability of winning the Chance Up are set. The settings of these are different for each of the modes A to C. In the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are displayed in parallel without overlapping. On the other hand, in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68, and is an image for encouraging the player to change the mode by operating the select button 68. In this W mode display presentation, the mode can be changed whether the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing or the reach presentation is in progress. In the example of Fig. 149(A), mode A is selected, and in the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11 is displayed dark (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21 is arranged at the top, suggesting that the mode is A. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R pass at high speed over the mode A image XH11, mode B image XH12, and mode C image XH13, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(B), a decorative pattern slow-changing performance is performed. In this decorative pattern slow-changing performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R slowly change and pass over the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, respectively. In this case, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in front, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are hidden by the decorative patterns and cannot be seen. Also, a player who sees the button image XH3 operates the select button 68 to change the mode from mode A to mode B. Therefore, in the first mode image XH1, the mode B image XH12 is displayed dark (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, the mode B image XH22 is placed at the top.

Next, as shown in Fig. 149(C), a decorative symbol stop performance is performed. In this decorative symbol stop performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed on the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, respectively. In this case, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are hidden by the decorative symbols in the portions where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in front and cannot be seen. In Fig. 149(C), the mode B image XH12 is displayed dark in the first mode image XH1, and the mode B image XH22 is displayed in the second mode image XH2, that is, the mode remains B.
After this decorative symbol stop performance, in the case of a big win, a big win symbol arrangement is displayed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the case of a loss, a loss symbol arrangement is displayed.

[W mode display effect B]
FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the W mode display performance B. In this W mode display performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 150(A), a decorative pattern variation performance is executed. In this decorative pattern variation performance, the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are used to perform the variation display of the decorative pattern, and the first mode image XH1, the second mode image XH2, and the button image XH3 are displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and the button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing mode C. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing mode C. In each mode, the background image, music, sound effects, frequency of appearance of a predetermined character, type of character, frequency of appearance of Chance Up, and probability of winning the Chance Up are set. The settings of these are different for each of the modes A to C. In the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are displayed in parallel without overlapping. On the other hand, in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68, and is an image for encouraging the player to change the mode by operating the select button 68. In this W mode display presentation, the mode can be changed whether the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing or the reach presentation is in progress. In the example of Fig. 150(A), mode A is selected, and in the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11 is displayed dark (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21 is arranged at the top, suggesting that the mode is A. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R pass at high speed over the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(B), character appearance presentation 1 is performed. In this character appearance presentation 1, character image XH4 is displayed on main display screen 7a, and this character image XH4 moves on main display screen 7a, passing over mode A image XH11, mode B image XH12, and mode C image XH13. In this case, when character image XH4 is in front, the mode A image XH11, mode B image XH12, and mode C image XH13 are hidden by character image XH4 and cannot be seen. Also, a player who sees button image XH3 operates select button 68 to change the mode from mode A to mode B. Therefore, in the first mode image XH1, mode B image XH12 is displayed dark (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, mode B image XH22 is placed at the top.

Next, as shown in Fig. 150(C), character appearance presentation 2 is performed. In this character appearance presentation 2, the character image XH4 moves to the left sub-display screen 64L and moves to the position of the second mode image XH2. In this case, the character image XH4 moves behind the second mode image XH2, and the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are always visible. In Fig. 150(C), the mode B image XH12 is displayed dark in the first mode image XH1, and the mode B image XH22 is displayed in the second mode image XH2, that is, the mode remains in B.
After this character appearance performance 2, in the case of a big win, a big win pattern arrangement is displayed by the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the case of a loss, a loss pattern arrangement is displayed.

[W mode display effect C]
FIG. 151 is a diagram for explaining the W mode display performance C. In this W mode display performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 151 (A), a decorative pattern change performance is executed. In this decorative pattern change performance, a decorative pattern change display is executed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the center decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and a first mode image XH1, a second mode image XH2, and a button image XH3 are displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and the button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing mode C. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing mode C. In each mode, the background image, music, sound effects, frequency of appearance of a predetermined character, type of character, frequency of appearance of Chance Up, and probability of winning the Chance Up are set. The settings of these are different for each of the modes A to C. In the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are displayed in parallel without overlapping. On the other hand, in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68, and is an image for encouraging the player to change the mode by operating the select button 68. In this W mode display presentation, the mode can be changed whether the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing or the reach presentation is in progress. In the example of Fig. 151(A), mode A is selected, and in the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11 is displayed dark (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21 is arranged at the top, suggesting that the mode is A. Also, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R pass at high speed over the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(B), a mode change presentation is performed. In this mode change presentation, the player, upon looking at button image XH3, operates select button 68 to change the mode from mode A to mode B. Therefore, in this mode change presentation, mode B image XH12 is displayed darker (indicated by hatching in the figure) in first mode image XH1, and mode B image XH22 is positioned at the top in second mode image XH2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(C), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped at the "7" symbol, and the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach state. In this reach effect, a character image XH4 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and this character image XH4 moves on the main display screen 7a, passing over the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13. In this case, when the character image XH4 is in front, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are hidden by the character image XH4 and cannot be seen. In this reach effect, mode B is continuously selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151 (D), a button press effect is performed. In this button press effect, a button image XH5 is displayed together with a character image XH4. This button image XH5 represents the effect button 63, and is an image for encouraging the player to press the effect button 63. Note that in this button press effect, mode B continues to be selected.

Next, as shown in Fig. 151 (E), a chance-up effect is performed. In this chance-up effect, a character image XH6 is displayed when a player who has seen the button image XH5 presses the effect button 63. This character image XH6 is written as "Super Hot," which is a chance-up that suggests a relatively high probability of winning a jackpot. Note that in this chance-up effect, mode B is continuously selected.
After this chance-up performance, in the case of a big win, a big win pattern arrangement is displayed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the case of a loss, a loss pattern arrangement is displayed.

[Modification]
In the above W mode display presentation, the Mode A image XH21, Mode B image XH22, and Mode C image XH23 are arranged so as to overlap in the second mode image XH2 of the left sub-display screen 64L, but this is not limited thereto, and the Mode A image XH11, Mode B image XH12, and Mode C image XH13 may be arranged so as to overlap in the first mode image XH1. Also, in the second mode image XH2, the Mode A image XH21, Mode B image XH22, and Mode C image XH23 may be arranged in parallel so as not to overlap.
In the above W mode display performance, the first mode image XH1 and the second mode image XH2 are respectively composed of a mode A image, a mode B image, and a mode C image, but are not limited to this. For example, the first mode image XH1 and the second mode image XH2 may each be composed of different mode images. For example, a mode A image XH11, a mode B image XH12, and a mode C image XH13 may be displayed as the first mode image XH1, and a mode D image representing a mode D different from modes A to C, a mode E image different from modes A to D, and a mode F image different from modes A to E may be displayed as the second mode image XH2. Also, a mode A image XH11, a mode B image XH12, and a mode C image XH13 may be displayed as the first mode image XH1, and a mode A image XH21, a mode B image XH22, and a mode D image different from modes A to C may be displayed as the second mode image XH2.

[Example of effect]
In the W mode display presentation, the first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L. With this configuration, the mode is displayed on each of the two display devices, so the player can easily recognize which mode is currently selected and can enjoy the mode presentation. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In the W mode display presentation, the first mode image XH1 displayed on the main display screen 7a and the second mode image XH2 displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L suggest the same mode. With this configuration, the same mode is displayed on each of the two display devices, so the player can easily recognize one mode and enjoy the mode presentation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
In the W mode display performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed when the first mode image XH1 is displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may overlap with the first mode image XH1. In this case, the first mode image XH1 is disposed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and is at least partially hidden by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. According to this configuration, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the main display screen 7a with priority over the mode display, and the left sub-display screen 64L with priority over the mode display. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the mode while enjoying the game performance, and can enjoy the mode performance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
In the W mode display presentation, the character image XH4 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the character image XH4 is displayed when the first mode image XH1 is displayed. The character image XH4 and the first mode image XH1 may overlap, in which case the first mode image XH1 is disposed behind the character image XH4 and is at least partially hidden by the character image XH4. According to this configuration, the variable display of the character image XH4 is prioritized over the mode display on the main display screen 7a, and the mode display is prioritized over the variable display of the character image XH4 on the left sub-display screen 64L, so that the player can easily grasp the mode while enjoying the game presentation, and can also enjoy the mode presentation. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XH-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
the display means includes a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display performance may be performed as one of the plurality of display performances,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first mode suggestion display on the first display means, the first mode suggestion display suggesting a mode,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a second mode suggestion display on the second display means, the second mode suggestion display suggesting a mode,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-1,
a mode represented by the first mode suggestion display and a mode represented by the second mode suggestion display are the same;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display performance is a performance in which a decorative pattern is displayed variably on the first display means,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is being performed, the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-3,
In the combination performance, when the third display performance is performed while the first display performance is being performed, if the first mode suggestion display and the decorative pattern overlap in the first display means, the first mode suggestion display is disposed behind the decorative pattern and is hidden by the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect XH-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect XH-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which a predetermined image different from the decorative pattern is displayed on the first display means,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination presentation, when the first display presentation is being performed, the fourth display presentation is performed, and when the first mode suggestion display and the predetermined image overlap, the first mode suggestion display is disposed behind the predetermined image and is hidden by the predetermined image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
The following aspect may also be adopted.
The first mode suggestion display (first mode image XH1) and the second mode suggestion display (second mode image XH2) are displayed simultaneously.
The first mode suggestion display includes a plurality of mode displays, and these plurality of mode displays are displayed so as not to overlap each other.
The second mode suggestion display includes a plurality of mode displays, and these plurality of mode displays are displayed so as to overlap each other.
The first display means (main display screen 7a) has a display screen area larger than that of the second display means (left sub-display screen 64L).
A predetermined image (character image XH4, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) may be displayed on the first display means and the second display means, and when the predetermined image is in a position where it overlaps with the second mode suggestion display, the second mode suggestion display is located in front of the predetermined image and is visible, and when the predetermined image is in a position where it overlaps with the first mode suggestion display, the first mode suggestion display is located behind the predetermined image and the overlapping portion is not visible.
On the second display means, the second mode suggestion display is displayed in association with a first operation unit image (e.g., button image XH3) representing a first operation unit (e.g., select button 68) for changing the mode, and on the first display means, a second operation unit image (e.g., button image XH5) representing a second operation unit (e.g., effect button 63) is displayed, and when the player operates the second operation unit, a predetermined effect (e.g., display of text image XH6) different from the change of mode is performed (see W mode display effect C).

The movable part operation warning presentation will be explained below with reference to Figures 152 to 154. In Figures 152 to 154, for example, the first movable part 14, the second movable part 15, and other movable parts arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 have been omitted for ease of viewing.

This movable part operation warning effect can be executed after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, and can also be executed during the decorative pattern change effect (changing display). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (e.g., a change effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the movable part operation warning effect is included, it reads corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays an image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

Here, we will explain how to lock the sword member 65 to the upper tray 61, and then explain the movable part operation warning effect A and the movable part operation warning effect B in that order.

[Method of locking the sword member 65 to the upper tray 61]
First, a method for locking the sword member 65 to the upper tray 61 will be described with reference to Fig. 152. Fig. 152 is a diagram for explaining a method for locking the sword member 65 to the upper tray 61.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operation part that resembles a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. For this reason, the sword member 65 is a movable part that can be pushed downward by the player in its entirety. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 65, i.e., the end of the sword handle. This sword button is an operation part that is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. For this reason, the sword button is a movable part that can be operated (pressed) by the player. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation in which the entire sword member 65 is pushed downward, and a second operation in which the sword button at the tip is pressed.

The sword and handle parts of the sword component 65 are decorative components that can emit light, and can emit light in a predetermined light pattern as the performance progresses. In other words, the sword component 65 has decorative components, and can emit light in various light patterns by emitting light from the decorative components.

The method of locking the sword member 65 to the upper tray 61 is to first insert the sword member 65 into an insertion port (not shown) on the left side of the top surface of the upper tray 61 and rotate it counterclockwise HTY while pushing it downward, as shown in FIG. 152(A). Then, as shown in FIG. 152(B), by continuing to rotate it until a "click" is heard, the locking of the sword member 65 to the upper tray 61 is completed.

When this locking is complete, the sword member 65 is rotated slightly around the vertical axis of the sword member 65 relative to the player seated in front of the gaming machine 1, making it easy for the player to grasp the handle of the sword member 65 with both hands and push the sword member 65 downward.

Inside the upper tray 61, a locking completion sensor (not shown) is provided to detect when the sword member 65 is locked, and a detection signal from the locking completion sensor is input to the sub-control board 90. An electrical circuit is configured so that the detection signal from the locking completion sensor becomes a locking completion logic when the sword member 65 is locked to the upper tray 61 (hereinafter referred to as "locking completion"), and becomes a locking incomplete logic that is the inverse of the locking completion logic when the sword member 65 is not locked to the upper tray 61 (hereinafter referred to as "locking incomplete").

The electrical circuit is pre-configured so that if the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the lock complete sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring becomes disconnected from the connector on the board, the logic of the detection signal from the lock complete sensor becomes lock incomplete logic. This allows the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 to be notified that some kind of trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the lock complete sensor, and the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 can report this trouble by a warning image or warning sound (specific sound).

In addition to the sword member 65 that the player can operate, the upper tray 61 is also provided with a performance button 63 and a select button 68 that the player can operate. The performance button 63 is operated (pressed) by the player during a performance that is executed as the game progresses. For this reason, the performance button 63 is a movable part that the player can operate (press). The select button 68 is operated (pressed) by the player during a performance that is executed as the game progresses, or when a predetermined setting of the gaming machine 1 is changed. For this reason, the select button 68 is a movable part that the player can operate (press). In this way, the upper tray 61 is provided with the sword member 65, the sword button of the sword member 65, the performance button 63, and the select button 68 as multiple movable parts that the player can operate (press), and further, all of the movable parts are arranged on the upper tray 61, which is easily visible, so all of the movable parts are arranged in positions that are easily visible to the player.

The performance button 63 has a transparent pressing member that is operated (pressed) by the player, and a decorative member that can emit light is provided inside the pressing member. When this decorative member emits light, the light passes through the pressing member, causing the performance button 63 to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting manner.

The select button 68 has a pressing member that is operated (pressed) by the player, which is made of a transparent material, and a decorative member capable of emitting light is provided inside the pressing member. When this decorative member emits light, the light passes through the pressing member, allowing the select button 68 to emit light in a predetermined luminous manner. Note that the pressing member of the select button 68 may be made of an opaque material (e.g., a material having a black color). In this case, no decorative member capable of emitting light is provided inside the pressing member of the select button 68, and the select button 68 does not emit light.

[Movable part operation warning effect A]
Next, the movable part operation warning performance A will be described with reference to Fig. 153. Fig. 153 is a diagram for explaining the movable part operation warning performance A. The movable part operation warning performance A can be executed after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, and can also be executed during the change performance (change display) by the decorative pattern. Here, the movable part operation warning performance A executed during the change performance (change display) by the decorative pattern will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 153(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (change display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the change performance (change display) of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a black spherical variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the third reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icon is displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only three reserved icons that have not been consumed and are stocked. For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change performance (change display) starts in FIG. 153(A), then, as shown in FIG. 153(B), a performance button image BG that imitates the performance button 63 is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, an arrow image YBG that moves up and down is displayed above the performance button image BG, and a message MG1 that prompts the user to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed near the top edge of the display screen 7a. At this time, the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

If the player then rotates the sword member 65 in the opposite direction to the counterclockwise direction HTY shown in FIG. 152(A), that is, clockwise, without operating (pressing) the effect button 63, the image shown in FIG. 153(B) continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 153(C), prompting the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, and a warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screen 64. In other words, a warning is issued because the player has operated (rotated clockwise) the sword member 65. Here, the warning is issued because the player has not gained anything or felt a sense of accomplishment by operating (rotating) the sword member 65 (in the statistical direction).

This warning image is an image that notifies the user that the sword member 65 has not yet been locked, and also conveys how to release the warning. In other words, the warning image is an image that notifies the user that the sword member 65 has not yet been locked, and also conveys how to complete the locking of the sword member 65.

In the center of the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, an incompletely locked sword image KG is displayed, which imitates the sword member 65 and is in the same position as the sword member 65 is in when it is not yet locked. Below the incompletely locked sword image KG, a message MG2 reading "Warning" is displayed, and below the message MG2, a message MG3 reading "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the locking" is displayed, and a counterclockwise arrow image YG indicating the direction of rotation is displayed around the center of the incompletely locked sword image KG.

Note that while the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, the sound of the message MG3 saying "Turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the locking" is repeatedly played from the speaker 67 as a warning sound (specific sound). In other words, in this embodiment, there is no dedicated sound for warning, and the sound of the message MG3 conveying how to cancel the warning is also used as a sound for warning. In other words, the warning sound has the functions of both a sound for warning and a sound of the message MG3 conveying how to cancel the warning.

Next, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 153(D), the effect condition is met in which the ally character CRA appears in the center of the display screen 7a as a result of the player's operation (pressing). At this time, the warning image shown in FIG. 153(C) continues to be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screen 64.

In this embodiment, when the ally character CRA is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, this indicates the start of a presentation that has a high expectation of a big win, so when the player sees the ally character CRA displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, their anticipation for the presentation that will proceed increases.

Here, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, causing an ally character CRA to appear, giving the player a sense of accomplishment. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, there are cases in which the ally character CRA does not appear in the center of the display screen 7a.

Then, various effects may continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), a jackpot is reached and a jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins, whereas when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), a miss occurs. When a jackpot or miss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, reserved display position 9Ad, and reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variation.

If, after FIG. 153(D), the player accidentally rotates the sword member 65 counterclockwise to return it to its original state after having rotated it clockwise, the warning image disappears from the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screen 64, and the audio of the message MG3 saying "Please rotate the sword member in the direction of the arrow until you hear a click to complete the locking" no longer comes from the speaker 67.

[Movable part operation warning effect B]
Next, the movable part operation warning performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 154. Fig. 154 is a diagram for explaining the movable part operation warning performance B. The movable part operation warning performance B can be executed after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, and can also be executed during the change performance (change display) by the decorative pattern. Here, the movable part operation warning performance B executed during the change performance (change display) by the decorative pattern will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 154(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts a display mode in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the center decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a change performance (changing display) of the decorative patterns (patterns: numbers "1" to "9") is started. When the change performance (changing display) of the decorative patterns starts, the decorative patterns displayed as stopped are displayed in a display mode in which they change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing their speed from a low speed, and change at high speed. This allows the background image arranged behind the decorative patterns to be viewed through the semi-transparent decorative patterns that are changing at high speed. The decorative patterns slow down just before stopping, change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and are displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped (displayed as temporarily stopped, and then displayed as stopped). In addition, when the decorative patterns are displayed as temporarily stopped, they are displayed in a display mode in which they move slowly in small vertical movements.

The currently changing icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R as the first special reserved pattern is consumed are displayed at the change display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A reserved display area is provided as the first special reserved pattern in the area of the display screen 7a to the left of the change display position 9Cd. In this reserved display area, four reserved display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image) can display reserved icons, and a maximum of four reserved icons can be stocked. The four reserved display positions 9Ad are aligned and displayed in a straight line along the bottom edge of the display screen 7a in the order of the first reserved display position 9Ad, the second reserved display position 9Ad, the third reserved display position 9Ad, and the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, from the position closest to the change display position 9Cd toward the left edge of the display screen 7a.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical reserved icon 9A is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad to the third reserved display position 9Ad, and no reserved icon is displayed at the fourth reserved display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only three reserved icons that have not been consumed and are stocked. For ease of explanation, the following explanation assumes that no game balls enter the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21.

In addition to the reserved icon 9A corresponding to the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the reserved icon 9B corresponding to the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21, which are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable performance (variable display) of the decorative pattern, the first special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special reserve based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 are displayed as numbers not shown in the figure at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of first special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 is displayed on the left side as a blue number, and the number of second special reserves based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 is displayed on the right side as a red number, always spaced apart from each other and arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a. These numbers are displayed as numerical values representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making them easy to understand intuitively. These numbers are placed at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not obstructed by other images.

Here, briefly explaining the reserved icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "icon"), the differences in shape and color indicate the differences in the expectation of winning at the time of the lottery corresponding to the icon. For example, of the four icons, namely, the yellow (gold) star icon, the black spherical icon, the smiling sphere icon, and the white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest expectation of winning, the black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of winning. For the smiling sphere icon, the expectation of winning is further set in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (high probability of winning)).

When the decorative pattern change performance (change display) starts in FIG. 154(A), a locked sword image PG, which imitates the sword member 65 and is in the same position as when the sword member 65 is locked, is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 154(B), an arrow image YPG moving in the vertical direction is displayed to the right of the locked sword image PG, and a message MG1 encouraging the user to operate the sword member 65 (push it downward) is displayed near the top edge of the display screen 7a. At this time, the change display position 9Cd, the pending display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

If the player then rotates the sword member 65 in the opposite direction to the counterclockwise direction HTY shown in FIG. 152(A), that is, clockwise, without operating the sword member 65 (pushing it downward), the image shown in FIG. 154(B) continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 154(C), urging the player to operate the sword member 65 (pushing it downward), and a warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screen 64. In other words, a warning is issued because the player has operated the sword member 65 (rotated clockwise). Here, the warning is issued because the player has not gained anything or felt a sense of accomplishment by operating the sword member 65 (rotating it in the statistical direction).

This warning image is an image that notifies the user that the sword member 65 has not yet been locked, and also conveys how to release the warning. In other words, the warning image is an image that notifies the user that the sword member 65 has not yet been locked, and also conveys how to complete the locking of the sword member 65.

In the center of the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, an incompletely locked sword image KG is displayed, which imitates the sword member 65 and is in the same position as the sword member 65 is in when it is not yet locked. Below the incompletely locked sword image KG, a message MG2 reading "Warning" is displayed, and below the message MG2, a message MG3 reading "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the locking", is displayed, and a counterclockwise arrow image YG indicating the direction of rotation is displayed around the center of the incompletely locked sword image KG.

Note that while the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, the sound of the message MG3 saying "Turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the locking" is repeatedly played from the speaker 67 as a warning sound (specific sound). In other words, in this embodiment, there is no dedicated sound for warning, and the sound of the message MG3 conveying how to cancel the warning is also used as a sound for warning. In other words, the warning sound has the functions of both a sound for reporting a warning and a sound of the message MG3 conveying how to cancel the warning.

Next, when the player operates the sword member 65 (pushing it downward), as shown in FIG. 154(D), the effect condition is achieved in which the ally character CRA appears in the center of the display screen 7a as a result of the player's operation (pressing). At this time, the warning image shown in FIG. 154(C) continues to be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screen 64.

In this embodiment, when the ally character CRA is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, this indicates the start of a presentation that has a high expectation of a big win, so when the player sees the ally character CRA displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, their anticipation for the presentation that will proceed increases.

Here, the player can feel a sense of accomplishment when an ally character CRA appears as a result of the player operating (pushing) the sword member 65 downward. Note that even if the player operates (pushes) the sword member 65 downward, there are cases where the ally character CRA does not appear in the center of the display screen 7a.

Then, various effects may continue, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), a jackpot is reached and a jackpot game (jackpot effect) begins, whereas when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same pattern (for example, the number "7"), a miss occurs. When a jackpot or miss is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, reserved display position 9Ad, and reserved icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variable icon 9C is no longer displayed due to the end of the variation.

If, after FIG. 154(D), the player accidentally rotates the sword member 65 counterclockwise to return it to its original state after having rotated it clockwise, the warning image disappears from the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screen 64, and the audio of the message MG3 saying "Please rotate the sword member in the direction of the arrow until you hear a click to complete the locking" no longer comes from the speaker 67.

[Example of effect]
Below are some examples of the effects of the moving part operation warning display.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable part operation warning display A of Figure 153 and the movable part operation warning display B of Figure 154, there is a display button 63 and a sword member 65 (moving part) that can be operated by the player (there are multiple moving parts), and the displays using the moving parts can execute a first display in which the display conditions can be achieved by the player's operation (Figure 153 (D) for movable part operation warning display A, Figure 154 (D) for movable part operation warning display B), and a second display in which a warning is issued by the player's operation (Figures 153 (C) and (D) for movable part operation warning display A, Figures 154 (C) and (D) for movable part operation warning display B). According to this configuration, there are cases where the player can feel a sense of accomplishment by achieving the performance conditions through operation, and cases where the player cannot feel a sense of accomplishment through operation and a warning is issued, and since it is possible to make the effect obtained different depending on the moving part operated by the player, when there are multiple moving parts that the player can operate, it is possible to clearly emphasize which moving part gives the player a sense of accomplishment, thereby improving the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable part operation warning presentation A in Fig. 153 and the movable part operation warning presentation B in Fig. 154, while the first presentation is in progress, the second presentation can be executed at the same time. According to this configuration, even if the presentation condition is achieved by the player's operation and the player feels a sense of accomplishment, by always maintaining a situation in which a warning can be issued, it is possible to contribute to preventing the player from performing an operation that would cause a warning to be issued.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable part operation warning performance A of FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning performance B of FIG. 154, a sub-display screen 64 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and in the second performance, a warning image (specific image) informing the player of the method for canceling the warning is displayed. According to this configuration, since the warning image (specific image) informing the player of the method for canceling the warning is displayed on the sub-display screen 64 (display means), the player can quickly respond by knowing the procedure for canceling the warning. In addition, the player can easily notice that there is a problem with the operation of the movable part, which can contribute to preventing the player from operating the movable part for which a warning is issued.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second performance in the movable part operation warning performance A in Fig. 153 and the movable part operation warning performance B in Fig. 154, a notification sound (specific sound) that notifies a warning can be output. According to this configuration, the notification sound (specific sound) first makes the player recognize that a warning has been issued, and can convey that the action performed by the player immediately before the notification sound (specific sound) was issued was a bad action.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the presentation button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning presentation A in Fig. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning presentation B in Fig. 154 are made to emit light. According to this configuration, the movable parts that can be operated by the player are further decorated and emphasized by being illuminated, which can contribute to encouraging the player to operate the movable parts.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the presentation button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning presentation A in Fig. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning presentation B in Fig. 154 are made to have decorative members. According to this configuration, the movable parts that can be operated by the player can be decorated and emphasized with decorative members, which can contribute to making the presence of the movable parts noticeable to the player in an easily understandable manner.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the presentation button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning presentation A in Fig. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning presentation B in Fig. 154 are arranged in positions that are easily visible. This configuration allows the arrangement of the movable parts to be easily understood by the player.

[Modification]
Below, modified examples of the movable part operation warning display are shown.
[Modification 1]
The movable part operation warning presentation A in Fig. 153 and the movable part operation warning presentation B in Fig. 154 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. In other words, they are performed in a game state of so-called left-handed hitting. However, they may be performed based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21. In other words, they may be performed in a game state of so-called right-handed hitting.

[Modification 2]
In the movable part operation warning presentation A of FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning presentation B of FIG. 154(C), a notification sound (specific sound) for notifying a warning can be output. However, the notification sound (specific sound) may not be output. That is, a warning image may be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L. In addition, as the output of the notification sound (specific sound), the volume of the notification sound (specific sound) may be made smaller than the volume of the presentation sound for the presentation unfolding on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this way, the presentation on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is not hindered by the presentation sound for the presentation unfolding on the display screen 7a, and the lottery result, which is of the greatest interest to the player, can be progressed and derived and displayed for the time being.

[Modification 3]
In the movable part operation warning presentation A in Fig. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning presentation B in Fig. 154(C), the first special chart reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 were displayed as numbers (not shown) arranged at the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. These numbers are displayed as numbers representing the number of reserved balls, so that they can be easily distinguished from the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. In addition, they are arranged at the forefront of the display screen 7a, and other images are arranged and displayed behind the forefront of the display screen 7a, so that visibility is not hindered by other images. In this embodiment, when the movable part operation warning performance is started, the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L of the sub-display screen 64, so that when the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R, the number displayed as a numerical value of the number of reserved balls may be displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, and when the warning image is displayed on the left sub-display screen 64L, the number displayed as a numerical value of the number of reserved balls may be displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R. In this way, the number displayed as a numerical value of the number of reserved balls can be displayed on another sub-display screen different from the warning image, and further, the number displayed as a numerical value of the number of reserved balls can be made difficult to distinguish by blending in with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, making it intuitively easy to understand.

[Modification 4]
In the movable part operation warning performance A in FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning performance B in FIG. 154(C), the performance was performed during the change performance (change display) by the decorative pattern. However, the movable part operation warning performance can be performed after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, and when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, it can be performed, for example, in a demo performance for waiting for customers, regardless of the change performance (change display). In other words, when the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 determines that the sword member 65 is not yet locked based on the detection signal from the lock completion sensor, it can be notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). In this way, regardless of the progress of the performance and regardless of the state of the game, when the sword member 65 is not yet locked, it can be notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound).

[Modification 5]
In the movable part operation warning presentation A in FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning presentation B in FIG. 154(C), when the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 determines that the sword member 65 is not yet locked based on the detection signal from the lock completion sensor, it is possible to notify by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). However, a special lever that can be operated by the player may be arranged in a position that is easily visible near the cylinder lock CYK (see FIGS. 152(A) and (B)) in the front frame 53. When a key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction, and the special lever is operated (pushed downward), the front frame 53 is released from the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached. When this special lever is operated (pushed downward), it is detected by the special lever detection sensor, and the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor is input to the sub-control board 90. The electrical circuit is configured so that the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor becomes an open operation logic when the special lever is operated (pushed downward), and becomes a closed logic, which is the inverse of the open operation logic, when the special lever is not operated (pushed downward).

When a key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction, this operation is detected by the cylinder lock detection sensor, and a detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is input to the dispensing control board 110. The detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is an open logic when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction, and is an inverted closed logic when the key is not inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in the predetermined direction. When the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction, the dispensing control board 110 sends a command to the main control board 80, and the main control board 80 that receives this command sends a command to the sub-control board 90. This allows the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 to know that the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction.

When the sub-CPU 92 determines that the special lever has been operated (pushed down) based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor while it is not aware that the key has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a specific direction, it can display a warning image on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, or play a warning sound (specific sound) from the speaker 67. Note that the warning image will be an image imitating a special lever instead of the incomplete lock sword image KG shown in Figures 153 (C), (D) and 154 (C), (D), and a message MG3 saying "Lift the special lever in the direction of the arrow until it clicks" will be displayed. Also, instead of the counterclockwise arrow image YG shown in Figures 153 (C), (D) and 154 (C), (D), an upward arrow image YG will be displayed.

The electrical circuit is pre-configured so that, at least, if the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring is about to come off from the connector on the board, the logic of the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor becomes the open operation logic. This allows the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 to be notified that some kind of trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor, and the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 can notify the trouble by a warning image or warning sound (specific sound). In addition, the electrical circuit may be pre-configured so that, if the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring is about to come off from the connector on the board, the logic of the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor becomes the open logic.

The open or closed state of the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the game board 2 is attached is detected by a front frame closed detection sensor, and the detection signal from the front frame closed detection sensor is input to the payout control board 110. The electric circuit is configured so that the detection signal from the front frame closed detection sensor becomes closed logic when the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the game board 2 is attached are closed, and becomes open logic, which is the inverse of the closed logic, when the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the game board 2 is attached are open.

If the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closure detection sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring becomes disconnected from the connector on the board, the logic of the detection signal from the closure detection sensor is set to open logic, so that the electrical circuit is pre-configured. This allows the payout control board 110 to be notified that some kind of trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closure detection sensor, and the payout control board 110 transmits this trouble as a command to the main control board 80, and the main control board 80, which receives this command, transmits a command to that effect to the sub-control board 90. This allows the sub-control board 90 to notify by a door-opening image or door-opening sound when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are open.

Although the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the gaming board 2 is attached are opened by an attendant or worker, there is a risk that they may be opened due to fraudulent activity, so the state (open state, closed state) of the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the gaming board 2 is attached is monitored. For this reason, when the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the gaming board 2 is attached are opened, it is necessary to provide an image with a higher level of notification that can be conveyed to the surroundings of the gaming machine 1 than a warning image, and further, it is necessary to provide a sound with a higher level of notification that can be conveyed to the surroundings of the gaming machine 1 than a warning sound (specific sound).

In other words, when the sub-CPU 92 is not aware that the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction, and when it determines that the special lever is operated (pushed down) based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor, it displays a warning image on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L and plays a warning sound (specific sound) from the speaker 67. On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 92 is aware that the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction, and further determines that the special lever is operated (pushed down) based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor, it displays a door-opening image, which is more informative than the warning image and can be transmitted to the surroundings of the gaming machine 1, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, not on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, and further plays a door-opening sound, which is more informative than the warning sound (specific sound) and can be transmitted to the surroundings of the gaming machine 1, from the speaker 67.

[Modification 6]
In the movable part operation warning performance A in FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning performance B in FIG. 154(C), when the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 determines that the sword member 65 is not yet locked based on the detection signal from the lock completion sensor, it is possible to notify by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). However, the specific decorative part (which can also be performed by illumination) attached to the front frame 53 may be provided with a movable part having a function of fixing other members placed on the front frame 53 or other members placed on the game board 2. This movable part is placed in a position visible to the player and can be operated by touching it. This movable part is basically operated by a staff member or worker when installing the gaming machine 1 in the game arcade. For example, by continuing to rotate the movable part counterclockwise until a "click" is heard, other members placed on the front frame 53 or other members placed on the game board 2 can be fixed, and the lock is completed.

Inside the front frame 53 to which the specific decorative part is attached, a specific decorative part lock completion sensor is provided that detects the completion of locking of the movable part, and a detection signal from the specific decorative part lock completion sensor is input to the sub-control board 90. The detection signal from the specific decorative part lock completion sensor becomes specific decorative part lock completion logic when other members placed on the front frame 53 or other members placed on the game board 2 are fixed and locked (hereinafter referred to as "specific decorative part lock completion"). When the movable part is not rotated, for example, counterclockwise until there is a "click" or the movable part is rotated, for example, clockwise, from a fixed state to a state in which other members placed on the front frame 53 or other members placed on the game board 2 are not fixed (hereinafter referred to as "specific decorative part lock incomplete"), the electrical circuit is configured so that the detection signal becomes specific decorative part lock incomplete logic, which is the inverse of the specific decorative part lock completion logic. When the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 determines that the specific decorative part has not been locked based on the detection signal from the specific decorative part locking completion sensor, it can display a warning image on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, or play a warning sound (specific sound) from the speaker 67. Note that instead of the incomplete lock sword image KG shown in Figures 153(C), (D) and 154(C), (D), the warning image will be an image that resembles the specific decorative part, and a message MG3 will be displayed stating, "Please turn the specific decorative part in the direction of the arrow until you hear a click to complete the locking."

The electrical circuit is pre-configured so that if the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the specific decorative part locking completion sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring becomes disconnected from the connector on the board, the logic of the detection signal from the specific decorative part locking completion sensor will indicate that the specific decorative part is not locked. This allows the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 to be notified that some kind of trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the specific decorative part locking completion sensor, and the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 can alert the user to the trouble by displaying a warning image or warning sound (specific sound).

[Modification 7]
In the movable part operation warning performance A in FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning performance B in FIG. 154(C), when the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 determines that the sword member 65 is not yet locked based on the detection signal from the lock completion sensor, it is possible to notify by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). However, it is also possible to detect the insertion of an illegal tool into the cylinder lock CYK (see FIG. 152(A) and (B)) and notify by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). When an illegal tool is inserted into the key insertion port of the cylinder lock CYK, the internal cylinder (movable part) may rotate slightly (may rotate halfway). In other words, the internal cylinder (movable part) may be operated by the player.

When an illegal tool is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) rotates slightly, the cylinder lock detection sensor detects that the internal cylinder (movable part) is not fully rotated, and the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is input to the dispensing control board 110. The detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is an illegal opening logic when an illegal tool is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not fully rotated, and when an illegal tool is not inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not rotated, the electric circuit is configured so that it becomes a normal closing logic that is the inversion of the illegal opening logic. When an illegal tool is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not fully rotated, the dispensing control board 110 sends a command to the main control board 80, and the main control board 80 that receives this command sends a command to the sub-control board 90. This allows the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 to know that an unauthorized tool has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and that the internal cylinder (movable part) has not been fully rotated. Note that instead of the incomplete lock sword image KG shown in Figures 153(C), (D) and 154(C), (D), the warning image shows an image that resembles a cylinder lock, and a message MG3 is displayed stating, "Please lock the cylinder lock by turning it in the direction of the arrow until you hear a click."

When the sub-CPU 92 determines that an unauthorized tool has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and that the internal cylinder (movable part) has not been fully rotated, it can display a warning image on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, or play a warning sound (specific sound) from the speaker 67. Note that the warning image is an image that imitates the cylinder lock CYK, instead of the incomplete lock sword image KG shown in Figures 153 (C), (D) and 154 (C), (D).

The electrical circuit is pre-configured so that if the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring becomes disconnected from the connector on the board, the logic of the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor becomes fraudulent open logic. This allows the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 to be notified that some kind of trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor, and the sub-CPU 92 of the sub-control board 90 can notify the trouble by a warning image or warning sound (specific sound).

The open or closed state of the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the game board 2 is attached is detected by a front frame closed detection sensor, and the detection signal from the front frame closed detection sensor is input to the payout control board 110. The electric circuit is configured so that the detection signal from the front frame closed detection sensor becomes closed logic when the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the game board 2 is attached are closed, and becomes open logic, which is the inverse of the closed logic, when the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the game board 2 is attached are open.

If the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closure detection sensor is disconnected due to fraudulent activity, or if the connector at one end of this wiring becomes disconnected from the connector on the board, the logic of the detection signal from the closure detection sensor is set to open logic, so that the electrical circuit is pre-configured. This allows the payout control board 110 to be notified that some kind of trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closure detection sensor, and the payout control board 110 transmits this trouble as a command to the main control board 80, and the main control board 80, which receives this command, transmits a command to that effect to the sub-control board 90. This allows the sub-control board 90 to notify by a door-opening image or door-opening sound when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are open.

Although the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the gaming board 2 is attached are opened by an attendant or worker, there is a risk that they may be opened due to fraudulent activity, so the state (open state, closed state) of the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the gaming board 2 is attached is monitored. For this reason, when the front frame 53 and the inner frame in which the gaming board 2 is attached are opened, it is necessary to provide an image with a higher level of notification that can be conveyed to the surroundings of the gaming machine 1 than a warning image, and further, it is necessary to provide a sound with a higher level of notification that can be conveyed to the surroundings of the gaming machine 1 than a warning sound (specific sound).

In other words, when the sub-CPU 92 determines that an illegal device has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and that the internal cylinder (movable part) has not been fully rotated, it displays a warning image on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L and plays a warning sound (specific sound) from the speaker 67. On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 92 determines that an illegal device has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and that the internal cylinder (movable part) has been fully rotated, it displays a door-opening image, which is more notifiable than the warning image and can be conveyed to the surroundings of the gaming machine 1, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, rather than on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, and further plays a door-opening sound, which is more notifiable than the warning sound (specific sound) and can be conveyed to the surroundings of the gaming machine 1, from the speaker 67.

[Modification 8]
In the movable part operation warning presentation A in Fig. 153 and the movable part operation warning presentation B in Fig. 154, a warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L. However, as the warning image, a message MG2 saying "Warning" may be displayed, and an error code (for example, "Warning: Error Code E4") may be displayed below the message MG2 without displaying a message MG3 saying "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock" and a counterclockwise arrow image YG. The sudden display of the error code can give the player a sense of anxiety and convey the fact that the action performed by the player just before the error code was displayed was a bad action.

[Modification 9]
The movable part operation warning display A in Figure 153 and the movable part operation warning display B in Figure 154 may not include some of the effects described above, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E4-1]
A gaming machine having a plurality of movable parts that can be operated by a player,
The performance by the movable part can execute a first performance in which a performance condition can be achieved by the operation of the player, and a second performance in which a warning is issued by the operation of the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E4-1,
The second performance can be executed simultaneously while the first performance is in progress.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect E4-1 or E4-2,
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
In the second performance, a specific image is displayed that conveys a method for canceling the warning.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-3,
In the second performance, a specific sound for notifying the warning can be output.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-4,
The movable part is capable of emitting light.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect E4-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-5,
The movable part may have a decorative member.
A gaming machine characterized by

◇ [Aspect E4-7]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-65,
The movable part is disposed at a position where it is easily visible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a mahjong ball gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium can be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation units operated by the player are provided with the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68, but are not limited to these, and the operation units operated by the player may also be levers, triggers, etc. Also, in the display performance of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display performance may be executed using a button image representing the effect button 63, but instead, the display performance may be executed using an image representing the sword member 65, or the display performance may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to execute various effects using the display devices (main display screen 7a, sub display screen 64, etc.). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-mentioned multiple effect examples and/or modified examples may be combined.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), and the display effects performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub-display screen 64, and the display effects performed on the sub-display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiment and modified examples, the above-mentioned embodiment of the aspect is intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect and does not limit the present aspect. The present aspect may be modified or improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents thereof are included in the present aspect.

1: gaming machine 3: playing area 5: board lamp 7: image display device 9A, 9B: reserved image (reserved icon)
9C…Relevant hold image (hold icon)
13 ... Third movable part 14 ... First movable part 15 ... Second movable part 17 ... Big prize opening start hole 20 ... First start hole (first ball entry hole)
21…Second starting hole (second ball entry hole)
64: Sub-display screen 66: Frame lamp 81: Game control microcomputer 91: Presentation control microcomputer 101: Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
It is possible to execute a performance in which a specific image is displayed in a specific area formed in a polygonal shape ,
In the presentation , increasing the number of corners of the polygonal shape increases the size of the specific area, suggesting that a larger specific area has a higher expectation of winning than a smaller specific area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images